Modicon Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide

3501

3379

02

Modicon QuantumAutomation SeriesHardware Reference GuideOctober 2007 eng

This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.com

2 35013379 02 October 2007


Table of Contents

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Part I Quantum Automation System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 15At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 1 Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview . . . . . . . . .17At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Quantum Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Quantum CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Quantum I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Quantum Communication Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Quantum Programming Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Part II Quantum System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Chapter 2 Quantum Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations. . . . . . . . . . 32Quantum Local I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Chapter 3 Network Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Quantum Network Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Quantum Network Interface Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

35013379 02 October 2007 3


Part III Quantum System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chapter 4 System Specifications for the Quantum Module . . . . . . . . . . 55Quantum System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Part IV Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration . . .59At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Chapter 5 Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules. . . . . . . . 61Quantum Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Chapter 6 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater) . 75140CPS11400 AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 11 A . . . . . . . . . . . . 84140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module . . . . . . 87140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 11 A Module . . . . . 90140CPS21100 DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module. . . . . . . . . . . 96140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module . . . . . . . . . . 99140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module. . . . . . . . . . 102140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module . . . . . . . . . 105140CPS51100 DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108140CPS52400 DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A . . . . . 111

Chapter 7 CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115140CPU11302 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117140CPU11303 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128140CPU21304 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139140CPU42402 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150140CPU43412 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161140CPU43412A CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174140CPU53414 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188140CPU53414A CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200140CPU53414B CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

4 35013379 02 October 2007


Chapter 8 Quantum Field Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 242140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Chapter 9 Distributed I/O (DIO) for the Quantum Modules. . . . . . . . . . .257At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 10 Quantum Remote I/O Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . .269At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269140CRP93X00 Remote I/O (RIO) Head Single and Dual Channel Module . . . 270140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Chapter 11 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules . . . . . . . . .281140NOM21X00 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . 281

Chapter 12 Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module . . . . . .291140NOM25200 Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module . . . . . . . 291

Chapter 13 Quantum Ethernet Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY/MAX Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Chapter 14 Intelligent/Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum . . . . .335At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393140MSB/MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

35013379 02 October 2007 5


Chapter 15 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

15.1 Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Intrinsically Safe Modules – General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

15.2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

15.3 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Chapter 16 Quantum Simulator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Chapter 17 Quantum Battery Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Chapter 18 Quantum I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

18.1 Overview of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490Quantum I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491I/O Map Status Byte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

18.2 Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506I/O Configuration for Analog Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524140ACI04000 High Density Analog in I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528140ARI03010 I/O RTD Input 8 Channel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532140ATI03000 I/O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

18.3 Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545I/O Configuration for Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

6 35013379 02 October 2007


140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

18.4 Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . 563140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

18.5 Discrete Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575140DAI34000 Quantum I/O 24 VAC IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579140DAI35300 Quantum I/O AC Input 24 Vac Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582140DAI44000 Quantum I/O 48 VAC IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585140DAI45300 Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588140DAI54000 Quantum I/O 115 VAC In Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591140DAI54300 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594140DAI55300 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598140DAI74000 Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602140DAI75300 Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605140DDI15310 Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608140DDI35300 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 611140DDI35310 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc Source 4x8 Input Module . . . . . 614140DDI36400 I/O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . 616140DDI67300 Quantum I/O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module . . . . . . . . . . . 620140DDI84100 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module. . . . . . . . 626140DDI85300 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module. . . . . . . . 629

18.6 Discrete Output Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633140DAO84000 I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640140DAO84010 I/O AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644140DAO84210 Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module . . . . . . . 649140DAO84220 Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 Module . . . . . . . . . 654140DAO85300 Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 4x8 Module . . . . . . . . 659140DDO15310 I/O DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664140DDO35300 Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module. . . . . . . . 668140DDO35301 I/O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module. . . . . . . . 673140DDO35310 I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676140DDO36400 I/O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module. . . . . . . . 681140DDO84300 Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module . . . 686140DDO88500 Quantum I/O DC Output 24-125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module . . . . 689140DRA84000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module. . . . . 693140DRC83000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

18.7 Discrete Verified Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

35013379 02 October 2007 7


I/O Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module – 140DVO85300 . . 701140DVO85300 I/O Verified 10-30 VDC Out Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706

18.8 Discrete Supervised Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710I/O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module – 140DSI35300 . . 711140DSI35300 I/O DC 24V Supervised Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

18.9 Discrete Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716140DAM59000 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720140DDM39000 I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink/DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727140DDM69000 I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 734

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

Appendix A Miscellaneous Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743Miscellaneous Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Appendix B Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Appendix C Hardware Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757Hardware Installation – Selecting Backplanes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758Hardware Installation – Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765Hardware Installation – Space Requirements for the Quantum System . . . . . . 768Hardware Installation – Mounting Quantum Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

Appendix D Power and Grounding Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems. . . . . 776System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793Closed System Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

8 35013379 02 October 2007


Appendix E CableFast Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .797At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797Features of the CableFast Cabling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798140 CFA 040 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805140 CFB 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808140 CFC 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812140 CFD 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820140 CFE 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822140 CFG 016 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824140 CFH 008 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852CableFast Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860CableFast Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

Appendix F Error Stopped Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .865Error Stopped Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865

Appendix G Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879

35013379 02 October 2007 9


10 35013379 02 October 2007


§
Safety Information
Important Information

NOTICE Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicatesthat an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if theinstructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personalinjury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoidpossible injury or death.

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 11


Safety Information

PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.

© 2006 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

12 35013379 02 October 2007


About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope This manual is a reference guide for the hardware of the Quantum automation system.

Validity Note The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding. We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric.

Product Related Warnings

Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication, please notify us.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of Schneider Electric.

All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to ensure compliance with documented system data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.

When controllers are used for applications with technical safety requirements, please follow the relevant instructions.

Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in improper operating results.

Failure to observe this product related warning can result in injury or equipment damage.

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected]

35013379 02 October 2007 13


About the Book

14 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007

This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.b

I
Quantum Automation System Overview
At a Glance

Overview This part provides an overview of the Quantum Automation System.

What's in this Part?

This part contains the following chapters:

Chapter Chapter Name Page

1 Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview 17

15

arr-thorp.com

Quantum Overview

16 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


1
Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the Modicon Quantum Automation System, which includes Modicon Quantum software support.

What's in this Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic Page

Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview 18

Quantum Power Supplies 19

Quantum CPU Modules 20

Quantum I/O Modules 21

Quantum Communication Interface Modules 22

Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules 25

Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM) 26

Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling 27

Quantum Programming Packages 28

17

arr-thorp.com

Modicon Quantum Overview

Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview

Overview The Modicon Quantum system is a special-purpose computing system with digital processing capabilities. Modicon Quantum is designed for real time control in industrial and manufacturing applications in a modular, expandable architecture employing the following modules.

Power SupplyCPUI/O I/O Network InterfaceIntelligent/Special Purpose I/OSimulator (XSM)BatteryBackplanesCableFast Cabling

Modicon Quantum System Block Diagram

The following figure is a block diagram of a typical Modicon Quantum system.

Modbus Plus Cable

Ethernet TCP/IPLocal I/O Drop

P/S CPU RIOHead

MB+Tap

Modbus Plus DIOTwisted Pair Cable

DIO Drop RIO Coaxial

MB+Tap

NOM NOE I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

RIO Drop

I/O I/O I/O I/ORIODrop

P/SI/O I/ODIODrop

MB+Tap

RIOTap

18 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum Power Supplies

Overview Quantum power supplies are used to supply system power to all modules inserted into the backplane, including:

Quantum CPU modulesQuantum Interface modulesQuantum I/O modules

Depending upon the system configuration, the option exists of using the power supply in three different modes.

Power Supply Modes

The following table shows the power supply modes.

Power Supply Type Usage

Standalone For 3 A, 8 A or 11 A configurations that do not require fault tolerant or redundant capabilities.

Standalone Summable For configurations consuming more than the rated current of one supply, two summing power supplies can be installed in the same backplane.

Redundant For configurations requiring power for uninterrupted system operation. Two redundant power supplies are required for redundancy.

System Safety

CAUTIONExercise caution when considering a combination of power supplies in a backplane. Use only like power supplies with the exceptions noted in System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies, p. 786.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35013379 02 October 2007 19



Quantum CPU Modules

Overview The Quantum CPU is a module residing on the Quantum local I/O backplane. The CPU is a digitally operating electronic system, which uses a programmable memory for the internal storage of user instructions. These instructions are used to implement specific functions such as:

LogicProcess sequencingTimingCouplingArithmetic

These instructions allow control through digital and analog outputs, for various types of machines and processes.

The Quantum CPU serves as a bus master controlling the local, remote, and distributed I/O of the Quantum system.

20 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum I/O Modules

Overview Quantum I/O modules are electrical signal converters that convert signals to and from field devices to a signal level and format, which can be processed by the CPU, such as:

Limit switchesProximity switchesTemperature sensorsSolenoidsValve actuators

All I/O modules are optically isolated to the bus, ensuring safe and trouble-free operation. All I/O modules are also software configurable.

35013379 02 October 2007 21



Quantum Communication Interface Modules

Overview Nine types of communication interface modules are available and presented in the table below, and are described in the following text.

Network Interface Modules

The following table shows the communication interface modules.

Type Description

RIO Single and dual channel Remote I/O interface modules (RIO heads and drops) connected via a coaxial cable network.

DIO Single and dual channel Distributed I/O interface modules connected via a twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network.

NOM Single and dual channel Network Option Modules (NOM) connected via a twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network.

Fiber Optic Modbus Plus

Modbus Plus on fiber module connected via a fiber optic Modbus Plus cable network.

Ethernet TCP/IP

Single channel Ethernet TCP/IP interface module connected via a twisted pair or fiber optic cable network.

InterBus InterBus Interface module connected via a twisted pair network.

SY/MAX Ethernet

SY/MAX Ethernet module connected via a twisted pair or fiber optic cable network.

LonWorks LonWorks module connected via a twisted-pair network.

MMS Ethernet

MMS Ethernet module connected via a fiber optic cable network.

Profibus Profibus Master module connected via a Profibus RS-485 port.

AS-i AS-i module connected via a two-wire AS-i port.

22 35013379 02 October 2007



RIO Modules (CRA/CRP)

Quantum RIO head and drop modules use a S908-based networking I/O configuration. Communication is done via single or dual coaxial cabling up to 15,000 feet away. This configuration supports a mix of the following product lines:

SY/MAX200 Series500 Series800 SeriesQuantum I/O

When Quantum RIO is required, the Quantum controller may support up to 31 RIO drops. In an RIO configuration, an RIO head module is connected with coaxial cable to RIO drop modules at each remote drop.

DIO Module (CRA)

Quantum DIO is implemented over a Modbus Plus network. The CPU or NOMs module may be the network head via their Modbus Plus ports.

Quantum DIO Modbus Plus drop adaptors are specifically designed to link Quantum I/O modules to the head via twisted pair shielded cable (Modbus Plus). The DIO drop modules also provide the I/O with power (maximum 3A) from a 24 Vdc or a 115/230 Vac source. Each DIO network supports up to 63 distributed drops using repeaters.

Network Option Module (NOM)

Quantum NOM modules provide extended communication capabilities for the Quantum system within a Modbus Plus configuration.

Modbus Plus on Fiber Module (NOM)

Quantum Modbus Plus on Fiber modules provides connectivity to Modbus Plus nodes by fiber cable without fiber optic repeaters, and allows the creation of a pure fiber optic network or a mixed fiber optic/twisted-pair network (with the use of a 490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater).

Ethernet TCP/IP (NOE) Modules

Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules make it possible for a Quantum controller to communicate with devices on an Ethernet network using TCP/IP – the de facto standard protocol. An Ethernet module may be inserted into an existing Quantum system and connected to existing Ethernet networks via fiber optic or twisted pair cabling.

SY/MAX Ethernet Modules (NOE)

Quantum-SY/MAX-Ethernet modules are Quantum CPU network option modules that can be placed in a Quantum backplane to connect Quantum controllers to SY/MAX devices and applications.

MMS-Ethernet Modules (NOE)

Quantum-MMS-Ethernet modules are Quantum CPU network option modules that can be placed in a Quantum backplane to connect Quantum controllers to MMS devices and applications.

35013379 02 October 2007 23



InterBus Interface Module (NOA)

The Quantum InterBus is the interface module to the InterBus bus. The InterBus bus is a fieldbus network designed for I/O blocks and intelligent devices used in manufacturing. It offers a master/slave topology that permits deterministic I/O servicing over it’s 13 km twisted pair network.

LonWorks Modules (NOL)

Quantum NOL modules provide connectivity between a Quantum controller and a LonWorks network, based on Echelon’s LonWorks technology. The NOL module is offered in three models for different transceiver types, and supports three twisted-pair media types with different network topologies or data transfer speeds.

Profibus Interface Module (CRP)

Quantum Profibus module is the interface module to Profibus-DP networks. The interface modules use Type A, shielded twisted pair to join inline connectors, with or without service ports and bus terminators.

AS-i Interface Module

Quantum AS-i modules provide connectivity between a Quantum controller and AS-i networks. AS-i bus cable is an unshielded flat two-wire link on which communication and power are transmitted to connected devices. The media insulation is self-healing to accommodate junction block removal.

24 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules

Overview Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O modules operate with minimum intervention from the Quantum controller after initially downloading module parameters or programs. The Quantum intelligent/special purpose I/O modules include the following.

High Speed Counter modules (EHC)ASCII Interface module (ESI)High Speed Interrupt module (HLI)Single Axis Motion Modules (MSx)Multi-Axis Motion Modules (MMS)

35013379 02 October 2007 25



Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM)

Overview There are two types of simulator modules, as described below.

Discrete and Analog Simulators

The following table shows discrete and analog simulators.

Type Description

Discrete 16 Point Simulator

(140XSM00200)

The Discrete Simulator (16 points) is used to generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140DAI54000 and the 140DAI74000 AC input modules.

Analog Simulator (140XSM01000)

The Analog Simulator (2 channels in, 1 channel out) module is used for simulating 4 ... 20 mA field current loops used with current input Quantum modules.

26 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling

Battery Module (XCP)

The Quantum battery module provides RAM backup power for the Quantum expert module.

Backplanes (XBP)

Quantum backplanes may be used in all locations of local, remote, or distributed I/O. There are six backplanes available in 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 slot versions. All I/O slots are usable with any module able to be used in any slot.

CableFast Cabling

The Quantum CableFast wiring system consists of pre-wired Quantum field wiring terminal strips and DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks, offered in straight through or special application versions.

35013379 02 October 2007 27



Quantum Programming Packages

Overview Quantum controllers support several editors.

Quantum Editors The following table shows the editors for the Quantum controllers.

Editor Where Discussed

Modsoft V2.6 For more information on Modsoft, refer to the Modicon Modsoft Programmer User Manual (890USE11500).

Concept V2.5 (or later versions)

For more information on Concept, refer to the Concept User Manual (840USE49300).

ProWORX NXT V2.1 For more information on ProWorX, refer to the ProWorX User Manual (372SPU68001 NMAN)

ProWORX 32 (V 1.0 minimum)

For more information on ProWORX 32, refer to the ProWORX 32 Programming Software for PLCs User Guide (372SPU780 01EMAN)

ProWORX Plus (V 1.0 minimum)

For more information on ProWORX Plus, refer to the ProWORX Plus for Modicon Reference Manual (371SPU68001 PMAN).

Modicon State Language (V1.2 minimum)

For more information on Modicon State Language, refer to the Modicon State Language User Manual (GM-MSL1-001).

28 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


II
Quantum System Configurations
At a Glance

Overview This part provides information on Quantum system configurations.




2 Quantum Configurations 31

3 Network Configurations 43

29

arr-thorp.com

Quantum Configurations

30 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


2
At a Glance

Introduction The following chapter provides information on the Quantum configurations, including Local I/O, Remote I/O (RIO), and Distributed I/O (DIO).



Topic Page

Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations 32

Quantum Local I/O 34

Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) 35

Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) 39

31

arr-thorp.com


Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations

Overview The following information contains a description of the Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O and their configurations.

These configurations (see the configuration table below for valid Quantum configurations) can be equipped with a combination of:

Quantum CPUsPower suppliesI/O interfacesExpert modulesI/O modules

Local, RIO, and DIO Configuration

The following table provides valid Quantum configurations, including backplanes and modules.

Note: Refer to System Specifications for the Quantum Module , p. 55 for a complete list of part numbers for all Quantum modules.

If Configuration Type Is

Backplane Types (Typical) Are

Required Modules Are

Optional Modules Are

Modules Not Permitted Are

Local 6, 10, 16 slots Power Supply CPU

RIO Head, I/O, NOx*

RIO Drop, DIO Drop

RIO** 6, 10, 16 slots Power Supply RIO Drop

I/O CPU, RIO Head, DIO Drop NOx*

DIO 2, 3, 4, 6 slots DIO Drop Power Supply, I/O

CPU, RIO Head, RIO Drop NOx*

*NOM, NOA, and NOE.**Remote I/O is typically used for large (number of modules) drops 6, 10, or 16 slot backplanes. Distributed I/O is typically used for small drops using 2, 3, 4, or 6 slot backplanes.

Note: Every Quantum module requires power from the backplane (except power supply and DIO modules). For a valid configuration, add up the required backplane current (in mA) for every module, and ensure that this number is less than the available power in the selected power supply.

32 35013379 02 October 2007



Local, Remote and Distributed I/O Configuration

Depending on the type of configuration—Local, Remote, or Distributed I/O, a variety of features will apply, as shown in the following table.

*Requires use of backplane expander, Telefast module excepted (27 modules x 32 points = 864). May be limited by bus power requirements.

Feature Configuration

Local I/O Remote I/O Distributed I/O

Maximum I/O Words

Per drop 64 in / 64 out 64 in / 64 out 30 in / 32 out

Per network 1,984 in / 1,984 out 500 in / 500 out

Maximum Physical Discretes

Per drop *864 any mix *864 any mix 448 any mix

Maximum drops per network

31 63

Media Coax Twisted Pair

Speed 1.5 Mhz 1 MHz

Maximum distance without repeaters

15,000 ft. (4,573 m) 1,500 ft. (457 m)

Scan synched I/O servicing

Yes No

Momentum I/O support

No Yes

Hot Standby support

Yes No

Modbus Plus compatible

No Yes

35013379 02 October 2007 33



Quantum Local I/O

Overview A local I/O configuration is contained in one rack and includes all Quantum modules mounted in a standard Quantum backplane. Quantum Local I/O can be as few as one I/O module (in a three slot backplane), or as many as 14, along with a CPU and power supply in a single 16 slot backplane.

If required for the application, system interface modules are also included in the Local I/O backplane. These modules could consist of one RIO processor or network option modules.

I/O Configuration The following figure is an example of a typical local I/O configuration.

Note: A maximum of 448 digital I/O points (14, 4x8 digital I/O modules), or a maximum of 48 analog input channels (six 8-channel analog in modules) and 32 analog output channels (eight 4-channel analog out modules) may be serviced in a single local I/O rack.

I/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OCPUPS

2 Slot

3 Slot4 Slot

6 Slot10 Slot

16 Slot

34 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum Remote I/O (RIO)

Overview Quantum RIO can be set up in single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures) and is contained in one rack at each RIO drop. When RIO is used, the Quantum CPU may support several drops (a drop can be either Quantum, SY/MAX, 200, 500, or 800 Series I/O systems).

Related Documentation

For more information on use and installation of Quantum RIO, see Modicon Remote I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide, Part Number 890USE10100.

For more information on Hot Standby systems, see the Quantum Hot Standby Installation and Planning Guide, Part Number 840USE10600.

Single Cable RIO Configuration

The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum RIO configuration.

Note: As stated above, the Quantum provides connectivity to other Modicon I/O products via the same system. It will connect to 800 series I/O via the J890, J892, P890, or P892 remote I/O adapters; 200 series I/O via J290 and J291 remote I/O adapters; 500 series I/O via 29X/J540 remote I/O adapters; and SY/MAX 8030CRM931.

I/OI/OI/ORIOHeadCPUPS

I/OI/OI/OI/OPS I/OI/OI/OI/OPS

Local I/ODrop

RIO Tap RIO Tap

Up to 31 Drops

B800 Series Drop

RIO Tap

RIODrop

RIODrop

RIO Drop # m RIO Drop # n

P81 J890

Terminator

*A RIO tap is required for every RIO drop in the system.

35013379 02 October 2007 35



Dual Cable RIO Configuration

The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum RIO configuration.

Hot Standby System

The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I/O networks. A Quantum Hot Standby system may be set-up using single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures).

Note: The dual cable option is provided for systems that require added protection against cable breaks or damaged connectors. With two cables connected between the host and each node, no single cable break will disrupt communications.

I/OI/OI/ORIOHeadCPUPS

I/OI/OI/OI/OPS I/OI/OI/OPS

Local I/ODrop

*RIO Tap andTerminator (#52-0422-000)

Up to 31 Drops

B800 Series

*RIOTap

RIODrop

RIODrop

RIO Drop # m RIO Drop # n

P81 J890

*RIO

*RIOTap

*RIO Tap andTerminator

*RIO Tap

*An RIO tap (# MA-0185-100) is required for every RIO drop in the system.

36 35013379 02 October 2007



Single Cable Hot Standby Configuration

The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum Hot Standby configuration.

PS PLC RIO CHS PS PLC RIO CHS

Last RIO Drop

Coaxial Cable

Standby ControllerPrimary Controller

Self-terminatingF adapter

RIO Drop # 2

TrunkCable

Splitter#MA-0186-100

Tap#MA-0185-100

Self-terminating F adapter#52-0411-000(for quad shield cable)#52-0399-000(for non-quad shield cable)

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

TapTrunk Terminator#52-0422-000

Fiber Optic Cable

35013379 02 October 2007 37



Dual Cable Hot Standby Configuration

The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum Hot Standby configuration.

PS PLC RIO CHS PS PLC RIO CHS

Last RIO Drop

Coaxial Cable

Standby PLCPrimary PLC

Self-terminatingF adapters

RIO Drop # 2

TrunkLine

A

Splitter #MA-0186-100

Tap#MA-0185-100

Self-terminating F adapters#52-0411-000(for quad shield cable)#52-0399-000(for non-quad shield cable)

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

Drop Cable

Trunk Terminator#52-0422-000

Fiber Optic Cable

Coaxial Cable

Trunk Terminator#52-0422-000

TrunkLine

B

Drop Cable

Splitter #MA-0186-100

38 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO)

Overview Quantum DIO can be set up in standard single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures). The Quantum DIO architecture is based on Modicon's Modbus Plus technology. When DIO is utilized, the Quantum system may support up to three distributed networks of up to 64 drops (using a repeater) each. Communication between the various nodes and the Modbus Plus head, in both single and dual cable DIO configurations, is done by twisted pair cabling from the head to the DIO adapters at the drops.


For detailed information concerning the Quantum DIO systems, refer to the MODBUS Plus I/O Servicing User Guide, part number 840USE10400.

Single Cable DIO Configuration

The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum DIO configuration.

I/OI/OI/ODIODrop

I/OI/OI/ODIODrop

I/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OCPUPS

* Tap * Tap

Local I/O

** Drop Cable

Quantum Drop # m

Up to 31 drops (64 with repeater)

Quantum Drop # n

** Drop Cable

* A MODBUS Plus tap is required for every participant on the network.** A drop cable is required for each drop from the MODBUS Plus tap.(Cables are not included with the mopdules and need to be ordered.)

35013379 02 October 2007 39



Dual Cable DIO Configuration

The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum DIO configuration.

Note: The dual cable option is provided for systems that require added protection against cable breaks or damaged connectors. With two cables connected between the host and each node, no single cable break will disrupt communications.

I/OI/OI/ODIODrop

I/OI/OI/ODIODrop

I/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/OI/ONOMCPUPS

*Tap *Tap

Local I/O

***Drop Cables

Quantum Drop # m

Up to 31 Nodes (63 with repeater)

Quantum Drop # n

***Drop Cables

*Tap*Tap

Up to 31 Nodes (63 with repeater)

*A MODBUS Plus tap (plastic, Part # 990NAD23000; ruggedized, Part # 990NAD23010) is requiredfor every participant on the network.***A drop cable (8 ft/2.4 m, Part # 990NAD21110; 20 ft/6 m, Part # 990NAD21130) is required foreach drop from the MODBUS Plus tap. Cables are not included with the modules and need to beordered.

Trunk Cable

Trunk Cable

40 35013379 02 October 2007



Part Numbers MODBUS Plus taps that can be used for single and dual cable DIO configurations include:

Part Number 990NAD23000, plastic; and Part Number 990NAD23010, ruggedized.

The following MODBUS Plus trunk cables can be used with these DIO configurations:

Part Number 490NAA27101 (100 ft/30 m)Part Number 490NAA27102 (500 ft/152 m)Part Number 490NAA27103 (1000 ft/304 m)Part Number 490NAA27104 (1500 ft/456 m)Part Number 490NAA27105 (5000 ft/1520 m)

Drop cables that can be used for these configurations include:

Part Number 990NAD21110 (8 ft/2.4 m)Part Number 990NAD21130 (20 ft/6 m)

35013379 02 October 2007 41



42 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


3
Network Configurations
At a Glance

Introduction The following chapter provides information on the Quantum network support, network interface techniques, and Modbus and Modbus Plus communications.



Topic Page

Quantum Network Support 44

Quantum Network Interface Techniques 47

Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications 50

43

arr-thorp.com


Quantum Network Support

Overview Quantum systems provide multiple choices for open, standards-based networking and fieldbus connectivity requirements. The Quantum supported networks include:

ModbusModbus PlusRemote I/OTCP/IP EthernetSY/MAX EthernetMMS EthernetInterbusLonWorksSERCOS

Combinations of these networks can be used to provide simple, high performance communication architectures which meet the tightly integrated needs of computer and controller connectivity. A summary of the services available on these networks is shown in the following table.

44 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum Supported Networks

The following table shows the Quantum supported networks.

Service Description

Modbus Modbus Plus

Remote I/O

Ethernet Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Profibus

TCP/IP

SY/MAX

MMS

Native to Quantum CPU

Y Y N N N N N N N N

Available on a Network Module

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

CPU Programming

Y N Y N N N N N N

CPU Executive Firmware Loading Support

N N N N N N N N

Module Firmware Loaded From CPU

Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y

Report By Exception Communica-tions

Y N Y Y N N N N

Multi-node Broadcast Communica-tions

N N N N N N N N N

Synchronized I/O Scanning

N N Y N N N N N Y Y

NonSynchro-nized I/O Scanning

N N N N N Y Y N N

Quantum I/O Drops

N Y N N N N N N N

Hot Standby Quantum I/O Drop Support

N N Y N N N N N N N

Y5

Y1

Y1 Y1

N6

yY2 Y5

Y1

Y1

Y1

35013379 02 October 2007 45



Hot Standby Data Communica-tions Support

Y Y N Y N N N N N N

Optional Dual Cabling

N Y N N N N N N N

Optional Fiber Optics

Y Y Y N

MomentumI/O Drops

N N N N N Y N N Y

Variable Speed Drives

N N N N N Y

Servo Motion Control

N N N N N Y Y

HMI: Displays & Panels

Y Y N N N N N

HMI: Work-stations

Y N Y Y N N N

1. Refer to the Modbus Plus portion of the Quantum Specifier's guide section for details of available services on 140NOM2XXX00 Modbus Plus Network modules

2. Service is only available on the native controller Modbus port when the XMIT loadable is used. 3. Available from third parties. 4. The SERCOS network standard is fiber optics. 5. The software for this module is a modConnect product. 6. Module firmware loaded through serial port on module.

Service Description

Modbus Modbus Plus

Remote I/O

Ethernet Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Profibus

TCP/IP

SY/MAX

MMS

Y1

Y3 Y1 Y5 Y3 Y4 Y4

Y1

Y3 Y1 Y3 Y4

Y1 Y3 Y4

Y1 Y3 Y4

Y1 Y3 5, Y4

46 35013379 02 October 2007



Quantum Network Interface Techniques

Overview Quantum communication and networking modules use a variety of different techniques to interface to the Quantum controller over the local backplane.

Direct CPU Driver

This technique allows the CPU to control high speed data transfers to and from the communication and networking modules, maximizing throughput and performance.

This technique is used extensively by the Remote I/O network and Hot Standby system to ensure highly deterministic synchronization of the CPU and I/O scans.

Option Module Interface

This technique allows the communication and networking modules to control data transfers to and from the CPU, maximizing the flexibility of the communications interface.

This technique is used extensively by the Modbus Plus and Ethernet peer-to-peer network modules. The number of option module interfaces supported by each CPU model is described in the following table.

CPU Interface Support

The following table shows the summary of Quantum CPU option module interface support in standalone configurations.

Note: Only one Remote I/O Head Interface is supported for each Quantum CPU.

Quantum Controller Model Number Available Option Module Interfaces Supported Per CPU

140CPU53414(A) 6

140CPU53414(B) 6

140CPU43412(A) 6

140CPU42402 6

140CPU21304 2

140CPU11303 2

140CPU11302 2

Note: Refer to Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications, p. 50 for details of available services on 140NOM2XX00 Modbus Plus Network modules.

35013379 02 October 2007 47



I/O Map Interface Some network and communication modules are interfaced to the controller through the standard I/O map configuration tables. In the following table, note that some network and communication modules require a Loadable instruction which enhances the standard controller Executive to support certain unique features of individual modules.

In addition, some loadables allow the communication and networking modules to be controlled by means of user-application code. The number of loadables and associated modules that can be handled by an individual CPU depends upon its memory size, the size of the application program, and the size of the loadables.

Communications and Networking

The following table shows the Quantum communications and networking modules.

Model Number Description Module Interface

Technique

Loadable Required

Backplane Support

Bus Power

mALocal RIO DIO

140CRP81100 Profibus Direct CPU Driver

N Y N N 1200

140CRP93100 Remote I/O Head Interface, single cable

Direct CPU Driver

N Y N N 780

140CRP93200 Remote I/O Head Interface, dual cable

Direct CPU Driver

N Y N N 780

140CHS21000 Hot Standby Processor Kit Direct CPU Driver

Y Y N N 700

140NOA61110 Interbus Master Direct CPU Driver

Y Y N N 700

140NOM21100 Modbus Plus Options, single cable

Option Module N Y N N 780

140NOM21200 Modbus Plus Option, dual cable Option Module N Y N N 780

140NOM25200 Modbus Plus Option, single channel fiber


140NOE21100 Ethernet TCP/IP Twisted Pair Option Module N Y N N 1000

140NOE25100 Ethernet TCP/IP Fiber Optic Option Module N Y N N 1000

140NOE31100 Ethernet SY/MAX Twisted Pair Option Module N Y N N 1000

140NOE35100 Ethernet SY/MAX Fiber Optic Option Module N Y N N 1000

140NOE510Ethernet MMS Twisted Pair Option Module N Y N N 1000

140NOE5510Ethernet MMS Fiber Optic Option Module N Y N N 1000

140NOE77100/1 Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 TX/FX N N Y N N 750

01

01

48 35013379 02 October 2007



1. The software for this module is a ModConnect product.

140NOE77110/1 Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 TX/FX Factory Cast

N N Y N N 750

140MMS42500 Multi-Axis Motion Controller w/SERCOS


140NOL91100 LonWorks Interface, twisted pair FTT10

I/O Map (16/16) Y Y Y N 950

140NOL91110 LonWorks Interface, twisted pair TPT/XF-78

I/O Map (16/16) Y Y Y N 950

140NOL91120 LonWorks Interface, twisted pair TPT/XF-1250

I/O Map (16/16) Y Y Y N 950

Model Number Description Module Interface

Technique

Loadable Required

Backplane Support

Bus Power

mALocal RIO DIO

35013379 02 October 2007 49



Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications

Overview Each Quantum CPU includes both a Modbus and Modbus Plus communications port. The features offered by both these communication protocols are listed in the following table.

Modbus and Modbus Plus Features

The following table shows the Modbus and Modbus Plus features.

Modbus Modbus, a master/slave protocol, is a de facto industry standard with support from over 500 industrial suppliers.

On-line programming or data acquisition applications are easily supported directly from the serial port of any computer.

Modbus can be used in either a simple point-to-point manner with a pair of devices, or in a network architecture with up to 247 slave devices.

Modbus Plus Modbus Plus combines high speed, peer-to-peer communication and easy installation to simplify applications and reduce installation costs.

It allows host computers, controllers and other data sources to communicate as peers throughout the network via low-cost twisted pair cable or optional fiber optic cable.

As a deterministic token-passing network, Modbus Plus communicates at one megabaud for fast access to process data. It’s strength is its ability to control real-time control devices like I/O and drives, without degraded performance due to loading or traffic.

Features Modbus Modbus Plus

Technique Slaves polled by a master Peer-to-peer, token rotation

Speed 19.2K typical 1 M

Electrical RS-232, various others RS-485

Distance without repeater RS-232, 50 ft. (15 m) 1,500 ft. (457 m)

Media Various Twisted pair, Fiber optics

Max nodes per network 247 64

Max network traffic 300 registers/sec @ 9.6 Kb 20,000 registers/sec

Programming Yes Yes

Read/Write data Yes Yes

Global data No Yes

Peer Cop No Yes

50 35013379 02 October 2007



Bridging between Modbus and Modbus Plus is done automatically on CPUs and Modbus Plus network modules.

The bridge mode redirects Modbus messages onto the Modbus Plus network for easy connectivity between Modbus and Modbus Plus devices.

A summary of the available services on Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus ports is given in the following table.

Modbus and Modbus Plus Services

The following table shows the Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus services.

Type Service Description Native CPU Ports NOM 1-2 Ports NOM 3-6 Ports

Modbus Modbus Plus

Modbus Modbus Plus

Modbus Modbus Plus

Modbus Services

Default Modbus Port Parameters Y - Y - Y -

Configurable Modbus Port Parameters Y - Y - -

Modbus to Modbus Plus Bridging - - -

Local CPU Programming - - N -

Remote CPU Programming over Modbus Plus

- - -

Modbus access to local CPU Y - Y - N -

Modbus access to remote CPU over Modbus Plus

Y - Y - Y -

Modbus Network Slave Support Y - N - N -

Modbus Master support with XMIT Loadable

Y - N - N -

Executive Firmware Loading Support Y - N - N -

Y5

Y2 Y3 Y3

Y4 Y4

Y4 Y4 Y2

35013379 02 October 2007 51



Modbus Plus Services

MSTR read/write register messagin- Y - Y - Y

MSTR read/write Global Data messaging

- Y - Y - Y

MSTR get/clear local/remote statistics - Y - Y - Y

Config Extension Global Data Support - Y - Y - N

Config Extension Peer Cop Support - Y - Y - N

Distributed I/O Support - Y - Y - N

CPU Programming - - -

Executive Firmware Loading Support - Y - N - N

Type Service Description Native CPU Ports NOM 1-2 Ports NOM 3-6 Ports

Modbus Modbus Plus

Modbus Modbus Plus

Modbus Modbus Plus

g6

Y4 Y4 Y4

Note: 1. Only supported on the 140CPU42402, 140CPU42412(A) and

140CPU53414(A)/(B) Quantum Controllers.2. The native CPU Modbus port can be disabled from bridge mode operation with

the native Modbus Plus Port.3. Modbus ports on NOMs are always in bridge mode with their associated

Modbus Plus port.4. Only one programmer connection can be logged in at a time to any CPU, and

only one program monitor can be attached at a time to any CPU.5. Modbus port parameters on NOMs 3-6 are defined by Modbus Port 3 in Concept

and Modsoft when the comm parameter selector switch is in mem.6. Up to 4 MSTR read/write register instructions can be serviced per CPU scan per

Modbus Plus port.

52 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


III
Quantum System Specifications
At a Glance

Overview This part provides system specifications for the Quantum automation system.




4 System Specifications for the Quantum Module 55

53

arr-thorp.com

System Specifications

54 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


4
System Specifications for the Quantum Module
Quantum System Specifications

Overview All modules are designed to the following system specifications, which include:

mechanical,electrical,AC/DC power supplies.

It shows the I/O modules operating voltages for:

less than 24 Vac or Vdc,between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc,greater than 48 Vac or Vdc.

Also given are the operating and storage conditions as well as agency approvals.

Mechanical Specifications

The following table shows individual Quantum module mechanical specifications.

Electrical Specifications

The following table shows the Quantum electrical specifications.

Weight 2 lbs. (1 kg) max

Dimensions (H x D x W) 9.84 in. x 4.09 in. x 1.59 in. (250 mm x 103.85 mm x 40.34 mm)

Wire Size 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG max. 20 AWG min.

Material (Enclosures and Bezels) Polycarbonates

Space Requirements 1 backplane slot

RFI Immunity (IEC 1000-4-3) 80 ...1000 MHz, 10 V/m

Ground Continuity (IEC 1000-4-5) 2 kV shield to ground

Electrostatic Discharge (IEC 1000-4-2) 8 kV air / 4 kV contact

Flammability Wiring Connector: 94V-0 Module Enclosure: 94V-1

55

arr-thorp.com


AC/DC Power Supplies

The following table shows the Quantum AC/DC power supplies.

I/O Modules - Table 1

The following table shows the Quantum function I/O modules with operating voltages less than 24 Vac or Vdc.


The following table shows the Quantum I/O modules with operating voltages between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc.


The following table shows the Quantum I/O modules with operating voltages greater than 48 Vac or Vdc.

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4) 2 kV common mode

Damped Oscillatory Transients 2 kV common mode1 kV differential mode

Surge Withstand Capability (Transients) (IEC 1000-4-5)

2 kV common mode1 kV differential mode

Non Periodic Peak Input Voltage 2.3 times nominal for 1.3 ms (Nominal = DC average or AC peak)

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4) 0.5 kV common mode

Damped Oscillatory Transients 1 kV common mode0.5 kV differential mode


1 kV common mode0.5 kV differential mode

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4) 1 kV



1 kV common mode0.5 kV differential mode

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4) 2 kV



2 kV common mode1 kV differential mode

56 35013379 02 October 2007



Operating Conditions

The following table shows the Quantum operating conditions.

Gas Resistance in Conformally Coated Modules

The following table shows gas resistance data for conformally coated Quantum modules.

Storage Conditions

The following table shows the Quantum storage conditions.

Temperature 0 ... 60° C (32 ... 140° F), unless specified otherwise

Humidity 0 ... 95 percent RH non-condensing at 60° C

Chemical Interactions

Enclosures and terminal strips are made of polycarbonates. This material can be damaged by strong alkalis and various hydrocarbons, esters, halogens and ketones in combination with heat. Common products containing these include detergents, PVC products, petroleum products, pesticides, disinfectants, paint removers, and spray paints.

Altitude 2,000 meters. When the altitude exceeds this, reduce the 60°C maximum operating temperature by 6°C per 1000 meters of additional elevation.

Vibration 10 ... 57 Hz at 0.075 mm d.a. 57 ... 150 Hz at 1 g

Shock +/-15 g peak, 11 ms, half-sine wave

Mixed Flowing Gas Test, 22 days exposure

Standard Gas Test Requirement Actual Exposure

EIA364-65 Level lll CL2 (Chlorine) 20 PPB, +/- 5 PPB 20 PPB

NO2 (Nirtic Oxide) 200 PPB, +/- 50 PPB 1250 PPB

H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide) 100 PPB, +/- 20 PPB 100 PPB

SO2 (Sulfur Oxide) N/A 300 PPB

ISA-S71.04 (GX Severe)

CL2 (Chlorine) 10 PPB 20 PPB

NO2 ((Nitric Oxide) 1250 PPB 1250 PPB

H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide) 50 PPB 100 PPB

O2 (Sulfur Oxide) 300 PPB 300 PPB

Temperature -40 ... 85° C (-40 ... 185° F)

Humidity 0 ... 95 percent RH non-condensing at 60° C

Free Fall 3 ft. (1 m)

35013379 02 October 2007 57



Agency Approvals

The following table shows the agency approvals.

UL 508

CSA 22.2-142

Factory Mutual Class 1, Div 2

European Directives (CE) 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and amendments

Note: All Quantum system modules contain static-sensitive components. Each module is labeled with the following static-sensitive symbol.The following figure shows the static sensitive symbol.

58 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


IV
Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration
At a Glance

Overview This part provides information on Quantum module specifications as well as configuration of the modules.




5 Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules 61

6 Power Supply Modules 71

7 CPU Modules 115

8 Quantum Field Bus Modules 229

9 Distributed I/O (DIO) for the Quantum Modules 257

10 Quantum Remote I/O Communication Modules 269

11 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules 281

12 Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module 291

13 Quantum Ethernet Modules 311

14 Intelligent/Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum 335

15 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules

417

16 Quantum Simulator Modules 475

17 Quantum Battery Module 483

18 Quantum I/O Modules 489

59

arr-thorp.com

Specifications and Configuration

60 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


5
Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules
Quantum Hardware Specifications

Overview This section shows the specifications for Quantum hardware modules including:

Power SuppliesCPUsNetworkingIntelligent/Special PurposeI/O

Power Supply Specifications

The following table shows the power supplies for local and RIO Drops.

Part Number Source Voltage Type Bus Current Provided

140CPS11100 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone 3 A

140CPS11400 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone 8 A

140CPS11410 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone/Summable 8 A

140CPS11420 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone/Summable 11A/16A/20A

140CPS12400 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone/Redundant 3 A

140CPS12420 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone/Redundant 8A/10A/11A

140CPS21100 24 Vdc Standalone 3 A

140CPS21400 24 Vdc Standalone/Summable 8 A

140CPS22400 24 Vdc Standalone/Redundant 8 A



140CPS51100 100 ... 150 Vdc Standalone 3 A


61

arr-thorp.com

Hardware Specifications

CPU Specifications

The following table shows specifications for the CPUs.

Networking Modules – RIO

The following table shows specifications for RIO Networking modules.

Field Bus Modules

The following table shows specifications for field bus modules.

Part Numbers Max IEC Program

SRAM Size

Ladder Logic

Available Registers

Bus Current Required

140CPU11302 109 k 256 k 8 k 10 k 780 mA

140CPU11303 368 k 512 k 16 k 10 k 790 mA

140CPU21304 606 k 768 k 32 k or 48 k 64 k or 32 k 900 mA

140CPU42402 570 k 2 M 64 k 64 k 1.8 A

140CPU43412 896 k 2 M 64 k 57 k 1.8 A

140CPU43412A 896 k 2 M 64 k 57 k 1.25 A

140CPU53414 2.5 M 4 M 64 k 57 k 1.8 A

140CPU53414A 2.5 M 4 M 64 k 57 k 1.25A

140CPU53414B 2.5 M 4 M 64 k 57 k 1.25A

Part Numbers (RIO) Drop Location Communication Channel(s)

Bus Current Provided

140CRA93100 Remote (Drop) 1 600 mA

140CRA93200 Remote (Drop) 2 750 mA

140CRP93100 Local (Head) 1 600 mA

140CRP93200 Local (Head) 2 750 mA

Part Number Communication Channel(s) Bus Current Required

140CRP81100 1 Profibus port, 1 RS-232 port (db 9 pin) 1.2 A

140EIA92100 1 AS-i 250mA

140NOA61100 1InterBus, LED display, gen 3 700 mA

140NOA61110 1 InterBus, 7 segment display, gen 3 700 mA

140NOA62200 1 InterBus, LED, gen 4 800 mA

140NOL91100 2 free topology, twisted pair; 78,000 BPS, LonWorks

400 mA

140NOL91110 2 linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated, 78,000 BPS, LonWorks

400 mA

140NOL91120 2 linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated, 1.25 BBPS, LonWorks

400 mA

62 35013379 02 October 2007



Networking Modules – DIO (Modbus Plus)

The following table shows specifications for DIO Networking modules.

Networking Modules – Ethernet

The following table shows specifications for ethernet modules.

Networking Modules – NOM

The following table shows specifications for Modbus Plus NOM Networking modules.

Intelligent/Special Purpose – Hot Standby Module

The following table shows specifications for the Hot Standby module.

Part Numbers (DIO) Source Voltage Communication Channel(s)

Bus Current Provided

140CRA21110 115 Vac 1 3 A

140CRA21210 115 Vac 2 3 A

140CRA21120 24 Vdc 1 3 A

140CRA21220 24 Vdc 2 3 A

Part Numbers Communication Channels Bus Current Required

140NOE21100 1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port 1 A

140NOE25100 1 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) port 1 A


140NOE35100 2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports 1 A


140NOE55100 2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports 1 A

140NOE771xx 1 10/100 BASE-TX Ethernet network (RJ-45) port1 100 BASE-FX (MT-RJ connector) fiber optic port

750 mA

Part Numbers (NOM) Communication Channels Bus Current Required

140NOM21100 1, twisted pair, 1 Modbus, 9-pin D-Sub 780 mA

140NOM21200 2, twisted pair, 1 Modbus, 9-pin D-Sub 780 mA

140NOM25200 2, fiber optic (ST-style); 1 Modbus (RJ-45) 780 mA

Part Number Communication Channel


Special Features

140CHS11000 Fiber Optic 700 mA Use kit P/N - 140 CHS21000

35013379 02 October 2007 63



Counter Modules The following table shows specifications for the high speed Counter modules.

ASCII Interface Module

The following table shows specifications for the ASCII Interface Module.

High Speed Interrupt Module

The following table shows specifications for the High Speed Interrupt module.

Single Axis Motion Modules

The following table shows specifications for the Single Axis Motion modules.

Part Number Function Points/ Channels


Special Features

140EHC10500 High Speed Counter (100 kHz)

5 250 mA 35 kHz @ 24 Vdc 100 kHz @ 5 Vdc

140EHC20200 High Speed Counter (500 kHz)

2 650 mA 500 kHz, Incremental or Quadrature

Part Numbers Function Communication Channels


Special Features

140ESI06210 Intelligent, Bi-directional, ASCII

Interface

2 300 mA 1 Port @ 19.2 kbps

Part Number Function Points/Channels Bus Current Required

140HLI34000 High Speed, Latch, and Interrupt 16 400 mA

Part Numbers Function Channels Bus Current Required

Special Features

140MSB10100 Motion Controller, Single Axis Bi-directional, ASCII

Interface

1 750 mA Dual Encoder Feedback

140MSC10100 Motion Controller, Single Axis

1 1000 mA Dual Encoder Feedback and

Resolver Feedback

64 35013379 02 October 2007



I/O Modules – Discrete In

The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In modules.

Type/Part Number

Function Points/Channels

Points per Group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

140DAI34000 24 Vac 16 N/A 180 mA Isolated

140DAI35300 24 Vac 32 8 250 mA Grouped






140DAI74000 230 Vac 16 N/A 180 mA Islolated


140DDI15310 5 Vdc 32 8 170 mA Grouped


140DSI35300 24 Vdc 32 8 250 mA Supervised inputs grouped




140DDI84100 10 ... 60 Vdc 16 2 200 mA Grouped

140DDI85300 10 ... 60 Vdc 32 8 300 mA Grouped

140DSI35300 24 Vdc 32 8 250 mA Supervised Inputs Grouped

35013379 02 October 2007 65



I/O Modules – Discrete Out

The following table shows specifications for the Discrete Out modules.

Type/Part Number


Points per Group


Special Features

140DAO84000 24 ... 230 Vac 16 N/A 350 mA 4 A per point, isolated

140DAO84010 24 ... 115 Vac 16 N/A 350 mA 4 A per point, isolated

140DAO84210 115 ... 230 Vac

16 4 350 mA 4 A per point, group fused

140DAO84220 24 ... 48 Vac 16 4 350 mA 4 A per point, group fused

140DAO85300 230 Vac 32 8 1A 1 A per point, group fused

140DDO15310 5 Vdc 32 8 350 mA 0.5 A per point, group fused


140DDO35301 24 Vdc 32 8 250 mA 0.5 A per point



140DDO84300 10 ... 60 Vdc 16 8 160 mA 2 A per point, group fused

140DDO88500 24 ... 125 Vdc 12 6 6 points: 375 mA

12 points: 650 mA

0.5 A per point with short circuit

protection,Group fused

140DRA84000 N.O. Relay 16 1 1,100 mA 2 A per point

140DRC83000 N.O./N.C. Relay

8 1 560 mA 5 A per point

140DVO85300 10 ... 30 Vdc 32 8 500 mA 0.5 A per point, verified output,

group fused

66 35013379 02 October 2007



I/O Modules – Discrete In/Out

The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In/Out modules.

I/O Modules – Analog In/Out

The following table shows specifications for the Analog In/Out module.

Type/Part Number

Type/Part Number

Points/channels

Points per group

Bus current required

Special features

140DAM59000 115 Vac 16 In8 Out

84

250 mA 0.5 A per point on outputs, grouped fused

140DDM39000 24 Vdc 16 In8 Out

84

330 mA 0.5 A per point on outputs, grouped fused

140DDM69000 125 Vdc 4 In4 Out

4N/A

350 mA Inputs: Grouped Outputs: 4 A per point

isolated

Type/Part Number Function Points/ Channels

Points per

group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

140AMM09000 InputsVdc:

+/- 10+/- 5

0 ... 100 ... 51 ... 5mA:

+/- 200 ... 204 ... 20

4 In N/A 350 mA Mixed inputs, current or voltage

Outputs4 ... 20 mA

2 Out N/A Isolated

35013379 02 October 2007 67



I/O Modules – Analog In

The following table shows specifications for the Analog In modules.

I/O Modules – Analog Out

The following table shows specifications for the Analog Out modules.

Type/Part Number Function Points/Channels

Points per

Group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

140ACI03000 4 ... 20 mA1 ... 5 Vdc

8 1 240 mA Mixed inputs, current or voltage

140ACI04000 0 ...25 mA0 ... 20 mA4 ... 20 mA

16 16 360 mA High density

140ARI03010 RTD: Pt, Ni, Ohms

8 1 200 mA IEC/American

140AVI03000 0 ... 20 mA,+/- 20 mA+/- 10 Vdc+/- 5 Vdc

8 1 280 mA Mixed inputs, current or voltage

140ATI03000 T/C: B, E, J, K, R, S, T

8 1 280 mA CJC INT/EXT

Type/ Part Number Function Points/ Channels

Points per

group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

140ACO02000 4 ... 20 mA 4 N/A 480 mA Channels isolated

140ACO13000 0 ... 25 mA0 ... 20 mA4 ... 20 mA

8 8 550 mA High density

140AVO02000 0 ... 10 Vdc,+/1 10 Vdc0 ... 5 Vdc+/- 5 Vdc

4 N/A 700 mA Mixed outputs

68 35013379 02 October 2007



Intrinsic Safe Analog Modules

The following table shows specifications for the Intrinsic Safe analog modules.

Intrinsic Safe Discrete Modules

The following table shows the specifications for the Intrinsic Safe discrete modules.

Miscellaneous Modules

The following table shows specifications for miscellaneous modules.

Type/Part Number


Points per

Group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

140AII33000 TC: B, E, J, K, R, S, TRTD: Pt, Ni Ohms

8 1 400 mA CJC INT/EXTIEC/American

140AII33010 0 ... 25 mA0 ... 20 mA4 ... 20 mA

8 8 1.5 A Mixed inputs, current. Internal power supply.

140AIO33000 0 ... 25 mA0 ... 20 mA4 ... 20 mA

8 8 2.5 A Internal power supply.

Type/Part Number


Points per

Common

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

140DII33000 Discrete In 8 8 400 mA Internal power supply

140DIO33000 Discrete Out 8 8 2.2 A Internal power supply

Type/Part Number Function Bus Current Required

140XBE10000 Backplane expander

500 mA

140XCP90000 Battery backup None

140XSM01000 Analog simulator None

35013379 02 October 2007 69



70 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


6
Power Supply Modules
At a Glance

Overview The following chapter describes the Quantum power supplies, including: specifications, LED indicators and descriptions, and wiring diagrams. Where applicable, it includes operating curves and hold-up capacitor timing charts.



Topic Page

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module 72

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater) 75

140CPS11400 AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module 78

140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A 81

140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 11 A 84

140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module 87

140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 11 A Module 90

140CPS21100 DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module 93

140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module 96

140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module 99

140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module 102

140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module 105

140CPS51100 DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module 108

140CPS52400 DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A 111

71

arr-thorp.com

Power Supplies

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 3 A module (Product Version 01 or greater).

Power Supply Module

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

140CPS 111 00PS 115/230 VAC

X

Removable Door

Customer Identification Label(Fold label and place it inside door)

Model NumberModule DescriptionColor CodeLED Area

X

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Field WiringConnector Cover

Field WiringConnector

1234567

1234567

115Vac115VacAC L

AC N

72 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11100 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 93 ... 132 Vac (jumper installed)170 ... 264 Vac (no jumper)

Input Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz

Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion

Less than 10% of the fundamental ms value

Input Current 0.4 A @ 115 Vac. 0.2 A @ 230 Vac

Inrush Current 13 A @ 115 Vac. @ 25°C first power up23 A @ 230 Vac. @ 25°C first power up

VA Rating 50 VA

Input Power Interruption 1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

Fusing (external) 1.5 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502515 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current 3 A

Minimum Current None required

Protection Over Current, Over Voltage

General

Field Wiring Connector (included)

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

Internal Power Dissipation 6 Watts typ.

Operating Mode Standalone

35013379 02 October 2007 73


Power Supplies

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS11100 LED indicator.

The following table shows the CPS11100 LED description.

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS11100 wiring diagram.

Note: For "Closed System" installations, connector 140XTS00 500 must be used (refer to Closed System Installation, p. 795 ).

LED Description

LEDs Color Indication when On

Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus.

Pwr ok

Note: See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems, p. 776 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

Do not connect anyexternal wiring to

Install jumper for 115 Vacoperation only

AC L

AC N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

}Internally connected

these points

74 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater)

Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 3 A module (PV01 or greater).

Power Supply Module

The following figure shows the power supply module (PV01 or greater) components.


140CPS 111 00PS 115/230 VAC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

115Vac

AC L

AC N

115Vac

35013379 02 October 2007 75


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11100 115/230 VAC power supply module (PV01 or greater).

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 100 ... 276 Vac





Inrush Current 10 A @ 115 Vac. 20 A @ 230 Vac

VA Rating 50 VA



Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current 3 A

Minimum Current 0.3 A


General



Internal Power Dissipation 2.0 + 3.0 x IOUT = Watts (where IOUT is in Amperes)


76 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies


The following figure shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) LED indicator.

The following table shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) LED description.

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) wiring diagram.

Note: For "closed system" installations, connector 140XTS00 500 must be used (refer to Closed System Installation, p. 795 ).

LED Description



Pwr ok


AC L

AC N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

} Internally connected. Do not connect any externalwiring to these points.

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only.

35013379 02 October 2007 77


Power Supplies

140CPS11400 AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 114 00PS 115/230 VAC

X

Removable Door


Model NumberModule DescriptionColor Code LED Area

X





1234567

1234567

115Vac

AC L

AC N

78 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies


Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 93 ... 138 Vac. 170 ... 276 Vac






VA Rating 130 VA

Input Power Interruption 1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum-rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

Fusing (external) 2.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current 8 A @ 60° C (See the operating curve below)



General



Internal Power Dissipation 6.0 + 1.5 x Iout = Watts (where Iout is in Amperes)


35013379 02 October 2007 79


Power Supplies




Wiring Diagram and Operating Curve

The following figures show the CPS11400 Wiring Diagram (left) and operating curve (right).

LED Description



Pwr ok


Internally connected.Do not connect any external wiring to these points.

AC L

AC N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

}Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

Ambient Temperature (C)

Out

put t

o Bu

s C

urre

ntT

(A)

40 6050 5545

1210

8642

80 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A

Overview The following provides information on the AC power supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module

The following figure shows the power supply module and its components.

140CPS 114 10PS 115/230 VAC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

115 VAC

115VAC

AC L

AC N

AlarmRelay

35013379 02 October 2007 81


Power Supplies


Specifications

Input Requirements




Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value



VA Rating 130 VA



Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current 8 A @ 60° C



General




Operating Mode Standalone / Summable

82 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies




Wiring Diagram The following figures shows the 140CPS11410.

LED Descripton



Pwr ok



AC L

AC N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


35013379 02 October 2007 83


Power Supplies

140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 11 A

Overview The following provides information on the AC power supply, 115/230 Vac, 11 A module.

Power Supply Module

The following figure shows the power supply module and its components.

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

115 VAC

115 VAC

AC L

AC N

140CPS 114 20PS 115/230 VAC

AlarmRelay

84 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies


Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 93 ... 132 Vac.170 ... 264 Vac




Input Current 1.2 A @ 115 Vac.0.7 A @ 230 Vac

Inrush Current @ 25° C (first power up)

≤ 20 A @ 115 Vac.≤ 25 A @ 230 Vac

VA Rating 160 VA @ 11 A



Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current Stand alone configuration: 11 A @ 60° CSummable configuration (Two 140CPS11420): 20 A @

60° C (Total load capacity)Summable configuration (One 140CPS11420 and one

140CPS11410): 16A @ 60° C (Total load capacity)



General



Internal Power Dissipation Less than 12 W at full load


35013379 02 October 2007 85


Power Supplies




Wiring Diagram The following figures shows the CPS11420.

LED Description



Pwr ok

Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF. The relay will de-energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc.


AC L

AC N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

Power loss alarm

86 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 124 00115/230 VAC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

115 VAC

115 VAC

AC L

AC N

35013379 02 October 2007 87


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS12400 PS 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements







VA Rating 130 VA



Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc




General




Operating Mode Standalone / Redundant

88 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies




Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CPS12400 wiring diagram.

LED Description



Pwr ok



AC L

AC N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


35013379 02 October 2007 89


Power Supplies

140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 11 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply, 115/230 Vac, 11 A module.

Power Supply Module



X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

Power loss alarm115 VAC

115 VAC

AC L

AC N

140CPS 124 20 PS 115/230 VAC

90 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS12420 PS 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 93 ... 132 Vac.170 ... 264 Vac




Input Current 1.2 A @ 115 Vac 0.7 A @ 230 Vac

Inrush Current ≤ 20 A @ 115 Vac @ 25° C first power up ≤ 25 A @ 230 Vac

VA Rating 160 VA @ 11 A



Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current Standalone configuration: 11 A @ 60° CRedundant configuration (two 140CPS12420): 10 A @

60° C (total load capacity)Redundant configuration (one 140CPS12420 and one

140CPS22400): 8 A @ 60° C (total load capacity)Redundant configuration (one 140CPS12420 and one

140CPS42400): 8 A @ 60° C (total load capacity)



General



Internal Power Dissipation Less than 12 W at full load


35013379 02 October 2007 91


Power Supplies





LED Description



Pwr ok

Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF. The relay will de-energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc.


AC L

AC N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

Power loss alarm

92 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

140CPS21100 DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the DC power supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 211 00PS 24 VDC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

24Vdc-

24Vdc+

35013379 02 October 2007 93


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS21100 PS 24 VDC power supply module.




Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 20 ... 30 Vdc

Input Current 1.6 A

Inrush Current 30 A

Input Power Interruption 1.0 ms max @ 20 V. 20.0 ms max @ 24 V


Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current 3 A



General

Field Wiring Connector (included) 7 point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)

Internal Power Dissipation 2.0 + 3 x Iout = Watts (where Iout is in Amperes)


LED Description



Pwr ok

94 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CPS21100 wiring diagram.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Not used

Not used

-24 Vdc (Common)

+24 Vdc

Not used

Not used

35013379 02 October 2007 95


Power Supplies

140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the DC summable power supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 214 00PS 24 VDC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

AlarmRelay24Vdc-

24Vdc+

+

-cap

96 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS21400 PS 24 Vdc power supply module.




Specifications

Input Requirements


Input Current 3.8 A max

Inrush Current 25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc

Input Ripple 2.4 Vdc max, 94 ... 189 Hz

Input Power Interruption 1 ms max @ 24 Vdc (see the hold-up capacitor timing chart)


Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current 8 A



General

Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)



LED Description



Pwr ok

35013379 02 October 2007 97


Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram and Timing Chart

The following figures show the CPS214 wiring diagram (left) and the hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).

Note: 1. A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available

on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF. The relay will de-energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc.

2. Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a ≥ 50 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart for capacitor values.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

} Power LossAlarm

-24 Vdc (Common)

+24 Vdc

+

- Capacitor(Optional)

Capacitor Size (millifarads)

Times/ms

Input Voltage

Capacitor Size(millifarads)

10090

8070

60

50

40

30

2010

020 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

22

105.84.72.210

4768100

98 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 224 00PS 24 VDC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

AlarmRelay24Vdc-

24Vdc+

+

-cap

35013379 02 October 2007 99


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 24 Vdc, 8 A DC redundant power supply.




Specifications

Input Requirements


Input Current 3.8 A max

Inrush Current 25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc

Input Ripple 2.4 Vdc max, 94 ... 189 Hz

Input Power Interruption 1 ms max @ 24 Vdc


Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Current 8 A


General

Surge Withstand 2.3 x Maximum Rated Input Voltage for 1.3 ms




LED Description



Pwr ok

100 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram and Timing Chart

The following figures show the 140CPS22400 wiring diagram (left) and the 140CPS22400 hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).

Note: 1. A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available

on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF, or a power supply failure. The relay will de-energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc.

2. Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a ≥ 50 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart (above) for capacitor values.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

} Power LossAlarm

-24 Vdc (Common)

+24 Vdc

+


Capacitor Size (millifarads)

Times/ms

Input Voltage

Capacitor Size(millifarads)

10090

8070

60

50

40

30

2010

020 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

22

105.84.72.210

4768100

35013379 02 October 2007 101


Power Supplies

140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the DC summable power supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 414 00PS 48 VDC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

AlarmRelay48Vdc-

48Vdc+

+

-cap

102 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS41400, 48 VDC power supply module.




Specifications

Input Requirements


Input Current 1.2 A @ 48 Vdc

Inrush Current 25 A @ 40 Vdc

Input Power Interruption 13 ms @ 48 Vdc

Fusing (external) 2.0 A medium time-lag recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Current 8 A (see operating curve)


General


Internal Power Dissipation 15.6 W @ 8 A


LED Description



Pwr ok

35013379 02 October 2007 103


Power Supplies


Operating Curve and Timing Chart

The following figures show the CPS41400 operating curve (left) and the hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).

Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF, or a power supply failure.


}1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Power LossAlarm

-48 ... -60 Vdc (Common)

+48 ... +60 Vdc

+


Note: Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a ≥ 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart (above) for capacitor values.

Capacitor size/mF

Input Voltage

Tim

e/m

s

10090

8070

60

50

40

30

2010

040 45 50 55 60 65 70

2.2

1

0

47 22 10 6.8 4.7


Out

put t

o B

us C

urre

ntT

(A)

40 6050 5545

12

10

8

6

42

104 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the DC redundant power supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module



Note: Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding an 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart (above) for capacitor values.

140CPS 424 00PS 48 VDC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

AlarmRelay48Vdc-

48Vdc+

+

-cap

35013379 02 October 2007 105


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS42400 PS 48 VDC RED power supply module.




Specifications

Input Requirements




Input Power Interruption 13 ms @ 48 Vdc

Fusing (external) 2.0 A medium time-lag recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Current 8 A (see operating curve)


General


Internal Power Dissipation 17.2 W @ 8 A


LED Description



Pwr ok

106 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies


Operating Curve and Timing Chart

The following figures show the CPS42400 operating curve (left) and the hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).


Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF, or a power supply failure.

}1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Power LossAlarm

-48 ... -60 Vdc (Common)

+48 ... +60 Vdc

+


Note: Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a ≥ 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart (above) for capacitor values.

Capacitor size/mF

Input Voltage

Tim

e/m

s

10090

8070

60

50

40

30

2010

040 45 50 55 60 65 70

2.2

1

0

47 22 10 6.8 4.7


Out

put t

o B

us C

urre

ntT

(A)

40 6050 5545

12

10

8

6

42

35013379 02 October 2007 107


Power Supplies

140CPS51100 DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module

Overview The following provides information on the DC power supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 511 00PS 125 VDC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

125Vdc+

125Vdc-

108 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS51100 125 Vdc power supply module.




Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 100 ... 150 Vdc including ripple

Input Current 0.4 A

Inrush Current 10 A

Input Power Interruption 1.0 ms max


Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Maximum Current 3 A



General



Internal Power Dissipation 2.0 + 3 x Iout = Watts (where Iout is in Amperes)


LED Description



Pwr ok

35013379 02 October 2007 109


Power Supplies



Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

125 VDC +

125 VDC - (Common)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

110 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies

140CPS52400 DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A

Overview The following provides information on the DC Standalone/Redundant power supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A module.

Power Supply Module



140CPS 524 00PS 125 VDC

X

Removable Door



X





1234567

1234567

125 Vdc+

125 Vdc-

35013379 02 October 2007 111


Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS52400 125 VDC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 100 ... 150 Vdc including ripple




Fusing (external) 2 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc




General



Internal Power Dissipation 6.0 + 1.5 x |OUT = Watts (where |OUT is in Amperes)


112 35013379 02 October 2007


Power Supplies





LED Description



Pwr ok



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

}Not used

Not used125VDC +

125 VDC - (Common)

35013379 02 October 2007 113


Power Supplies

114 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


7
CPU Modules
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the Quantum CPU modules.

The following table shows an overview of the Quantum CPU modules.

CPU SRAM (bytes)

Ladder Registers Extended 984 Ladder Performance

Max IEC Program

140CPU11302 256 k 8 k 10 k none 0.3 - 1.4 ms/k 109 k

140CPU11303 512 k 16 k 10 k none 0.3 - 1.4 ms/k 368 k

140CPU21304 768 k 32 k or 48 k

57 k or 28 k *

80 k or 0 k *

0.3 - 1.4 ms/k 606 k

140CPU42402 2 M 64 k 57 k 96 k * 0.1 - 0.5 ms/k 570 k

140CPU43412 2 M 64 K 57 K* 96 k 0.1 - 0.5 ms/k 896 k

140CPU43412A 2 M 64K 57 K* 96 k 0.1 - 0.5 ms/k 896 k

140CPU53414 4 M 64 K 57 K* 96 k 0.9 - 0.45 ms/k 2.5 M

140CPU53414A 4 M 64 K 57 K* 96K 0.1 - 0.5 ms/k 2.5 M

140CPU53414B 4 M 64 K 57 K* 96K 0.1 - 0.5 ms/k 2.5 M

*Refer to the individual specification pages for detailed information.

115

arr-thorp.com

CPU Modules



Topic Page

140CPU11302 CPU Module 117





140CPU43412A CPU Module 174


140CPU53414A CPU Module 200

140CPU53414B CPU Module 214

116 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

140CPU11302 CPU Module

Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU11302 Controller module – CPU 256 K, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 109 K (requires IEC-only Exec.)

CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.

Modbus

Date Installed

Batt.

Batt.Spare

off

not used

RTUASCII

mem

memprt

Modbus

ModbusPlus

Network

Node

Customer Identification Label(Fold label and place it inside door) Part #043502480

Removable doorPart #043513804


Battery

Memory Protect andComm parameterSlide Switches

ModbusConnector

ModbusPlusChan A

Modbus Plus ConnectorChan A

140CPU 113 02CONTROLLER

X

35013379 02 October 2007 117


CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU11302 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications

984 Ladder Logic 8 k words max

Reference Capacity

Discrete 8192 In and 8192 Out max

Register 9999 max

Local I/O (Main Backplane)

Maximum I/O Words 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of I/O Racks 2 (Requires expander)

Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop 64 In / 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31

Distributed I/O

Maximum Number of Networks per System

3**

Maximum Words per Network (For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of two words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out

Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out

Watchdog Timer 250 ms (S/W adjustable)

Logic Solve Time 0.3 ms / k to 1.4 ms / k

Battery 3 V Lithium

Service Life 1200 mAh

Shelf Life 10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

Battery Load Current @ Power-off

Typical 5 μA

Maximum 110 μA

Communication

Modbus (RS-232) 1 serial port (9-pin D-shelf)

Modbus Plus (RS-485) 1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

General

118 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured – one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Processor.–

Diagnostics Power Up Runtime

RAM RAM

RAM Address RAM Address

Executive Checksum Executive Checksum

User Logic Check User Logic Check

Processor

Bus Current Required 780 mA

Power Dissipation 3.9 W

TOD Clock +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

Maximum Number of NOM, NOE, and MMS modules (any combination)

2

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 119


CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators.

The following table shows the LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions


Ready Green The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics.

Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic. (See the following table for Run LED error codes).

Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port.

Modbus + Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Mem Prt Amber Memory is write protected (the memory protect switch is on).

Bat Low Red The battery needs replacing.

Error A Red Indicates a communications error on the Modbus Plus network.

Ready

Bat Low

Error A

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

120 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table show the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error, and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex) for the 140CPU11302 module.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code Error

Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode

2 80B ram error during sizing

80C run output active failed

82E MB command handler stack error

3 769 bus grant received

72A not master asic on cpu

72B master config write bad

72C quantum bus DPM write failure

72F plc asic loopback test

730 plc asic BAD_DATA

35013379 02 October 2007 121


CPU Modules

4 604 UPI timeout error

605 bad UPI response opcode

606 UPI bus diagnostic error

607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow

608 modbus cmd-length is zero

609 modbus abort command error

614 mbp bus interface error

615 bad mbp response opcode

616 timeout waiting for mbp

617 mbp out of synchronization

618 mbp invalid path

619 page 0 not paragraph aligned

61E bad external uart hardware

61F bad external uart interrupt

620 bad receive comm state

621 bad transmit comm state

622 bad comm state trn_asc

623 bad comm state trn_rtu

624 bad comm state rcv_rtu

625 bad comm state rcv_asc

626 bad modbus state tmr0_evt

627 bad modbus state trn-int

628 bad modbus state rcv-int

631 bad interrupt

5 503 ram address test error

52D P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR

6 402 ram data test error

7 300 EXEC not loaded

301 EXEC Checksum

8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error

8002 flash prog / erase error

8003 unexpected executive return

LED Error Codes


122 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Front Panel Switches

Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.

The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU11302.

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is set to RTU or ASCII mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.

ASCII Communication Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1

Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting

RTU Communication Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


ASCII

RTU

memnot used

off

memprt

35013379 02 October 2007 123


CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Communication Port Parameters

Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50

Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2

Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even

Device Address 1 ... 247

124 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.

SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.

The following figure shows SW1 and SW2.

The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1 SW2

1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4

Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be "on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW 1 (TOP)

SW 2 (BOTTOM)

35013379 02 October 2007 125


CPU Modules

Modbus Connector Pinouts

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

Modbus Ports Pinout Connections

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA2620 or 990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module.

5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

RX

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

126 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable (laptop) computers.

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data DTR: Data Terminal Ready

RX: Received Data CTS: Clear to Send

RTS: Request to Send NC: No Connection

DSR: Data Set Ready CD: Carrier Detect

CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

35013379 02 October 2007 127


CPU Modules


Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU11303 Controller module – CPU 512 k, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 368 K (requires IEC Exec.)


Modbus

Date Installed

Batt.

Batt.Spare

off

not used

RTUASCII

mem

memprt

Modbus

ModbusPlus

Network

Node


Removable door


Battery


ModbusConnector

ModbusPlusChan A


140CPU 113 03 CONTROLLER

X

128 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


Specifications

984 Ladder Logic 16 k words max

Reference Capacity

Discrete 8192 In and 8192 Out max

Register 9999 max




Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop 64 In / 64 Out*


Distributed I/O


3**

Maximum Words per Network (For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of two words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out




Battery 3 V Lithium




Typical 7 μA

Maximum 210 μA

Communication

Modbus (RS-232) 1 serial port (9-pin D-shell)


General

35013379 02 October 2007 129


CPU Modules

* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured - one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM21x00 Option Processor.


RAM RAM




Processor





2

Specifications

130 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the CPU11303 LED indicators.

The following table shows the CPU11303 LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions



Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following table for Run LED error codes).






Ready

Bat Low

Error A

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

35013379 02 October 2007 131


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex). The following table shows the blinking run LED error codes.

LED Error Codes












132 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


35013379 02 October 2007 133


CPU Modules



The following figure shows the three options that are available.

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed. The following table shows the ASCII communication port parameters.




Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


ASCII

RTU

memnot used

off

memprt

134 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules



Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50


Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


35013379 02 October 2007 135


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table that follow) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.


The following figure shows SW1 and SW2 switches.





1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

136 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules






5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

RX

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

35013379 02 October 2007 137


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the Modbus port connections for nine-pin portable computer connections.




RTS: Request to Send N/C: No Connection


CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

138 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU21304 Controller module – CPU 768 K, MATH, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 606 K.

CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its parts.

Modbus

Date Installed

Batt.

Batt.Spare

off

not used

RTUASCII

mem

memprt

Modbus

ModbusPlus

Network

Node




Battery


ModbusConnector

ModbusPlusChan A



X

35013379 02 October 2007 139


CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU21304 controller module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference Capacity

984 Ladder Logic Discrete Register Extended Register

32 k words 64 k 57 k 80 k

48 k words 64 k 28 k 0 k

57,766 4XX registers maxOnly if:

0XXX = 16 and1XXX = 16 and

3XXX =16

Discrete 64 k - any mix




Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Remote Drops

31

Distributed I/O


3**

Maximum Words per Network (For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out


Watchdog Timer 250 ms (software adjustable)


Battery 3 V Lithium




Typical 5 μA

Maximum 110 μA

Communication


140 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured - one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Processor.


General


RAM RAM




Processor





2

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 141


CPU Modules



The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions






Mem Prt Amber Memory is write-protected (the memory protect switch is on).



Ready

Bat Low

Error A

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

142 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The Blinking Run LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex).

The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU21304.

LED Error Codes












35013379 02 October 2007 143


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


144 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules



The following figure shows the three options that are available.

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed



Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is set to RTU or ASCII mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicationunicate with the controller to which it is connected, as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.


Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


ASCII

RTU

memnot used

off

memprt

35013379 02 October 2007 145


CPU Modules


Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50


Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


146 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.





SW1 and SW2 Adress Settings


1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TENS)

SW2 (ONES)

35013379 02 October 2007 147


CPU Modules





Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it isrecommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module.

5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

RX

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

148 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The follwing figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable computers.






CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

35013379 02 October 2007 149


CPU Modules


Overview The following provides information on the140CPU42402 Controller module – CPU 2 M, MATH, 2xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 570 K.

CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU module and its components.

Modbus

Date Installed

Batt.

Batt.Spare

off

not used

RTUASCII

mem

memprt

Modbus

ModbusPlus

ModbusPlus

Network

Node




Battery


ModbusConnector

Modbus Plus ConnectorChan B*

ModbusPlusChan A

ModbusPlusChan B



X

150 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


Specifications

User Logic/Reference Capacity

984 Ladder Logic

Discrete Register Extended Register

64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k



3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity




Maximum Number of I/O Racks

2 (Requires expander)

Remote I/O


Maximum Number of Remote Drops

31

Distributed I/O


3**

Maximum Words per Network (For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out




Battery 3 V Lithium




Typical 7 μA

Maximum 210 μA

Communication

35013379 02 October 2007 151


CPU Modules

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured-one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Modules.


Modbus Plus (RS-485) 2 (redundant) network ports (9-pin D-shell)

General


RAM RAM




Processor

Bus Current Required 1.8 A

Power dissipation 9 W

TOD Clock +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60 °C


6

Specifications

152 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules



The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions








Error A Red Indicates a communications error on the redundant Modbus Plus port A (140CPU42402 only).

Error B Red Indicates a communications error on the redundant Modbus Plus port B (140CPU42402 only).

Ready

Bat Low

Error A

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

Error B

35013379 02 October 2007 153


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the CPU42402.

LED Error Codes












154 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


35013379 02 October 2007 155


CPU Modules


Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.

The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU42402 module.

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.


ASCII Comm Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1


RTU Comm Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


ASCII

RTU

memnot used

off

memprt

156 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Comm Port Parameters

Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50


Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


35013379 02 October 2007 157


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.







1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

158 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules






5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

RX

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

35013379 02 October 2007 159


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable computers






CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

160 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU43412 Controller module – CPU 2M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program – 896 k.


Mod

bus

Com

m 1

Date Installed

Batt.

Deysw

ModbusComm 1

Network

Node


Part #31000226



Battery

Key Switch

ModbusConnector


ModbusConnector

Modbus PlusConnector

Mod

bus

Com

m 2

Mod

bus

Plu

s

SlideSwitch

ModbusComm 2

ModbusPlus

ASCII

RTU

mem

X

35013379 02 October 2007 161


CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference Capacity 984 Ladder Logic


64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k


0XXX = 161XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity





Remote I/O



Distributed I/O


3**

Maximum Words per Network (for every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out


Maximum Number of Option Module Interfaces

Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus Plus, Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules)

using the option module interface technique (see Quantum Network Interface Techniques, p. 47).

Note: Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality, including Quantum DIO support.



Battery 3 V Lithium



162 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured – one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of two 140NOM21x00 Option Modules.

Battery Load Current at Power-off

Typical 7 μA

Maximum 210 μA

Communication



General


RAM RAM




Processor


Power Dissipation 9W


Operating Temperature 0 ... 60° C

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 163


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the LED indicators.


LEDS Color Indication when On

Ready Green The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics.

Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic.

Bat Low Red The battery needs replacing or is not present.

Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2.


Error A Red Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port.


Bat1 Low

ReadyRun

Modbus

Modbus + Error A

Mem Prt

164 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412.

LED Error Codes












35013379 02 October 2007 165


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


166 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.

The following figure shows the three options that are available for the 140CPU43412 module.

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.




Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


ASCII

RTU

memnot used

off

memprt

35013379 02 October 2007 167


CPU Modules



Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50

Parity Enable/DisableOdd/Even

Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


168 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches (see the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.








1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

35013379 02 October 2007 169


CPU Modules

Key Switch The key switch is used to protect memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch.

The following table shows the key switch information.

Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.

Key Switch Description

Key switch Position

Controller Status Memory Protected

From Programmer

Changes

Will Accept Programmer Stop or Start

Key switch Transition

Stop Controller is stopped and disables Programmer changes.

Y N From Start or Memory Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables Programmer changes

Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and Programmer changes are disabled. User cannot write to unlocated variables.

Y N From Stop or Start: Prevents Programmer changes, controller run status is not changed

StopMemPrt

Start

StopMemPrt

Start

170 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that support Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

Modbus Port Modem Support

Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability. Modbus Port 2 RTS/CTS connections function properly for normal non-modem communications but do not support modems.

Start Controller may be either stopped or running. Programmer may make changes and start/stop the controller

N Y From Stop: Enables Programmer changes, starts controller.From Memory Protect: Enables programmer changes, starts controller if stopped.


Key switch Position


From Programmer

Changes




35013379 02 October 2007 171


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

RX

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

172 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable computers.






CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

35013379 02 October 2007 173


CPU Modules

140CPU43412A CPU Module

Overview The following provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU43412A Controller Module.

This module is functionally identical to the non-"A" version, however, the following should be considered:

If you are using the module in a Hot Standby topology, then you must use either two non-"A" models or two "A" models.The "A" version requires a new flash executive.The "A" version and non-"A" flash executives are not interchangeable.Schneider Automation software (Concept, ProWORX, and Modsoft) supports the "A" version. Any existing or new 140CPU43412 program configuration will load into a 140CPU43412A without any modifications.

CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components. M

odbu

s C

omm

1

Date Installed

Batt.

Dey

ModbusComm 1

Network

Node




Battery

Key Switch

ModbusConnector

140CPU 434 12A486 CONTROLLER

ModbusConnector


Mod

bus

Com

m 2

Mod

bus

Plu

s

SlideSwitch

ModbusmComm 2

ModbusPlus

ASCII

RTU

mem

X

174 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412A Controller module.

Specifications



IEC Application

64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k 800 k


0XXX = 16 and 1XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity


Local I/O


Maximum Number of I/O Racks 2 (Requires Expander)

Remote I/O



Distributed I/O


3**


500 In and 500 Out


*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one word must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured--one word must be subtracted from the total available.**Requires the use of two140NOM21X00 Option Modules.

Maximum Number of Network Module Interfaces

6

Watchdog Timer 250 ms (software adjustable)


Battery

Type 3 V Lithium




35013379 02 October 2007 175


CPU Modules

Typical 7 μA

Maximum 210 μA

Communication



Programming Software Capability Modsoft, version 2.6 minimumConcept, version 2.1 with B2.1 patch

Concept 2.2 with SR2ProWORX NxT, version 2.0 minimum

ProWORX Plus, version 1.05 minimumProWORX 32, version 1.0 minimum

General


RAM RAM Address

Executive Checksum User Logic Check

Processor

RAM RAM Address






Specifications

176 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules



The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the 140CPU43412A module.





Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2.




ReadyRun

Modbus Error A

Mem Prt

Modbus +

Bat low

35013379 02 October 2007 177


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412A.

LED Error Codes












178 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


35013379 02 October 2007 179


CPU Modules

Note: Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility.

180 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Front Panel Slide Switch

The slide switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS232) ports. Three options are available:

1. Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port.2. Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)

functionality to the port.3. Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the

port in software.

The figure shows the three options that are available on the front panel slide switch.

The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.

The following table shows the RTU comm port parameters. The comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.



Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


RTU

mem

ASCII

35013379 02 October 2007 181


CPU Modules

The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.


Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50


Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


182 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Key Switch The key switch protects memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch.

The CPU43412A has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables. On power up, if you have a program in flash memory, you can choose the desired operating mode using the PLC MEM switch on the processor front panel. The 140CPU43412A has a key switch with Run, Mem Prt, and Stop positions.

Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.

Stop position The application in Flash is not transferred to internal RAM: warm restart of the application.

Mem Prt position The application in Flash is not transferred to internal RAM: warm restart of the application.

Start position The application in Flash is automatically transferred to internal RAM when the PLC processor is powered up: cold restart of the application.

Stop

MemPrt

Start

Stop

MemPrt

Start

35013379 02 October 2007 183


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Address Switch

The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings for the Address Switch located on the rear panel.

SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.



1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TENS)

SW2 (ONES)

184 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The following table shows the key switch information.


Key switch Position


From Programmer

Changes





Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and Programmer changes are disabled. User cannot write to unlocated variables.


Start Controller may be either stopped or running. Programmer may make changes and start/stop the controller.

N Y From Stop: Enables Programmer changes, starts controller. From Memory Protect: Enables programmer changes, starts controller if stopped.

35013379 02 October 2007 185


CPU Modules


All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232 connector that support Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.



Modbus Ports Pinout Connections Figure



5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RXTX

DTRGRND DSRRTS CTS

1

23

45678

1

23

4

6789

SHIELD

RXTX

DTRGRND 5DSRRTS CTSNC

1

23

4

6789

SHIELD

RXTX

DTRGRND DSRRTS CTSNC

RX

RTSCTS DSRGRNDNC

1

23

45678

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

186 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for portable (laptop) computers.






CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

35013379 02 October 2007 187


CPU Modules


Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU53414 Controller module – CPU 4M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program – 2.5 M.


Date Installed

Batt.

Batt.Spare

off

not used

RTUASCII

mem

memprt

Modbus

Modbus

ModbusPlus

Network

Node




Battery

ModbusConnector

Modbus Plus Connector

ModbusConnector


X

SlideSwitch

Mod

bus

Com

m1

Mod

bus

Com

m 2

Mod

bus

Plu

s

Key Switch

188 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specification for the 140CPU53414 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications



64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k


0XXX = 16 and 1XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity





Remote I/O



Distributed I/O


3**

Maximum Words per Network. (For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out


Maximum Number of Option Module Interfaces

Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus Plus, Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules) using

the option module interface technique.Note: Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full

functionality, including Quantum DIO support.


Logic Solve Time 0.1 ms/k to 0.5 ms/k

Battery 3 V Lithium




Typical 14 μA

35013379 02 October 2007 189


CPU Modules

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured – one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of two 140NOM21x00 Option Modules.

Maximum 420 μA

Communication



General


RAM RAM




Processor


Power dissipation 9 W



Specifications

190 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules




LED Descriptions





Modbus Green Communications are active on Modbus port 1 or 2.




Bat Low

ReadyRun

Modbus

Modbus + Error A

Mem Prt

35013379 02 October 2007 191


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414 module.

LED Error Codes












192 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


35013379 02 October 2007 193


CPU Modules


The slide switch, located on the front panel of the CPU, is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. Three positions are available:



port in software.

The slide switch:

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.




Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


ASCII

RTU

mem

194 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


Key Switch The key switch, located on the front of the CPU, is used to protect memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch.


Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50


Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


Note: The key switch positions shown on the switch (above, left) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.

Stop

MemPrt

Start

StopMemPrt

Start

35013379 02 October 2007 195


CPU Modules


The following table provides descriptions of the key switch information.


Key Switch

Position

Controller Status Memory Protected From

Programmer Changes


Key Switch Transition



Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and Programmer changes are disabled. The user cannot write to unlocated variables.




196 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.








1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

35013379 02 October 2007 197


CPU Modules


All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a 9-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.




5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RXTX

DTRGRND DSRRTS CTS

1

23

45678

1

23

4

6789

SHIELD

RXTX


1

23

4

6789

SHIELD

RXTX


RX

RTSCTS DSRGRNDNC

1

23

45678

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

198 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable (laptop) computers.






CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

35013379 02 October 2007 199


CPU Modules

140CPU53414A CPU Module

Overview This unit provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU53414A Controller Module.

This module is functionally identical to the non-"A" version, however, the following should be considered:

If you are using the module in a Hot Standby topology, then you must use either two non-"A" models or two "A" models.The "A" version requires a new flash executive.The "A" version and non-"A" flash executives are not interchangeable.Schneider Automation software (Concept, ProWORX, and Modsoft) supports the "A" version. Any existing or new 140CPU53414 program configuration will load into a 140CPU53414A without any modifications.


odbu

s C

omm

1

Date Installed

Batt.

ModbusComm 1

Network

Node



Model NumberModule DescriptionColor CodeLED

Area

Battery

Key Switch

ModbusConnector


ModbusConnector


Mod

bus

Com

m 2

Mod

bus

Plus

SlideSwitch

ModbusPlus

ASCII

RTU

mem

X

ModbusComm 2

200 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU53414A Controller module.

Specifications



IEC Application

Memory

64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k 2.7M



3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity


Local I/O)



Remote I/O



Distributed I/O


3**


500 In and 500 Out


*This information can be a mix if Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured---one word Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.**Requires the use of two 140NOM21X00 Option Modules.

Maximun Number of Network Option Module Interfaces

Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus Plus, Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules) using the option module interface technique

(see Quantum Network Interface Techniques, p. 47). Note: Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality, Including

Quantum DIO support.

Watchdog timer 250 ms (software adjustable)


Battery

Type 3 V Lithium

35013379 02 October 2007 201


CPU Modules




Typical 14 μA

Maximum 420 μA

Communication



Programming Software Capability Modsoft, version 2.6Concept, version 2.1 with B2.1 patch exec

Concept 2.2 with SR2ProWorx NxT, version 2.0

ProWorx Plus, version 1.05

General


RAM RAM Address


Processor

RAM RAM Address



Power dissipation 6.25 W



Specifications

202 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules



The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the 140CPU53414A module.

LED Descriptions









ReadyRun

Modbus

Error A

Mem Prt

Modbus +

Bat Low

35013379 02 October 2007 203


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414A.

LED Error Codes












204 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


35013379 02 October 2007 205


CPU Modules


206 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The slide switch, located on the front of the CPU, is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS232) ports. Three options are available.



port in software.

Slide switch::





Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


RTU

mem

ASCII

35013379 02 October 2007 207


CPU Modules



Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50


Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


208 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Key Switch The following figure shows the key switch.

The CPU53414A has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables. On power up, if you have a program in flash memory, you can choose the desired operating mode using the PLC MEM switch on the processor front panel. The 140CPU53414A has a key switch with Run, Mem Prt, and Stop positions.

Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above, left) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.




Stop

MemPrt

StartStop

MemPrt

Start

35013379 02 October 2007 209


CPU Modules


The following table provides a description of the key switch information.


Key Switch Position


From Programmer

Changes









210 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings.








1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)


35013379 02 October 2007 211


CPU Modules



5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RXTX

DTRGRND DSRRTS CTS

1

23

45678

1

23

4

6789

SHIELD

RXTX


1

23

4

6789

SHIEL

RXTX


RX

RTSCTS DSRGRNDNC

1

23

45678

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

212 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules








CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

35013379 02 October 2007 213


CPU Modules

140CPU53414B CPU Module

Overview This unit provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU53414B Controller Module.

This module is functionally identical to the non-"B" version, however, the following should be considered:

If you are using the module in a Hot Standby topology, then you must use either two non-"A", or two "A" or two "B" models.The "B" version requires a new flash executive.The "B" version, "A" version and non-"A" flash executives are not interchangeable.Schneider Automation software (Concept, ProWORX, and Modsoft) supports the "B" version.


odbu

s C

omm

1

Date Installed

Batt.

ModbusComm 1

Network

Node



Model NumberModule DescriptionColor CodeLED

Area

Battery

Key Switch

ModbusConnector


ModbusConnector


Mod

bus

Com

m 2

Mod

bus

Plus

SlideSwitch

ModbusPlus

ASCII

RTU

mem

X

ModbusComm 2

214 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU53414B Controller module.

Specifications



IEC Application

Memory

64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k 2.7M



3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity


Local I/O)



Remote I/O



Distributed I/O


3**


500 In and 500 Out


*This information can be a mix if Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured---one word Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.**Requires the use of two 140NOM21X00 Option Modules.

Maximun Number of Network Option Module Interfaces

Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus Plus, Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules) using the option module interface technique

(see Quantum Network Interface Techniques, p. 47). Note: Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality, Including

Quantum DIO support.

Watchdog timer 250 ms (software adjustable)


Battery

Type 3 V Lithium

35013379 02 October 2007 215


CPU Modules




Typical 14 μA

Maximum 420 μA

Communication



Programming Software Capability Modsoft, version 2.6Concept 2.2 with SR2 (LL984 only)

Concept 2.5Concept 2.6ProWorx 32

ProWorx NxT, version 2.0ProWorx Plus, version 1.05

Unity Pro 3.1

General


RAM RAM Address


Processor

RAM RAM Address






Specifications

216 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules



The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the 140CPU53414B module.

LED Descriptions









ReadyRun

Modbus

Error A

Mem Prt

Modbus +

Bat Low

35013379 02 October 2007 217


CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414B.

LED Error Codes












218 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules
























631 bad interrupt





301 EXEC Checksum




LED Error Codes


35013379 02 October 2007 219


CPU Modules


220 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules


The slide switch, located on the front of the CPU, is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS232) ports. Three options are available.



port in software.

Slide switch::





Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


RTU

mem

ASCII

35013379 02 October 2007 221


CPU Modules



Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50


Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2


222 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Key Switch The following figure shows the key switch.

The CPU53414B has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables. On power up, if you have a program in flash memory, you can choose the desired operating mode using the PLC MEM switch on the processor front panel. The 140CPU53414B has a key switch with Run, Mem Prt, and Stop positions.

Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above, left) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.




Stop

MemPrt

StartStop

MemPrt

Start

35013379 02 October 2007 223


CPU Modules


The following table provides a description of the key switch information.


Key Switch Position


From Programmer

Changes









224 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules

Rear Panel Switches

The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings.








1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)


35013379 02 October 2007 225


CPU Modules



5

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RXTX

DTRGRND DSRRTS CTS

1

23

45678

1

23

4

6789

SHIELD

RXTX


1

23

4

6789

SHIELD

RXTX


RX

RTSCTS DSRGRNDNC

1

23

45678

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

226 35013379 02 October 2007


CPU Modules








CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

35013379 02 October 2007 227


CPU Modules

228 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


8
Quantum Field Bus Modules
At a Glance

Overview This chapter contains information on various Quantum Field Bus Modules.



Topic Page

140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module 230

140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module 236

140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules 242

140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules 250

229

arr-thorp.com


140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module

Overview The following information describes the 140CRP81100 Field Bus Communication Module, which provides interface to Profibus-DP networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems.


For a detailed discussion of the planning, installation and use of a Quantum Profibus system, refer to the Modicon TSX Quantum Profibus-DP Under Modsoft User Manual, P/N 840USE46800, Profibus-DP Under Concept Manual, P/N 840USE48700, and the Profibus-DP Configutator for CRP 811, P/N 840USE46900.

230 35013379 02 October 2007



Communicatons Module

View of the 140CRP81100 communications module and the Profibus tap:

Removable DoorPart #043513804


RS-232C port

PCMCIA Card(467NHP911)

LED Status Display

PROFIBUS RS-485 Port

Profibus Tap (490NAE911)

Module ModelNumber

35013379 02 October 2007 231



LED Status The following figure shows the LED Status display.

The following table provides descriptions of the Status LEDs.

LEDs Color Function Description

Active Green On Indicates bus communication is present

Flashing The flash ram load operation is active

Ready Green On Module is operational

Fault Red On Indicates fault. Refer to LED fault codes in manual 840USE46800.

Backplane Green Flashing Indicates fault. Refer to LED fault codes in manual 840USE46800.

PROFIBUS Green Flashing Erroneous configuration data or PROFIBUS fault

DP S/R Green Fast flashing frequency Sending/receiving DP bus data

Medium flashing frequency Slaves are configuring

Slow flashing frequency Waiting for configuration data

Flashing with fault code Erroneous configuration data

Load Yellow Flashing Configuration data load operation active

Flashing with fault code Load operation fault

Active

Ready Fault

Backplane

PROFIBUS

DP S/R

Load

Resetting Fault LEDTo reset the fault LED the CRP811 must be power cycled or hot swapped.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

232 35013379 02 October 2007



PROFIBUS RS-485 Port d-Sub pinouts

Below are the pinouts for the PROFIBUS RS-485 port.

Legend to pinouts for the RS-485 port:

RS-232C Port Below are pinouts for the RS-232C port

Hot Swapping RestrictionModules may be hot swapped when the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap modules in a Class 1, Division 2 environment.Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

Pin Signal Function

1 Shield Shield, Protective Ground

3 RxD/TxD-P Receive/Transmit-Data-P (+)

5 DGND 5 V common

6 VP +5 V

8 RxD/TxD-N Receive/transmit-data-N(-)

1

2

3

4

59

8

7

6

1

2

3

4

59

8

7

6

35013379 02 October 2007 233



Legend to pinouts for the RS-232C port:

Pin Signal Function

2 RXD Received Data

3 TXD Transmitted Data

5 GND Signal Ground

7 RTS Request to Send

8 CTS Clear to Send

234 35013379 02 October 2007



Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the 140CRP81100 Communication Module:

Specifications

Programming software Modsoft version 2.32 or greaterConcept version 2.2 or greater

Bus current required 1.2 A


Data Interface

RS-232C 9 pin D-shell non-isolated, Shielded cable, 3 m max; 19.2 Kbps default.

RS-485 Profibus, up to 12 Mbps

Installation Local backplane only

Bus Specifications

Bus nodes max. 32

Bus lenths, transmission rates (for 12 Mbps cable)

max. 1.2 km at 9.6 Kbpsmax 1.2 km at 19.2 Kbpsmax. 1.2 km at 93.75 Kbpsmax 1.0 km at 187.5 Kbpsmax 0.5 km at 500 Kbpsmax 0.2 km at 1.5 Mbpsmax 0.1 km at 3 Mbpsmax 0.1 km at 6 Mbpsmax 0.1 km at 12 Mbps

Transmission media shielded twisted pair

Connection interface EIA RS-485

Node type Master class 1

Bus access procedure Master/slave to dP bus slaves

Transmission procedure half-duplex

Frame length Max. 255 bytes

Data unit length Max. 246 bytes

Data security Hamming distance, HD = 4

Node addresses 1 ... 126

35013379 02 October 2007 235



140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module

Overview The 140EIA92100 field bus communications module provides communications interface to AS-i networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems.


For more detailed information see Modicon Quantum AS-i Master Module manual, part number 840USE11700, or start the newmod.hlp from your Concept CD. To locate it, go to the root of your Concept Installation directory. Example of path: Drive_X:\Concept\*.hlp

Note: The newmod help system on your Concept CD contains a hyperlink labeled "Back to Main Content." This link will not return you to Concept 2.5 (and later versions) Help.

236 35013379 02 October 2007



Communications Module

The following diagram provides a view of the 140EIA92100 communications module.

1 LED Display2 AS-i (Red): ON shows the module is not powered. Flashing shows automatic addressing

enabled.3 SLV/BUS (Green): ON when LEDs 0-31 are in bus display mode.4 I/O Status (Green): ON when LEDs 0-31 are in slave display mode.5 Mode (Push Button): Press and hold this button to change from slave mode to bus mode.6 Address (Push Button): Press this button to scroll through the 32 slaves. Hold to reverse

direction of the scroll.7 AS-i Channel Cable Connector: Connects module to AS-i cable and AS-i power supply.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

35013379 02 October 2007 237



LED Display and Descriptions

Diagram of the LED display:

The following table provides LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LED Color Description

Active Green Bus communication is present.

F Red Fault on the AS-i bus.Steady: module faultFlashing: bad bus configuration or slave address

B Green Communication exists between master and slaves.

0-31 Green Slave indicators.

B01234567

89101112131415

1617181920212223

F2425262728293031

Active

238 35013379 02 October 2007



LED Bus Mode Each indicator lamp 1-31 corresponds to a slave address on the bus.

On: Slave is present.Flashing: Slave is mapped but not detected, or detected but not mapped. It may also be projected and detected, but not activated (bad profile or I/O code).Off: Slave is neither mapped nor detected.

Example:

LED Slave I/O Mode

Slave mode (SLV) figure:

On0 8 16 241 9 17 252 10 18 263 11 19 274 12 20 285 13 21 296 14 22 307 15 23 31

Off

Flashing

SLV/BUS

I/O STATUS

Select with mode pushbutton

Display of the address of the selected slave:

0 8 7 241 9 0 252 10 18 263 11 19 274 12 20 285 13 21 296 14 22 307 15 23 31

SLV/BUS

I/O STATUS

On: number of the selected slave

A short press on the address button will change the selectedslave.

Slave 3selected

Display of the state of the I/O bits of the

0 8 16 241 9 17 252 10 18 263 11 19 274 12 20 285 13 21 296 14 22 307 15 23 31

SLV/BUS

I/O STATUS

0-3: displays the state of the input bits

selected slave:

4-7: displays the state of the output bits

On: bit = 1

Off: bit = 0 or not significant

Long press on theaddress push button {

{Input bits

Output bits

35013379 02 October 2007 239



LED Diagnostics State of Indicator Lamps:

B Active F Meaning Corrective Action

Module switched off. Switch the device on.

Operating in Protected Mode (normal). Displaying Outputs.

æ

Operating in Protected Mode (normal). Displaying Inputs.

æ

Fault on AS-i bus (self-programming possible).

Replace the faulty slave with a new identical slave.

Fault on AS-i bus (self-programming not possible).

Connect the terminal.

AS-i power supply fault or no slave on the AS-i bus.

1. Check AS-i power supply.2. Check the continuity of the AS-i bus cable.

Module self-tests in progress.

æ

Indicator lamp is on.

Indicator lamp is off.

Indicator lamp is flashing.

Indicator lamp is in indeterminate state.

(1) Faulty slave ID is flashing.(2) No slave ID numbers are flashing.

X(1)

X(2)

X

X X X

X X

240 35013379 02 October 2007



AS-i Cable Connection

The following figure shows the AS-i cable connection:

Specifications The following table provides specifications for the 140EIA92100 AS-i module:

Connector

Brown wire

AS-i cable

AS-i−(Blue)

Blue wire

AS-i+(Brown)

Specifications

Master profileBus lengthI/O# slavesPower supplyScan time

TransmissionPolarity reversal

M2100m max, no repeaters124IN/124OUT31 max30Vdc @ 120mA max156 msec x (n+2) if n < 31156 msec x (n+1) if n = 31167 kbits/secNon-destructive

Bus current required 250mA max

Power dissipation 2.5W max

Installation Local, RIO, DIO

Programming software Concept v2.5 (or later versions)ProWORX Nxt v2.1Modsoft v2.61

35013379 02 October 2007 241



140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules

Overview This section includes information for the NOA6XXXX InterBus communications modules which provide interface to InterBus networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems.


For more detailed information on the installation and use of Quantum InterBus modules, see the Modicon TSX Quantum 140NOA61110 User Manual, part number 840USE41900; the Modicon TSX Quantum 140NOA61100 User Manual, part number 840USE41800; and the TSX Quantum 140NOA62200 User Manual, part number 840USE49700.

InterBus Communications Module

The following figure shows the NOA6XXXX InterBus Communications module.


Removable Door

Model NumberModule Description

Color Code

LED Display

140NOA XXX XXCONTROLLER

RS-232C Port

X

Seven SegmentDisplay

Reset Push Button

InterBus Port

242 35013379 02 October 2007



Specifications The following table shows the InterBus specifications.

Specifications

Data Interface

InterBus RS-485, isolated (500 V test voltage)

RS-232C maximum cable length As per DIN 66 020, non-isolated 20 m shielded

Data Transfer Frequency 500 kbaud

Connection Styles InterbusRS-232C (Use cable part number 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350)


Power Dissipation Max. 3.7 W, typically 2.5 W

Installation Local backplane only

35013379 02 October 2007 243



LED Indicators and Descriptions for NOA611X0

The following figure shows the NOA611X0 LED indicators.

The following table shows the NOA611X0 LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color Function

R Green Ready. The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for service.

Active Green Bus communication is active.

F Red Fault. A fault occurred on the module.

IB-S Run Green The InterBus is functioning normally and carrying data.

BS Off Yellow One or more bus segments are shut down.

Master Red Processor fault. Fault on the InterBus processor or the communications processor has failed.

RBUS Red Remote bus fault. The remote bus has been diagnosed as defective.

LBUS Red Peripheral bus fault. The peripheral bus has been diagnosed as defective.

Slave Red An InterBus node has reported a (module) fault.

DEA202 Red Initialization fault with the DEA 202.

Memory Red Memory fault.

Start Up Red The InterBus master is not operational.

Active

IB-S Run

BS Off

Master

R F

RBUS

Slave

DEA202

Memory

Start Up

LBUS

244 35013379 02 October 2007



LED Indicators and Descriptions for NOA62200

The following figure shows the NOA62200 LED indicators.

The following table shows the NOA62200 LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color Status Meaning

R Green On Ready. The switch-on routine was completed successfully. The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for operations. RAM and checksum are ok.

Flashing No firmware; or firmware is being loaded.

Off Module error.

Active Green On The communication with the TSX Quantum CPU is active.

F Red On Fault. An error has occurred on the INTERBUS.

IB-S Run Green On The INTERBUS is functioning, normal data transfer.

Flashing cyclically.

The INTERBUS is ready.

No cyclic flashing.

No INTERBUS configuration (error message).

Slave Red On An INTERBUS node is indicating a module error.

140NOA 622 00INTERBUS Master

R Active F

IBS-RUN

Slave

35013379 02 October 2007 245



Seven Segment Display

The seven segment display is only applicable to the NOA61110 module.

Front Panel Connections and Controls

The InterBus module is equipped with an InterBus port and a Modbus Plus port, both are female 9-pin D connectors (see below for pinouts), and a reset push button.

Display Meaning

0 Interbus is not able to run.

– | | – Interbus is able to run but stopped.

– – Interbus is running.

RBUS LED on Number of the defective remote bus segments.

LBUS LED on Number of the defective peripheral bus.

RBUS & LBUS LEDs on

Bus segment fault, interbus comm stopped. Faulted bus segment number (or next segment) displayed.

Slave LED on Bus segment number containing a faulted module.

246 35013379 02 October 2007



InterBus Port Connect the remote bus cable to the female connector port labeled interbus. The following figure shows the InterBus port connection.

The following table shows the key to the remote bus.

Pin Signal Function

1 DO Data Out (+)

2 DI Data In (+)

3 GND Comm

4 GND (NOA622 only) F/O Interface

5 VCC (NOA622 only) F/O Interface

6 DO Data Out (-)

7 DI Data In (-)

8 VCC (NOA622 only) Auxiliary Supply for F/O Interface

9 RBST (NOA622 only) RBST Coupling

Black circle = Pin occupied. White circle = N/C

INTE

RB

US

rem

ote

bus

35013379 02 October 2007 247



RS-232C Port Use a Modbus data cable, Part Number 990NAA26320 (2.7 m) or Part Number 990NAA26350 (15.5 m). The following figure shows the RS-232C port connection.

The following table shows the key to the RS-232C port.

Reset Push Button

The reset push button performs a hardware reset of the module which must be done each time new firmware has been downloaded. This button allows you to reset the module without removing it from the backplane.

Required Loadables

Loadables are accessible from Groupe Schneider's World Wide Web site at http://www.schneiderautomation.com. Click on the appropriate software under the "Control Software" section on the home page.

Pin Signal Function

2 D2 (RXD) Received Data

3 D1 (TXD) Transmitted Data

5 E2 (GND) Signal Ground

7 S2 (RTS) Request to Send

8 M2 (CTS) Clear to Send


RS

232

C

Note: 140CPU11302 does not support the 140NOA61110 or the 140NOA62200 module.

248 35013379 02 October 2007



Comparison of NOA61100, 61110, and 62200 Modules

The following table provides a comparison of the NOA61100, 61110, and 62200 modules.

Characteristics NOA61100 NOA61110 NOA62200

Physical Addressing Y Y Y

Logical Addressing N Y Y

PCP Channel N Y Y

Startup Check of Configuration

Possible via user- program triggering one of the active bits 10 ... 15

Y Y

Support of Remote Bus Branch

Y Y Y

Support for Hot Standby N N N

Number of NOAs in Local Drop

3 3 2 (140CPU11303)6 (140CPUX341XA)

Interbus Compatibility Generation 3 Generation 3 Generation 4

Maximum Slaves 512 512 251

Configuration Tool Phoenix Contact CMD V1.21 or V1.30

Phoenix Contact CMD V1.21 or

V1.30

SyconTLX L FBC 10M

V2.725

Software Versions

Modsoft Rev. (min.) 2.4 2.4 N/A

Concept Rev. (min.) 2.0 2.1 2.5 SR2

ProWORX (min.) 2.0 2.0 N/A

35013379 02 October 2007 249



140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules

Overview The NOL modules provide connectivity between a Modicon Quantum controller and a control network based on Echelon’s LonWorks technology. Once the NOL module has been installed in a Quantum backplane and configured, it can be bound to an existing LonWorks network, and installed as a standard node.


For more detailed information, see the Quantum Automation Series Network Option Module for LonWorks, part number 840USE10900.

LonWorks Network Option Modules

The following figure shows the NOL911X0 LonWorks Network Option Module.

Note: The NOL module requires a valid LonWorks configuration file (.XIF) loaded into it to define the LonWorks network variables to which it will be bound.

Note: You must have a LonWorks compliant network management tool, such as Metra Vision, to install an NOL module on a LonWorks network.


Removable Door


Color Code

LED Display

140NOL 911 00CONTROLLER

RS- 232 SerialPort

X

Reset Button

Auxiliary LonWorksComm Port

Service Pin

Primary LonWorksComm Port

Neuron ID

Domain

Subset 1

Subset 2

Node ID

ExecutiveVers

250 35013379 02 October 2007



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the NOL911X0 module.

Specifications

Data Transfer Frequency 78 Kbps (140 NOL 911 10)

Connection Styles Screw terminals, telephone jack


Quantum ControllersRemote I/O

V2.0 at a minimumV2.0 at a minimum

35013379 02 October 2007 251



LED Indicators, Descriptions, and Status

The condition of the NOL module is indicated by the status (off, on, or blinking) of the LED indicators. The following figure shows the LED indicators.


The following table shows the LED Indicator Status.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Function

Active Bus communication is present.

Ready Module has passed internal diagnostics, and is configured.

MSG In Flashes every 10 ms when an update message for a bound network variable is received by the NOL module from the LonWorks network.

MSG Out Flashes every 10 ms when an update message for a bound network variable is transmitted by the NOL module to the LonWorks network.

Wink Flashes briefly when the NOL module receives a wink message from the LonWorks network. Also used to display internal error codes defined in the Wink LED Error Codes table.

Srvc Indicates status of LonWorks network service.

Active

Ready

Srvc

MSG InMSG Out

Wink

LED Indicator Status

LED Color Condition of NOL Module Error Condition

Powered UpNot Configured

Not Programmed

Powered UpConfigured

Not Programmed

Normal Operation

ConfiguredProgrammed

Active Green Off Off On Off1

Ready Green Blink On On Off2

MSG In Green Off Off Blink N/A

252 35013379 02 October 2007



If not lit, either the LON module requires configuration and mapping or is not communicating with the CPU by way of the DX Loadable.If a LON module is inserted into the backplane and the Ready LED does not illuminate, the Wink LED should be observed for an error code.See the following Wink LED error codes.

Wink LED Error Codes

The Wink LED is used to display error conditions. The following table shows the number of times the LED blinks for each type of error.

Front Panel Push Buttons

Two push buttons are located on the front of the NOL module. The service pin push button initiates the LonWorks network installation. When depressed, it causes the Service LED to illuminate, and forces the Neuron Chip in the module to output its unique 48-bit ID and Program ID.

The reset push button performs a hardware reset of the module, and must be done each time new firmware has been downloaded.

MSG Out Green Off Off Blink N/A

Wink Green Off Off Blink on command

Blink3

Srvc Yellow Off Blink Off N/A

LED Indicator Status

LED Color Condition of NOL Module Error Condition

Powered UpNot Configured

Not Programmed

Powered UpConfigured

Not Programmed

Normal Operation

ConfiguredProgrammed

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Error Condition

1 Module is in the bootloader

2 Error in writing to flash memory

3 Error in initializing the Lon Works network

4 Error in the module configuration

Note: The Reset push-button is recessed and requires a paper clip or similar tool to activate.

35013379 02 October 2007 253



Front Panel Connectors

There are three connectors located on the front of the NOL module. These are the RS-232 configuration port; the primary LonWorks communication port; and the auxiliary LonWorks configuration port.

RS-232 Configuration Port

This 9 pin, D-shell, female, RS-232 compatible serial port’s attributes are:

Configured at a fixed rate of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. Used to download configuration and new firmware to the module.Supports XMODEM protocol with an ASCII terminal based command processor.Can be directly connected to a PC serial communications port.

The following figure shows the 9-pin configuration port.

The following table shows the key to the RS-232C port.

Modbus cables 990NAA26320 and 990NAA26350 are suitable for connection between the PC serial port and NOL module RS-232 port.

Primary LonWorks Communication Port

This is the primary interface for wiring into a LonWorks network. The connector is a two-position 5.08 mm screw terminal.

Pin Signal Function

2 RXD Received Data

3 TXD Transmitted Data

5 GND Signal Ground


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

RS

232

C

254 35013379 02 October 2007



Auxiliary LonWorks Communication Port

This is the auxiliary interface for wiring into a LonWorks network. The connector is an eight position RJ-45 (phone jack) socket. The figure below shows the Pin 1 connector.

Note: The Auxiliary LonWorks Communications Port is not intended to be connected to any public telecommunications network.Both the Primary and Secondary ports provide standard interfaces to LonWorks networks and are wired in parallel for flexibility. The connections are not polarity sensitive.

Pin 1

35013379 02 October 2007 255



NOL Module Media Types

The NOL module supports three twisted pair media types with different network topologies or data transfer speeds.

140NOL91100140NOL91110140NOL91120

The following table shows the transceiver types supported by each module are as follows:

*Not actively sold after 10/00.

NOL Model Number Transceiver Type

Configuration Data Transfer Rate

140NOL91100* TP/FTT-10 Free topology, twisted pair 78,000 BPS

140NOL91110 TP/XF-78 Linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated

78,000 BPS

140NOL91120* TP/XF-1250 Linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated

1.25 MBPS

IncompatibilityNOL modules are not compatible in Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) racks.Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

256 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


9
Distributed I/O (DIO) for the Quantum Modules
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides information on the distributed I/O (DIO) modules. This information includes specifications, LED indicators and descriptions, rear panel switches, and wiring diagrams for the following modules:

140CRA21110140CRA21210140CRA21120140CRA21220



Topic Page

140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules 258

140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules 263

257

arr-thorp.com

DIO

140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules

Overview This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus Distributed I/O AC powered single (CRA21110) and dual (CRA21210) channel modules.

DIO Module The following figure shows the parts of the distributed I/O (DIO) module.

140CRA 211 0010 80 vdc out

X

Removable Door


Part #043505673Model NumberModule Description Color Code

Modbus Plus

LED Area

X





ModbusPlus

NetworkNode

Not used

AC L

AC N

Not used

Not used

Not used1234567

258 35013379 02 October 2007


DIO

Specifications The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21110 and CRA21210 AC powered single and dual channel DIO modules.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage 85 ... 276 Vac






VA Rating 50 VA

Input Power Interruption 1/2 cycle at full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between

interruptions.

Fusing (external) 1.5 A (Part #043502515 or equivalent)

Operating Mode Standalone or not powered (see Power and Grounding Guidelines, p. 775).

Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Current 3 A

Minimum Load 0 A


Communication

Modbus Plus 1 port (single cable); 2 ports (dual cable)

General

Specifications I/O Type: Quantum

Modules/Drop: Depends on bus current loading and word count

Words: 30 In / 32 Out. (Two additional input words are reserved for drop status.)


RAM Data/Address

Executive Checksum


Internal Power Dissipation 2.0 V + 3.0 V x IBUS = Watts (where IBUS is in Amperes)

35013379 02 October 2007 259


DIO

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram.


AC L

AC N

NOT USED

NOT USED

NOT USED

NOT USED

260 35013379 02 October 2007


DIO

LED Indicators and Descriptons

The following figure shows the LED panel.

The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions.

LED Descriptions


Ready Green The module has passed power-up diagnostics.

Fault Red A communications error exists between the DIO module and one or more I/O modules, or an output module is not being written to, over the Modbus Plus network.

Pwr ok Green Bus power is present.


Error A Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel A (dual cable only).

Error B Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel B (dual cable only).

Ready

Error BModbus +Error A

Fault

Pwr ok

35013379 02 October 2007 261


DIO

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit.


The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches.

SW1 and SW2 Switches


1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4

Note: If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the RIO module displays a flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition. Only addresses 1-32 are valid.

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (Top)

SW2 (Bottom)

262 35013379 02 October 2007


DIO

140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules

Overview This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus Distributed I/O DC powered single (CRA21120) and dual (21220) channel modules.

DIO Module The following figure shows the parts of the Distributed I/O (DIO) module.

140CRA 211 0010 80 vdc out

X

Removable Door


Part #043504640Model NumberModule Description Color Code

Modbus Plus

LED Area

X





ModbusPlus

NetworkNode

Not used

ACL

ACN

Not used

Not used

Not used1234567

35013379 02 October 2007 263


DIO

Specifications The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21120 and CRA21220 DC powered single and dual channel DIO modules.

Specifications

Input Requirements


Input Current 1.6 A

Inrush Current 30 A


Fusing (external) 2.5 A (Part #043503948 or equivalent)

Operating Mode Standalone or not powered (See Power and Grounding Guidelines, p. 775).

Output to Bus

Voltage 5.1 Vdc

Current 3 A

Minimum Load 0 A


Communication

Modbus Plus 1 port (single cable). 2 ports (dual cable)

General

Specifications I/O Type Quantum

Modules/Drop Depends on bus current loading and word count

Words 30 In / 32 Out. (Two additional input words are reserved for drop status)


RAM Data/Address

Executive Checksum

Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip (Part #043503328)

Internal Power Dissipation 2.0 V + 3.0 V x IBUS = Watts (where IBUS is in Amperes)

264 35013379 02 October 2007


DIO

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram.


NOT USED

NOT USED

–24VDC (Common)

+24VDC

AC L

AC N

35013379 02 October 2007 265


DIO


The following figure shows the LED panel.

The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions.

LED Descriptions



Fault Red A communications error exists between the DIO module and one or more I/O modules or an output module is not being written to over the Modbus Plus network.

Pwr ok Green Bus power is present.


Error A Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel A (dual cable only).

Error B Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel B (dual cable only).

Ready

Error BModbus +Error A

Fault

Pwr ok

266 35013379 02 October 2007


DIO

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table that follow) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit.

SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.


SW1 and SW2 Switches


1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4

Note: If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the RIO module displays a flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition. Only addresses 1-32 are valid.

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (Top)

SW2 (Bottom)

35013379 02 October 2007 267


DIO

268 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


10
Quantum Remote I/O Communication Modules
At a Glance

Introduction Quantum networking modules provide open, standards-based networking and fieldbus connectivity using Modbus, Modbus Plus, Ethernet, InterBus, SY/MAX and LonWorks networks. Specifications for these modules are included below.



Topic Page

140CRP93X00 Remote I/O (RIO) Head Single and Dual Channel Module 270

140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module 275

269

arr-thorp.com

Networking

140CRP93X00 Remote I/O (RIO) Head Single and Dual Channel Module

Overview The Remote I/O Head Single and Dual Channel modules are installed in the same backplane as the system controlling CPU modules. The RIO head is used to transfer data bi-directionally between the CPU and RIO drop modules installed in separate backplanes. A coaxial cable network is used to interconnect the RIO head module and one or more RIO drop modules.

RIO Head Module The following figure shows the Remote I/O (RIO) module’s parts. The specific module illustrated is the 140CRP93200.

140CRP 931 00RIO DROP

X

Removable Door Part #043513804


Part #043504680Model NumberModule Description Color CodeLED Area

RIO CoaxConnector

Version Label

Remote I/ODROP N0.

270 35013379 02 October 2007


Networking

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Head Single and Dual Channel modules.

Specifications

Drop Type Quantum, 200 Series, 500 Series, 800 Series, or SY/MAX (any mix)

Drops 31 max

Words/Drop 64 In / 64 Out

ASCII 2 ports/drop, 32 ports (16 drops) max

Requires the use of AS-P892-000, AS-J892-101/102, or AS-J290-0X0 at the RIO drops.

Coax Termination Internal 75Ω

Coax Shield Tied to chassis ground

Data Transfer Rate 1.544 mb

Dynamic Range 35 dB

Isolation 500 Vdc coaxial cable center conductor to ground

External Connections

One Channel (CRP93100)

One "F" type female connector with a right angle adapter

Two Channels (CRP93200)

Two "F" type female connectors with a right angle adapter

General

Diagnostics Power Up Power Up and Runtime

Dual Port Memory Check Executive Checksum

LAN Controller Check RAM Address/Data

Maximum Number of CRPs Supported by the Controller

1

Bus Current Required (Typical)

Single Channel: 600 mA

Dual Channel: 750 mA

Power Dissipation (Typical)

Single Channel: 3 W

Dual Channel: 3.8 W

35013379 02 October 2007 271


Networking


The following figure shows the LED indicators for the RIO Head module.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the RIO Head module.

CONNECTIVITY COMPLIANCETo maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC), the RIO head module must be connected using quad shielded cable (see the Remote I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide, 890USE10000, V2.0).

Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

LED Descriptions

LEDS Color Indication When On

Ready Green The module has passed powerup diagnostics.

Com Act Green The module is communicating on the RIO network.

Error A Red There is a loss of communication on Channel A with one or more of the drops.

Error B Red There is a loss of communication on Channel B with one or more of the drops (dual cable only).

Ready

Error BCom ActError A

272 35013379 02 October 2007


Networking

LED Error Codes The Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Head module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

LED Error Codes


Slow (steady) 0000 Requested Kernel Mode

2 6820 hcb frame pattern error

6822 head cntrl blk diag error

6823 mod personality diag error

682A fatal start I/O error

682B bad read I/O pers request

682C bad execute diag request

6840 ASCII input xfer state

6841 ASCII output xfer state

6842 I/O input comm. state

6843 I/O output comm. state

6844 ASCII abort comm. state

6845 ASCII pause comm. state

6846 ASCII input comm. state

6847 ASCII output comm. state

6849 building 10 byte packet

684A building 12 byte packet

684B building 16 byte packet

684C illegal I/O drop number

3 6729 984 interface bus ack stuck high

4 6616 coax cable initialization error

6617 coax cable dma xfer error

6619 coax cable dumped data error

681A coax cable DRQ line hung

681C coax cable DRQ hung



7 6300 prom checksum error (Exec not loaded)

6301 prom checksum error


8002 Flash prog / erase error

35013379 02 October 2007 273


Networking

8003 Unexpected executive return

LED Error Codes


274 35013379 02 October 2007


Networking

140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module

Overview The Remote I/O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules are used to transfer data bi-directionally over a coaxial cable network between I/O modules installed in the same (RIO drop) backplane and the RIO head installed in the CPU backplane.

RIO Drop Module The following figure shows the components of the Remote I/O (RIO) drop module. The specific module shown is the CRA93200.

140CRA 932 00RIO DROP

X

Removable Door (Part #043513804)


Part #043504680Model NumberModule Description Color CodeLED Area

RIO CoaxConnector

Version Label

Remote I/ODROP N0.

35013379 02 October 2007 275


Networking

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules.

Specifications

I/O Type Quantum

Words/Drop 64 In / 64 Out

Coax Termination Internal 75 Ω

Coax Shield Capacitor to ground

Data Transfer Rate 1.544 mb

Dynamic Range 35 dB

Isolation 500 Vdc coaxial cable center conductor to ground

External Connections

One Channel (CRA93100) One "F" type female connector with a right angle adapter

Two Channels (CRA93200) Two "F" type female connectors with a right angle adapter

General

Holdup Time Software configurableNote: In the event of a communication loss with the remote processor, this is the time that output modules will retain their last operating state. Input module data will be held in the system controlling CPU. After this time, output modules will

assume their predefined time-out states, and inputs will be zeroed by the CPU.

Diagnostics Power Up Power Up and Runtime

Dual Port Memory Check Executive Checksum

LAN Controller Check RAM Address/Data

Bus Current Required (Typical) Single Channel: 600 mA

Dual Channel: 750 mA

Power Dissipation (Typical) Single Channel: 3 W

Dual Channel: 3.8 W

CONNECTIVITY COMPLIANCETo maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC), the RIO Head module must be connected using quad shielded cable (see the Remote I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide, 890USE10000, V2.0).


CAUTION

276 35013379 02 October 2007


Networking

LED Indicators and Description

The following figure shows the LED indicators for the Drop module.

The following table shows the RIO Drop module LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions



Com Act Green The module is communicating on the RIO network.

Fault Red Unable to communicate with one or more I/O modules.

Error A Red Communication error on Channel A.

Error B Red Communication error on Channel B (dual cable only).

Ready

Error BCom ActError A

Fault

35013379 02 October 2007 277


Networking

LED Error Codes Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Drop module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Drop module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code Description of Error

3 6701H asic test failure

4 6601H power down interrupt

6602H 82588 lan chip test error

6603H receive abort timeout

6604H transmission loop timeout

6605H transmission dma error

6606H cable a initialization error

6607H cable a dma xfer error

6608H cable b dma xfer error

6609H cable a dumped data error

660AH cable a DRQ line hung

660BH cable b DRQ line hung

660CH cable a or b DRQ hung

660DH power-up lan controller error

5 6501H ram address test error

6 6401H ram data test error

7 6301H prom checksum error

278 35013379 02 October 2007


Networking

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the RIO Drop Modules and are used for setting RIO drop addresses (refer to the following illustration and table).

SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens); SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones). The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.




1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 0 ... 4

Note: If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the module displays a flashing ERROR A and ERROR B LED indicating an error condition. Only addresses 2 - 32 are valid.

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (Tens)

SW2 (Ones)

35013379 02 October 2007 279


Networking

280 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


11
Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules
140NOM21X00 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules

Overview The following information describes the single and dual channel twisted-pair cable NOM21X00 modules, which provide interface to Modbus Plus networks.

Modbus Plus Module

The following figure shows the components of the Modbus Plus 140NOM21X00 modules.

Mod

bus

ModbusComm 1

Network

Node


Part #043504417Removable door

Model NumberModule DescriptionColor Code

LED Area

ModbusConnector

140NOM 21X 00CONTROLLER

Mod

bus

Plu

s C

han

ModbusComm 2

ModbusPlus

ASCII

RTU

mem

X

Mod

bus

Plu

s C

han

Comm ParameterSlide Switch


Chan AModbus Plus

ConnectorChan B

281

arr-thorp.com

Modbus Plus NOMs

Specifications The Modbus Plus Head Single and Dual Channel modules provide extended communication capabilities for the Quantum system within a Modbus Plus configuration. The following table shows the specifications show the Modbus Plus single and dual channel modules.

Specifications

Communication Ports

NOM21100 1 Modbus Plus network (RS-485) port (9-pin connector)

NOM21200 2 Modbus Plus network (RS-485) ports (9-pin connectors) for dual connectivity on a single Modbus Plus network. These ports handle identical versions of all inbound and outbound transactions and keep track of the data paths used for these transactions.

Both Modules 1 Modbus (RS-232) serial port (9-pin connector) A bridge mode capability in the module permits a panel device connected to this port to access nodes on the Modbus Plus network or to access the local PLC directly without having to go out onto the network.


RAM RAM



Processor

Power Dissipation (Typical)

4 W


NOM21100 780 mA

NOM21200 780 mA

282 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOMs


The following figure shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED indicators.

The following table shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED Descriptions.

LED Descriptions



Run Green Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode–should always be OFF during normal operations.

Modbus Green Indicates communication is active on the single RS-232 serial port.

Modbus+ Green Indicates communication is active on the Modbus Plus port.

Error A Red There is an error condition on Cable A of a dual cable Modbus Plus network (140NOM21200 only).

Error B Red There is an error condition on Cable B of a dual cable Modbus Plus network (140NOM21200 only).

Ready

Error BModbus + Error A

Run

Modbus

35013379 02 October 2007 283


Modbus Plus NOMs

LED Error Codes The blinking Run LED error codes for the NOM module shows the number of times the Run LED on the NOM module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

LED Error Codes


Steady 014H normal power down event

2 815 ram sequence error

3 49H illegal data command received by bypass code

4BH diagnostics test pattern invalid in the icb block

4CH diagnostics test pattern invalid in the page 0

4DH icb address not the same as found in hcb

4EH bad code selected for mstrout_sel proc

52H config table exec_id is different than the sys table exec_id

53H got a pupinit hook for neither S985 nor S975 addr

56H did not get bus ack form 984 interface within 400 ms

59H unexpected modbus port state in send command to 680 proc

5AH system table missing

5BH bad DPM critical byte write

4 616h bad or unexpected interrupt

617h loopback error on modbus port 1

618h parity error

619h set port greater than 21

61AH controller ram size is less than 8k

621H modbus cmd-buffer overflow

622H modbus cmd-length is zero

623H modbus abort command error

624H bad modbus state trn-int

625H bad modbus state rcv-int

626H bad comm state trn_asc

627H transmit underflow error

628H bad comm state trn_tru

629H bad comm state rcv_asc

62aH bad comm state rcv_rtu

62bH bad transmit comm state

62cH bad receive comm state

284 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOMs

62dH bad modbus state tmr0_evt

62eH bad uart interrupt

631H UPI timeout error

632H bad UPI response opcode

633H UPI bus diagnostic error

634H mbp bus interference error

635H bad mbp response opcode

636H timeout waiting for mbp

637H mbp out of synchronization

638H mbp invalid path

639H peer did not respond with complement of the opcode

63AH peer unable to come out of transitions at power-up

681h bad master state

682h bad slave state

683h unknown routing failure to send

684h bad port number in set () proc

685h bad port number in reset () proc

686h bad port number in getport () proc

687h bad port number in bitpos () proc

688h bad port number in enable_transmit_interrupt () proc

689h bad port number in enable_receive_interrupt () proc

68ah bad port number in disable_transmit_interrupt () proc

68bh bad port number in

691h privilege flag is not reset in the session timeout proc

692h bad port number in chkmst_hdw () proc

6AIh unknown controller type in reset busy flag

6A2h unknown function code in generate_poll_cmd () proc

6A3h unknown function code in generate_logout_msg () proc

6A4h slave link timeout on port other than port #9

6A5h illegal bypass command received by bypass code

5 513h ram address test error

6 412h ram data test error

7 311h prom checksum error

LED Error Codes


35013379 02 October 2007 285


Modbus Plus NOMs

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit.

The following table shows the address settings for the SW1 and SW2 switches.

Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The illustration below shows the setting for an example address of 11.

Note: If "0," or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be "on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.



1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 1 ... 4

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (Top)

SW2 (Bottom)

286 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOMs


Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the unit. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port provided with the Modbus Plus option module. Three options are available, as shown in the following illustration.

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. The following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.


Note: If the left-hand switch is in the upper position and right-hand switch is set to mem then, as of firmware version 2.20, bridge mode is deactivated. This means that the network connection between Modbus and Modbus Plus is locked.The NOM hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is set to RTU or ASCII mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the NOM Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is conected, as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.


Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1


ASCII

RTU

mem

35013379 02 October 2007 287


Modbus Plus NOMs



Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50

Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2



288 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOMs


The NOM modules are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin (left) and 25-pin (right) connections.

6

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

Quantum9-Pin Male

IBM-XT25-Pin Female

CD

RX

TX

DTR

GROUND

DSR

RTS

CTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GROUND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

1

2

3

4

7

8

9

SHIELD

RX

TX

DTR

GROUND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

RX

RTS

CTS

DSR

GROUND

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SHIELD

TX

20DTR

35013379 02 October 2007 289


Modbus Plus NOMs


The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable (laptop) computers.






CD

RX

TX

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS CTS

RTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

TX

RX

SHIELD

IBM-AT9-Pin Female

Quantum9-Pin Male

NC NC

290 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


12
Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module
140NOM25200 Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module

Overview The following information pertains to the Modbus Plus on Fiber module, 140NOM25200. The Modbus Plus on Fiber module provides connectivity to Modbus Plus nodes by fiber cable.

There are many benefits that result from the use of fiber optics. Some of these include:

Longer distances between nodes (up to 3 km), thereby, increasing the total length of the network,Fiber optic medium is not susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic interference, RF interference, and lightning,Intrinsically safe links that are required in many hazardous industrial environments,Total electrical isolation between terminal points on the link.


For more detailed information on fiber optic network repeaters, see the Fiber Repeater User Guide, part number GM-FIBR-OPT.

291

arr-thorp.com

Modbus Plus NOM

Modbus Plus on Fiber Module

The following figure shows the parts of the Modbus Plus 140NOM25200 module.


Part #043504417)Removable Door

Model NumberModule DescriptionColor Code

LED Area

140NOM 252 00CONTROLLER

Port 2 TX and RXConnectors

X

Comm ParameterSlide Switch

ASCII

RTU

Modbus Plus

TX2

TX1

RX1

RX2

Fiber Port 2

Fiber Port 1

TX2

RX2

Fiber Port 2

TX1

RX1

Fiber Port 1

mem

ASCII

RTU

mem

Modbus PortModbus Connector

Port 1 TX and RXConnectors

292 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM


The following figure shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED indicators.

The following table shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions



Run Green Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode – should always be OFF during normal operations. Note: The table for the NOM 21X 00 shows the number of times the RUN LED on the Modbus Plus on Fiber Module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

Modbus Green Indicates communication is active on the single RS-232 serial port.

Modbus+ Green Indicates communication is active on the Modbus Plus port.

Fport1 Green Indicates an optical signal has been received on fiber optic Port 1.

Fport2 Green Indicates an optical signal has been received on fiber optic Port 2.

FRNGoff Red Indicates the first break in a self healing ring.

Ready

Modbus+

Run

Modbus

Fport 1Fport 2

FRNGoff

35013379 02 October 2007 293


Modbus Plus NOM

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the NOM25200 module.

Specifications

General Communication Ports

Optical Ports 2 (consisting of an optical receiver and transmitter)

Modbus Port 1 RJ45 (phone jack-type) connector

Transmission/Data Rate 1 Mbit/second for Modbus Plus with Bi-Phase S encoded data

Optical Interface ST-Type connectors

Pulse Width Distortions and Jitter 5 ns or better

Wavelength 820 nm

Power Loss Budget (includes 3 dB of system margins).

50/125 micron fiber - 6.5 dB

62.5/125 micron fiber - 11 dB

100/140 micron fiber - 16.5 dB

Maximum Distance for point-to-point connection

2 km over 50 micron fiber

3 km over 62.5 micron fiber

3 km over 100 micron fiber

Maximum System Length in Self Healing Ring Configuration

10 km over 62.5 micron fiber

Optical Transmitter Specifications

Optical Power (Measured with 1 m test fiber)

-12.8 ... -19.8 dBm average power in 50/125 micron fiber cable

-9.0 ... -16 dBm average power in 62.5/125 micron fiber cable

-3,5 ... -10.5 dBm average power in 100/140 micron fiber cable

Rise/Fall Time 20 ns or better

Silence (OFF leakage) -43 dBm

Optical Receiver Specifications

Receiver Sensitivity -30 dBm average power

Dynamic Range -20 dB

Detected Silence -36 dBm

Miscellaneous Specifications

294 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

Front Panel Switch

A three-position slide switch is located on the front of the unit. This switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port. The three options that are available, as shown in the figure below, include setting the slide switch in the top position (ASCII), middle position (RTU), or bottom position (Valid mem comm port parameters).

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters, which are set and cannot be changed.

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following RTU comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.


RAM RAM



Processor

Power Dissipation 4 W

Bus Current Required 750 mA max

External Power Not required for this module

Specifications


Baud 2,400

Parity Even

Data Bits 7

Stop Bits 1



Baud 9,600

Parity Even

Data Bits 8

ASCII

RTU

mem

35013379 02 October 2007 295


Modbus Plus NOM

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software. The following parameters are valid.

Stop Bits 1


Valid Mem Comm Port Parameters

Baud 19,200 1,200

9,600 600

7,200 300

4,800 150

3,600 134.5

2,400 110

2,000 75

1,800 50

Data Bits 7 / 8

Stop Bits 1 / 2




296 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

Rear Panel Switches

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit.

Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The following illustration shows the setting for an example address of 11.

The following figure shows the node address settings for the SW1 and SW2 switches.




1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9

10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9

20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9

30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9

40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9

50 ... 59 5 0 ... 9

60 ... 64 6 1 ... 4


1

3

09 2

6 45

87

1

3

09 2

6 45

87

SW1 (Tens)

SW2 (Ones)

35013379 02 October 2007 297


Modbus Plus NOM

Modbus Connector

The NOM25200 module is equipped with an RS-232 port (see below) located on the front of the module. This port uses an eight-position RJ45 (phone jack-type) connector. The following figure shows the NOM25200 Pin 1 connector.

The following figures show the 9-pin adapter front view (left) and side view (right).

Note: A D-shell adapter is available from Modicon for NOM 252 00-to-computer connections: a (110 XCA 20 300) 9-pin adapter for PC-AT type computers (see the illustration pinout table below).

Pin 1

Pin 1

Pin 9

Front View

110XCA20300

50.8mm(2 in)

Side View

298 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

The following figure shows the 9-pin RJ45 connector schematic.

RJ45 Cable Types

This following figure shows the RJ45 connector, Modicon Part #110XCA2820X cable. The table provides part numbers and cable lengths.

Connectors Pinouts

RJ45Connector

9-pin D-shell

1 DCD

2 RXD

3 TXD

4 DTR

5 GDN

6 DRS

7 RTS

8 CTS

9 RI

Chassis 8Ground

1

TXD 3

RXD 4

DSR 2

GND 5

CTS 7

RTS 6

Case of the Connector

Cable Part Numbers Cable Lengths

110XCA28201 3 ft. (0.91 m)

110XCA28202 10 ft. (3 m)

110XCA28203 20 ft. (6 m)

RJ45Connector

RJ45Connector

Modicon Part # 110 XCA 282 0X

35013379 02 October 2007 299


Modbus Plus NOM

Fiber Optic Cable Connections

The NOM25200 module is connected in the Quantum system by a fiber optic cable (see the following figure). The cable has two strands. Each module transmits a signal in one direction. For this reason, each strand must be connected to the transmit port on one module and the receive port on the other.

One strand of the fiber optic cable is labelled every 10 inches with the manufacturer’s name and the cable specifications. This is the only way to distinguish the two strands.

Module A Module B

Transmit Transmit

FiberPort2

FiberPort2

Receive Receive

Receive Receive

FiberPort1

FiberPort1

From PreviousNOM Transmit

From PreviousNOM Receive

To NextNOM Receive

To NextNOM Transmit

Transmit Transmit

300 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

Connecting the Fiber Optic Cable

The following steps show how to connect the fiber optic cable.

Step Action

1 Remove the protective plastic coverings from the cable ports and the tips of the cable. Snap one of the fiber cable clasps (shipped with the module) over the cable so that the wider end of the tool is closest to the cable end.

2 Turn the connection ring so that one of the arrows on the side of the ring lines up with the ridge inside.

3 a. Slide the tool up to the connection ring. b. Gripping the cable with the plastic cable clasp, slide the cable end onto the lower cable port. The arrow and the ridge on the connection ring should lineup with the slot on the left of the cable port.c. Use the clasp to push the cable over the tab on top of the port. d. Turn the cable to the right, so that the tab locks securelye. Remove the clasp. f. Repeat this process with the remaining strand of cable.

Protective Coverings Cable Fiber Cable Clasp

Cable Connection RingCableTipRidgeArrow

Cable Port

Tab

Cable Connection Ring

Fiber Cable Clasp

3 m Cable(Part # 990XCA65609)

35013379 02 October 2007 301


Modbus Plus NOM

Fiber Optic Configurations

The following represent four typical configurations that show the wide range of the network architecture:

Point-to-Point connection,Bus configuration,Tree and Star configurations,Self Healing Ring configuration.

Point-to-Point Configuration

Point-to-point configuration (see the following figure) allows communication over the distance of up to 3 km through harsh industrial environments. The following figure shows the point-to-point configuration.

Bus Configuration

This type of configuration is used when it is required to connect a number of fiber nodes and can be used to increase the distance of a standard Modbus Plus network by changing to a fiber medium. This kind of network allows the connection of up to 32 Quantum NOM252 nodes over the distance of 5 km.

The following illustrations show the NOM25200 module in a mixed fiber optic/twisted pairs bus configuration network and a pure fiber optic bus configuration network.

Fiber Optic Cables

Node # 1 Node # 2

P/S P/SCPU CPUI/O I/ONOM NOM

Point-to-Point Configuration Example

Equipment FailureThe loss of a single node in this configuration disables the rest of the network. It is suggested that the Self Healing Ring configuration be used to avoid this problem.Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

WARNING

302 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

The following figure shows the mixed fiber optic/copper network.

The following figure shows the pure fiber optic network.

Note: The distance between nodes on fiber is limited by the maximum allowable power loss from end-to-end (3 km over 62.5 mm fiber). Power loss includes the fiber optic cable attenuation, connector losses at the Fiber Optic Receiver and Transmitter ports, and the system margin of 3 dB.The end NOM25200 in this configuration will have the FRNGoff LED active and will display the Cable B Framing error in the MBPSTAT (in ladder logic).

Node # 1P/S CPU I/ONOM I/O

211


211

490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater


252


252


252

To Node # n

MB+ Cable

Legend

Fiber OpticCable

MB+ Tap withTerminator

MB+ Tap(Terminator not

required)

Bus Configuration Example 1(Mixed Fiber Optic/Copper Network)


252


252


252

To Node # nFiber Optic Cable

Fiber Optic CableTo Node # n

Bus Configuration Example 2(Pure Fiber Optic Network)

35013379 02 October 2007 303


Modbus Plus NOM

Tree Configuration

The use of a tree configuration can provide flexibility in the layout of Modbus Plus and NOM 25200 networks. The following illustration shows an example of a tree configuration. Additional repeaters can be connected in order to extend communication between electrical links.

490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeaters

Node # 9P/S CPU I/ONOM

252

MB+ Cable

Legend

Fiber OpticCable


MB+ Tap


252


252


252


252


252


252


252


211

Tree Configuration Example

304 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

Self Healing Ring Configuration

This configuration can be achieved by connecting the unused fiber optic ports of the first and last NOM25200 directly or through the fiber optic repeater, if a mixed fiber optic/twisted pairs network is used. This type of connection has all the advantages of the previously described configurations, along with built-in redundancy. A broken connection between any two Quantum modules in the ring will automatically reconfigure the network to the Bus Configuration and continue the communication.


211


211

490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater


252


252


252

MB+ Cable

Legend

Fiber Optic Cable


MB+ Tap

Self-Healing Ring Configuration Example

35013379 02 October 2007 305


Modbus Plus NOM

Hot Standby Systems

The following figure shows the self healing ring configuration for hot standby systems example.

490NR25400 Fiber Optic Repeaterfor Modbus Plus

Primary SystemP/S CPU CRP CHS

252

MB+ Cable

Legend

Fiber Optic Cable


Node # 1

P/S CPU I/ONOM I/O

252

PC with SA85 Card

P/S CPU I/O I/OI/O

Remote I/O Drop

P/SNOM

931

110

Standby SystemP/S CPU CRP CHS

252

P/SNOM93

1

110

Node # 2

MB+ Tap

Remote I/O

RIO Cable

Coaxial RIO Link To OtherRIO Drops

490NR95400 Fiber Optic Repeaters (for RIO)

Typical Hot Standby System with Remote I/O

Self Healing Ring Configuration for Hot Standby Systems Example

306 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

Network Status The information about the condition of the network is presented in the form of Network Status. This information indicates the loss of connection (the first break in the self healing ring) and is similar to the way existing 140NOM21200 reports the loss of redundant cable.

The break of the fiber cable will be detected by the module not receiving the signal from the side where the cable is broken and will be reported as a Cable B Framing error by MBPSTAT. This condition will also activate the FRNGoff LED on the front of the module.

Recommended Materials for Fiber Optic Links

Modicon does not manufacture fiber optic products such as cables, connectors, or special tools. However, we have experience with third party suppliers of materials and can give some guidelines on what will work with our products.

Connectors The following table shows the connector types

Termination Kits The following table shows the termination kits.

Optical Star Passive Couplers

The AMP Model 95010-4 is a pig-tail option and must be used with an enclosure (use AMP Model 502402-4, a 19 in rack-mount enclosure, 1.7 in high).

Connector Type Part Number Operating Temperature

ST Bayonet (Epoxy) 3M 6105 -40 ... +80° C

ST Bayonet (Hot Melt) 3M 6100 -40 ... +60° C

ST Bayonet (Epoxy) AMP 501380-5 Series -30 ... +70° C

ST Bayonet (Epoxy) AMP 503415-1 Series -20 ... +75° C

Light_Crimp ST Style AMP 503453-1 Series -20 ... + 60° C

Mechanical Line Splice (one size fits all)

3M 2529 Fiberlok1 II -40 ... +80° C

Note: All connectors must have a short boot for strain relief.

Kit Type Part Number Description

Bayonet ST (Epoxy) AMP 503746-1 For all epoxy type ST style

Light_Crimp XTC AMP 50330-2 For all Light_Crimp

Mechanical Line Splice 3M 2530 Fiber Splice Prep Kit, complete with cleaving tool

3M Hot Melt 3M 05-001853M 05-00187

110 V Termination Kit220 V Termination Kit

35013379 02 October 2007 307


Modbus Plus NOM

Other Tools The following table shows other tools that may be needed for fiber optic links.

Cables It is recommended that you use 62.5/125 μm cable (such as AMP 503016-1, AMP 502986-1, or equivalent) with a maximum attenuation of 3.5 dB/km in most of the configurations.

Product Part Number Description/Use

3M (Photodyne) Optical Source Driver

9XT Hand-held optical source driver (requires a light source)

3M (Photodyne) Optical Light Source

1700-0850-T 850 nm Light Source, ST Connectors for 9XT

3M (Photodyne) Power Meter

17XTA-2041 Hand-held Fiber Optic Power Meter

3M Optical Light Source, 660 nm, visible

7XE-0660-J Use with 9XT to troubleshoot raw fiber, requires FC/ST patch cord

3M FC/ST Patch Cord BANAV-FS-0001 Connects FC connector on 7XE to ST

3M Bare Fiber Adapter, ST-compatible

8194 Permits use of above source and meter to test raw fiber (two required)

Note: Modicon recommends using the 990XCA65609 cable.When passive star couplers are used, 100/140 micron cable (such as AMP503016-3, AMP502986-3, or equivalent) with a maximum attenuation of 5.0 dB/km is recommended because higher optical power can be pumped in 100 μm cable and as a result, greater distance (up to 1 km) between units can be achieved.

Note: All cables must have a maximum cable diameter of not more than 3 mm at the terminal side.

308 35013379 02 October 2007


Modbus Plus NOM

Connections The following information discusses connecting the NOM25200 on fiber cable, adding a new mode to the network, and repairing the break in the cable.

Adding a New Node to the Network

If a new node is added to an existing network in order to extend the network (at the end of any configuration), then a new node may be connected first by fiber cable and then hot-swapped to the backplane to avoid errors to the existing network.

If a new mode is added to the middle of the network, the fiber optic cables need to be disconnected from one side of the existing NOM252 module and connected to port 1 or 2 of a new node. Additional fiber optic cable then needs to be connected to the second port of the new NOM252 and to the next NOM252 in the network, the new NOM252 then has to be hot-swapped to the backplane.

Note: When a new network is assembled, it is recommended that you connect all cables before powering up the system. Connect fiber optic cables as described previously in this section.

Hot Swapping RestrictionModules may be hot swapped when the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap modules in a Class 1, Division 2 environment.Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

35013379 02 October 2007 309


Modbus Plus NOM

Repairing the Break in the Cable

Because the NOM25200 will stop transmitting in the direction from which it is not receiving the signal, the replacement of a broken fiber optic cable and the reconnection of it will not re-establish communication over that segment. The hot swap of only one NOM252 at the repaired connections is required to complete the connection.

For the self healing ring configuration, the repair of the first break in the fiber optic network has to be scheduled to the time when one of the units on either side of the repaired break can be hot-swapped without creating the problem by disconnecting the node.

Calculating Number of Modules in a Fiber Network

Calculate the number of NOM25200 modules in a fiber network using the following method.

Note: The break of any fiber connectors or fiber optic cables is the equivalent to the break of the trunk cable in a Modbus Plus network on copper.

Note: Self healing configurations are not considered redundant networks. High system availability can be achieved with redundant networks.

Step Action

1 The total allowable pulse width distortions and jitter are limited to 20% of the bit period and is 200 nsec for the full fiber optic network.

2 The jitter contributed by the NOM252 is 5 nsec max.

3 Jitter contributed by fiber optic repeaters (if used) is 40 nsec.

4 The formula to determine the number (N) of chained repeaters is:

where "L" is the total cable length (km), and "X" is the jitter (added by the fiber optic cable) in nsec/km: X = 3 ns/km for 50/125 μm5 ns/km for 62.5/125 μm7.5 ns/km for 100/140 μm

N 200nsec X L( )nsec– 40nsec–5nsec

------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1+=

310 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


13
Quantum Ethernet Modules
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides information on the NOE2X1 TCP/IP, NOE3X1 SY/MAX, NOE5X100 MMS, and NOE771xx Ethernet modules.



Topic Page

140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module 312

140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY/MAX Modules 315

140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules 318

140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules 321

311

arr-thorp.com

Ethernet Modules

140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module

Overview The Quantum NOE2X1TCP/IP is described in this section. This includes specifications for the NOE21100 and NOE25100 modules.

Ethernet TCP/IP Module

The following figure shows the Ethernet TCP/IP NOE2X100 module.

Specifications The Ethernet TCP/IP modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface to Ethernet networks for the Quantum Automation Series system.

Customer Identification Label(Fold label and place it inside

Removable Door


Color CodeLED Display

140NOE 251 00controller

Transmit CableConnector

X

Global Address Label

Receive CableConnector

GlobalAddress

GlobalAddress

Fiber Optic

Fiber Optic10 base FL

Specifications

Communication Ports

Ethernet ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP/IP protocol: NOE 211 00 1, 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port. NOE 251 00 1, 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) port

Data Transfer Frequency 10 mb


Bus Current Required 1 A

Compatibility

Programming Software Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

Quantum Controllers All, V2.0 at a minimum

312 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules


The following figure shows the NOE2X100 LED indicators.

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE2X100 LED indicator.

Installing the NOE Module

Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules come fully configured. However, before installing your module, you should make sure the default configuration is appropriate for your network.

If the module will be communicating on an open network, consult your network administrator to obtain a unique IP network address. You must enter this address in the Modsoft Ethernet TCP/IP configuration extension screen before installing the module.

If the module will be communicating on a local network, make sure the default IP network address is not already in use on that network. To determine the default IP network address, locate the global address label on the front panel of the module. Convert the rightmost eight digits from hexadecimal to decimal. The result should be a decimal number in the form, 84.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each group of xxx is a number from 0 to 255. This is the default IP network address.

Active

ReadyRun

Kernel

FaultColl

Link

Appl

LED Descriptions


Active Green Module is communicating with backplane.

Ready Green Module has passed internal diagnostic tests.

Run Green Flashes during normal operation.

Link Green Ethernet link to hub is ok.

Kernel Amber If steady, module is operating in kernel mode. If flashing, module is waiting for download.

Fault Red An error has been detected, a download has failed or a reset is in process.

Coll Red If steady, cable is not connected. If flashing, Ethernet collisions are occurring.

Appl Amber Entry exists in crash log.

35013379 02 October 2007 313


Ethernet Modules

Installation Example: Discovering the Default IP Network Address

The following example shows the steps for discovering the default IP network address.

Step Action

1 Locate the global address label on the front panel of the module.

2 Note the rightmost eight digits.

3 Convert them from hexadecimal to decimal. Each pair of hexadecimal numbers will result in a decimal number between 0 and 255. This is the default IP address.

4 If you use the default IP network address and if your network uses Ethernet II framing and if you do not need to specify the default gateway or a subnet mask, then you may install the module without changing the default configuration.

IEEE GLOBAL ADDRESS

0000540B72A8

5 4 0 B 7 2 A 8

84.11.114.168

SYSTEM ERRORDo not connect this module to your network until you have ensured that its IP address will be unique on the network.


CAUTION

HARDWARE RESCTRICTIONSThe cable for an Ethernet module must be routed through an Ethernet hub for the net-work to function properly. Do not connect the module directly to another device.


CAUTION

314 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY/MAX Modules

Overview This section includes information for the NOE31100 and 35100 SY/MAX Ethernet modules. The Quantum SY/MAX Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to SY/MAX devices via Ethernet.


For more detailed information, see Quantum-SY/MAX-Ethernet Module User Guide, 840USE11100, Version 1.0.

Ethernet SY/MAX Module

The following figure shows the NOE3X100 SY/MAX Ethernet modules.

Note: The NOE31100 is equipped with one RJ-45 connector instead of the fiber optic connectors (as shown above on the NOE35100).


Removable Door


Color Code

LED Display

140NOE 311 00CONTROLLER


X



GlobalAddress

Fiber Optic10 base FL

TxRx

Tx

Port 1Rx

35013379 02 October 2007 315


Ethernet Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the SY/MAX Ethernet modules NOE31100 and 35100.

Specifications

Communication Ports

NOE31100 1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

NOE35100 2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports

Cable Type

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet RG58a/u or RG58C/U coaxial (Belden 9907/82907 or equivalent)

10Base-T (twisted pair) 2, 3, 4, or 6 twisted pairs with a solid copper core

Wire Size

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet 20 AWG

10Base-T (twisted pair) 22, 24, 26 AWG

Topology

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet Bus

10Base-T (twisted pair) Star

Connector

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet BNC (UG-274)

10Base-T (twisted pair) Modular RJ-45 (4 pins of 8 are used by 10Base-T)

Backplane Compatibility (Requires Quantum CPU)

3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 position backplanes

Compatible SY/MAX 802.3 Devices and Software

Model 450Model 650

SFI160SFW390-VAX

Streamline Version 1.3


316 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules


The following figure shows the NOE3X100 LED indicators.

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE3X100 indicator.

SY/MAX Addressing

Be sure that the module is assigned a unique SY/MAX drop number during configuration.

LED Descriptions





Link Green Ethernet connection is made.

Kernel Amber On during download.

Fault Red An error condition has occurred.

Collision Red If steady, an error condition exists. If flashing, packet collisions are occurring on the network during data transmission.

Appl Amber A fatal error has occurred.

Active

ReadyRun

Kernel

FaultCollision

Link

Appl

PERSONAL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGEFailure to assign a unique SY/MAX drop number during configuration can cause severe personal injury or equipment damage.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

35013379 02 October 2007 317


Ethernet Modules

140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules

Overview The section includes information for the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modules, NOE51100 and NOE55100. The Quantum MMS Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to MMS devices via Ethernet.

Ethernet MMS Module

The following figure shows the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modules.

Note: The NOE51100 is equipped with one RJ45 connector instead of the fiber optic connectors (as shown above on the NOE55100).


Removable Door


Color Code

LED Display

140NOE 511 00CONTROLLER


X



GlobalAddress

Fiber Optic

TxRx

Tx

Port 1Rx

318 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

Specifications The following table shows the MMS Ethernet specifications.

Specifications

Communication Ports

NOE51100 1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

NOE55100 2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports

Cable Type

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet 2, 3, 4, or 6 twisted pairs with a solid copper core

10Base-T (twisted pair) RG58a/u or RG58C/U coaxial (Belden 9907/82907 or equivalent)

Wire Size

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet 20 AWG

10Base-T (twisted pair) 22, 24, 26 AWG

Topology

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet Bus

10Base-T (twisted pair) Star

Connector

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet BNC (UG-274)

10Base-T (twisted pair) Modular RJ-45 (4 pins of 8 are used by 10Base-T)

Backplane Compatibility (Requires Quantum CPU)

3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 position backplanes

Data Transfer Frequency 10 mb


35013379 02 October 2007 319


Ethernet Modules


The following table shows the NOE5X100 LED indicators.

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE5X100 indicator.

LED Descriptions





Link Green Ethernet connection is made.

Kernel Amber On during download.

Fault Red An error condition has occurred.

Collision Red If steady, an error condition exists. If flashing, packet collisions are occurring on the network during data transmission.

Appl Amber A fatal error has occurred.

Active

ReadyRun

Kernel

FaultCollision

Link

Appl

320 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules

Overview The following provides information on the Quantum ethernet modules 140NOE77100, 140NOE77101, 140NOE77110, and 140NOE77111.


Refer to Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide, 840USE11600 for more detailed information on the installation and use of Quantum ethernet modules.

Ethernet Module The following figure shows the NOE77100 Ethernet module. The other NOE771xx Ethernet modules are the same in appearance except for the model number.

Removable Door


LED Display

Color CodeModule Description

Model Number

MT-RJ Cable Connector

140NOE 771 00 Ethernet 10/100

ActiveReadyRun

FaultColl

Rx Act Tx ActLink

10MB100MB Fduplex

RJ-45 Cable Connector

Kernel Appl

WR

ITE ASSIG

NE

D IP A

DD

RESS AB

OV

ED

o Not D

uplicate AddressU

se Permanent Felt-tip Pen

IP AddressWritable Area

FxBase

10/100 Base-T

100 Base Fx

00-T

35013379 02 October 2007 321


Ethernet Modules

Specifications The main specifications for the Quantum 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules are described in the following table

Specifications

Communication Ports One auto-sensing 10/100Base-T shielded twisted pair (RJ-45 connector) port and one 100Base-FX (MT-RJ connector) port. Both ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP/IP protocol. Only one port can be used at a time.



Fuse None

Programming Software

Type and version Concept, Ver. 2.2 or higher (NOE77100/10)

Concept, Ver 2.5 or higher (NOE77101/11)

Modsoft, Ver. 2.6 or higher (NOE77100/10)

ProWORX NxT, Ver 2.1 or higher (NOE77100/10)

ProWORX NxT, Ver 2.2 or higher (NOE77101/11)

Firmware

CPU Type and version Quantum Executive, Ver. 2.0, or higher

NOE Upgradeable Field Upgradeable via FTP or Programming Panel.

Operating Conditions

Temperature 0 to +60° C

Humidity 0 to 95% Rh non-condensing @ 60° C

Altitude 15,000 ft (4500 m)

Vibration 10-57 Hz @ 0.0075 mm d.a

57-150 Hz @ 1 g

Storage Conditions

Temperature -40 to +85°C

Humidity 0 to 95% Rh non condensing @ 60°C

Free Fall 1 m unpackaged

Shock 3 shocks / axis, 15 g, 11 ms

322 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules


The following figure shows the NOE771xx LED indicators.

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE771xx LED indicator.

LED Descriptions

LED Color Description

Active Green Indicates the backplane is configured.

Ready Green Indicates module is healthy.

Fault Red During a crash while going through a reset.If Duplicate IP address is detected.If no link is available.While going through BOOTP sequence.

Run Green Flashes to indicate diagnostic code, as described in "Run LED Status" (following table).

Coll. Red Flashes when Ethernet collisions occur.

Link Green On when Ethernet link is active.

TxAct Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet transmission.

RxAct Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet reception.

Kernel Amber On when in Kernel Mode.Flashing while in download mode.

10MB Green On when the module is connected to a 10 Megabit network.

100MB Green On when the module is connected to a 100 Megabit network.

Fduplex Green On when Ethernet is operating in the full duplex mode.

Appl Green On when crash log entry exists.

Fault

LinkRun Coll

ApplKernel

Active

Tx Act

Rx Act

10MB

100MB Fduplex

Ready

35013379 02 October 2007 323


Ethernet Modules

Run LED Status The following table lists each available state of the Run LED indicator and provides diagnostic information for that state

Indicator State Status

On (steady) Normal operation: The NOE module is ready for network communication.

Number of flashes in sequence

one Not used

two Not used

three No Link: the network cable is not connected or is defective.

four Duplicate IP address: The module will be set to its default IP address.

five No IP address: The module is attempting to obtain an IP address from a BOOTP server. Module is set to default IP address.

six Invalid IP configuration. (Likely cause: Default gateway is not on the same subnet mask. Module is set to default IP address.

seven No valid executive NOE present

324 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

Key Features The key features of the 140 NOE 771 (-00, -01, -10, -11) models are listed below:

MODBUS I/O Scanner

The functionality of the NOE771xx module is further enhanced by the addition of a MODBUS I/O Scanner that can be configured with either the Modsoft, Concept, or ProWorx programming panel. This allows the user a means to transfer data between network nodes without using the MSTR instruction.

The NOE771 MODBUS I/O Scanner can be configured by either of the following two methods:

Peer Cop (Available on NOE77100 only)Ethernet I/O Scanner

-00 -01 -10 -11

HTTP Server X X X X

FTP Server X X X X

Flash File System X X X X

BOOTP Client X X X X

BOOTP Server X X X X

SNMP V2 Agent X X X X

MODBUS Messaging X X X X

I/O Scanner X X X

Hot Standby X In Version 2.0 X In Version 2.0

Global Data - Publish / Subscribe X X

Bandwidth Monitoring X X

Faulty Device Replacement (DHCP Server)

X X

Enhanced Web Diagnostics X X

Schneider Private MIB X X

FactoryCast Application X X

User Programmable Web Pages X X

Note: It is recommended that the enhanced MODBUS I/O Scanner be used for all new installations. Peer Cop functionality is provided only as an easy migration path for an existing installation. The enhanced MODBUS I/O Scanner provides greater functionality than the Peer Cop based I/O scanner.

35013379 02 October 2007 325


Ethernet Modules

Peer Cop Based I/O Scanner

The following table lists the characteristics of the Peer Cop based MODBUS I/O Scanner, which is available only on the NOE77100.

Enhanced Modbus I/O Scanner

The following table lists the characteristics of the Enhanced based MODBUS I/O Scanner, which is available on the NOE77100, NOE77101, and NOE77111.

Refer to the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide, 840USE11600 to learn how to configure the MODBUS I/O Scanner.

MODBUS/TCP Server

The following information describes the functionality of the MODBUS/TCP Server.

Introduction –Client

All NOE771xx Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules provide the user with the capability of transferring data to and from nodes on a TCP/IP network through the use of a communication instruction. All PLCs that support networking communication capabilities over Ethernet can use the MSTR Ladder Logic instruction to read or write controller information or can also use IEC communication blocks.

Parameter Value

Max. No. of Devices 64

Max. No. of Input Words 500

Max. No. of Output Words 500

HealthTimeout Value Global Setting (20 Msec to 2 Secs in 20 mSec increments)

Input TimeOutState Global Setting (Zero or Hold)

IP Address Derived from MODBUS Address (must be on NOE’s Subnet)

Remote Register Reference Not configurable - 400001 is used

Parameter Value

Max. No. of Devices 128: NOE77100, NOE77101 and NOE77111.

Max. No. of Input Words 4000

Max. No. of Output Words 4000

HealthTimeout Value Individual Setting (1 Msec to 2 Secs in 1 mSec increments)

Input TimeOutState Individually Settable

IP Address Individually Settable

Remote Register Reference Configurable

Min. Update Rate Settable

326 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

Introduction – Server

All NOE771xx Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules provide the user with the ability to access data from the controller using the standard MODBUS/TCP protocol. Any device: PC, HMI package, another PLC, or any MODBUS/TCP compliant device can access data from the PLC. The MODBUS/TCP Server also allows programming panels to log into the controller over Ethernet.

Limitations The NOE771xx supports up to 64 simultaneous MODBUS/TCP Server connections. The NOE771xx allows only one Programming Panel to be logged in at a time to guarantee consistency of changes to the controller configuration.

The following MODBUS/TCP commands are supported by the NOE:Read DataWrite DataRead/Write DataGet Remote StatisticsClear Remote StatisticsMODBUS 125 Commands (used by programming panels to download a new Exec to the NOE).

Performance The following table shows the performance characteristics of the NOE771xx’s MODBUS/TCP Server.

FTP and HTTP Server

The following information describes services provided by the FTP and HTTP servers.

FTP Server The NOE771xx’s File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address. Any FTP client can log on to the module, if the client uses the correct user name and password.

The FTP Server provides the following services:Update the NOE’s firmware by downloading a new ExecProvides error log visibility by uploading error log filesUpload/download BOOTP Server and SNMP configuration files

Parameter Value

Typical Response Time (ms) 0.6

Number of MODBUS connections (Client and Server) 64 (-01, -11)16 (Client -00)32 (Server -10)

Number of simultaneous login channels 1

Note: NOE771xx MODBUS/TCP performance measurements are made with Quantum 140CPU53414 PLC.

35013379 02 October 2007 327


Ethernet Modules

The default user name is USER, and the default password is USERUSER. Both the user name and password are case sensitive. Refer to the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for instructions about how to change the password, and how to add or delete user names to the FTP Server.

There should be only one FTP client per module.

328 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

HTTP Server The NOE771xx’s HyperText Transport Protocol (HTTP) Server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address. It can be used with version 4.0 or greater of either the Internet Explorer or Netscape browser.

The NOE771xx’s HyperText Transport Protocol (HTTP) Server allows you to view the following information:

Module’s Ethernet statisticsController and I/O informationBOOTP/DHCP/FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) Server informationGlobal Data (Publish / Subscribe)

The HTTP Server’s HTML pages allow you to configure the module’s BOOTP/DHCP/FDR Server and SNMP Agent.

The HTTP Server is protected with a default name and password. The default name and password are both USER, and both are case sensitive. They can both be changed via the Configuration page on the NOE 771 0x’s Web Embedded Pages (see the Installing the Module chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide ).

For the NOE7711x modules, they can be changed via the FactoryCast Configurator.

The NOE771xx supports a maximum of 32 HTTP simultaneous connections.

Address Servers The following information describes the services provided by the Address Servers:

BOOTP ServerDHCP Server

Note: Browsers may open multiple connections so 32 HTTP connections does not indicate 32 simultaneous users.

Note: The NOE7710x module does not support user downloaded Web pages. You will need to purchase the 140NOE7711x module to support that requirement.

35013379 02 October 2007 329


Ethernet Modules

BOOTP Server

The BOOTstrap Protocol (BOOTP) software, compliant with RFC 951, is used to assign IP addresses to nodes on an Ethernet network. Devices (hosts) on the network issue BOOTP requests during their initialization sequence, and a BOOTP Server that receives the request will extract the required IP address information from its database and place it in BOOTP response messages to the requesting devices. The devices will use the assigned IP addresses, received from the BOOTP Server, for all communication occurring on the network.

Your NOE BOOTP Server

Your NOE x0 module comes supplied with a BOOTP Server. This feature allows you to provide IP addresses to all the I/O devices being serviced by the NOE771x0. Providing a BOOTP Server that is built into your NOE771x0 module eliminates the need for you to have a dedicated PC on your I/O network acting as a BOOTP Server.

You can configure your NOE771x0’s BOOTP Server from the module’s HTTP Web page. Using this feature allows you to add, remove, and edit devices to the BOOTP Server’s database, which is maintained on the modules non-volatile memory.

Note: The BOOTP Server is available on the 140NOE771 -00 and -10 models.

Note: The NOE771x0’s BOOTP Server cannot be used to provide its own IP address.

330 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

DHCP Server

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a superset of the BOOTP Protocol. Your 140NOE771x1 has a DHCP Server. The DHCP Server is compliant with RFC 1531. The DHCP Server can be used to provide the IP configuration to devices using BOOTP or devices using DHCP.

The DHCP Server has entries that use the MAC address to serve the IP configuration and entries in the Server that use the role name to serve the IP configuration. See the Address Server Configuration/Faulty Device Replacement chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for details on configuring your NOE’s address Server.

If you are migrating a BOOTP configuration from a 140NOE771x0 module to the new 140 NOE 771 x1 module, see the Address Server Configuration/Faulty Device Replacement chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for details on automatic upgrade of your configuration for the new DHCP Server.

Global Data Global Data service is a real time Publisher/Subscriber mechanism providing the most efficient data exchange for PLC application coordination.

Devices supporting Global Data are arranged in a distribution group for the purpose of application variable exchange and synchronization. Each Global Data device can publish up to one network (application) variable and subscribe up to 64 network (application) variables.

The Quantum NOE’s embedded Web Global Data Configuration Page provides a configuration screen to determine which and how many application variables are exchanged with this service. After configuration, the exchanges between all stations belonging to the same distribution group are done automatically.

The Global Data service uses the 4x register space for Global Data exchanges.

Note: The DHCP Server is available on the 140NOE771x1 models.

Note: OPERATING ON A CORPORATE NETWORKBefore placing the NOE on a corporate network, Schneider Automation recommends that you discuss the installation with your MIS department. It is likely that your company's corporate network has at least one DHCP Server running already. If the NOE's DHCP Server is running on the same network, it may disturb the network.To avoid any possible problem related to the NOE's DHCP Server on the corporate network, you must ensure that the DHCP Server is not running in the NOE by not having address entries in the configuration. If there are no configured devices in the address Server configuration page, then the NOE will not start the DHCP Server.

35013379 02 October 2007 331


Ethernet Modules

Key Features of Global Data

The main features for Global Data are:One Publisher and many SubscribersA device can publish one network variable of up to 512 registersA device can subscribe to several network variables of up to 2048 4x registersA device subscribes to the complete network variableOne distribution group per network IP addressApplication defined publication rateUp to 64 Global Data network variables (numbered from 1 to 64) can be part of the data distribution groupAn NOE has only one multicast address; consequently, it can only publish and subscribe inside the groupA device can participate in several distribution groups by using multiple NOEs in the rack

Global Data has an advantage over Client/Server services when more than one Subscriber is receiving the same data since only one transaction is necessary for all Subscribers to receive the data.

This advantage offers two benefits:Reduce overall network trafficEnsure tighter synchronization of multiple subscribers

Bandwith Monitoring

Bandwidth Monitoring allows you to monitor the NOE’s CPU allocation for each of the following services: Global Data, I/O Scanning, and Messaging. The Bandwidth Monitoring service retrieves workload data and returns one of two pieces of information: whether the module has free resources or whether the module is working at capacity. Knowing the resource allocation helps you:

Decide about allocating your resourcesDetermine the number of NOEs needed in a system

Available Services

The services accessed and monitored are:Global DataI/O ScannerModbus Messaging

If you use Bandwidth Monitoring, you do not need to develop a new set of access functions. The actual NOE CPU load is computed each second.

Bandwidth Monitoring Load Rates

The Bandwidth Monitoring service checks once a second and computes four (4) values in private data:

Percentage of NOE’s CPU allocated to Global DataPercentage of NOE’s CPU allocated to the I/O ScannerPercentage of NOE’s CPU allocated to MessagingPercentage of NOE’s CPU allocated to other services and idle

332 35013379 02 October 2007


Ethernet Modules

Results are returned as percentages. CPU time spent in other services is shown as "Other" or "Free." Bandwidth Monitoring uses the same functions as used by SNMP.

The three service rates, Global Data, I/O Scanner, and Messaging, are computed using the following formula:

(Current load * 100) / Maximum Load

Table of Maximum Load Rates

The current load is computed dynamically.

Enhanced Web Diagnostics

The embedded Web server provides Web pages that you may use to diagnose Transparent Factory / Real Time services.

Those diagnostic services are listed below:1. Global Data diagnostics

Status of all Global Data servicesStatus of all subscribed and published variablesPublication / Subscription rate

2. I/O Scanning diagnosticsStatus of all I/O Scanning servicesStatus of individual scanned devicesActual I/O scanning rate

3. Messaging diagnosticsDiagnostic information for Port 502 messaging

4. Bandwidth MonitoringThroughput measurement of NOE by service

Diagnostic Service Workload Data Returned Maximum load for NOE 771 x1

Global Data Number of published variables per second 800

I/O Scanner Number of transactions per second 4200

Messaging Number of messages treated per second 410

Note: The loads are dependent on controller scan time. Each application has an expected scan time. Therefore, when evaluating the loads, you should ensure that the controller scan time is set to the expected scan time for the application being modelled.

Note: These services are available on the 140NOE771x1 modules.

Note: All these pages are protected by the general HTTP password.

35013379 02 October 2007 333


Ethernet Modules

334 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


14
Intelligent/Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides information on the following intelligent/special purpose modules:

Five Channel High Speed Counter ModuleTwo Channel High Speed Counter ModuleASCII Interface ModuleHigh Speed Interrupt ModuleSingle Axis Motion ModulesHot Standby Module



Topic Page

140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module 336

I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200 342

140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module 372

140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module 387

140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module 393

140MSB/MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules 398

140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable 408

140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module 413

335

arr-thorp.com

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module

Overview This section provides specifications and descriptions of the high speed counter modules EHC10500, Five Channel Discrete High Speed Counter. The High Speed Counter module is a discrete counter for proximity and magnetic pickups.


For more detailed information on the planning, installation and use of this module, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140EHC10500 Module User Guide,part number 840USE44300.

EHC10500 Counter Module

The following figure shows the EHC10500 Five Channel Discrete High Speed Counter module.

140EHC 105 0010 80 vdc

X X



Removable Door

Customer Identification Label(Fold label and place it inside the door)

Field WiringTerminal Strip

Model NumberModule Description Color Code

LED Area

23

5

7

9

1113

15

17

19

23

252729

31

33

3537

39

1

4

6

8

10

12

1416

18

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

3840

21

336 35013379 02 October 2007



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the EHC10500 high speed counter.

Specifications

Number of Channels 5 counter inputs, 8 digital inputs, and 8 digital outputs

LEDs Active

F

R (Green) - Module is ready

1 ... 8 (Green - left column) - Discrete Inputs (IN1 ... IN8)

C1 ... C5 (Green - middle column) - Discrete Counter Inputs (C1 ... C5)

1 ... 8 (Green - right column) - Discrete Outputs (OUT1 ... OUT8)

P (Green) - 24 Vdc is present

Required Addressing 13 Words In13 Words Out

Discrete Counter Inputs

Count Frequency 100 kHz max @ 5Vdc35 kHz max @ 24Vdc

Input Thresholds On+3.1 ... +5V+15 ... +30V

Off0 ... 1.15V@5 Vdc-3 ... +5V@24 Vdc

Input Current 7 mA

Duty Cycle 1 : 1

Data Formats 16 Bit Counter: 65,535 Decimal32 Bit Counter: 2,147,483,647 Decimal

Operation Modes Discrete incremental counter

Max Continuous Input Voltage 30 Vdc

Discrete Inputs

VREF Supply + 24 Vdc On State (Vdc) -3.0 ... 5.0.

Off State (Vdc)15.0 ... 30.0

Input Current (typical) 5 mA

Discrete Outputs

FET Switch ON 20 ... 30 Vdc

FET Switch OFF 0 Vdc (ground reference)

Max Load Current (each output) 210 mA max

Output Off State Leakage 0.1 mA max @ 30 Vdc

Output On State Voltage Drop 1.25 Vdc @ 0.5 A

Miscellaneous

Isolation (Channel to Bus) 500 Vac rms for 1 minute

35013379 02 October 2007 337



Fault Detection Loss of output field power, output short circuit

Power Dissipation ≤ 6 W


External 24 Vdc Power Supply 19.2 ... 30 Vdc, 24 Vdc nominal, 60 mArequired plus the load current for each output

External Fusing User discretion

Compatibility Programming Software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0at a minimum Quantum Controllers: All, V2.0 at a minimum

Specifications

338 35013379 02 October 2007




The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC10500 high speed counter.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC10500 high speed counter.

LED Descriptions


Active Green Bus communication is present

F Red Lights upon any defined hardware, firmware, and process error.

R Green Indicates firmware initialization is complete and the module is ready for service.

1 ... 8 (left column) Green Digital inputs IN1 ... IN8

C1 ... C5 Green Counter inputs xxC1 ... xxC5 (xx=5/24)

1 ... 8 (right column) Green Digital outputs OUT1 ... OUT8

P Green 24 Vdc is present

Active F

C11234

R

5678

1234

5678

1C2C3C4C5

P

35013379 02 October 2007 339



Wiring Diagram The following figure show the EHC10500 wiring diagram. N/C

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

M11

M12

M13

M14

M15

IN2

IN4

IN6

IN8

Common Common

OUT2

OUT4

OUT6

OUT8

External Power Supply Return

OUT7

OUT5

OUT3

OUT1

IN7

IN5

IN3

IN1

24 Vdc C5

24 Vdc C4

24 Vdc C3

24 Vdc C2

24 Vdc C1

5 Vdc C5

5 Vdc C4

5 Vdc C3

5 Vdc C2

5 Vdc C15 Vdc CounterInput Signals

(C1...C5)

5 Vdc

24 Vdc

To M11

To M11

24 Vdc CounterInput Signals

(C1...C5)

24 Vdc

24 Vdc Input Signals

(IN1...IN8)

24 Vdc Output Signals(OUT1...OUT8)

24 Vdc

+ –

+ –

+ –

+ –

340 35013379 02 October 2007



Note: 1. N / C = Not Connected.2. Terminals 29 and 30 are common and are jumpered together.

35013379 02 October 2007 341



I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200

Overview This section describes configuration of the 140EHC20200 high speed counter module which operates in pulse or quadrature mode and accepts single ended or differentiated inputs.

I/O Map Register Assignment

The 140EHC20200 high speed counter requires six contiguous output (4X) and six contiguous input (3X) registers in the I/O map.

The 4X registers perform the same configuration tasks as the Modzoom screen-assigned parameters. Also, the preset and the enable inputs connected to the field wiring terminal block perform the same functions as those software command control bits. When both methods are used to:

Preset a counter—the last preset executed has precedence.Enable/disable a counter—it will only be enabled when both the hardware enable input and software enable control bit are in the enable state.

For simple applications, the zoom screens rather than the I/O mapped registers can be used to configure the module. Zoom screens are used only while the PLC is stopped. The selected parameters take effect when the PLC is set to run. For applications that require that module parameters be changed while the system is running, user logic can modify the I/O map-assigned registers to override the previously selected zoom parameters.

When using either zoom screens or I/O map registers, the maximum values specified in the Load Values Command section are the largest values that can be used by the module.

The I/O Mapped registers discussed in this section are

4x output registers that:

Preset and enable/disable input counters.Load setpoint and maximum values to define output turn on points.Set mode of operation, count, or rate sample.Enable output switches and configures their mode of operation.

3X input registers that:

Hold count or rate sample data.Display field power status.Echo 4X command data after the command is executed by the module.

342 35013379 02 October 2007



EHC20200 Operations

Four operations can be performed:

Command 1 CONFIGURES the ModuleCommand 2 LOADS VALUESCommand 3 READ INPUT COUNTERCommand 4 READS RATE SAMPLE or LAST INPUT COUNT BEFORE PRESET

Each operation uses one or more of both types of registers assigned to the module. In addition to the command definition byte, the first 4X register for all commands contain control bits to preset and enable/disable counters of either channel.

Command 1 CONFIGURES the Module

Command 1 uses three 4X registers and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

This command does the following:

Sets up the module for pulse or quadrature input.Sets up the module for count or rate-sample mode. Counters cannot be separately configured.Defines counter register length—16 or 32 bit.Enables output assertion including module communication loss state. Output assertion is available if configured for two 16 bit, or one 32 bit counter. No output assertion is available if two 32 bit counters are defined, or in rate-sample mode.Defines output assertion point.

3X

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5

4X

4X+1

4X+2

35013379 02 October 2007 343



Command 2 LOAD VALUES

There are four formats for this command. It uses up to six 4X registers and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

Values loaded may be:

Maximum count and setpoint (i.e., output turn on times).Output assertion ON time duration (one input only).Rate sample time interval.

Command 3 READ INPUT COUNTER

Command 3 uses one 4X register and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

Command 4 READS RATE SAMPLE or LAST INPUT COUNT BEFORE PRESET

Command 4 uses one 4X register and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

3X

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5

4X

4X+1

4X+2

4X+3

4X+4

4X+5

3X

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5

4X

Note: 4X register formats for the commands are described first. The 3X register contents after issuing Command 1 or 2 are listed after the 4X register description for Command 2, since the responses are the same for both. The 3X responses for Commands 3 and 4 immediately follow those commands.

3X

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5

4X

344 35013379 02 October 2007



Command 1 - CONFIGURE, Output Register Format (4X = 01XX hex)

The following figure shows the 4x output register for command 1.

The following figure shows the 4x+1 output register for command 1 (4X+1).

Note: When Command 0 (4X = 00XX) or any other undefined commands are asserted in the 4X register, the 3X registers will contain the count inputs if in count mode (same as Command 3) and the rate sample values when in rate-sample mode (same as Command 4).

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X

1 = Enable Counter 11 = Disable Counter 11 = Preset Counter 21 = Enable Counter 21 = Disable Counter 2Configure Command Bit

1 = Preset Counter 1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+1

Two 16 bit counters, Output Assertion ON

0/1 = Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 10/1 = Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 2

One 32 bit counter, Output Assertion ONTwo 16 bit counters, Output Assertion ONTwo 32 bit counters, Output Assertion OFF0/1 = Rate Sample Mode OFF/ON When = 1, automatically sets bits 11 and 12 (i.e., two 32 bit counters, no Output Assert)0/1 = Comm Lost Output Assert OFF/ON When = 0, if module communication with the bus is lost, outputs are disabled. When = 1, outputs continue to operate as configured.

0011

0101

35013379 02 October 2007 345



The following figure shows the 4x+2 output register for command 1.

Output 2A Operating Mode

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14X+2

Output 2B Operating ModeOutput 1A Operating ModeOutput 1B Operating Mode

Mode01234567

Bits000001010011100101110111

DescriptionDisable OutputON if Count = SetpointLatched ON if Count = Setpoint. Hardware RESET required to turn OFFON if Count = Maximum CountLatched ON if Count = Maximum Count. Hardware RESET required to turn OFFON when Count = Setpoint for time specified in Command 2 registerON when Count = Maximum Count for time specified in Command 2 registerNot Used

MODULE DISABLE POSSIBILITYThe Output ON time specified in the Command 2 registers may be used by only one of the four outputs. When more than one output is set to mode 5 or 6, the module firmware will operate the first one encountered, and disable the other outputs set to modes 5 or 6.


CAUTION

346 35013379 02 October 2007



Command 2. LOAD VALUES, Output Register Format (4X = 02XX hex)

The LOAD VALUES 4X register format depends on the Counter/Rate Sample mode selected in Command 1, Register 4X+1, bits 11 and 12.

If configured for two 16 bit Counters, Output Assert ON, the following figures, which shows counters for registers 4X through 4X+5, are displayed.

Note: Zero set into any 4X register means no change.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X

1 = Enable Counter 11 = Disable Counter 11 = Preset Counter 21 = Enable Counter 21 = Disable Counter 2Load Values Command Bit


Maximum Count for Counter 1 (max = FFFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+1

Setpoint for Counter 1 (max = FFFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+2

Maximum Count for Counter 2 (max = FFFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+3

Setpoint for Counter 2 (max = FFFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+4

Output Assert ON Time (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+5

Configured for two 16 Bit Counters, Output Assert ON

35013379 02 October 2007 347



If configured for one 32 bit Counter, Output Assert ON, the following figures, which show the counters for registers 4X through 4X+5, with low and high word, are displayed.

Note: Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means no change.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14X



Maximum Count for Counter 1 (max = 7FFFFFFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+1 (Low Word)4X+2 (High Word)

Setpoint for Counter 1 (max = 7FFFFFFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


Output Assert ON Time (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+5

Configured for One 32 Bit Counter, Output Assert ON

348 35013379 02 October 2007



If configured for two 32 bit Counters - NO Output Assert, the following figures, which show the 4X through 4X+4 counters, with low and high word, are displayed.

Note: Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means no change.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14X




16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


Configured for two 32 bit Counters - NO Output Assert

35013379 02 October 2007 349



If configured for Rate Sample Mode, the following figures, which show the 4X through 4X+2 counters, are displayed.

Note: Zero set into any 4X register or any 4X register pair for 32 bit values means no change.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X

1 = Preset Counter 11 = Enable Counter 11 = Disable Counter 11 = Preset Counter 21 = Enable Counter 21 = Disable Counter 2Load Values Command Bit

Rate Sample Timer Value, Counter 1 (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+1

Rate Sample Timer Value, Counter 2 (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4X+2

Configured for Rate Sample Mode

350 35013379 02 October 2007



Command 1 and Command 2 Response Formats

The following figures show the 3X through 3X+5 response formats.

Command 3, READ INPUT COUNTER, Output Register Format (4X = 03XX hex)

The following figure shows the 4X register for Command 3, READ INPUT COUNTER, output register format.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3X

Configure orLoad Values Command Byte

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3X+5

1 = Field Power Lost

3X+1 to 3X+4 echoes 4X+1 to 4X+4 register contents.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14X

1 = Preset Counter 11 = Enable Counter 11 = Disable Counter 11 = Preset Counter 21 = Enable Counter 21 = Disable Counter 2Read Counter Inputs Com-mand Bits

35013379 02 October 2007 351



Command 3 Response Format

The following figure shows the Command 3 response format.

Command 4, READ RATE SAMPLE or READ LAST COUNT VALUE BEFORE MOST RECENT PRESET, Output Register Format (4X = 04XX hex)

The following figure shows the 4x counters for Command 4.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3X

Read Counter InputsCommand Byte

3X+1 and 3X+2 = Counter 1’s 16 or 32 bit Current Count.3X+3 and 3X+4 = Counter 2’s 16 or 32 bit Current Count.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3X+5


16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14X

1 = Preset Counter 11 = Enable Counter 11 = Disable Counter 11 = Preset Counter 21 = Enable Counter 21 = Disable Counter 2Read Rate/Last Count Command Bit

352 35013379 02 October 2007



Command 4 Response Format

The following figures show the counters for 3X through 3X+5 for command 4.

I/O Map Status Byte

The most significant bit in the I/O Map status byte is used for the 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module. The following figure shows the map status byte register.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3X

Read Rate Sample/Last Count Command Byte

3X+1 and 3X+2 = Counter 1’s 32 bit Rate Sample / Last Count Before Preset.3X+3 and 3X+4 = Counter 2’s 32 bit Rate Sample / Last Count Before Preset.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3X+5


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Internal Fuse Blown or External Output Supply Lost

35013379 02 October 2007 353



Using I/O Mapped Registers to Operate the High Speed Counter

COUNT UP ExampleField connections for this example are illustrated in the EHC202 wiring diagrams 1–4 in this section. The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc. Input pulse on-off threshold levels for the 5 ... 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification table. The minimum differential input is 1.8 V.

The following user logic:

Configures the module to count up from zero.Turns an output on for one count at a setpoint value of 50.Continues counting to 100.Rolls over to zero and turn on a second output for one count.Repeats the operation.

See 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module, p. 372 for counter timing diagrams illustrating output on times.

The following table shows the I/O Map register assignments.

In this example, block moves are used to load the operating parameters into the module. This requires pre-defined tables be established. Register values are in HEX format.

Module Configuration

The following table shows the module configurations.

Module Input Ref Output Ref Description

140EHC20200 300001-300006 400001-400006 EHC20200 High Speed

400101 0140 CONFIGURE command, Disable Counter 2

400102 0000 Pulse input, two 16 bit counters, output assert on Rate Sample OFF, disable outputs at bus communication loss

400103 3100 Output 1A on at setpoint, Output 1B on at maximum count +1 Output 2A and 2B are disabled

400104 0000Not used by this command400105 0000

400106 0000

354 35013379 02 October 2007



Load Values The following table shows the load values.

Zeros in the 4X registers also mean no change. Setpoint, maximum count and assert time can only be set to zero using the Modzoom screens. When the registers in this example are echoed, zeros will appear but the actual content in the module will be unchanged from previous values. In this example, Counter 2 is disabled and its outputs and timed assert have not been selected. Registers 400204 - 6 have no meaning.

After the module executes the Configure and Load Value’s commands, they are echoed in the I/O mapped 3X registers except for the command register’s low 8 bits. Command execution time by the module is 1 ms. Actual time between the 4X register block move and the echo response display in the 3X registers is dependent on User Logic and hardware configuration. An echo of the Configuration command registers would appear as follows:

Response for Configuration Command

The following table shows the echo response for the configuration command.

400201 0243 LOAD VALUES command, disable Counter 2, preset and enable Counter 1

400202 0064 Counter 1 maximum count, count after which Output 1B turns on

400203 0032 Counter 1 setpoint, count when Output 1A turns on

400204 0000 Counter 2 maximum count (not used in this example)

400205 0000 Counter 2 setpoint (not used in this example)

400206 0000 Output Assert Time (Not used in this example, one output only, if used)

Register Value

300001 0100

300002 0000

300003 3100

300004 0000

300005 0000

300006 0000

35013379 02 October 2007 355



Read Input Counter Command

The following table shows the read input registers.

When this command is issued, the content of the input pulse counter is retrieved. The 3X register content would appear as shown in the following table.

3x Register Content

Reset of Latched Outputs

If register 400103 in the Module Configuration Table has been set to 4200, Output 1A would have been latched on at setpoint and Output 1B latched on at maximum count. Wiring Diagrams 2 and 4 show how the encoder Z outputs could be used to reset the latched outputs. The minimum pulse width to reset outputs is 1 μs.

40301 0300 READ INPUT COUNTER command

40302 0000

Not used by this command40303 0000

40304 0000

40305 0000

40306 0000

Register Value Description

300001 0300 Command echo

300002 XXXX Current input count

300003 0000 Zeros as the count will not exceed 100. For counts above 65,536, this register is a multiplier. As an example: 30002 has a value of 324 and 30003 a value of 3.The total count is (65,536 x 3) + 324 = 196,932

300004 0000 Counter 2 is disabled


300006 0X00 X is the field power indicator

356 35013379 02 October 2007



User Logic The User Logic illustrated accomplishes the module’s configuration and then causes the input counter to be displayed after the first three successive scans by the PLC when it is in RUN mode. The following figure shows the module’s configuration in RUN mode.

300001

#00256TEST

#00001

300001

#00512TEST

#00001

000011

000010

000010

000012

Read Counter

Load Configuration

Load Configuration Done

Load Values

Check Configuration Echo

Check Load Values Echo

Configuration Done

Load Values Done

000011

000012

000010

400101

400001BLKM

#00006

400201

400001BLKM

#00006

400301

400001BLKM

#00006

P

P

35013379 02 October 2007 357



COUNT DOWN Example

The COUNT DOWN example uses the same wiring as in the count up example, except the Input 1B+ level is changed to common (connected to Vref-) for Pulse Inputs illustrated in Wiring Diagrams 1 and 2. For Quadrature Inputs, no wiring change is required as the count direction is decoded internally by sensing the phase shift change between inputs A and B.

The User Logic is the same as for the count example. The actual operation of the module is different in that the output associated with maximum count turns on after zero count has been reached.

The example configures the module to decrement the input count from the maximum value, turn on an output at a setpoint value of 50, and turn on a second output after the input counter had reached zero and rolled over to the maximum count; the operation is then repeated. The initial loading of the maximum count will not cause its associated output to turn on.

RATE SAMPLE Example for Either Pulse or Quadrature Input

Field connections for this example are illustrated in Wiring Diagrams1–4. The connections on terminals 15 and 16 are optional, depending on the use requirements of the outputs. Terminals 39 and 40 always require the 24 Vdc supply connections. The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc. Input pulse on-off threshold levels for the 5 ... 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification table. The minimum differential input is 1.8 V.

As with count examples, tables are set up and transferred to the module using block moves. The User Logic for Rate Sample is the same as that used for Pulse Input Count Up/Down.

Module Configuration

The following table shows the module configurations.

400101 0140 CONFIGURE command, Disable Counter 2

400102 1000 Pulse input, Rate Sample ON, disable outputs at bus communication loss (Note: Bits 11 and 12 were not required.)

400103 0000 Not used by this command

400104 0000

400105 0000

400106 0000

358 35013379 02 October 2007



Load Values The following table shows the load values.

Read Rate Sample

The following table shows a read rate sample.

When this command is issued, the input pulse counter content is retrieved.The 3X register content is the count over the time period selected in the Load Values registers 4X + 1 and 4X + 2. The 3X response to the Read-Rate Sample command in register 40301 is as follows.

400201 0243 LOAD VALUES command, disable Counter 2, preset and enable Counter 1

400202 XXXX Counter 1 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds

400203 0000 Counter 2 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds (Not used in this example)

400204 0000 Not used by this command

400205 0000

400206 0000

Note: Command echoes are the same as described in the Pulse Input Count Up/Down examples.

40030 0400 READ INPUT COUNTER command

400302 0000

Not used by this command400303 0000

400304 0000

400305 0000

400306 0000

35013379 02 October 2007 359



Response to Read Rate Sample Command

The following table shows the responses to the read rate sample command.

Rate Sample Mode Caution

If a version 02.00 or higher module replaces a module which has a version number less than 02.00 in a Rate Sample mode application, extra software configuration may be required.

Rate Sample mode is set using Command 1, CONFIGURE (01XX), 4X+1 register, bit 13 = 1 (see the description of Command 1 in this section).

The following figure shows the module’s label.

In modules prior to V02.00, when Rate Sample mode was selected, input was always handled as if it were generated by a pulse encoder. For example, 60 count per revolution encoders, either pulse or quadrature types, would give a rate of 60 for a one-second revolution when the interval was set for one second.

Register Value Description

300001 0400 Command echo

300002 XXXX Counter 1 Input rate low word

300003 XXXX Counter 1 Input rate high word: this register is a multiplier. As an example: 30002 has a value of 324 and 30003 a value of 3.The total count is (65,536 x 3) + 324 = 196,932



300006 0X00 X is the field power indicator

Note: To verify the version of the module, reference the indicated label found on the top front of the module.

140EHC 202 00HI SPEED CTR

High Speed CTR 2CH500KHz 02.00

Note: Modules labeled with PV and SV designations are newer than 02.00 marked models

360 35013379 02 October 2007



Users are cautioned that beginning with V2.00 modules, if a quadrature type encoder is used to provide count input and Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 1 and 2, bits 9 or 10, are set to 1, the module will detect all edges. The result is four times the rate sample value as would be accumulated with an equivalent pulse encoder input. In the example in the above paragraph, the rate sample would be equal to 240.

Encoder type selection is set using Command 1, CONFIGURE (01XX), 4X+1 register, bits 9 or 10 (see the description of Command 1 in this section).

If the Encoder Type select bits are set to 0, either type of encoder will produce the Rate Sample, as did versions of the module that were lower than V02.00.

35013379 02 October 2007 361



Wiring Diagram 1 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 1.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+ –

+ –

+ –

. . . .INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

INPUT 1A+

INPUT 1B+

PRESET 1C+

OUTPUT RESET 10+

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

VREFOV

24 Vdc

Pulse

VREF

362 35013379 02 October 2007



Note: Notes on Wiring Diagram 1.1. Single ended pulse input.2. Constant enable.3. Count up.4. Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays.5. Counter 2 not used.6. N/C = Not Connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 363




OUTPUT RESET 10+

PRESET 1C+

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+ –

INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

INPUT 1A+

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

24 Vdc

–+

INPUT B1+ Z

AA

Z

1.8 VMINA+A-

+

–VREF

364 35013379 02 October 2007



Note: Notes on Wiring Diagram 21. Differential pulse input.2. Constant enable.3. Zero pulse resets outputs 1A and 1B.4. Count up.5. Outputs a and B operate relays.6. Counter 2 not used.7. N/C = Not Connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 365




OUTPUT RESET 10+

PRESET 1C+

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+ –

+ –

+

–INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

INPUT 1A+

INPUT 1B+

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

24 Vdc

VREF

A

B

INPUT 2A+

366 35013379 02 October 2007



Note: Notes on Wiring Diagram 31. Quadrature input.2. Constant enable.3. Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays.4. Counter 2 not used5. N/C = Not Connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 367




OUTPUT RESET 10+

PRESET 1C+

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+ –

INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

INPUT 1A+

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

24 Vdc

–

+INPUT 1B+ Z

AA

Z

+

VREF

B

B

–

368 35013379 02 October 2007



Note: Notes on Diagram 4.Differential quadrature input.Constant enable.Zero pulse reset Output 1A and 1B.Output 1A and 1B operate relays.Counter 2 not used.N/C = Not Connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 369



Module Zoom Selections

Push <Enter> to display and select applicable parameters.

The following figure shows the module zoom selections.

The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x16, Output Assert Mode:

Counter X Maximum Count: * 0 DEC

Counter X Setpoint (alarm): * 0 DEC

Time Output On: 0 DEC milliseconds (16383 maximum)

Terminal Count

Latched Terminal

Timed Setpoint

Timed Terminal

Counter X output modeOutput Coil X mode:

2x16 Assert Outp

2x32 Assert Outp

2x32 No Assert

Rate Sample Mode

Number of counters, output assertion:

Setpoint

Latched Setpoint

Off

On

Comm lost output assert override:

2x16 w/ Output

2x32 w/ Output

2x32 No Output

Rate Sample Mode


Incremental

Quadrature

Counter X mode control:

Note: When OFF, outputs aredisabled when communicationwith the bus is lost. When ON,outputs continue to operate asconfigured.

Note: Only one outputshould be configuredas timed (Setpoint orTerminal).

370 35013379 02 October 2007



*Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module.

The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 1x32, Output Assert Mode:


The following figure shows the number of counters in output assertion.

The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x32, No Output Assert Mode:


The next line applies ONLY IF the counter is in Rate Sample Mode:

Counter 2 Maximum Count: * 0 DEC

Counter 2 Setpoint (alarm): * 0 DEC

Time Output On: 0 DEC milliseconds (16383 maximum)

Words 2-3: Counter 1 Maximum Count: * 0 DEC

Words 4-5: Counter 2 Maximum Count: * 0 DEC

Rate Sample Timer X: 0 DEC milliseconds (65535 maximum)

Note: Any Number of counters, output assertion selection pop-up menu can be used as they reflect each other.

2x16 Assert Outp

2x32 Assert Outp

2x32 No Assert

Rate Sample Mode


35013379 02 October 2007 371



140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module

Overview The EHC20200 offers the following features:

Two counters that operate in pulse or quadrature mode and accept singleended or differential inputs.

Two FET output switches for each counter — turned on when the counter reaches programmed setpoint or maximum values, and turned off by changes in counter values, software commands, or a hard wired reset from the field.

Refer to I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200, p. 342 for configuring and operating the EHC20200 with Modsoft.

EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module

The following figure shows the EHC20200 Two Channel High Speed Counter module.

140EHC 202 0010 80 vdc out

X X



Removable Door




LED Area

23

5

7

9

1113

15

17

19

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

1

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

21

372 35013379 02 October 2007



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the EHC20200 High Speed Counter module.

Specifications

Number of Channels 2 with 2 outputs each

LEDs Active

F

8 Input Status LEDs (Green)

4 Output Status LEDs (Green)

Count Frequency 500 kHz max with differential inputs. 250 kHz max with single-ended inputs.

Registers Required 6 Words In6 Words Out

Data Formats

16 Bit Counter 65,535 Decimal

32 Bit Counter 2,147,483,647 Decimal

Discrete Inputs

Operation Modes IncrementalQuadrature

Max Continuous Input Voltage 30 Vdc

Input Threshold

Single Ended ModeVREF Supply+ 5 Vdc+ 12 Vdc+ 24 Vdc

On State (Vdc)

0 ... 2.00 ... 5.0

0 ... 11.0

Off State (Vdc)

3.5 ... 5.07.0 ... 12.0

13.0 ... 24.0

Differential Mode (Minimum) 1.8 Vdc

Input Resistance 10 k

Discrete Outputs

Output Levels (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B)

FET Switch ON Supply - 0.4 Vdc

FET Switch OFF 0 Vdc (ground reference)

Max Load Current (each output) 0.5 A

Output Off State Leakage 0.4 mA max @ 30 Vdc

Output On State Voltage Drop 0.4 Vdc @ 0.5 A

Output Protection 36 V transorb for transient voltage suppression

Miscellaneous

Isolation (Channel to Bus) 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

35013379 02 October 2007 373



Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B field power

Power Dissipation 4.0 W + 0.4 x total module load current


External 24 Vdc Power Supply 19.2 ... 30 Vdc, 24 Vdc nominal, 50 mA required, plus the load current for each output

Fusing Internal: 2.5 A fuse, (Part # 043503948 or equivalent)External: User discretion

Compatibility Programming Software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

Quantum Controllers: All, V2.0 at a minimum

Specifications

374 35013379 02 October 2007



Fuse Location The following figure shows the fuse location.

Note: Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuse.

140HEC 202 0010 80 vdc out

X

Fuse Location

35013379 02 October 2007 375




The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC20200 High Speed Counter module.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC20200 high speed counter.

LED Descriptions



F Red Indicates internal fuse blown or loss of output power supply

In 1 Green Counter 1 input

En 1 Green Enable Counter 1 input

Pre C1 Green Preset Counter 1 input

Res 01 Green Reset Output 1A, 1B

In 2 Green Counter 2 input

En 2 Green Enable Counter 2 input

Pre C2 Green Preset Counter 2 input

Res 02 Green Reset Output 2A, 2B

Out 1A Green Counter 1A output

Out 1B Green Counter 1B output

Out 2A Green Counter 2A output

Out 2B Green Counter 2B output

Active F

In 1En 1Pre C1Res 01Out 1A

Out 1B

In 2En 2Pre C2Res 02Out 2A

Out 2B

376 35013379 02 October 2007



Controlling the Module

Hardware inputs from the field can be used to:

Increment/decrement the input counters with serial pulses from encoders or other square wave sources.Set direction of count.Reset the outputs.

Hardware inputs from the field and software commands are used together to:

Enable the count input.

Hardware inputs from the field or software commands can be used to:

Preset the input counter to zero or maximum count.

Software commands can be used to:

Configure the counters for pulse (tachometer) or quadrature mode.Configure for 16 or 32 bit counters, with or without output assertion.Configure the module to operate in either count or rate-sample mode.Option for outputs to operate or not operate if backplane bus communication is lost (i.e., a fault condition).Option for outputs to switch on when setpoint and/or maximum values are reached.Define the setpoint and maximum count values.Define ON time for outputs.Disable outputs.Read the input counter totalizing or rate sample values.Retrieve the old (previous) input counter value after the counter has been preset.

35013379 02 October 2007 377



Timing Diagrams and Parameters

This section includes timing diagrams and parameters for the 140EHC20200 counter modules. Timing diagrams and a timing parameter table for the 140EHC20200 counter module are shown below.

The following table shows the EHC20200 timing parameters.

Timing Parameters Limits

Filter200 Hz

No Filter500 khz

Tdly1 Count to Output Assertion Delay (MAX) 4.8 ms 40 μs

Tdly2 Preset/Reset to Output Delay (MAX) 4.8 ms 40 μs

Tpw1 Count/Reset Pulse Width (MIN) 2.5 ms 1 μs

Tpw2 Preset Pulse Width (MIN) 2.5 ms 500 μs

Tst Enable/Reset/Preset to Count Setup Time (MIN) 2.5 ms 2 μs

Thold Enable/Reset to Count Hold Time (MIN) 2.5 ms 2 μs

Note: The timing parameter limits are measures at the module field terminal connector at the logic low threshold level.

Tpw 1

TholdTst

Tst

Tst

Tdly1Tdly2

Tpw 2

Tpw 1

Count Input

Enable

Preset

Reset

Output Assertion

EHC20200 Timing Diagrams

378 35013379 02 October 2007



Module Functions

The following functions apply to the EHC202 high speed counter module.

COUNT UP The input counter is reset to zero if the count direction input is UP and a preset (hardware or software) or Load Value command is sent to the module.

When counting in the UP direction, the input counter increments to the maximum value, the next input pulse sets the counter to zero and it continues counting back up to the maximum value.

COUNT DOWN The input counter is set to maximum count if the count direction is down and a preset (hardware or software) or Load Value command is sent to the module.

When counting in the DOWN direction, the input counter is decremented from the maximum value to zero. The next pulse resets the input counter to the Maximum value and the increment down starts again.

REMOVE ENABLE

This function disables the input counter, causing it to stop incrementing and hold the count accumulated prior to disabling.

OUTPUTS When configured in the count mode, outputs will turn on for defined times when setpoints or maximum values have been reached.

No output assertion in two 32 bit counter mode or rate sample.

Programmed ON time for outputs can be set for one channel, one output and one trigger point only.

In a running controller, latched outputs are turned off only by a hardware RESET input. If no reset is provided, the outputs latched on will turn off when the controller is stopped.

COUNTER PRESET

This is both a hardware and software function. In the event that both methods are used, the last one executed has precedence. An input counter will be automatically preset whenever a new maximum value or rate sample time is loaded.

COUNTER ENABLE

Both hardware and software enables are required for an input counter to operate. An input counter will be automatically software enabled whenever a new maximum value is loaded or a preset (hardware or software) is sent to it.

RATE SAMPLE VALUE

The rate sample value is held and may be accessed during count operations. The value read is from the last configured and completed rate sample interval.

QUADRATURE MODE

When the module is configured for quadrature mode operation, the counter requires encoder pulses on inputs A and B.

In quadrature mode, all input signal edges are counted. A 60 count/revolution encoder will produce a count of 240 for one shaft rotation.

35013379 02 October 2007 379



Miscellaneous Information

Field wire to Counter 2 inputs and outputs, when configured for one 32 bit counter with output assertion. The unused Counter 1 must have its + (plus) inputs connected to VREF+.

Input counts and parameters are not maintained in the module at power down. The rewrite of parameters at power up must be done with either user logic or Modzoom-type preset panel selections.

The 200 Hz filter for each counter can be activated by strapping the Lo Filter Sel terminal to the Return terminal. This function provides noise immunity for low frequency applications and can also be used for relay debounce.

Operation The following information describes the operation of various module functions.

Rate Sample To rate sample, the module must be:

Configured for pulse or quadrature mode.Configured for Rate Sample mode.Loaded with the Rate Sample time value.Enabled to count, using hardwired input and software control bits.

Pulse Count To count pulses, the module must be:

Configured for pulse or quadrature mode.Configured for counter display: two 16 bit, one 32 bit, or two 32 bit counters.Loaded with the maximum count.Enabled to count, using hardwired input and software control bits.

Pulse Count and Turning Outputs On/Off

To count pulses and turn outputs on and off, the module must be:

Configured for pulse or quadrature mode.Configured for two 16 bit or one 32 bit counter. Configured to assert or not assert outputs at the programmed count values when the module loses communication with the bus (fault condition).Configured to specify if outputs turn on at a setpoint or maximum count, turn on at those points for a specific amount of time, or remain latched. If latched, outputs can only be reset by a hard wired input. Loaded with setpoint values, maximum count values, and output assert time.Enabled to count using hardwired input and software control bits.

380 35013379 02 October 2007



Counter Rollover Examples for Pulse Input

Count is from 0 -> 10 (Maximum Count)

Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5

Output B turns on after Input Count = Maximum (Terminal) Count = 10

Count is from 10 (Maximum Count) -> 0


Output B turns on after Input Count = 0

Example 1 - Count Up

Pulse Input

Input Counter

Output A

Output B

Example 2 - Count Down

Pulse Input

Input Counter

Output A

Output B

Note: Outputs are not latched.

35013379 02 October 2007 381



Counter Rollover Examples for Quadrature Input

Count is from 0 -> 10 (Maximum Count)

Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5. Output B turns on after Input Count = Maximum (Terminal) Count = 10

Example 1 - Count Up

Input B

Input

Output A

Output B

Input A

Counter

382 35013379 02 October 2007



Count is from 10 (Maximum Count) -> 0


Output B turns on after Input Count = 0

Example 2 - Count Down

Input B

Input

Output A

Output B

Input A

Counter

Note: Outputs are not latched.

35013379 02 October 2007 383



Wiring Diagram Signal Descriptions

The following table shows the wiring diagram for signal descriptions.

Parameter Description/Usage

INPUT A Single ended or differential count input or Phase A for quadrature mode.

Single ended (active low only) uses Input 1A+ and/or Input 2A+.

Input 1A- and/or Input 2A- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.

INPUT B Direction level for non-quadrature devices or Phase B for quadrature mode.

Direction inputs for non-quadrature input devices are: Count Up = High Voltage LevelCount Down = Low Voltage Level

For single ended Input devices, only Input 1B+ and/or Input 2B+ are used. Input 1B- and 2B- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.

PRESET C Presets count register(s). Low level causes preset.

For single ended Preset inputs, only Preset 1C+ and/or Preset 2B+ are used. Preset 1C- and 2C- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.

OUTPUT RESET 0 Low level resets Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B to OFF if latched.

For single ended Reset inputs, only Reset 10+ and/or Reset 20+ are used. Reset 10- and 20- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.

ENABLE Low level enables counting.

For single ended Enable inputs, only Enable 1+ and/or Enable 2+ are used. Enable 1- and 2- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.

VREF Field input device power source connection. Also, connect any unused (+) inputs to the group VREF terminal or the one in use (30 Vdc max).

Group A = Terminal 17

Group B = Terminal 37

Group A and Group B VREF supplies can be different voltage levels.

LO FILTER SEL Enables the internal 200 Hz filter when connected to Return Terminal 39.

OUTPUT Internal FET switches connect the output supply wired to Terminal 40 to the Output 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B terminals at output assert times.

POWER SUPPLY External 24 Vdc power supply (+) connection. Required for the module interface and for Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B.

RETURN External 24 Vdc power supply (-) connection. Required for the module interface and for Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B.

384 35013379 02 October 2007



Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140EHC20200 wiring diagram.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+ –

+ –

+ –

......INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

LO FILTER SEL 2

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT 1A+

INPUT 1B+

PRESET 1C+

OUTPUT RESET 10+

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

VREF0V

24 Vdc

Pulse

VREF

35013379 02 October 2007 385



The preceding wiring diagram shows single ended connections for:

Refer to I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200, p. 342 for both differential pulse encoder input and single ended or differential quadrature encoder input wiring diagrams.

Terminal 1 Pulse encoder input (sinking device)

Terminal 3 Input 1B count UP direction

Terminal 5 Unused hardwire Preset tied high

Terminal 7 Output Reset tied high, not required; outputs not used

Terminal 11 Hardware enabled (software enable also required using predefined Modzoom or 4X register

Terminal 17 Required Vref+ connection

Terminal 21 Terminal 23 Terminal 25 Terminal 27 Terminal 31 Terminal 37

Counter 2 not used. These terminals must be connected VREF+.

Terminal 39 Required Output Supply Return

Terminal 40 Required Output Supply

386 35013379 02 October 2007



140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module

Overview The ASCII Interface Two Channel module is a Quantum communications interface module used to:

Input messages and/or data from an ASCII device to the CPU.Output messages and/or data from the CPU to an ASCII device.Bi-directionally exchange messages and/or data between an ASCII device and the CPU.


For more detailed information on use of the ASCII interface module, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module User Guide, identification number 840USE10800.

ASCII Interface Module

The following figure shows the ESI06210 ASCII interface module components.

140ESI 062 1010 80 vdc

X

Removable Door



Port 1RS232

Port 2RS232C

Reset

Port 1RS232CP

ort 1

Por

t 2

RS-232

RS-232 Port 2

LED Area

Reset Button

35013379 02 October 2007 387



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ASCII interface two channel module.

Specifications

Data Interface

RS-232C 2 serial ports (9-pin D-shell), non-isolated

Cabling (Maximum cable length 20 m shielded)

990NAA26320, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 12 ft. (2.7 m)

990NAA26350, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 50 ft. (15.5 m)

Firmware Specifications

Port Performance Burst Speed: 19.2 k baud each port. Continuous Speed: Application dependent

Depth of Nested Messages 8

Buffer Size 255 Input. 255 Output

Number of Messages 255

Maximum Message Length 127 characters plus 1 checksum

Memory

RAM 256 kb for data and program + 2 kb dual port ram

Flash-ROM 128 kb for program and firmware

Power Dissipation 2 W max


Fusing

Internal None

External User discretion

Required Addressing 12 Words In12 Words Out

Compatibility


Data Formats Supported Text, Decimal, Fixed Point, Nested Write Message, Set Register Pointer, Print Time/Date, Repeat, Space,

Newline, Control Code, Flush Buffer

Quantum Controllers All, Executive V2.0 at a minimum

Battery Backup Module 140XCP90000

388 35013379 02 October 2007




The following figure shows the ESI06210 LED indicators.

The following table shows the ESI06210 LED descriptions.

LED Blinking Sequence

The following table shows the blinking sequence of the F, Status, Error 1, and Error 2 LEDs.


R Green The module has passed powerup diagnostics


F Red The module has detected a fault

Rx1 Green Received data on RS-232C Port 1

Tx1 Green Transmitted data on RS-232C Port 1

Rx2 Green Received data on RS-232C Port 2

Tx2 Green Transmitted data on RS-232C Port 2

Status Yellow Status

Error 1 Red There is an error condition on Port 1

Error 2 Red There is an error condition on Port 2

ActiveR

Error 1

F

Error 2

Rx1

Tx1

Rx2Tx2

Status

LEDs and Blinking Sequence

F Status Error 1 Error 2 Description

F Status Error 1 Error 2 Description

OFF ON OFF OFF Programming mode

OFF OFF ON N/A Serial Port 1 incurred a buffer overrun

OFF OFF N/A ON Serial Port 2 incurred a buffer overrun

N/A Blinking (See the next table)

OFF OFF The ASCII module is in kernal mode and may have an error

35013379 02 October 2007 389



Status LED Crash Codes

The following table shows a table of Status LED crash codes.

Front Panel Connectors and Switches

The ESI has two serial ports which it uses to communicate with serial devices. The following is the pinout connections for the ASCII module serial ports.

Number of Blinks (one per second)

Code (in hex) Error

Steady 0000 Requested kernal mode

4 6631 Bad micro controller interrupt

5 6503 RAM address test error

6 6402 RAM data test error

7 6300 PROM checksum error (EXEC not loaded)

6301 PROM checksum error

630A Flash-message checksum error

630B Executive watchdog timeout error

8 8000 Kernal other error

8001 Kernal PROM checksum error

8002 Flash program error

8003 Unexpected executive return

1

2

3

4

59

8

7

6

ConnectionNo Connection

390 35013379 02 October 2007



RS-232C Serial Ports

The following table shows the pin number and description for the RS-232C serial ports.

The serial port interface allows the user to configure the module and to program the ASCII messages into the module. This is only activated when the module enters into its programming mode via the front panel push button.

Pin Number Signal Name Description

1 DCD Carrier Detect

2 RXD Receive Data

3 TXD Transmit Data

4 N/A Not Connected

5 GND Signal Ground

6 N/A Not Connected

7 RTS Request to Send

8 N/A Not Connected

9 N/A Not Connected

Shield N/A Chassis Ground

Note: The serial port is capable of communicating with either a dumb terminal or a PC using terminal emulation software (i.e., PROCOMM).

35013379 02 October 2007 391



Serial Port Setup When programming mode is entered, one of the RS-232 serial ports is set to a standard terminal communication’s configuration to communicate with the user on the programming terminal via a Modbus. This communication configuration consists of the following.

The serial port configuration has been set this way so that the configuration of the port is a known configuration and may or may not be the same configuration that is used when the module is running.

Front Panel Reset Push Button

A recessed push button on the front of the module is used to reset the module.

Baud rate: 9600

Data bits: 8

Stop bits: 1

Parity bit: None (disabled)

Keyboard Mode: ON (Character echo)

XON/XOFF: ON

RESET

392 35013379 02 October 2007



140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module

Overview The High Speed Latch and Interrupt 24 Vdc 16x1 Sink/Source Input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with 24 Vdc sink/source input devices.


For more detailed information on the use of a Quantum High Speed Interrupt module, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt I/O Module User Guide, part number 840USE11200.

High Speed Interrupt Module

The following figure shows the components of the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module.

X



Removable Door


Part #31000207Field WiringTerminal Strip


LED Area

23

5

7

9

1113

15

17

19

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

1

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

140HLI 340 0010 80 vdc

X

21

35013379 02 October 2007 393



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 16 isolated points

LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status

Required Addressing 1 Word In

Operating Voltages and Currents

ON (voltage) 15 ... 30 Vdc

OFF (voltage) -3 ... +5 Vdc

ON (current) 2.0 ... 8.0 mA

OFF (current) 0 ... 0.5 mA

Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 30 Vdc

Response

OFF - ON 30 μs (max)

ON - OFF 130 μs (max)

Input Protection 30 Vdc reverse polarity

Isolation

Point to Point 500 Vac rms for 1 minute

Point to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

Fault Detection None


Power Dissipation 2.0 W + 0.30 W x the number of points on


Fusing

Internal None


394 35013379 02 October 2007




The following figure shows the LED indicators for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module

LED Descriptions



1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned on.

Note: Due to the speed of the module, LED indications do not represent the state of the input signal, when the input signal is a short duration pulse.

ACTIVE

12345678

910111213141516

35013379 02 October 2007 395



Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the HLI 340 00 High Speed Interrupt module.

N/C

INPUT 4(+)– +

+ −

INPUT 1(+)2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1INPUT 2(+)

INPUT 3(+)

INPUT 5(+)

INPUT 6(+)

INPUT 7(+)

INPUT 8(+)

N/C

N/C

N/C N/C

N/C

N/C

24 Vdc

INPUT 9(+)

INPUT 10(+)

INPUT 11(+)

INPUT 12(+)

INPUT 13(+)

INPUT 14(+)

INPUT 15(+)

INPUT 16(+)

INPUT 1(-)

INPUT 2(-)

INPUT 3(-)

INPUT 4(-)

INPUT 5(-)

INPUT 6(-)

INPUT 7(-)

INPUT 8(-)

INPUT 9(-)

INPUT 10(-)

INPUT 11(-)

INPUT 12(-)

INPUT 13(-)

INPUT 14(-)

INPUT 15(-)

INPUT 16(-)

Sinking Field Device

Sourcing Field Device

24 Vdc

N/C

396 35013379 02 October 2007



Note: 1. Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used (the user should

consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment). Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end.

2. N / C = Not Connected

35013379 02 October 2007 397



140MSB/MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules

Overview The Quantum single axis motion (MSX) modules are incremental encoder (140MSB10100) or resolver and encoder (140MSB/MSC10100) feedback-only modules contained in a single-width housing. It works with servo motors that use Cyberline drives and other types of DC and brushless drives from other manufacturers.


For detailed information on the use of MSX motion modules, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140MSX10100 Single Axis Motion Module Reference Guide, part number 840USE10500.

MSX Motion Modules

The following figure shows the components of the MSX motion modules.

140MSB 101 0010 80 vdc out

X

Removable Door



ModbusConnector

Servo PortConnector

LED Area

398 35013379 02 October 2007



Operational Specifications

The following table shows the operational specifications for the servo.

The following table shows the operations specifications for communication.

The following table shows the operational specifications for the application program.

Servo

Commutation Update Rate 0.25 ms

Velocity Loop Update Rate 0.5 ms

Velocity Loop Bandwidth > 100 Hz

Velocity Range 0 - 6000 rpm

Position Loop Update rate 1 ms

Position Accuracy - Resolver +/- 10 arc minutes typical, +/- 15 arc minutes max

Position Repeatability - Resolver +/- 5 arc minutes max

Position Accuracy - Encoder Encoder dependent, 0.5 arc minutes max

Communication

Protocol Modbus

Address (set by software) 1 default

Required Addressing 6 Words In, 6 Words Out

Baud Rate (set by software) 300 - 19200 baud, 9600 default

Application Program

Execution Rate See note below

Storage 650 instructions

Note: A majority of the instructions typically take 1 ms to execute. The execution time of an instruction, though, is not constant. The execution time can increase due to factors such as: if the Sync Ratio Mode is on, how often the position generator must execute to plan out new moves, how many "whenever"s are enabled, and the number of sources requesting commands to be executed (e.g., backplane, internal program, Modbus port), etc. If timing is extremely critical to an application, actual time must be determined experimentally by running the actual application program.

35013379 02 October 2007 399



The following table shows the operational specifications for high speed input.

The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete inputs.

The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete outputs.

The following table shows the operational specifications for analog input.

High Speed Input

Position Capture Time 250 μs max

Isolation 500 V to system bus

Pulse Width 25 μs

Minimum Time Between Successive Captures

20 ms

Discrete Inputs

Number 7

Scan Time 1.5 ms


Discrete Outputs

Number 3

Update Time 10 ms max


Reset State 0 V, nominal

On State 24 V, nominal

Output Type Totem pole (sink/source)

Protection Short circuit, overvoltage

Fault Overcurrent detected

Analog Input

Number 1

Scan Time 15 ms

Data User configurable

Range +/- 10 V

Accuracy +/- 100 mV, plus offset

400 35013379 02 October 2007



The following table shows the operational specifications for analog output.

The following table shows the operational specifications for the resolver feedback (fully configured version).

The following table shows the operational specifications for the incremental encoder feedback.

The following table shows the operational specifications for compatibility.

Analog Output

Number 1

Scan Time 20 ms

Data User configurable

Range +/- 10 V


Resolver Feedback (Fully Configured Version)

Conversion Method Tracking

Resolver Style Transmit

Excitation Frequency 5 kHz

Excitation Amplitude Automatically adjusted

Excitation Current 120 mA

Loss of Feedback Detected within 40 ms

Incremental Encoder Feedback

Resolution 4 times line count

Signals A, B, Mark

Signal Frequency 200 kHz, up to 500 kHz with reduced noise immunity

Encoder Output style Differential, 5 V

Loss of Feedback Detected within 40 ms

Compatibility


Quantum Controllers All, V2.0 at a minimum

35013379 02 October 2007 401



Electrical Specifications

The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete inputs and high speed input.

The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete output.

The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog input.

The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog output.

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the resolver interface.

Discrete Inputs and High Speed Input

Input Impedance 3.5 kΩ

Inputs On 15 Vdc min

Inputs Off 5 Vdc max

Isolation 500 Vac to system bus

Discrete Output

Drive Capability 150 mA at user supplied. 19.2 ... 30 Vdc resistive

Protection Current limit, thermal


Analog Input

Resolution 10 bits

Input Impedance 30 kΩ

Offset +/- 50 mV


Analog Output

Resolution 12 bits

Drive Capability 3 mA

Offset +/- 50 mV


Resolver Interface

Reference 5 +/- 0.05 kHz, 1.6 ... 5.5 V rms. 50 mA drive capability

Sine / Cosine Input Impedance 3 kΩ

Resolution 16 bits to 300 rpm. 14 bits to 1350 rpm. 12 bits to 6000 rpm

Accuracy 10 arc minutes, typical, resolver dependent

402 35013379 02 October 2007



The following table shows the electrical specifications for the motor temperature input.

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the encoder feedback interface.

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the drive interface.

The following table shows the electrical specifications for power requirements.

Motor Temperature Input

Normal State Short circuit, 2 mA sink max

Fault State Open circuit


Encoder Feedback Interface

Input Range -0.7 ... 7 Vdc

Input Impedance 145 Ω, nominal

Differential Signals, High +2 V differential, min

Differential Signals, Low -2 V differential, min

Maximum Encoder Frequency 200 kHz square wave (55% ... 45% with less than 15 degrees of quadrature error)

Isolation 500 Vac to system bus with external power supply

Minimum Encoder Pulse Width 1 ms

Drive Interface

Drive Fault Input True high, TTL compatible relative to remote common, 10 K internal pull-up resistor

Drive Enable Relay Form C contacts. 120 Vac @ 0.1 A resistive. 30 Vdc @ 0.5 A resistive

Current Command Voltages +/- 10 Vdc

Current Command Summing Accuracy

0 +/- 0.1 Vdc

Current Commands 3 mA drive capability

Power Requirements

Main Power Input 5 V +/- 5% @ 750 mA (with no encoders or resolvers attached, output off)

Main Power Input 5 V +/- 5% @ 1000 mA (with maximum encoder and resolver load, outputs on)

Hot Swap Surge Current Less than 5 A

Bus Current Required MSB Module: 700 mA. MSC Module: 1000 mA

35013379 02 October 2007 403



Front Panel Indicators and Descriptions

There are 17 LED indicators visible on the front panel. The following figure shows the front panel LED indicators.

The following table shows the 140MSX10100 LED descriptions.

Front Panel Connectors

There are two connectors located on the front of the module: the Modbus Connector and the Servo Connector.




+ Lim ok Green Digital Input 1 active.

- Lim ok Green Digital Input 2 active.

Home Green Digital Input 3 active.

In 4 Green Digital Input 4 active.




Drv Flt Red Fault signal from drive.

Drv En Green Drive enabled.

Out 1 Green Digital Output 1 active.




Moving Amber Motor is moving.

In Pos Amber Motion is within the in position of the final target.

Active

Ready+ Lim ok- Lim okHomeIn 4In 5In 6In 7

Drv FltDrv EnOut 1Out 2Out 3ModbusMovingIn Pos

404 35013379 02 October 2007



Modbus Connectors

The MSX modules are equipped with a 9-pin, RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts to 9-pin connectors (AS-W956-xxx).

The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts for 25-pin connectors (AS-W955-xxx).

Servo Connector The MSX is also equipped with a 50-pin servo connector for communication with feedback devices.

Msx Modbus Port Pinouts to 9-Pin Connectors (AS-W956-xxx)

SignalMSxPin

ComputerPin Signal Function

TXDRXDGNDDTRDSRRTSCTS

12345678

13256478

RXDTXDGNDDSRDTRRTSCTS

No Connection ShieldSerial dataSerial dataGroundControl lineControl lineControl lineControl line

MsxModbus Port Pinouts for 25-Pin Connectors (AS-W955-xxx)

SignalMSxPin

ComputerPin Signal Function

TXDRXDGNDDTRDSRRTSCTS

12345678

123762045

RXDTXDGNDDSRDTRRTSCTS

No Connection ShieldSerial dataSerial dataGroundControl lineControl lineControl lineControl line

Note: The tables below show the 50-pin servo connector signals. Pin numbers correspond to both the MSB and MSC modules. When the signals differ from each other, they are shown separated by a slash (i.e., Pin Number 34, MSB/MSC).

35013379 02 October 2007 405



Server Connector Signals

The following figure shows the server connector signals (from left to right) 50 - 34.



50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34

N/C

N/C

/Ref

eren

ce O

utpu

t Low

N/C

/Ref

eren

ce O

utpu

t Hig

h

N/C

/Sin

e In

put L

ow

N/C

/Sin

e In

put H

igh

N/C

/Cos

ine

Inpu

t Low

N/C

/Cos

ine

Inpu

t Hig

h

Ove

rtem

p Lo

w

Ove

rtem

p H

igh

Driv

e En

able

Com

mon

Driv

e En

able

Con

tact

(NC

)

Driv

e En

able

Con

tact

(NO

)

Driv

e Fa

ult

Velo

city

- / P

hase

Com

mon

N/C

/ P

hase

C

N/C

/ P

hase

B

Velo

city

+ /

Pha

se A

33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18

Anal

og In

put

Anal

og C

omm

on

Anal

og O

utpu

t

Hig

h S

peed

Inpu

t

Auxi

liary

Inpu

t 7

Auxi

liary

Inpu

t 6

Auxi

liary

Inpu

t 5

Auxi

liary

Inpu

t 4

Hom

e(A

uxili

ary

Inpu

t 3)

Lim

it C

CW

(Aux

iliar

y In

put 2

)

Lim

it C

W(A

uxili

ary

Inpu

t 1)

Auxi

liary

Out

put 3

Auxi

liary

Out

put 2

Brak

e O

utpu

t(A

uxili

ary

Out

put 1

)

24 V

Com

mon

24 V

dc17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

N/C

(Not

Con

nect

ed)

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

Enc

oder

2 M

ark-

Enc

oder

2 M

ark+

Enc

oder

2 P

hase

B-

Enc

oder

2 P

hase

A-

Enc

oder

2 P

hase

B+

Enc

oder

2 P

hase

A+

Enc

oder

1 M

ark-

Enc

oder

1 M

ark+

Enc

oder

1 P

hase

B-

Enc

oder

1 P

hase

B+

Enc

oder

1 P

hase

A-

Enc

oder

1 P

hase

A-

406 35013379 02 October 2007



Rear Panel Switches

The MSX has an RS-232 serial port to connect the module to an IBM PC (or compatible) running the Modicon Motion Development Software (MMDS). A two-position Dip switch is located on the rear panel of the module (see the following illustration). SW1 is used to specify the module’s operating mode (984 or MMDS control). SW2 is used to specify the communication characteristics of the Modbus port upon power-up.

The following figure shows the two-position Dip switch.

The following table shows the settings for the Dip switch settings.

Switch Setting Function

SW1 *Closed MMDS control

Open PLC control

SW2 Closed Programmed baud

*Open Modbus default

*Factory setting

Note: SW1 and SW2 are open when they are switched away from the internal PCB of the module.

CLOSED OPEN1

SLIDE SWITCHAREA OF DETAIL

2

35013379 02 October 2007 407



140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable

Backplane Expander

With the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander you can add a second backplane to a local or remote drop. A custom communications cable, 3.0 meters maximum, provides the data communication transfer.

Backplane Expander Illustration

The following figure shows the components of the backplane expander.

X

Removable Door

Connector

Model NumberModule Description Color Code140

XBE 100 00XBP EXPANDER

408 35013379 02 October 2007



Specifications Specifications for the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander are below.

Words per Drop The following tables shows Words per drop.

Specifications

Number of Connected Backplanes

2

Maximum Distance 3 meters

Backplane Requirements

Size All backplane sizes – 3, 4, 6, 10 and 16 slot.

Slots used 1

Number of Backplane Expander modules allowed

1 per backplane

LEDs None.

Required Addressing The Backplane Expander will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC I/O map.

Power Requirements

Power Consumption 2.5 watts


Connector 37 pin D-type

Compatibility

Primary Backplane No restrictions

Secondary Backplane All types of Quantum I/O modules can be used in the secondary backplane, unless otherwise noted in the I/O

documentation.

Programming Software Modsoft V 2.6 or Concept V 2.2 at a minimum

Executive Firmware 140CPUX130X - Version 2.2140CPUX341X - Version 1.03140CPUx341xA - Any version140CPUx341xB - Any version140CPU42402 - Version 2.15140CRA93X0X - Version 1.2

Maximum words per drop

Local I/O 64 in /64 out

Remote I/O 64 in /64 out

35013379 02 October 2007 409



Cable Specifications

Specifications for the the three possible Expander Cables are below.

Basic Configuration

The backplane containing the the CPU or RIO drop adapter is designated the ‘Primary’ backplane and the adjacent backplane is designated the ‘Secondary’ backplane. Each backplane requires its own power supply.

Part Number Length

140 XCA 71703 1 meter

140 XCA 71706 2 meters

140 XCA 71709 3 meters

Note: Cable must be installed before powering up the backplanes.

Backplane Expander140 XBE 100 00

Cable endmarked “Primary”

Backplane Expander Cable140XCA7170X

Primary Backplane

Secondary Backplane

Backplane Expander140XBE10000

CPU or RIOAdapter

PowerSupply

PowerSupply

410 35013379 02 October 2007



POSSIBLE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE FAILUREDo not Hot Swap a Backplane Expander module into a powered backplane unless the communications cable has first been connected to the module.


CAUTION

POSSIBLE COMMUNICATIONS FAILUREThe cable is polarized. Ensure that the cable end marked "Primary" is connected to the backplane that has the CPU or RIO adapter.


CAUTION

HOT SWAPPING RESTRICTIONModules may be hot swapped when the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap modules in a Class 1, Division 2 environment.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or equip-ment damage.

WARNING

USER DEFINED OUTPUTSIf the primary backplane power supply goes OFF and the secondary backplane power supply remains ON the behavior of the outputs on the secondary backplane is not guar-anteed. Outputs could either go to off state or take their Time out state as defined by the user. If the power supply of the secondary backplane goes OFF and the primary backplane power supply remains ON , the IO Health bit of the modules located in this backplane could indicate a healthy module. It is recommended that all modules in the secondary backplanes, regardless of configuration, have their Time out state config-ured as USER DEFINED with VALUE 0. Additionally using the same primary power source for primary and secondary backplanes could reduce the effect of this issue.


CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 411



Backplane Expander Guidelines

The same 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander modules are used for the primary and secondary backplanes. The end of the Backplane Expander cable marked "Primary" always connects to the Backplane Expander module in the Primary Backplane.The system can use any Quantum type power supply. Each backplane can have a different type of power supply.Loss of power in the secondary backplane will not shut down the entire drop. Only modules located in the Secondary backplane will lose power.Backplane expander modules can be located in any slot in the backplane and do not have to be placed in corresponding slots in the primary and secondary backplanes.I/O modules that have downloadable executive firmware, such as the ESI module, are allowed in the secondary backplane except when downloading their execs. Executive firmware cannot be downloaded to modules in the secondary backplane.It may be necessary to update the CPU or RIO drop executive firmware. See Executive Firmware section in the Specifications table.The Backplane Expander will not be recognized by the programming panel software. It will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC I/O map.The Backplane Expander will allow configuration or I/O mapping of additional modules in the local drop containing a CPU or RIO drop adapter up to the drop word limit or physical slot address limitation.Option modules, such as NOMs, NOEs and CHSs must reside in the primary backplane.Any Interrupt module can be located in the secondary backplane, but the interrupt mode is not supported.The Backplane Expander module cannot be Hot Swapped into a powered backplane without first attaching the communications cable. To install the Backplane Expander in a powered backplane, first connect the cable to the Backplane Expander module, then mount the module into the powered backplane.

412 35013379 02 October 2007



140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module

Overview This section describes the Hot Standby Module 140CHS11000. The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I/O networks when downtime cannot be tolerated.


For more detailed information on the use of the Hot Standby module, refer to the Quantum Automation Hot Standby System Planning and Installation Guide, part number 840USE10600.

Hot Standby Module

The following figure shows the Hot Standby Module components.

Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place

it inside door)Part #31000264Removable door

Model NumberModule DescriptionColor CodeLED Display

Keyswitch

Program Update Button

140CHS 110 00CONTROLLER

Transmit Cable Connector

X

A/B Designation Slide Switch

Receive Cable Connector

35013379 02 October 2007 413



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Quantum Hot Standby system.




Specifications

I/O Type Quantum

Fiber Optic Communication Ports 2 (Transmit and Receive)

Compatibility


Quantum Controllers All, V2.0 at a minimum. (Check the version label of the top front of the module for the proper revision level.)

Bus Current Required (Typical) 700 mA


Ready Green If steady: Power is being supplied to the module and it has passed initial internal diagnostic tests. If blinking: Module is trying to recover from an interface error.

Com Act Green If steady: CHS 110 modules are communicating. If blinking: An error has been detected.

Primary Green Module is supporting primary controller.

Com Err Red Module is retrying communications or communications failure has been detected.

Standby Amber If steady: Module is supporting the standby controller, which is ready to assume the primary role if needed. If blinking: Program update is in progress.

Com Err

Ready

Primary

Standby

Com Act

414 35013379 02 October 2007



Error Codes The following table shows the number of times the Com Act LED blinks for each type of error and the codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex).

Front Panel Controls

The Hot Standby module has three controls on the front panel: a function keyswitch, a designation slide switch, and an update button.

Keyswitch and Program Update Button

The following figure shows the keyswitch and program update button.

The keyswitch has three positions: off line, xfer, and run:

Off line – Putting the key in this position takes the controller out of service.Xfer – When the key on the standby unit is in this position, the standby is prepared to receive a full program update from the primary controller. The update is initiated by pressing the program update button, which is located on the front panel between the function keyswitch and the cable connectors. If you turn the key on the primary unit to xfer, the system will ignore your action.Run – The switch should be in this position except when initiating a full program update or taking the module off line.


1 6900 error in additional transfer calculation

2 6801 ICB frame pattern error

6802 head control block error

6803 bad diagnostic request

6804 greater than 128 MSL user loadables

4 6604 powerdown interrupt error

6605 UART initialization error

5 6503 RAM address test error

6 6402 RAM data test error

7 6301 PROM checksum error

8 C101 no hook timeout

C102 read state RAM timeout

C103 write state RAM timeout

C200 powerup error

Off lineXfer

Run

35013379 02 October 2007 415



A/B Designation Slide Switch

The slide switch is used to designate the controller as A or B. The slide switch on one Hot Standby module in every pair must be set to A; the switch on the other must be set to B. The controller designated A will begin as the primary controller as long as it reaches the ready state before or at the same time as controller B. If the switches are set to the same position, the system will refuse to recognize the second controller at startup.The following figure shows the A/B designation slide switch.

A

B

416 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


15
Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides information on the Intrinsically Safe Analog Input/Output, and Digital Input/Output Modules.


This chapter contains the following sections:

Section Topic Page

15.1 Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information 418

15.2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules 422

15.3 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules 459

417

arr-thorp.com

Intrinsically Safe Modules

15.1 Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information

Intrinsically Safe Modules – General Description

Introduction The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically Safe series of modules. It provides a general description of intrinsic safety and how it is accomplished in Quantum modules, how they should be installed, precautions that should be observed, and wiring and grounding practices that must be followed.

Intrinsic Safety Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy limiting devices known as intrinsically safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical equipment located in the hazardous area.

Module Location The Quantum Intrinsically Safe family of modules are entity certified to be installed in safe areas to monitor/control intrinsically safe apparatus located In hazardous areas.

Intrinsically Safe Barriers

All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous areas. Opto-isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the Quantum backplane bus circuitry. The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe parameters are:

Intrinsically Safe Power Supply

DC/DC converters in Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules provide intrinsically safe power to field devices located in hazardous areas. No external field power is required where these modules are installed.

Installation of Quantum Intrinsically Safe Modules

Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard 140XBPOXX00 Quantum backplane. The modules can be installed in any slot position in the backplane. (The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module.)

Voc ≤ 28 Vdc and Isc ≤ 100mA

418 35013379 02 October 2007



Hot Swapping Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety standards.

Safe Area Wiring Practices

Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This can be accomplished by the following methods:

Separate blue wire ducts, raceways or conduitsGrounded metal or insulated partitions between the intrinsically safe and non- intrinsically safe wiring a separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the required separation.

Identification and Labeling

Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue color coding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it from all non-intrinsically safe modules.

All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically Safe Wiring" with a maximum spacing of 25 ft. between labels.

Wiring Type and Grounding

Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire gauge size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must be connected to the ground screws on the backplane, at the module end, and left open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area. The instruction sheet packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram applicable to that type of module.

HOT SWAPPING RESTRICTIONDo not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module.


WARNING

35013379 02 October 2007 419



Module Figure The following diagram is a view of a typical input or output module.

Agency Approvals

CENELEC Zone 1, Gas Group IIC, IIB, and IIACSA Class 1, Div 1, Gas groups A, B, C, and DFM Class 1, Div 1, Gas groups A, B, C, and DUL Class 1, Div 1, Gas groups A, B, C and D

140 xxx xx xx

X X



Removable Door

Customer Identification Label(Fold label and place it inside the door)Field Wiring

Terminal StripPart# 140XTS33200


LED Area

23

5

7

9

1113

15

17

19

23

252729

31

33

3537

39

1

4

6

8

10

12

1416

18

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

3840

21

420 35013379 02 October 2007



Intrinsically Safe Wiring Diagram

The following diagram illustrates a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module using a separate raceway to isolate its external wiring to the hazardous area. This is just one of the possible ways of field wiring the module. Other methods would include bundling and laying the intrinsically safe wires in the same wiring trough with the bundled non-intrinsically safe wires, with each bundle tied down and separated by minimum of two inches of air space through out the wiring runs.

Questions Regarding Intrinsically Safe Wiring Practices

The information concerning intrinsic safety wiring practices, is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requirements for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your site should be referred to the approval agencies listed.

PS CPU

STD I/O M O D U L E

STD I/O M O D U L E

I.S. M O D U L E

STD I/O M O D U L E

BACKPLANE

STANDARD I/OWIRING

INTRINSICALLYSAFE WIRINGLABELS

SAFE WIRING SAFE WIRING

HAZARDOUS

AREA

SAFE

AREA INTRINSICALLY

SAFE WIRINGIN SEPARATE BLUE RACEWAY

(Intrinsically Safe)

35013379 02 October 2007 421



15.2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on the intrinsically safe analog modules, 140AII33000, 140AII33010, and 140AIO33000.

What's in this Section?

This section contains the following topics:

Topic Page

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules 423

140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module 431

140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module 446

140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module 452

422 35013379 02 October 2007



I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules

Overview This section provides information on the I/O configuration of the intrinsically safe analog modules, 140AII33000, 140AII33010, and 140AIO33000.

140AII33000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AII33000 intrinsically safe analog input module.

I/O Map register Assignment

Register assignments depend on module configuration. This module may be configured as an RTD/Resistance or a Thermocouple input module.

35013379 02 October 2007 423



RTD I/O Map Register Assignments

When the 140AII33000 is configured as a RTD/Resistance input module, it requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.

Register 1 Channel 1 data








Register 9 Input Status Word

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Range warning on Channel 8 1 = Range warning on Channel 7 1 = Range warning on Channel 6 1 = Range warning on Channel 5 1 = Range warning on Channel 4 1 = Range warning on Channel 3 1 = Range warning on Channel 2 1 = Range warning on Channel 1

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 1

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 21 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 3




424 35013379 02 October 2007



Thermocouple/Millivolt Map Register Assignments

When the 140AII33000 is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt input module, it requires ten contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.









Register 9 Input Status Word

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Range warning on Channel 8 1 = Range warning on Channel 7 1 = Range warning on Channel 6 1 = Range warning on Channel 5 1 = Range warning on Channel 4 1 = Range warning on Channel 3 1 = Range warning on Channel 2 1 = Range warning on Channel 1






Register 10 Remote Junction Temperature

35013379 02 October 2007 425



I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte is used by the 140AII33000 module as follows.

Modsoft Module Zoom Selections

Use Modsoft’s Zoom feature to select the module input type and then configure the eight channels appropriate to the input type selected.

12345678MSB

Channel 1 out of range or short circuitChannel 2 out of range or short circuit




LSB

RTD/Resistance

TC/mV

1.0 Deg

0.1 Deg

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Temperature

Raw Value

Resolution (Temp):

Output Unit (Temp):

Value Type:

For RTD / Resistance Input For TC / mV Input

1.0 Deg

0.1 Deg

Celsius

Fahrenheit

On Board

Channel 1

Resolution (Temp):

Output Unit (Temp):

Cold Junction Compensator:

426 35013379 02 October 2007



Configure each channel (1 through 8) appropriate to the module input type selected.

140AII33010 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AII33010 intrinsic safe analog input module.

For RTD Module Input:

Enable

Disable

4 Wire

3 Wire2 Wire

Channel Enable/Disable:

4-Wire /3-Wire /2-Wire:

Pt100, -200 to 850Pt200, -200 to 850Pt500, -200 to 850Pt1000, -200 to 850Ni 100, -60 to 180Ni 200, -60 to 180Ni 500, -60 to 180Ni1000, -60 to 180R, 0 to 766.66 OHMR, 0 to 4000 OHMAPt100, -100 to 450APt200, -100 to 450APt500, -100 to 450APt1000, -100 t0 450

RTD Type (Pt, Ni, R, A Pt)

For TC / mV Module Input:

No

Yes

25

100

UndefinedJ, gain=25K, gain=25

E, gain=25T, gain=100S, gain=100R, gain=100B, gain=100

Thermocouple Type:Open circuit test:

Raw output, amplifier gain:

Yes

No

This channel installed:

(see Note)

Note: A gain of 25 produces readings with + 100mV. A gain of 100 produces readings with + 25mV.

35013379 02 October 2007 427



I/O Map Register Assignments

The 140AII33010 module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.

I/O Map Status Byte (Inputs)

The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for this module.


Use Modsoft’s Module Zoom feature to display and select the input range.









Register 9 Input Status Word1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 8 1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 7 1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 6 1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 5 1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 4 1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 3 1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 2 1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 1

87654321MSB

1= Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on one or more input channels

4 to 20mA 0 - 16,0004 to 20mA 0 - 40950 to 20mA 0 - 20,0000 to 25mA 0 - 25,000

Channel x Range Selection

428 35013379 02 October 2007



140AIO33000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AIO33000 intrinsic safe analog output module.

I/O Register Assignments

The 140AIO33000 module requires eight contiguous output (4x) registers assigned as follows:

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte for this module is as follows.









12345678Channel 1 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 2 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)Channel 3 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)



Channel 8 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

35013379 02 October 2007 429




Use Modsoft’s Module Zoom feature to display and select the module channel ranges and time-out state. Time-out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.

The following figure shows the time-out state for the Modsoft module zoom feature.

User Defined

Disabled

Channel X Time-out State: Last Value

User Defined Time Out Value is in Percentage:50.00% should be entered as 5000:Channel X User Defined Time Out Value: 0 DEC

4 to 20 mA 0 - 16,0004 to 20 mA 0 - 4,0950 to 20 mA 0 - 20,0000 to 25 mA 0 - 25,000

Channel X Range Selection:

430 35013379 02 October 2007



140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module

Overview The Quantum 140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module will interface with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs, which are software-configurable on a module basis with either RTD/Resistance or thermocouple/millivolt inputs.

When it is configured as an RTD/Resistance Input module, it supports 100Ω, 200Ω, 500Ω, and 1000Ω platinum (American or European) and nickel sensors. The module also allows any mix and match of sensor type or resistance inputs that can be configured by the software.

When it is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt Input module, it accepts B, J, K, E, R, S and T type thermocouples. The module also allows any mix and match of thermocouple or millivolt inputs that can be configured by the software.

35013379 02 October 2007 431



RTD/Resistance Module Specifications

Specifications for the Quantum140AII33000 module configured as an Intrinsically Safe RTD/Resistance input module are as follows.

RTD/Resistance Module Specifications

Number of Channels 8

LEDs Active (Green)F (Red)

1 - 8 (Red) Indicated channel is out of range - includes broken wire and short circuit conditions.

RTD Types (Configurable)

Platinum (American and European) – PT100, PT200, PT500, PT1000

-200° C to +850° C

Nickel – N100, N200, N500, N1000 -60° C to +180° C

Measurement Current

PT100, PT200, N100, N200PT500, PT1000, N500, N1000

2.5 mA0.5 mA

Input Impedance >10 MΩ

Linearity +/- 0.003% of full scale (0 ... 60° C)

Resolution 12 bits plus sign (0.1° C)

Absolute Accuracy +/- 0.5 °C (25° C)+/- 0.9 °C (0 .. 60° C)

Accuracy Error @ 25°C Typical: +/- 0.05% of full scale Maximum: +/- 0.1% of full scale

Input Filter > 100 dB @ 50/60 Hz

Isolation

Channel to Channel Channel to Bus

None 1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

Update Time (All Channels)

3-wire2 or 4-wire

1.35 sec.750 m sec.




Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire conditions

Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards

Fusing Internal-not user accessible

Programming Software Modsoft Ver. 2.61 or higher

432 35013379 02 October 2007



Thermocouple/Millivolt Module Specifications

The following table shows the specifications for the Thermocouple/Millivolt module.



LEDs Active (Green) F (Red)

1 ... 8 (Red). Indicated channel is out of range - Broken wire condition is detected.

TC Types and Ranges

Types J K E T S R B Ranges (°C) -210 ... +760-270 ... +1370-270 ... +1000-270 ... +400-50 ... +1665-50 ... +1665

+130 ... +1820

Millivolt Ranges -100 mV ... +100 mV*-25 mV ... +25 mV*

*Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges

TC Circuit Resistance/Max Source Resistance

200Ω max for rated accuracy

Input Impedance >1MΩ

Input Filter Single low pass @ nominal 20 Hz. Plus notch filter at 50/60 Hz

Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz

Cold Junction Compensation (CJC)

Internal CJC operates 0 ... 60° C (errors are included in the accuracy specification). The connector door must be closed. Remote CJC can be

implemented by connecting the TC (which monitors the external junction block temperature) to channel 1. Types J, K, and T are recommended for best accuracy.

Programming Software Modsoft Ver. 2.61or higher

Resolution

TC Ranges Choice of: 1° C (Default) 0.1° C 1° F 0.1° F

Millivolt Ranges +/- 100 mV range, 3.05 μV (16 bits) +/- 25 mV range, 0.76 μV (16 bits)

TC Absolute Accuracy (see Note 1)

Types J, K, E, T (see Note 2) +/- 2° C +/- 0.1% of reading

Types S, R, B (see Note 3) +/- 4° C +/- 0.1% of reading

Millivolt Absolute Accuracy

@ 25°C +/- 20 μV +/- 0.1% of reading

Accuracy Drift w/ Temperature 0.15 μV/°C + 0.0015% of reading/°C max.

35013379 02 October 2007 433



Field Wiring Field wiring to the module shall consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge shall be AWG 20 to AWG 12. In a 2-wire field configuration, the maximum field wire length is a function of the required accuracy. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

RTD/Resistance Input Wiring

When the Universal Input module is configured as a RTD/Resistance Input module, the maximum wire length (distance to a sensor) for a 3 or 4-wire configuration is 200 meters.

Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Wiring

When the module is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt Input module, the sum of thermocouple source or voltage source impedance and wire resistance should not exceed 200 ohms for rated accuracy.

Fixed Wiring System

The Quantum140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.

Isolation

Channel to Channel Channel to Bus

None 1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

Update Time 1 sec. (all channels)

Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire





Fusing Internal - not user accessible

Programming Software Modsoft Ver. 2.6 or higher or Concept Ver. 2.2 or higher

Notes: 1. Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC, TC curvature, offset plus gain, for module temperature of 0 ... 60° C. User-supplied TC errors not included. 2. For type J and K, add 1.5° C inaccuracy for temperatures below -100° C.3. Type B cannot be used below 130° C.4. All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output. This results in a reading 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected.


434 35013379 02 October 2007



Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment

The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.

The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding

Intrinsically Safe 140AII33000 CDF ABE

35013379 02 October 2007 435



Agency Approved Wiring Diagrams

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module configured with an RTD/Resistance connection.

I Source 1 (+) I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (+) V Sense 1 (-)


N/CN/C




N/CN/CI Source 4 (+) I Source 4 (-)










I.S. Module AII 330 00Blue Terminal Strip

ChassisGround

ChassisGround

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONZONE 1Group IIA, IIB, IIC

(SEE NOTE 1)

4 Wire RTD/ResistorConnection

(SEE NOTE 1)


(SEE NOTE 1)


Note 1. Only shielded twisted paircables should be used for connec-tions. Shields should be left open atthe field end and connected tochassis ground at the groundscrews on the backplane.

Note 2. Pins marked “N/C”(Not Connected) are notelectronically connected tothe module.

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONCENELEC CERTIFICATIONEntity Parametersper Channel:Vo = 15.5 VdcIo = 276 mA/chPo = 1.07 W/chCo = 0.508 μF/chLo = 466 μH/ch

31001362 Rev 00 140 AII 330 00 RTD Wiring Diagram

436 35013379 02 October 2007



The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a Thermocouple connection.

















NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

(See Note 1)

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONZONE 1GROUP IIA, IIB, IIC

Thermocouple TypeJ, K, E, T, R, S, B(See Note 2)

ChassisGround

ChassisGround

(See Note 1)

mV Source

(+)

(-)


Note 2. Thermocouple tip may begrounded, if required.

Note 3. Pins marked “N/C” (NotConnected) are not electronicallyconnected to the module.


CENELEC CERTIFICATIONEntity Parametersper Channel:Vo = 15.5 VdcIo = 276 mA/chPo = 1.07 W/chC0 = 0.508 μF/chLo = 466 μH/ch

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

31001362 Rev 00 140 AII 330 00 TC Wiring Diagram

35013379 02 October 2007 437



The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD/resistor connection.


















CHASSISGROUND

CHASSISGROUND

CHASSISGROUND

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONClass 1, Division 1Group A, B, C, D

(SEE NOTE 1)

(SEE NOTE 1)

(SEE NOTE 1)

Note 1. Only shielded twisted paircables should be used forconnections. Shields should beleft open at the field end andconnected to chassis ground atthe ground screws on the backplane.


Note 3. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes shouldbe used for mounting this module.




Note 1. Entity parameters perchannel: Voc = 15.5 V

Isc = 123 mACa = 0.47 ufLa = 1.0 mH

Note 2. Maximum non-hazardous area voltage mustnot exceed 250 V.

Note 3. Install in accordancewith Canadian Electrical Code,Part I for installation in Canada.

Note 4. Install in accordancewith the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70)and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 forinstallation in the United States.

Note 5. To maintain intrinsicsafety, shield for each cablemust be grounded and mustextend as close to the terminalsas possible.

Note 6. Intrinsically Safe (I.S)cables of one module must berouted separately from I.S.cables of another module.

Note 7. I.S. devices whenconnected to I.S. terminals must

La > Li + Lcable

Ca > Ci + Ccable

Isc < Imax

Voc < Vmax

satisfy the following conditions:

Note 8. This module is certifiedas a component for mounting ina suitable enclosure wherethe suitability of the finalcombination is subject toacceptance by CSA or aninspection authority having thejurisdiction.

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C


Notes related toCSA certificationfor this module


438 35013379 02 October 2007



The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection.


















ChassisGround

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONClass 1, Division 1Group A, B, C, D

(SEE NOTE 1)

(SEE NOTE 1)



Note 4. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes shouldbe used for mounting this module.

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONNotes related toCSA certificationfor this module.


Isc= 123 mACa = 0.47 μfLa = 1.0 mH






La > Li + Lcable

Ca > Ci + Ccable

Isc < I max

Voc < V max


Note 8. This module is certifiedas a component for mounting ina suitable enclosure wherethe suitability of the finalcombination is subject toacceptance by CSA or aninspection authority having thejurisdiction.

ThermocoupleType J, K, E, T, R, S, B(SEE NOTE 2)

Note 2. Thermocouple tip may be grounded if required.

(+)

(-)mV Source

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I for installation in

140 AII 330 00 TC Wiring Diagram31001362 Rev 00

35013379 02 October 2007 439



The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured as a RTD/resistor connection.

440 35013379 02 October 2007




















ChassisGround

ChassisGround

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONClass I, Div I Group A, B, C, DClass II Div I Group E, F, G

Note 1. Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end.

4 WireRTD/Resistor

HAZARDOUS LOCATION,

Connection

2 WireRTD/ResistorConnection

3 WireRTD/ResistorConnection

Note 2. Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected tothe Module.

Note 3. Only 140XBP0xx00 backplanes should be used formounting this module.

Note 4. The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsicallysafe apparatus with associated apparatus not specificallyexamined in combination as a system when the approved valuesof Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than orequal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus andthe approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatusmust be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsicallysafe apparatus plus all cable parameters.

Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ Imax

Note 5. Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW.For examples, switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc.Note 6. Wiring methods must be in accordance with NationalElectrical Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6“Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations Instrumentation Part I: Intrinsic Safety.”

Note 7. Control room equipment connected to associatedapparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms.

Note 8. All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meetsthe requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01.

Note 9. No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval.

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

Class III Div I

140AII33000 RTD Wiring Diagram

Class I, Div 2 Group A, B, C, D

Note 11. For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed incompliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation requirements of the ultimate application, includingaccess only by the use of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiringmethods.

31001362 Rev 01

This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel.Voc = 15.5 VDCIsc = 276 mA/ChCa = 500 nf/ChLa = 0.3 mH/ChPo = 1070 mW/Ch

Notes Related to FM Certification

Note 10. For Schneider Electric internal use only. For controlsheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

35013379 02 October 2007 441



The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection.

442 35013379 02 October 2007




















ChassisGround

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONClass I, Div I Group A, B, C, DClass II Div I Group E, F, G

Note 1. Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end. Thermocouple tips may

Note 2. Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected tothe Module.Note 3. Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used formounting this module.Note 4. The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsicallysafe apparatus with associated apparatus not specificallyexamined in combination as a system when the approved valuesof Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than orequal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus andthe approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatusmust be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsicallysafe apparatus plus all cable parameters.

Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ Imax

Note 5. Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW.For examples, switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc.Note 6. Wiring methods must be in accordance with NationalElectrical Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6“Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations Instrumentation Part I: Intrinsic Safety.”Note 7. Control room equipment connected to associatedapparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms.Note 8. All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meetsthe requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01.Note 9. No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval.

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

Class III Div I

be grounded if required.

Note 10. For Schneider Electric internal use only. For controlsheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

(-)

(+)

mV Source

ThermocoupleType J, K, E, T, R, S, B

140AII33000 TC Wiring Diagram

HAZARDOUS LOCATION,Class I, Div 2 Group A, B, C, D

Note 11. For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed incompliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation requirements of the ultimate application, includingaccess only by the use of a tool and provision for Div 2 wiring methods.31001362 Rev 01

Notes Related to FM CertificationThis IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connectionwith IS RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel.Voc = 15.5 VDCIsc = 276 mA/ChCa = 500 nf/ChLa = 0.3 mH/ChPo = 1070 mW/Ch

35013379 02 October 2007 443



The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD/resistor connection.


















ChassisGround

ChassisGround

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONClass 1, Division 1GROUP A, B, C, D

(SEE NOTE 1)

(SEE NOTE 1)

(SEE NOTE 1)


Note 2. Pins marked “N/C” (NotConnected) are not electronicallyconnected to the module.Note 3. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes shouldbe used for mounting this module along



NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONNotes related toUL certificationfor this module.


Isc = 123 mACa = 0.47 ufLa = 466 uH


Note 3. If the electrical parametersof the cable are unknown, thefollowing values must be used





La > Li + Lcable

Ca > Ci + Ccable

Isc < Imax

Voc < Vmax


N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C


with the following UL listed modules:140 CPU xxx xx140 CPS xxx xx

for Ccable and Lcable:Capacitance 60 Pf/ftInductance 0.20 uH/ft


444 35013379 02 October 2007



The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection.


















ChassisGround

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONCLASS 1, DIVISION 1GROUP A, B, C, D

(SEE NOTE 1)

(See Note 1)



NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONNotes related toUL certificationfor this module.


Isc = 123 mACa = 0.47 ufLa = 466 μH


Note 5. To maintain intrinsicsafety, shield for each cablemust be grounded and must extend as close to the terminalas possible.



La > Li + Lcable

Ca > Ci + Ccable

Isc < I max

Voc < V max


Note 2. Thermocouple tip may be grounded if required.

(+)

(-)mV Source

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

Note 3. If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values must be used for Ccable andLcable:

Capacitance 60 Pf/ftInductance 0.20 uH/ft

Note 4. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules:

140 CPU xxx xx140 CPS xxx xx


ThermocoupleType J, K, E, T, R, S, B(See Note 2)

140 AII 330 00 TC Wiring Diagram31001362 Rev 00

35013379 02 October 2007 445



140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module

Overview The Quantum 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module interfaces with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software-configurable. The module accepts 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 25 mA, and 4 ... 20 mA inputs. The module allows any mix and match of current input ranges that can be configured by the software. The module provides power to intrinsically safe transmitters located in hazardous areas.

Specifications Specifications for the Quantum 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module are as follows.

Specifications



1 ... 8 (Red), 1 per channelNote: This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition or an out-of-

range condition (4 ... 20 mA only).

Current Input

Linear Measuring Range 4 ... 20 mA0 ... 20 mA0 ... 25 mA

Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA internally limited

Input Impedance 100 Ω +/- 0.1% between V+ and signal terminals

Resolution 4 ... 20 mA, 0 to 4,095 counts4 ... 20 mA0 to 16,000 counts

0 ... 20 mA, 0 to 20,000 counts0 ... 25 mA, 0 to 25,000 counts

Available Voltage Terminals V+, V-, :~ 14.5 Vdc at 25 mA Terminals V+, Signal :~ 13.6 Vdc at 20 mA

Accuracy Error @ 25°C Typical: +/- 0.05% of full scale Maximum: +/- 0.1% of full scale

Linearity + 0.003% of full scale

Accuracy Drift w/ Temperature Typical: +/- 0.0025% of full scale /°CMaximum: +/- 0.005% of full scale /°C

Common Mode Rejection > 100 dB @ 50/60 Hz

Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 15 Hz, +/- 20%

Isolation

Channel to Channel None

446 35013379 02 October 2007



Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

Fixed Wiring System

The Quantum 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system, where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.


The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.

Channel to Bus 1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

Update Time 750 ms for all channels

Fault Detection Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode)



External Power Not required


Fusing Internal-not user accessible


Specifications


Intrinsically Safe 140AII33010 CEF ABD

35013379 02 October 2007 447




The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module.

V1 (-) V1 (+)

N/C Signal 1

N/C Signal 2

N/C N/C

V3 (-) V3 (+)

N/C Signal 3

N/C Signal 4

N/C N/C

V5 (-) V5 (+)

N/C Signal 5

N/C Signal 6

N/C N/C

V7 (-) V7 (+)

N/C Signal 7

N/C Signal 8

N/C N/C

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATIONZONE 1GROUP IIA, IIB, IIC

(SEE NOTE 1)


Note 2. A dropping resistor 100Ohms is across the signal and V(-)

Note 3. Three wire transmittersshould be provided power onlyfrom the module. An external


CENELEC CERTIFICATIONEntity Parametersper Channel:Vo = 23.8 VdcIo = 112 mA/chPo = 622 mW/chCo = 127 nf/chLo = 2.9 mH/ch

V2 (-) V2 (+)

V4 (-) V4 (+)

V6 (-) V6 (+)

V8 (-) V8 (+)

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. 3 WIRETRANSMITTER

I.S. 2 WIRETRANSMITTER

pins of each channel. V(-) is internally connected to I.S. ground.

power supply should not be used.

Note 4. Pins marked “N/C” (NotConnected) are not electronically connected to the module.

I.S. + 14.5 Vdc

31001363 Rev 00 140 AII 330 10 Wiring Diagram

448 35013379 02 October 2007



The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

V1 (-) V1 (+)

N/CSignal 1

N/C Signal 2

N/C N/C

V3 (-) V3 (+)

N/C Signal 3

N/C Signal 4

N/C N/C

V5 (-) V5 (+)

N/C Signal 5

N/C Signal 6

N/C N/C

V7 (-) V7 (+)

N/C Signal 7

N/C Signal 8

N/C N/C

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATIONZONE 1GROUP IIA, IIB, IIC

(SEE NOTE 1)

Note 1. Only shielded twisted paircables should be used forconnections. Shields should beleft open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at theground screws on the backplane.

Note 2. A dropping resistor 100Ohms is across the signal and V(-)

Note 3. Three wire transmittersshould be provided power onlyfrom the module. An external


V2 (-) V2 (+)

V4 (-) V4 (+)

V6 (-) V6 (+)

V8 (-) V8 (+)

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. 3 wiretransmitter


pins of each channel. V(-) is internally connected to I.S. ground.

power supply should not be used.

Note 4. Pins marked “N/C” (NotConnected) are not electronically connected to the module.

I.S. + 14.5 Vdc(See Note 2)

ChassisGround(See Note 1)

ChassisGround(See Note 1)

Note 5. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanesshould be used for mounting thismodule.

Notes related toCSA certificationfor this module.

Note 2. Maximum non-hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

Note 4. Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

Note 5. To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

Note 7. I.S. devices when connected to I.S. termi-nals must satisfy the fol-lowing conditions:Voc < VmaxIsc < ImaxCa > Ci + CcableLa > Li + Lcable


Note 8. This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suit-ability of the final combi-nation is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority hav-ing the jurisdiction.

Note 1. Entity parameters per chan-nel:

Voc = 23.8 VIsc = 112 mACa = 127nf

Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I for installa-tion in Canada.

Note 6. intrinsically Safe (I.S.) cables of onemodule must be routed separately from I.S. cables of another module.

35013379 02 October 2007 449



The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

V1 (-) V1 (+)

N/C Signal 1

N/C Signal 2

N/C N/C

V3 (-) V3 (+)

N/C Signal 3

N/C Signal 4

N/C N/CV5 (-) V5 (+)

N/C Signal 5

N/C Signal 6

N/C N/C

V7 (-) V7 (+)

N/C Signal 7

N/C Signal 8

N/C N/C

HAZARDOUS LOCATION

Class I Div I Group A, B, C, DClass II Div I Group E, F, G


V2 (-) V2 (+)

V4 (-) V4 (+)

V6 (-) V6 (+)

V8 (-) V8 (+)



I.S. + 14.5 Vdc @ 25 mA

Note 1. Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end.Note 2. Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected tothe Module.Note 3. Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used formounting this module.

Note 5. The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsicallysafe apparatus with associated apparatus not specificallyexamined in combination as a system when the approved valuesof Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than orequal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus andthe approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatusmust be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsicallysafe apparatus plus all cable parameters.

Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ ImaxNote 6. Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW.For examples, switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc.Note 7. Wiring methods must be in accordance with NationalElectrical Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6“Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations Instrumentation Part I: Intrinsic Safety.”Note 8. Control room equipment connected to associatedapparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms.Note 9. All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meetsthe requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01.Note 10. No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval.

Note 4. Three wire transmitters should be provided power only from the Module. External Power Supply should not be used.

Note 11. For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet,refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

Class III Div I

ChassisGround

ChassisGround

31001363 Rev 01140 AII 330 10 Wiring Diagram


Note 12. For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed incompliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation requirements of the ultimate application, includingaccess only by the use of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiringmethods.

Notes Related to FM CertificationThis IS field device should meet note 6 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 5 appropriate forconnection with IS Analog Current IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per channel.Voc = 23.8 VDCIsc = 112 mA/ChCa = 127 nf/CHLa = 2.9 mH/ChPo = 622 mW/CH

450 35013379 02 October 2007



The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

V1 (-) V1 (+)

N/CSignal 1

N/CSignal 2

N/C N/C

V3 (-) V3 (+)

N/CSignal 3

N/C Signal 4

N/C N/CV5 (-) V5 (+)

N/C Signal 5

N/CSignal 6

N/C N/C

V7 (-) V7 (+)

N/C Signal 7

N/CSignal 8

N/C N/C

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATIONCLASS I, DIVISION I GROUP A, B, C, D

(SEE NOTE 1)


V2 (-) V2 (+)

V4 (-) V4 (+)

V6 (-) V6 (+)

V8 (-) V8 (+)

(SEE NOTE 1)



I.S. + 14.5 Vdc



Note 5. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes shouldbe used for mounting this module along

Notes related toUL certificationfor this module.

Note 1. Entity parameters perchannel: Vcc = 24.3 V

Isc = 112 mACa = 127 nfLa = 1.5 mH


Note 3. If the electrical parametersof the cable are unknown, thefollowing values must be used





La > Li + Lcable

Ca > Ci + Ccable

Isc < I max

Vcc < V max


Note 2. A dropping resistor of 100Ohms is across the Signal and V

with the following UL listed modules:140 CPU xxx xx140 CPS xxx xx

for Ccable and Lcable:Capacitance 60Pf/ftInductance 0.20 uH/ft

(-) pins of each channel. V (-) isinternally connected to I.S. ground.

Note 3. Three Wire Transmitters should be provided power onlyfrom the module. An externalpower supply should not be used.

(See Note 2)


35013379 02 October 2007 451



140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module

Overview The Quantum 140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module controls and monitors current loops in intrinsically safe applications. The module provides 8 dual-ended output channels that are referenced over sense resistors to a single Common. The output ranges are 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA. This module detects broken wires on a per-channel basis indicates their location on the front panel LEDs, and transmits the status to the PLC.

452 35013379 02 October 2007



Specifications Specifications for the Quantum 140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module are as follows.

Specifications



1 ... 8 (Green) - Module output switched ON1 ... 8 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated Channel

(4 ... 20 mArange)

Loop Resistance 500 ohms maximum

Ranges 4 ... 20 mA (0 to 4095) 4 ... 20 mA (0 to 16000)0 ... 20 mA (0 to 20000) 0 ... 25mA (0 to 25000)

Resolution 15 bits within 4 ... 20 mA

Accuracy Drift w/Temperature

Typical: 40 PPM/°C. Maximum: 70 PPM/°C

Accuracy Error @ 25°C +/- 0.2% of full scale

Linearity +/- 1 LSB

Isolation


Channel to Bus 1780 Vac RMS for 1 minute

Update Time 4 ms - for all channels

Settling Time 1 ms to +/- 0.1% of the final value

Bus Current Required 2.5 Amp



Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA range

Voltmeter Monitor Specifications

Range 0.250 ... 1.250 V

Scaling (Volts) = (mA) x 0.0625

Output Impedance 62.5 W Typical

Wire Length 1 m maximum



Programming Software Modsoft Ver. 2.61or higher

VOUT ILOOP

35013379 02 October 2007 453



Field Wiring Field wiring to the module should consist of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge should be AWG 30 to AWG 18. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

Fixed Wiring System

The Quantum140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.





Intrinsically Safe 140AIO33000 CEF ABD

454 35013379 02 October 2007





Output 1 (-) Monitor 1 (-)

N/COutput 1(+)


N/COutput 3 (-) Monitor 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (+) Monitor 4 (-)

N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/COutput 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)N/C

Output 6 (-)

Output 6 (+)N/C

Output 7 (-)

Output 7 (+)N/C

Output 8 (-)

Output 8 (+)N/C

N/C

I.S. Module AIO 330 00Blue Terminal Strip

ChassisGround


(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. Field DeviceR-500 OHMS Max


Note 1. Only shielded cablesshould be used for connections.Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module

Note 5. Pins marked “N/C” (NotConnected) are not electronically

end.

connected to the module.

Note 6. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanesshould be used for mountingthis module.



Isc = 93 mACa = 71 nfLa = 2.0 mH


Note 3. Install in accordancewith Canadian Electrical Code,Part I for installation in Canada.



Note 6. Intrinsically Safe (I.S.)cables of one module must berouted separately from I.S.cables of another module.

Note 7. I.S. devices whenconnected to I.S. terminals mustsatisfy the following conditions:Vcc < VmaxIsc < ImaxCa > Ci + CcableLa > Li + Lcable

Note 8. This module is certifiedas a component for mounting ina suitable enclosure where thesuitability of the finalcombination is subject toacceptance by CSA or aninspection authority having thejurisdiction.

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (+)

Output 4 (+)

Monitor 5 (-)

Monitor 6 (-)

Monitor 7 (-)

Monitor 8 (-)

V

(SEE NOTE 2)

Note 2. More than one devicecan be connected as long asthey have differential input andtotal input resistance is lessthan 500 ohms.

Note 3. The voltmeter isoptional and reads voltageproportional to the current.Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter.

Note 4. Unused channels willshow open loop unless outputsare shorted as shown forchannel 8.

(See Note 3)

140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram31001364 Rev 00

35013379 02 October 2007 455





N/COutput 2 (-)

Output 1 (+)

N/COutput 3 (-)

Output 2 (+)

N/COutput 4 (-)

N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

Output 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)N/C

Output 6 (-)

Output 6 (+)N/C

Output 7 (-)

Output 7 (+)

Output 8 (+)

N/C

I.S. ModuleTerminal Strip

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONCLASS I DIV I GROUP A, B, C, DCLASS II DIV I GROUP E, F, G


Note 1. Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should

Note 3. Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mountingthis module.

Note 6. The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safeapparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined incombination as a system when the approved values of Voc andIsc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and

CLASS III DIV I

be left open at the field elnd and connected to chassis ground at theModule end. Note 2. Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values ofCa and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or aregreater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus allcable parameters.Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ ImaxNote 7. Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate

nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW. For examplesswitches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc. Note 8. Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical

Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP12.6, “Wiring Practicesfor Hazardous (classified) Locations InstrumentationPart I: Intrinsic Safety”.Note 9. Control room equipment connected to associated apparatusshould not use or generate more than 250Vrms.Note 10. All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets therequirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01Note 11. No revisions to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval.


Monitor 2 (+)

Monitor 3 (-)

Output 3 (+)

Monitor 4 (-)

Output 4 (+)

Monitor 5 (-)

Monitor 6 (-)

Monitor 7 (-)

Monitor 8 (-)N/C

Output 8 (-)

N/C

N/C

Note 4. More than one device can be connected in series as long as

they have differential input and total load resistance is lessthan 500 ohms.Note 5. Voltmeter is an optional Voltmeter shown to read voltage

proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limitedto 1 meter.Unused channels will show Open Loop unless shorted asShown in Channel 8.

V


Note 13. For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed in140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram31001364 Rev 01 requirements of the ultimate application, including access only by the use

of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods.

compliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation

This IS field device should meet Note 7 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 6 appropriate forconnection with IS RTD/TC IN Module with concept parameters listed below. The entity parameters listed are per channel.

Voc = 29.5 VDCIsc = 94 mA/ChCa = 68 nf/ChLa = 4.2 mH/ChPo = 520 mW/Ch

Note 12. For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, referto 19-100986 Rev 1.

456 35013379 02 October 2007





N/COutput 1(+)


N/C


N/C


N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/COutput 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)N/C

Output 6 (-)

Output 6 (+)N/C

Output 7 (-)

Output 7 (+)N/COutput 8 (-)

Output 8 (+)N/C

N/C


ChassisGround


(SEE NOTE 1)





end.


Note 6. Only Quantum140 XBP 0X 00 backplanesshould be used for mountingthis module along with the



Isc = 93 mACa = 68 nfLa = 2.0 mH






Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (+)

Output 4 (+)

Monitor 5 (-)

Monitor 6 (-)

Monitor 7 (-)

Monitor 8 (-)

V

(SEE NOTE 2)




(See Note 3)

following UL listed modules:140 CPU xxx xx140 CPS xxx xx

Note 3. If the electricalparameter of the cable areunknown, the following valuesmust be used for Ccable andLcable:


140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram31001364 Rev 00

35013379 02 October 2007 457





N/COutput 1(+)


N/COutput 3 (-) Monitor 3 (-)

N/C


N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/COutput 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)N/C

Output 6 (-)

Output 6 (+)N/C

Output 7 (-)

Output 7 (+)N/C

Output 8 (-)

Output 8 (+)N/C

N/C


ChassisGround


(SEE NOTE 1)





end.


CENELEC CERTIFICATIONEntity Parametersper channel:

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (+)

Output 4 (+)

Monitor 5 (-)

Monitor 6 (-)

Monitor 7 (-)

Monitor 8 (-)

V

(SEE NOTE 2)




(See Note 3)

Vo = 29.5 VdcIo = 94 mA/ChPo = 520 mW/chCo = 68 nf/chLo = 4.2 mH/ch

31001364 Rev 00AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram (Analog Output)

458 35013379 02 October 2007



15.3 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on the intrinsically safe discrete modules, 140DII33000 and 140DIO33000.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules 460

140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module 462

140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module 468

35013379 02 October 2007 459



I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules

Overview This section provides information on the I/O configuration of the intrinsically safe discrete modules, 140DII33000 and 140DIO33000.

Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module

The following is the intrinsically safe discrete input module:

140DII33000 (DC, intrinsic safe)


This 8-point input module can be configured as either 8 contiguous discrete input (1x) references or as one 3x register. The following figure shows an I/O map register.

I/O Map Status Byte

There is no I/O map status byte associated with this module.


Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. The following figure shows the input type display.

2 3 4 5 6 7 81

I/O MAPPING RULESWhen I/O mapping input modules using discrete (1x) references in remote drops, users should not split discrete words between drops. The lowest discrete reference for a drop should start on a word boundary.


CAUTION

BIN

BCD

input Type:

460 35013379 02 October 2007



Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module

The following shows the 8-point discrete output module:

140DIO33000 (DC, Intrinsic Safe


The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete output (0x) references or as one output (4x) register. The following figure shows the format for the output modules.

I/O Map Status Byte

There is no I/O Map status byte associated with this module.


Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and timeout state for the module. Timeout state isassumed when system control of the module is stopped.

2 3 4 5 6 7 81

Output Type:

Timeout State:

User Defined Timeout State Points 1- 8: 00000000

BIN

BCD

Last Value

User Defined

35013379 02 October 2007 461



140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module

Overview The Quantum 140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input module provides safe power to dry contact closures e.g., push buttons, selector switches, float switches, flow switches, limit switches, etc., in a hazardous area, and receives the proportional current to indicate an on/off state. The received current is converted into digital signals that is transferred to the PLC.

Specifications The following table provides specifications for the DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 8

LEDs Active (Green)1 ... 8 (Green) – Indicates point status


No load voltage (between input + and input -)

8 Vdc

Short circuit current 8 mA

Switching point 1.2 mA ... 2.1 mA

Switching hysteresis 0.2 mA

Switching Frequency 100 Hz maximum

Response

OFF-ON 1 ms

ON-OFF 1 ms

Isolation


Channel to Bus 1780 Vac, 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

Internal Resistance 2.5 KΩ

Input Protection Resistor limited








462 35013379 02 October 2007



Fixed Wiring System

The DII33000module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.

Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.





Intrinsically Safe 140 DII 330 00 CDE ABF

35013379 02 October 2007 463





Input 1 (+) Input 1 (-)

N/C N/CInput 2 (+) Input 2 (-)

N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C





N/C N/C

I.S. ModuleDII 330 00Blue Terminal Strip

ChassisGround


(SEE NOTE 1)I.S. +8 Vdc

I.S. FieldDevice


Note 1: Only shielded cablesshould be used for connections.Shields should be left open at thefield end and connected to chassisground at the ground screws on

Note 2: Pins marked “N/C” are notelectronically connected to themodule.

Note 3: All “INPUT (- )S” areconnected together internally.

CENELEC CERTIFICATIONEntity Parametersper Channel:Vo = 9.6 VdcIo = 80 mA/chPo = 192 mW/chCo = 450 nf/chLo = 694 microH/ch

the backplane.

31001365 Rev 00 140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram

464 35013379 02 October 2007





N/C N/C


N/C N/C



N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


ChassisGround


(See Note 1)

I.S. FieldDevice


Note 1. Only shielded cablesshould be used for connections.Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground


I.S. +8 Vdc

screws on the backpalne.


Note 3. Only Quantum140 XBP oX oo backplanesshould be used for mountingthis module.


Note 1. Entity parameters permodule: Voc = 9.6 V

Isc = 80 mACa = 450 nfLa = 694 mH


Note 3. Install in accordancewith Canadian Electrical Code,Part I, for installation in Canada.




Note 7. I.S. devices whenconnected to I.S. terminals mustsatisfy the following conditions:Voc < VmaxIsc < ImaxCa > Ci + CcableLa > Li + Lcable


N/C N/C

140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram31001365 Rev 00

35013379 02 October 2007 465





N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


ChassisGround


I.S. FieldDevice

Note 1: Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should

Note 3: Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mountingthis module.

I.S. +8 Vdc

Note 4: The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safeapparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined incombination as a system when the approved values of Voc andIsc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and

CLASS III DIV I

be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at theModule end. Note 2: Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values ofCa and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or aregreater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus allcable parameters.Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ ImaxNote 5: Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate

nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW. For examplesswitches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, Etc. Note 6: Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical

Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP12.6, “Wiring Practicesfor Hazardous (classified) Locations InstrumentationPart I: Intrinsic Safety”.Note 7: Control room equipment connected to associated apparatusshould not use or generate more than 250Vrms.Note 8: All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets therequirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01Note 9: No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval.

N/C N/C

140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram31001365 Rev 01


Note 10. For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, referto 19-100986 Rev 1.Note 11. For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed in

requirements of the ultimate application, including access only by the useof a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods.


This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved or connection with IS RTD/TC IN Modules withConcept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel.Voc = 9.6 VDCIsc = 80 mA/ModuleCa = 450 nf/ChLa = 0.694 mH/ChPo = 192 mW/Module


466 35013379 02 October 2007




Input 1 (+)

N/C

Input 1(-)

Input 2 (+)

N/C

Input 3 (+)

N/C

Input 4 (+)

N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C


N/CInput 6 (+) Input 6 (-)

N/C


N/C


N/C

N/C

I.S. Module

Blue Terminal Strip

ChassisGround


(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. Field




screws on the backplane.





Isc = 80 mACa = 450 nfLa = 0.175 mH






Input 2 (-)

N/C

Input 3 (-)

Input 4 (-)


Note 3. If the electricalparameters of the cable areunknown, the following valuesmust be used for Ccable andLcable:

Capactance 60 Pf/ftInductance 0.20 uH/ft

Device

I.S. +8 Vdc

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

DII 330 00

140DII33000 Wiring Diagram31001365 Rev 00

35013379 02 October 2007 467



140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module

Overview The Quantum 140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output module switches intrinsically safe power to a variety of components such as solenoid valves, LEDs, etc., that are located in a hazardous area. This module is for use with sink devices only.

Specifications Specifications for the DIO33000 module are as follows.

Fixed Wiring System

The DIO33000 module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip, which is plugged into the module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 8

LEDs Active-1 (Green)1 ... 8 (Green) – Indicates point status

Output Voltage 24 V (open)

Maximum Load Current

Each Point 45 mA

Per Module 360 mA

Off State Leakage/Point 0.4 mA

Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF-ON 1 ms

ON-OFF 1 ms

Output Protection (Internal) Transient voltage suppression

Isolation


Channel to Bus 1780 Vac, 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.


Bus Current Required 2.2 Amp (full load)

Power Dissipation 5 W (full load)


Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety requirements



468 35013379 02 October 2007



Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.





Intrinsically Safe 140DIO33000 CDE ABF

35013379 02 October 2007 469





Output 1 (+) Output 1 (-)

N/C N/COutput 2 (+) Output 2 (-)

N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C





N/C N/C

N/C N/C

I.S. ModuleDIO 330 00Blue Terminal Strip

CHASSISGROUND


(See Notes 1 & 2)I.S. +8 Vdc

I.S. FieldDevice


Note 1. Only shielded cablesshould be used for connections.Shields should be left open at thefield end and connected to chassisground at the module end.

Note 2. Pins marked “N/C” are notelectronically connected to themodule.

Note 3. All “Output (- )s” areconnected together internally

CENELEC CERTIFICATIONEntity Parametersper Channel:Vo = 27.9 VdcIo = 121 mA/chPo = 840 mW/chCo = 84 nf/chLo = 2.2 mH/ch

31001366 Rev 00 140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

470 35013379 02 October 2007






N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C




N/C N/C


N/C N/C

N/C N/C


ChassisGround


(See Notes 1 & 2)

I.S. FieldDevice



Note 2. All negative outputterminals - Output 1 (-) thruOutput B (-) are internally


I.S. +24 Vdc @ NO LOAD

screws on the backpalne.

connected to I.S. ground


Note 4. Only Quantum140 XBP oX oo backplanesshould be used for mountingthis module.



Isc = 119 mACa = 84 nfLa = 1.0 mH


Note 3. Install in accordancewith Canadian Electrical Code,Part I, for installation in Canada.



Note 6. Intrinsically safe (I.S.)cables of one module must berouted separately from I.S.cables of another module.



31001366 Rev 00 140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

35013379 02 October 2007 471






N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C


N/C N/C

N/C N/C


ChassisGround


I.S. FieldDevice

Note 1. Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should

Note 3. Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mountingthis module.

I.S. +24 Vdc@ NO LOAD

Note 4. The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safeapparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined incombination as a system when the approved values of Voc andIsc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and

CLASS III DIV I

be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at theModule end. Note 2. Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values ofCa and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or aregreater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus allcable parameters.Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ Imax

Note 5. Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate

nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW. For examplesswitches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, Etc. Note 6. Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical

Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP1.2.6, “Wiring Practicesfor Hazardous (classified) Locations InstrumentationPart I: Intrinsic Safety.”Note 7. Control room equipment connected to associated apparatusshould not use or generate more than 250Vrms.Note 8. All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets therequirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01Note 9. No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval.Note 10. For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, referto 19-100986 Rev 1.

140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram


Note 11. For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed in

requirements of the ultimate application, including access only by the useof a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods.


31001366 Rev 01

Notes Related to FM CertificationThis IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connectionwith IS RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters LIsted below. The entity parameters are per Channel.Voc = 27.9 VDCIsc = 121 mA/ChCa = 84 nf/ChLa = 2.2 mH/ChPo = 840 mW/Ch

472 35013379 02 October 2007




Output 1 (+)

N/C

Output 1(-)

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (+)

N/C

Output 4 (+)

N/C

N/C N/C

N/C N/C


N/C


N/C


N/C


N/C

N/C

I.S. Module

Blue Terminal Strip

ChassisGround

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONCLASS 1, DIVISION 1Group A, B, C, D

(See Notes 1 & 2)

I.S. Field




screws on the backplane.





Isc = 119 mACa = 84 nfLa = 1.0 mH






Output 2 (-)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

Output 4 (-)

Note 2. All negative outputterminals—Output 1 (-) thruOutput 8 (-)—are internallyconnected to I.S. ground


Note 3. If the electricalparameters of the cable areunknown, the following valuesmust be used for Ccable andLcable:


Device

I.S. +24 Vdc @ NO LOAD

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

DIO 330 00

140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram31001366 Rev 00

35013379 02 October 2007 473



474 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


16
Quantum Simulator Modules
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides information on discrete and analog simulator modules.



Topic Page

140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module 476

140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module 478

475

arr-thorp.com

Simulator Modules

140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module

Overview The 140XSM00200 module consists of 16 toggle switches which are used to generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140DAI54000 and the 140DAI74000 AC input modules.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDWhen using this simulator module with the 140DAI54000 or 140DAI74000 input mod-ules, you should be careful not to come in contact with the supplied 115 or 230 VAC located at the bottom of the simulator module.


CAUTION

476 35013379 02 October 2007


Simulator Modules

16 Point Discrete Simulator Module

The following figure shows the 140XSM00200 16 Point Discrete Simulator module.

Note: Voltage source range is 24 ... 230 Vac.

X

140 XSM

002 00 Discrete Input S

imulator

(For use with 140D

AO

54000 & 140D

AO

74000)

SwitchPosition FunctionRightMiddleLeft

Momentary SignalOffConstant Signal

Power Connector LabelPower Connector

X

N L

1

234567

8910111213141516

35013379 02 October 2007 477


Simulator Modules

140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module

Overview The 140XSM010module is used for simulating 4 ... 20 mA field current loops used with current input Quantum modules. It provides two adjustable 4 ... 20 mA analog signals and one fixed 24 Vdc output. The simulator also measures and displays voltages from 0 ... 5 Vdc.

The simulator module includes the following:

An internal 24 Vdc power supply

A 0 ... 5 Vdc meter

Two 10-turn potentiometers

478 35013379 02 October 2007


Simulator Modules

Analog Simulator Module

The following figure shows the XSM01000 Analog Simulator module.

Note: The 140XSM01000 can be placed in any slot in the Quantum.

Note: The 140XSM01000 is not a functional module and should be used only for testing, simulating, and calibrating current input Quantum modules.

140XSM 010 00Analog simulator

X

Removable Door

X

XAnalog out

Voltmeter

Potentiometers

Color Coded Leads

Analog in1

Analog in2

35013379 02 October 2007 479


Simulator Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the XSM 010 00 analog simulator module.

Specifications

Voltage

Operating Voltage 100 ... 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz

Output Continuous 24 Vdc, 400 mA max

Operating Current 300 mA @ 120 Vac

Voltmeter Range 0 ... 5 Vdc

10-Turn Potentiometer Output Variable Current/Voltage

4 ... 20 mA1 ... 5 Vdc

Internal Fusing None

Bus Current Required None

480 35013379 02 October 2007


Simulator Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140XSM01000 generic wiring diagram for the 140Axl03000 input modules, 140Ax002000 output modules, and the 140AMM09000 input/output module.

Red

Black

White

Blue

Yellow

Violet

Black

White

Green/Yellow

Analog Simulator140XSM01000

Analog Output

Analog Input

140XSM01000 Generic Wiring Diagram for the 140AxI03000 Input Modules, 140AxO02000 Output Modules, and the 140AMM09000 Input/Output Module

V+

–

– +L

N24 Vdc

115...240 Vac

IN 1

IN 2

0-5 Vdc

Monitor(Typical)

Input X(Typical)

Input Y(Typical)

1

2

7

9

10

1

2

3

5

6

7

Wiring Example

249Ohms

(Load forillustration purposes)

35013379 02 October 2007 481


Simulator Modules

Note: The preceding diagram shows a typical connection between the simulator, a 140ACI03000 input module, and a 140ACO02000 output module. The simulator provides a variable 4 ... 20 mA input to the analog in module. The input can then be read by a Quantum CPU, and, if required, outputted through an analog out module. For the output module to operate properly, the main current loop must be active, and, as shown above, 24 Vdc is supplied between terminals 9 and 10 with a 249 Ohms voltage drop resistor. (For a more detailed description of these modules, refer to Quantum I/O Modules, p. 489)

482 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


17
Quantum Battery Module
At a Glance

Overview The following chapter provides information on the battery module, its installations and replacement considerations.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module 484

140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module 485

483

arr-thorp.com

Battery Module

I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module

Overview The following provides information on the Battery module, 140XCP90000 (Battery Backup).


There is no I/O Map register assignment associated with this module.

I/O Map Status Byte

The two least significant bits in the I/O Map status byte are used as follows:


There are no Module Zoom selections required for this module.

8

Bat2 LowBat1 Low

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

484 35013379 02 October 2007


Battery Module

140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module

Overview This section describes the battery module, its installation and replacement considerations.

Battery Module The following figure shows the battery module components.

LED Area

Battery Slot 1(with battery installed)

Battery Access Tape(for removal/replacement)

Battery Slot 2(with battery installed)

Battery Access Tape(for removal/replacement)

Module NumberModule DescriptionColor Code

Removable Door

140XCP 900 00BATTERY BACKUP

CustomerIdentification

Label

Battery 1

Battery2

Changed:

Changed:

35013379 02 October 2007 485


Battery Module

Battery Backup The 140XCP90000 provides RAM backup power for expert modules. One non-rechargeable 3.6 V lithium battery is provided and is accessible from the front of the module in Battery Slot 1 (the upper slot) for easy removal when it is necessary to change it.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the battery module.

Note: Extended backup protection is provided when a second battery is installed in Battery Slot 2 (the lower slot).

Specifications

Battery Type C, 3 V lithium

Maximum Load Current 100 mA



Battery Part Number 990XCP99000

Note: The formula to calculate the life cycle of one battery in the battery module is:Life cycle = 1 / (4 x I) days where I (in Amps) is the total battery current load of all modules in the backplane.

486 35013379 02 October 2007


Battery Module




Battery Installation and Replacement Considerations

The following procedure describes the installation of a battery.

LED Descriptions



Bat1 Low Red Battery 1 voltage is low.

Bat2 Low Red Battery 2 voltage is low.

Note: The Bat1 Low and Bat2 Low LEDs turn ON when a battery is not installed, installed backwards, or in need of replacement.

Active

Bat1 Low

Bat2 Low

Step Action

1 Remove the insulating strip from the plus (+) pole of the battery before inserting it into the module. This strip is used to insulate the battery when on the shelf. Note: The battery installed in the module, when shipped, has the insulating strip in place. Remove this strip and re-install the battery before operation.

2 When single battery backup is required, install the battery in Battery Slot 1. The circuitry is designed so Battery 1 supplies the current until it is used up. Battery 2 (when installed) then assumes the load requirement without interruption. Battery status is indicated via LEDs and Modsoft status bytes.

3 When the controller is in operation, the batteries can be replaced at any time. Note: When the controller is powered OFF, battery replacement can be done without RAM loss only when a second functioning battery is installed.

35013379 02 October 2007 487


Battery Module

Installing/Removing a Battery

The following procedure describes how to install or remove a battery.

Step Action

1 Remove the insulating strip from the new battery.

2 If necessary, remove the old battery. Detach it from its housing (on the front of the module), by pulling the battery access strip (see below) until the battery pops out.

3 Replace it with the new battery using the reverse of the procedure in step 2.

Insulating Strip

Battery

Pull on this tape toremove battery. Donot use metallic tool.

CAUTION

Access StripBatt. install date

MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENTDo not use any metallic tools (i.e., pliers, screwdriver, etc.) when removing or replacing a battery in this module. Using tools during removal and replacement may cause per-sonal injury and/or damage to the battery and this module.


WARNING

MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENTEnsure that proper polarity is maintained when connecting and inserting new batteries into the XCP90000. Inserting the battery improperly may cause personal injury and/or damage to this module.


WARNING

HAZARDOUS WASTEUsed batteries (hazardous waste) must be disposed of according to local rules and regulations governing hazardous waste.


CAUTION

488 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


18
Quantum I/O Modules
At a Glance

Introduction The following section provides information on the Quantum Input/Output (I/O) modules.


This chapter contains the following sections:

Section Topic Page

18.1 Overview of I/O Modules 490

18.2 Analog Input Modules 506

18.3 Analog Output Modules 545

18.4 Analog Input/Output Modules 562

18.5 Discrete Input Modules 574

18.6 Discrete Output Modules 632

18.7 Discrete Verified Output Module 700

18.8 Discrete Supervised Input Module 710

18.9 Discrete Input/Output Modules 715

489

arr-thorp.com

I/O Modules

18.1 Overview of I/O Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides an overview of I/O modules used in Quantum.



Topic Page

Quantum I/O Modules 491

I/O Map Status Byte 504

490 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Quantum I/O Modules

Overview The following section contains specifications for input/output modules. Module descriptions include wiring diagrams, LED indicators and descriptions, illustrations of module figures, and, for discrete modules, true high/true low descriptions.

I/O Module The following figure shows the I/O modules and its components.

Note: When field wiring the I/O modules, the maximum wire size that should be used on a field wiring terminal is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.

Note: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140XTS00200) must be ordered separately. (The terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

140DDO 843 0010 80 vdc out

X X



Removable Door




LED Area

Fuse Cutouts

23

5

7

9

1113

15

17

19

23

252729

31

33

3537

39

1

4

6

8

10

12

1416

18

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

3840

21

35013379 02 October 2007 491


I/O Modules

Recommen-dations for Fitting Terminal Blocks to Discrete Modules

Recommen-dations for Fitting Terminal Blocks to Analog Modules

Quantum I/O LED Descriptions

These tables describe the generic LED blocks used in Quantum I/O modules. Descriptions of each type I/O modules’ unique LED configuration are included in the individual I/O module specifications in this section.

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASHBefore mounting/removing a discrete module,

cut-off the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators), anddisconnect the terminal block.

WARNING

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASHBefore mounting/removing an analog module,

make sure that the terminal block is still connected to the ground, andcut-off the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators).

WARNING

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

492 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions for Discrete 16 Point and Analog I/O Modules

The following table shows the LED indicators for discrete 16 point and analog I/O modules.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 16 point and analog I/O modules.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


F Red A fault (external to the module) has been detected.

1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

1 ... 16 Red There is a fault on the indicated point or channel.

Active F

91

102113

124

5

6

7

8

13

14

15

16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

35013379 02 October 2007 493


I/O Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions for 24 Point Input Modules

The following table shows the LED indicators for the 24 point input modules.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 24 point input modules.

LED Indicators and Descriptions for 32 Point I/O Modules

The following table shows the LED indicators for the 32 point I/O modules.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 32 point I/O modules.





Active F

91

102113

124

5

6

7

8

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24





Active F

91

102113

124

5

6

7

8

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

494 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions for Bi-Directional Modules

The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140AMM09000 bi-directional module.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140AMM09000 bi-directional module.

The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140DAM59000 and 140DDM39000 bi-directional modules.



F Red No power applied to the output group(s) or input out-of-range.

1 and 2 (left column) Green Indicates output is active.

1 and 2 (middle column)

Red Indicates output status: broken wire or bad field supply.

1 ... 4 (right column) Red Indicates input status: under/over range.

Active F

11

22

1

23

4

Active F

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

35013379 02 October 2007 495


I/O Modules

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140DAM59000 and 140DDM39000 bi-directional modules.

The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140DDM69000 bi-directional module.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140DDM69000 bi-directional modules.




1 and 8 (left columns) Green The indicated output point and channel is turned ON.

1 and 16 (right two columns)

Green The indicated input point and channel is turned ON.



F Red Over current condition on any point.

1 and 4 (left columns) Green The indicated output point is turned ON.

1 and 4 (middle columns)

Red The indicated output point has an over current condition.

1 and 4 (right columns)

Green The indicated input point is turned ON.

Active F

1 112 223 334 44

496 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions for Discrete 12 Point Modules with Fault Indication

The following table shows the LED indicators for the discrete 12 point 140DDO88500 module with fault indication.

The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication.



F Red An over current condition on any point has been detected.


1 ... 12 Red The indicated output point has an over current condition.

Active F

9 1110 2211 3312 44

9101112

5678

5678

35013379 02 October 2007 497


I/O Modules

Field Wiring Terminal Strip/Module Keying Assignments

Field wiring terminal strips and module housings are slotted on the left and right sides of the PCB card slot to accept keying pins (see I/O Module figure). The purpose of keying is to prevent plugging the terminal strip into the wrong module, once wiring connections have been made. Keying is implemented at the discretion of the user.

Primary keying is provided on the right side of the module, marked A through F (top and bottom positions are coded the same). Primary keying provides module class coding. Primary codes have been pre-defined (see the following chart).

Secondary keying is provided on the left side of the module, marked 1 through 6. Secondary keying codes are user-definable and may be used to identify module personality within module classes, or other unique site requirements.

Safety precautionFor maximum safety and protection, Modicon recommends that module key coding be part of the system installation procedure.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

498 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

The following figure shows the I/O module keying assignments.

To support keying, all I/O modules accepting terminal strips come with 12 customer-installable primary keys (six yellow keys each for the module and terminal strip) and six secondary keys (three white keys each for the module and terminal strip). In the following table, check the Primary Module and Terminal Strip Coding columns for key locations.

Note: The primary/secondary keys shown (in black) in this example reflect the recommended coding of a 24 Vdc module in slot 6 to its field wiring terminal strip.

X

Right Side of Terminal Strip

Secondary Key Slots

Primary Key Slots

Left Side of Terminal Strip

ABCDEF

FED

CBA

A

B

C

D

E

F

F

E

D

C

B

A

123456

Install the key into the slot round end first.

1

2

3

4

5

6

35013379 02 October 2007 499


I/O Modules

I/O Module Terminal Strip Keying

The following table shows the primary module and terminal strip keying for the I/O modules.

Primary Module and Terminal Strip Keying

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding

Terminal Strip Coding

5 Vdc 140DDI15310 ABC DEF

140DDO15310

9 ... 12 Vdc Unassigned ABD CEF

24 Vdc 140DDI35300 ABE CDF

140DDI35310

140DDM39000

140DDO35300

140DDO35310

140DSI35300

140HLI34000

10 ... 60 Vdc 140DDI84100 ABF CDE

140DDI85300

140DDO84300

140DVO85300

125 Vdc 140DDI67300 ACD BEF

140DDM69000

140DDO88500

24 Vac 140DAI34000 ACE BDF

140DAI35300

48 Vac 140DAI44000 ACF BDE

140DAI45300

140DAO84220

115 Vac 140DAI54000 ADE BCF

140DAI54300

140DAI53300

140DAM59000

140DAO84010

230 Vac 140DAI74000 ADF BCE

140DAO84000

140DAO84210

140DRA84000

500 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

To implement the user-optional secondary keying code (designed to prevent the mismatching of terminal strips to I/O modules of identical type), 17 slot positions have been provided in modules and terminal strips to support a variety of coding schemes.

In addition (by using the secondary keying code), the user may key the field wiring terminal to the position where the module is installed in a backplane, using the white keys for each code. To determine a unique module code and terminal strip code, refer to the table below.

Relay 140DRC83000 AEF BCD

Analog I/O 140ACI03000 BCD AEF

140AVI03000

140ACO02000 BCE ADF

140AVO02000 BCF ADE

TC/RTD 140ARI03010 BDE ACF

140ATI03000

Analog In/Out 140AMM09000 BDF ACE

Intelligent/ Special Purpose

140EHC10500 BEF ACD

140EHC20200

Unassigned CDE ABF

Unassigned CDF ABE

Unassigned CEF ABD

Unassigned DEF ABC

Primary Module and Terminal Strip Keying

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding

Terminal Strip Coding

35013379 02 October 2007 501


I/O Modules

Secondary Keying and Backplane Positions

The following table shows the secondary keying and backplane positions.

The user may also use personality keying to differentiate between like module types (i.e., DAO84000 and DAO84210 both have the same primary keying pin combinations), using the white keys for each code.

Backplane Position Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding

1 123 456

2 124 356

3 125 346

4 126 345

5 134 256

6 135 246

7 136 245

8 145 236

9 146 235

10 156 234

11 234 156

12 235 146

13 236 145

14 245 136

15 246 135

16 256 134

502 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Discrete I/O True High/True Low Circuit Descriptions

The following figures illustrate discrete I/O module true high and true low logic circuits.

Current Sinking describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state, sinks current from the external load.

Current Sourcing describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state, sources current to the external load.

LOGIC

PowerSupply

LoadCurrent

Common

Input

CurrentPowerSupply

Current Sink Input/Current Source Output

Output

True High/Current Sink Input/Current Source Output

Current

Input

LOGIC

Load

Common

Current Source Input/Current Sink Output

PowerSupply

Current

Output

True Low/Current Source Input/Current Sink Output

35013379 02 October 2007 503


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte

Overview This Quantum I/O map menu entry allows you to assign the 3x register that defines the start of a table in which I/O-mapped module status is available. You may either enter the 3x value, or the value 0 (indicating no choice). The value entered is displayed in the summary information on the top of the Quantum I/O Map. Modules in a backplane report status (and fault) information in an 8-bit byte—therefore, one word of the table conveys the status information for two modules.

The following figure shows an example of the Quantum report status and fault information.

If you choose to display or develop a program using these values, the table/module relationship is given in the following example:

Enter status reg( 0): 300001

Tme AS Quit

F5 OFF F9QUANTUM

Rex100 ms Module Status Reg:

Number of Outputs:

: 1 Available:300001-300002

32

189

Ref Output Ref Description

504 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Table/Module Configuration

The following figure shows the table/module configuration.

Given the above sample configuration, if you select 300001 as the starting address of the status table and there are no I/O modules in the first two locations, the first

I/O module status is found in the least significant byte of the second word (i.e., position 3). The table fills until the last I/O mapped module is found.

Note: The bit pattern reported in each status/error byte is dependent on the module type.

I/OA

I/OB

I/OC

Slot 2 Slot 1

I/O B I/O A

300001

300003

Slot 4 Slot 3

Slot 6 Slot 5

Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6

300002

I/O C

35013379 02 October 2007 505


I/O Modules

18.2 Analog Input Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on Quantum Analog Input Modules.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for Analog Input Modules 507

140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module 524

140ACI04000 High Density Analog in I/O Module 528

140ARI03010 I/O RTD Input 8 Channel Module 532

140ATI03000 I/O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module 536

140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module 540

506 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Configuration for Analog Input Modules

Overview This section provides information on configuration of Analog Input modules. These modules include:

140ACI03000140ACI04000140ARI03010140ATI03000140AVI03000

140ACI03000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ACI03000 Analog Input module.

35013379 02 October 2007 507


I/O Modules

I/O Map and Register Assignment

The ACI03000 eight-channel unipolar input module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers, assigned as follows.

Channel 1 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ... 20 mA)Register 1

Register 2

Register 3

Register 4

Channel 2 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ... 20 mA)



Channel 5 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ... 20 mA)Register 5

Register 6

Register 7

Register 8




Input status word

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or Under Voltage on Channel 8 (1 ... 5 V only)1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or Under Voltage on Channel 7 (1 ... 5 V only)



1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or Under Voltage on Channel 2 (1 ... 5 V only)1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or Under Voltage on Channel 1 (1 .. ... 5 V only)

Register 9

Note: Count stops at 4095

Note: The undervoltage for this module is 0.5 - 0.7 V

508 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte

The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for the 140ACI03000 Input module.The following figure shows the MSB register.


There are no Module Zoom selections required for this module.

140ACI04000 The following information pertains to the 140ACI04000 Analog Input module.

Possible Equipment FailureWhen configured for voltage measurement (no jumper installed between INPUT(+) and I SENSE terminals), if a broken field wire occurs, readings will be non-zero and not predictable.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

WARNING

1 = Broken wire/under voltage on one or more input channels

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MSB

35013379 02 October 2007 509


I/O Modules


This module requires 17 contiguous input (3x) registers which are assigned as follows:

Channel 1 dataRegister 1

Register 2

Register 3

Channel 2 data

Channel 3 data

Register 14

Register 15

Register 16

Channel 14 data

Channel 15 data

Channel 16 data

Registers 4 ... 13

510 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Map Register Assignments-Register 17

The following figure shows the status warnings for register 17.

I/O Map Status Byte

I/O map status byte is used as follows:


Push <Enter> to display and select the channel range.

140ARI03010 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ARI03010 Analog Input module.

Input Status WordRegister 17

1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 131 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 14


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9







Note: The broken wire detect is set at 2.0 mA.

1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 to 20mA 0 to 16,000

4 to 20mA 0 to 4095

4 to 20mA 0 to 20,000

0 to 25mA 0 to 25,000

Channel X range selection:

35013379 02 October 2007 511


I/O Modules


This module requires nine contiguous 16-bit (3x) registers—eight for input data and one for input status. The data registers formats are as follows:

Channel 1 data Register 1

Register 2

Register 3

Register 4

Channel 2 data

Channel 3 data

Channel 4 data


Register 6

Register 7

Register 8

Channel 6 data

Channel 7 data

Channel 8 data

Status WordRegister 9

1 = Broken wire or out range on channel 51 = Broken wire or out range on channel 6


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

1 = Range warning on channel 8*1 = Range warning on channel 7*






512 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

*A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.34% or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel. The warning bit is cleared when the out-of-range bit is set.

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte is used by the 140ARI03010 Input module as follows:


Push <Enter> to display and select the overall module and channel configuration.

Note: The data format is 16-bit integer values in the positive range and an integer value with the MSB indicating a negative sign in the negative range.

Channel 1 out of range or short circuit

12345678

MSB LSB




Channel 8 out of range or short circuit

1.0 DEG

0.1 DEG

CELSIUS

FAHRENHEIT

TEMPERATURE

RAW VALUE

Resolution:

Output unit:

Value Type:

35013379 02 October 2007 513


I/O Modules

The following figure shows the channel X configuration selection.

140ATI03000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ATI03000 Analog Input module.

ENABLE

DISABLE

Pt100, -200 ...850Pt200, -200 ...850Pt500, -200 ...850Pt1000, -200 ...850Ni100, -60 ... 180Ni200, -60 ... 180Ni500, -60 ... 180Ni1000, -60 ... 180R, 0 ... 766.66 OHMR, 0 ... 4000 OHMAPt100, -100 ... 450APt200, -100 ... 450APt500, -100 ... 450APt1000, -100 ... 450

RTD TYPE (Pt, Ni, R, A Pt):

4-Wire/3-Wire/2-Wire:

Channel Enable/Disable:

4 WIRE

3 WIRE

2-WIRE

514 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


This module requires ten contiguous, 16-bit words—eight for input data, one for channel status, and one for internal temperature of the module. The data words formats are as follows.

Channel 1 data Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Channel 2 data

Channel 3 data

Channel 4 data

Channel 5 data Word 5

Word 6

Word 7

Word 8

Channel 6 data

Channel 7 data

Channel 8 data

35013379 02 October 2007 515


I/O Modules

The following shows the word 9 register.

* A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value, as shown in the following table. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.4% or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel. The warning bit is cleared when the out-of-range bit is set.

The following figure shows the word 10 register.

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte is used by the 140ATI03000 Input Module as follows.

Input status wordWord 9

1 = Channel 5 out of range1 = Channel 6 out of range


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9






1 = Range warning on channel 2*

1 = Range warning on channel 1*

Internal temperatureWord 10

Channel 1 open circuit or out of range

12345678

MSB LSB

Channel 2 open circuit or out of rangeChannel 3 open circuit or out of range



Channel 8 open circuit or out of range

516 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Measurement Ranges

Ranges in the following table are expressed in degrees C. The user can select either 0.1 or 1.0° (C or F) for the output data format.

If the 0.1° format is selected, the decimal point is implied (i.e., a reading of 1234 should be interpreted as 123.4°). The internal CJC data is reported in the same units as the TC output.

All TC output data is in signed integer format except as noted for Type B (see below).

Measurement Range Tables

This table shows thermocouple ranges.

This table shows millivolt ranges.

Note: If the TC is open, then the warning bit is cleared and the out-of-range bit is set. If it is over range, then the channel’s output data word is always 7FFFH; if it is under range, the channel’s output data word is always 8001H. These are the possible highest and lowest values.

Thermocouple Ranges

Data Format

Input Minimum Reading

Normal Over Range Warning

Out-of-Range Set

Modsoft Signed Format

J Type TC -228.5 -210 to +760 760.1 to 778.6 >778.7

K Type TC -302.9 -270 to +1370 1370.1 to 1405.0 >1405.1

E Type TC -293.8 -270 to +1000 1000.1 to 1023.9 >1024.0

T Type TC -279.5 -270 to +400 400.1 to 409.6 >409.7

S Type TC -89.9 -50 to +1665 1665.1 to 1705.0 >1705.1

R Type TC -89.6 -50 to +1665 1665.1 to 1704.7 >1704.8

B Type TC (See Note 3)

+86.4 +130 to +1820 1820.1 to 1863.7 >1863.8

Millivolt Ranges

Offset Binary

-100 mV0

+ 100 mVGain = 25

0

08000hFFFFh

None

See Note 2

-25 mV0

+25 mVGain = 100

0

08000hFFFFh

None

See Note 2

35013379 02 October 2007 517


I/O Modules

Note: 1. Open Circuit Detect is always enabled for all TC types and may be disabled for

linear ranges.2. On millivolt ranges, if Open Circuit Detect is enabled, this bit is set on Open

Circuit Detect or input FFFFh3. Data format changes to unsigned if the output is requested in units of 0.1° F to

accommodate readings above 3276.8° F.

518 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Push <Enter> to display and select the configuration parameters.

1.0 DEG

0.1 DEG

CENTIGRADE

FAHRENHEIT

On board

Channel 1

UndefinedJ, gain=25K, gain=25E, gain=25T, gain=100S, gain=100R, gain=100B, gain=100

NO

YES

25

100

NO

YES

Resolution:

Output Unit:

Cold Junction Compensator:

CHANNEL X CONFIGURATION

Thermocouple Type:

Note:Undefined = Linear Range

The next two entries are for undefined type:

Open Circuit Test:

Millivolt Range:

This channel installed:

35013379 02 October 2007 519


I/O Modules

140AVI03000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AVI03000 Analog Input module.


This module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers.

Map Register Assignment

The following figures shows the assignment registers and the input status warnings. Channel 1 data Register 1

Register 2

Register 3

Register 4

Channel 2 data

Channel 3 data

Channel 4 data


Register 6

Register 7

Register 8

Channel 6 data

Channel 7 data

Channel 8 data

520 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

The following figure shows Register 9.

*A range warning is issued when a channel input is outside the rated input value, as shown in the following table. Warning bits stay on after out of range bits are set. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.4%. Out of range bits are also set if inputs drop below 0.5 V (1 ... 5 V mode) or 2.08 mA (4 ... 20 mA mode).

When configured for current inputs (jumper installed between INPUT(+) and ISENSE terminals), a broken field wire results in a zero current reading. If 4 ... 20 mA is selected, fault LEDs and warning/out of range and I/O Map Status Byte bits are displayed

Input status wordRegister 9



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9







Possible Equipment FailureWhen configured for voltage inputs (no jumper installed between INPUT(+) and ISENSE terminals), if a broken field wire occurs, readings will be non-zero and not predictable. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 521


I/O Modules

Linear Measuring Ranges

The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AVI03000 Analog Input module.

*The Voltmeter ranges are listed in Modsoft signed format.

I/O Map Status Byte

The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for the 140AVI03000 Input module.

The following figure shows the input register.

Data Format Input Under Warning

Normal Over Warning

16-bit Format +/- 10 V < 768 768 ... 64,768 > 64,768

+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA <16,768 16,768 ... 48,768 > 48,768

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 64,000 > 64,000

0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 32,000 > 32,000

1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA <6,400 6,400 ... 32,000 > 32,000

Voltmeter Format*

+/- 10 V < –10,000 –10,000 ...10,000 > 10,000

+/- 5 V < –5,000 –5,000 ... 5,000 > 5,000

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10,000 > 10,000

0 ... 5 V 0 ... 5,000 > 5,000

1 ... 5 V < 1,000 1,000 ... 5,000 > 5,000

+/- 20 mA < –20,000 –20,000... 20,000 > 20,000

0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20,000 > 20,000

4 ... 20 mA < 4,000 4,000 ... 20,000 > 20,000

12-bit Format +/- 10 V 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 4,095 4,095

0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 4,095 4,095

1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

1 = Out of range or broken field wire on one or more channels (4 .. 20 mA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

522 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Push <Enter> to display and select data format for the module and the ranges for the individual input channels.

The following figures show the module data format and Channel X range (per channel) options.

Data Formats (per module)

Channel X Range(per channel)

16-bit Format

Voltmeter

12-bit Format

-10V to +10V

0V to +10V

-5V to +5V

0V to +5V

1V to +5V

-20mA to +20mA

0mA to +20mA

+4mA to +20mA

35013379 02 October 2007 523


I/O Modules

140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module

Overview The Analog Input 8 Channel Unipolar module accepts mixed current and voltage inputs. Required jumpers between the input and sense terminals for current input measuring are included with the module.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ACI03000 analog input module.

Specifications

Number of Channels 8 Differential

LEDs Active: Indicates bus communication present.

F: Indicates channel fault.NOTE: This module produces a fault signal F if any one

channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4 ... 20 mA range.

Required Addressing 9 Words In

Voltage Input

Linear Measuring Range 1 ... 5 Vdc

Absolute Maximum Input 50 Vdc

Input Impedance > 20 MΩ

Current Input

Linear Measuring Range 4 ... 20 mA

Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA

Input Impedance 250 Ω +/- 0.03%

Resolution 12 Bits

Accuracy Error @ 25° C Voltage ModeTypical:

Maximum:+/- 0.05% of full scale+/- 0.1% of full scale

Current Mode Add +/- 0.03% to voltage specification

Linearity +/- 0.04%


Typical:Maximum:

+/- 0.0025% of full scale / °C+/- 0.005% of full scale / °C

Common Mode Rejection > -72 dB @ 60Hz


Isolation

Channel to Bus 1000 Vdc, 3000 Vpp, for 1 minute

Operating Voltage

524 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Channel to Channel 30 Vdc max


Fault Detection Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode) or under voltage range (1 ... 5 V)




Note: Calibration is not required for this module.

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 525


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the ACI030 module.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

N/CINPUT 2(-)

INPUT 1(-)

N/C

N/C

INPUT 3(-)

N/CINPUT 4(-)

N/C

N/C

INPUT 5(-)

N/C

INPUT 6(-)

N/C

N/C

INPUT 7(-)

N/C

INPUT 8(-)

N/C

N/C N/C

I SENSE 8

INPUT 8(+)

I SENSE 7

INPUT 7(+)N/C

I SENSE 6

INPUT 6(+)

I SENSE 5

INPUT 5(+)

N/C

I SENSE 4

INPUT 4(+)

I SENSE 3

INPUT 3(+)

N/C

I SENSE 2

INPUT 2(+)

INPUT 1(+)

I SENSE 1Jumper

Voltage Source

Current Source

-+

-+

526 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the

discretion of the user).2. Either a shielded or unshielded signal cable may be used. Shielded types

should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 3. Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid this occurrence,

wire unused channels in voltage mode to a channel that is in use. 4. N / C = Not connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 527


I/O Modules

140ACI04000 High Density Analog in I/O Module

Overview The 140ACI04000 is a 16 channel analog input module which accepts mixed current inputs.

528 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ACI04000 analog input module.

Specifications

Number of Channels 16 Differential or 16 externally tied single ended

LEDs Active: Indicates Bus communication is present F: Indicates channel fault.NOTE: This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4 ... 20 mA range.


Current Input

Linear Measuring Range 0 ... 25 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts4 ... 20 mA, 0 ...16,000 counts4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 4,095 counts


Input Impedance 250 Ω nominal

Accuracy Error @ 25° C +/- 0.125% of full scale

Linearity (0 to 60°C) +/- 6μA max, 0 ... 25 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts+/- 6μA max, 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts+/- 6μA max, 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 16,000 counts+/- 12μA max, 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 4,095 counts


Typical:Maximum:

+/- 0.0025% of full scale / °C+/- 0.005% of full scale / °C



Isolation

Field to bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute

Operating Voltage

Channel to Channel 30 Vdc max

Update Time 15ms for all 16 channels

Fault Detection Broken wire in 4 ... 20 mA mode




Fusing

Internal None


35013379 02 October 2007 529


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram for the 140ACI04000 module.

INPUT13 (-)

INPUT 11 (-)

INPUT 9 (-)

INPUT 7(-)

INPUT 5(-)

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

INPUT 2 (-)

INPUT 3(-)

INPUT 1(-)

INPUT 4 (-)

NC

INPUT 6 (-)

INPUT 8 (-)

N/C

INPUT 10 (-)

INPUT 12 (-)

N/C

INPUT 14 (-)

INPUT 15 (-)

INPUT 16 (-)

N/C N/C

INPUT 16 (+)

INPUT 15(+)

INPUT 14 (+)

INPUT 13(+)

N/C

INPUT 12 (+)

INPUT 11(+)

INPUT 10 (+)

INPUT 9(+)

N/C

INPUT 8 (+)

INPUT 7(+)

INPUT 6 (+)

INPUT 5(+)

N/C

INPUT 4 (+)

INPUT 1(+)-+

-+

INPUT 2(+)

INPUT 3(+)

Current Source

Current Source

DifferentialInput

SingleEnded Input

530 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. The current sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the discretion of the

user.)2. Either shielded or unshielded cables may be used. In noisy environments,

twisted shielded cable is recommended. Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end.

3. Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid this occurrence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 ... 25 mA range.

4. The maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc.5. N/C = Not connected

35013379 02 October 2007 531


I/O Modules

140ARI03010 I/O RTD Input 8 Channel Module

Overview The RTD Input 8 Channel module accepts input from up to eight 2-, 3-, and 4-wire RTD sensors, and provides temperature measurement data to the Quantum CPU.

Specifications The following table shows the ARI030010 RTD IN specifications.

Specifications


LEDs Active

F

1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range. (This includes broken wire and short circuit

conditions.)

R - Module has passed power-up diagnostics


RTD Types Range (degrees C)

IEC PlatinumPT 100, PT200, PT500, PT1000

- 200 to + 850

American PlatinumPT 100, PT200, PT500, PT1000

- 100 to + 450

NickelN100, N200, N500, N1000

- 60 to + 180

Measurement Current

PT100, PT200, N100, N200 2.5 mA

PT500, PT1000, N500, N1000 0.5 mA


Linearity +/- 0.01% of full scale (0 ... 60° C)

Resolution 0.1° C

Absolute Accuracy +/- 0.5 degrees C (25° C)+/- 0.9 degrees C (0 ... 60° C)

Isolation

Channel to Channel 300 V peak-to-peak

Channel to Bus 1780 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz for 1 minute or 2500 Vdc for 1 minute

Update Time (All Channels)

2-wire4-wire

640 ms

532 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

3-wire 1.2 s

Fault Detection Out of range or 8 red LEDs to indicate broken wire conditions




Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 533


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram Figure

The following figure shows the ARI03010 wiring diagram.

I SOURCE 1(+)2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1I SOURCE 1(-)

V SENSE 1(+) V SENSE 1(-)

I SOURCE 2(+) I SOURCE 2(-)


SHIELD 2 SHIELD 1





SHIELD 4 SHIELD 3




SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5

I SOURCE 7(+)


I SOURCE 7(-)




SHIELD 8 SHIELD 7

3-WIRE RTD

2-WIRE RTD

4-WIRE RTD

534 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. The module is calibrated per:

IEC Publication 751 for platinum RTDs: 100Ω @ 0 degrees C, TCR (α) = 0.00385Ω/Ω/degrees C. DIN 43760 for nickel RTDsAmerican Platinum RTDs: 100Ω @ 0 degrees C, TCR (α) = 0.00392Ω/Ω/degrees C

2. Terminals labeled shield are not connected internally. Shields should be grounded at the field device end.

3. When using 2-wire configurations, the temperature equivalent of twice the lead resistance of one leg must be subtracted from the temperature reading.

35013379 02 October 2007 535


I/O Modules

140ATI03000 I/O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module

Overview The Thermocouple Input 8 Channel is an eight-channel thermocouple input module.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the TC IN module.

Specifications


LEDs Active

F

1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range- or Broken wire condition is detected


TC Types and Ranges Range (degrees C)

J - 210 ... + 760

K - 270 ... + 1370

E - 270 ... + 1000

T - 270 ... + 400

S - 50 ... + 1665

R - 50 ... + 1665

B + 130 ... + 1820

Millivolt Ranges - 100 mV ... +100 mV*

- 25 mV ... +25 mV*

*Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges.

TC Resistance / Max Source Resistance

200Ω max for rated accuracy


Input Filter Single low pass @ nominal 20 Hz, plus notch filter at 50/ 60 Hz

Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz

Cold Junction Compensation (CJC)

Internal CJC operates 0 ... 60° C (errors are included in the accuracy specification). The connector door must be closed.Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting a TC (which monitors the external junction block temperature) to channel 1. Types J, K, and T are recommended for remote CJC.

Resolution

536 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

TC Ranges Choice of:1.0° C (default)

0.1° C1.0° F0.1° F

Millivolt Ranges 100 mV range, 3.05 mV (16 bits)25 mV range, 0.76 mV (16 bits)

TC Absolute Accuracy (see Note 1)

Types J, K, E, T (see Note 2) +/- 2° C plus +/- 0.1% of reading

Types S, R, B (see Note 3) +/- 4° C plus +/- 0.1% of reading

Millivolt Absolute Accuracy

@ 25° C +/- 20 μV plus +/- 0.1% of reading

Accuracy Drift w /Temperature 0.15 μV / °C plus 0.0015% of reading / °C max

Operating Voltage

Channel to Channel 220 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz or 300 Vdc max

Isolation

Channel to Bus 1780 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 minute

Update Time 1 s (all channels)

Fault Detection 8 red LEDs to indicate out of range or broken wire conditions




Note: 1. Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC, TC – curvature,

offset plus gain, for module temperature of 0 ... 60° C. User supplied TC errors not included.

2. For Type J and K, add 1.5° C inaccuracy for temperatures below -100° C.3. Type B cannot be used below 130° C.4. All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output. This results in a

reading of 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected.

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 537


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the ATI03000 wiring diagram.

Not used 2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Not used

538 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. Either shielded or unshielded TCs may be used. (The user should consider

using shielded wire in a noisy environment.) Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end.

2. Connections marked Not Used are not electrically connected within the module. These points are used as a thermal link to ambient air. They are not recommended as electrical tie points as this could affect the accuracy of cold junction compensation.

35013379 02 October 2007 539


I/O Modules

140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module

Overview The Analog In 8 Channel Bipolar module accepts a mix of current and voltage inputs. Jumpers are required between the input and sense terminals for current inputs.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AVI03000 ANALOG IN module.

Specifications

Number of Channels 8 Differential

LEDs ActiveF

1 ... 8 (Red) – Indicated channel is out of range or broken wire condition is detected (4 ... 20mA)


Input Ranges (Selectable on a per-channel basis)

Bipolar +/- 10 Vdc +/- 5 Vdc +/- 20 mA

Unipolar 0 ... 10 Vdc 0 ...5 Vdc 0 ... 20 mA

Unipolar w/Offset 1 ... 5 Vdc 4 ... 20 mA

Voltage Input

Linear Measuring Range (Input range) x 1.024


Input Impedance >20 MΩ

Current Input

Linear Measuring Range (Input range) x 1.024


Input Impedance 250Ω + 0.03%

Resolution

16 Bit +/- 10 Vdc, 0 ... 10 Vdc

15 Bit +/- 5 Vdc, 0 ... 5 Vdc, +/- 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA

14 Bit 1 ... 5 Vdc, 4 ... 20 mA

Absolute Accuracy Error @ 25° C Voltage Mode (Add +/- 0.03% in Current Mode)

Typical: +/- 0.03%Maximum: +/- 0.05% of full scale

Linearity +/- 0.008%

Accuracy Drift w/Temperature Typical: +/- 0.0015% of full scale / °CMaximum: +/- 0.004% of full scale / °C

540 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AVI03000 Analog Input Module.


Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3dB cutoff @ 847Hz, +/- 20%

Isolation

Channel to Bus 750 Vdc, 500 Vac rms, for 1 minute

Channel to Channel 200 Vdc, 135 Vac rms max


Fault Detection Broken wire in 4 ... 20 mA mode, out of range in 1 ... 5 V mode




Note: Calibration is not required for this module.

Specifications

Data Format Input Range Under Warning

Normal Over Warning

16-bit Format +/- 10 V < 768 768 ... 64,768 > 64,768

+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA < 16,768 16,768 ... 48,768 > 48,768

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 64,000 > 64,000

0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 32,000 > 32,000

1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA <6,400 6,400 ... 32,000 > 32,000

Voltmeter* Format

+/- 10 V < -10,000 -10,000 ... 10,000 > 10,000

+/-5 V, +/- 20 mA < -5,000 -5,000 ... 5,000 > 5,000

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10,000 > 10,000

0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 5,000, 0 .... 20,000

> 5,000

1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA < 1,000 1,000 ... 5,000, 4,000 ... 20,000

> 5,000

+/- 20 mA < -20,000 -20,000 ... 20,000 > 20,000

0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20,000 > 20,000

4 ... 20 mA < 4,000 4,000 ... 20,000 > 20,000

35013379 02 October 2007 541


I/O Modules

*The Voltmeter ranges are listed in signed integer format.

12-bit Format +/- 10 V 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 4,095 4,095

0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 4,095 4,095

1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

Data Format Input Range Under Warning

Normal Over Warning

542 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the AVI03000 wiring diagram.

N/C

INPUT 2(-)

INPUT 1(-)

N/C

N/C

INPUT 3(-)

N/C

INPUT 4(-)

N/C

N/C

INPUT 5(-)

N/C

INPUT 6(-)

N/C

N/C

INPUT 7(-)

INPUT 8(-)

INPUT 7(+)

I SENSE 6

INPUT 5(+)

INPUT 4(+)

I SENSE 3

INPUT 3(+)

N/C

I SENSE 2

INPUT 2(+)

INPUT 1(+)

I SENSE 1Jumper

N/C

N/C

N/C

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

I SENSE 4

N/C

I SENSE 5

INPUT 6(+)

N/C

I SENSE 7

INPUT 8(+)

I SENSE 8

N/C

Current Source

Voltage Source

-+

+-

35013379 02 October 2007 543


I/O Modules

Note: 1. The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the

discretion of the user).2. Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used. Shielded types should

have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end.3. To prevent improper fault indications, unused inputs should have the + (plus)

and – (minus) inputs tied together and be configured for a bipolar input range.4. N / C = Not Connected.

544 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

18.3 Analog Output Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on Quantum analog output modules.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for Analog Output Modules 546

140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module 550

140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I/O Module 554

140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module 558

35013379 02 October 2007 545


I/O Modules

I/O Configuration for Analog Output Modules

Overview This section provides information on the configuration of analog output modules. These modules are:

140ACO02000140ACO13000140AIO33000140AVO02000

140ACO02000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ACO02000 Analog Output module.


This module requires four contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as follows. The following figure shows the register assignments.

I/O Map Status Byte

The four least significant bits in the I/O map status byte are used for the 140ACO02000 Output module. The following figure shows the status byte register.

Channel 1 data (0 ... 4,095 = 4 ... 20 mA)Register 1

Register 2

Register 3

Register 4

Channel 2 data (0 ... 4,095 = 4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 3 data (0 ... 4,095 = 4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 4 data (0 ... 4,095 = 4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 1 loop broken wireChannel 2 loop broken wire

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


546 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.

140ACO13000 The following information

pertains to configuration of the 140ACO13000 analog current sink output module.


This module requires eight contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as follows. The following figure shows the map register assignment.

Channel X Timeout State(per channel)

Channel X User Defined Timeout Value: 0 DEC

Disabled

Last Value

User Defined


Register 2

Register 3

Register 4

Channel 2 data

Channel 3 data

Channel 4 data

Channel 5 dataRegister 5

Register 6

Register7

Register 8

Channel 6 data

Channel 7 data

Channel 8 data

35013379 02 October 2007 547


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status is used for the 140ACO13000 output module as follows:


Push <Enter> to display and select channel ranges and timeout states for each channel. Time out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.

The following figure shows the Channel X timeout state options.

140AVO02000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AVO02000 Analog Output module.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


Channel 4 loop broken wire

Channel 1 loop broken wire



Channel X Range Selection


Channel X Timeout State

4 to 20 mA 0 to 16,000

4 to 20 mA 0 to 4,095

0 to 20 mA 0 to 20,000

0 to 25 mA 0 to 25,000

Minimum Output

Last Value

User Defined

548 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


This module requires four contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as follows .

I/O Map Status Byte



Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.

The following figure shows the Channel X timeout state options.

Channel 1 data (0 ... 4,095 +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V, 0 ... 5 V, or 0 ... 10 V)Register 1

Register 2

Register 3

Register 4

Channel 2 data (0 ... 4,095 +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V, 0 ... 5 V, or 0 ... 10 V)



Note: Selecting "Disabled" for any channel causes all others to default to that state. Output will be what is connected to the module master override terminals, either common or an external voltage. Output LEDs 1-4 will go out when Disabled is selected and the module goes to the inactive state.

Channel X Timeout State(per channel)


Disabled

Last Value

User Defined

35013379 02 October 2007 549


I/O Modules

140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module

Overview The Analog Output 4 Channel Current module controls and monitors current in 4 ... 20 mA loops.

Specifications The following table shows the module specifications.

Specifications


LEDs Active

F

1 ... 4 (Green) - Module outputs switched on

1 ... 4 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated channels

NOTE: When the green channel status LEDs are off, the loop current is 0 mA.

Required Addressing 4 Words Out

Loop Voltage 12 ... 30 Vdc. Up to 60 Vdc with an external loop resistor. Outputs are short circuit proof up to 30 Vdc (up

to 60 Vdc with external loop resistor).

Loop Resistance

No external resistor is required for loop voltage supply less than 30 volts.

Internal Voltage Drop 7 Vdc min, 30 Vdc max @ 20 mA

Resolution 12 Bits


Linearity +/- 1 LSB

Accuracy Drift w/Temperature Typical: 0.004% of full scale / °C. Maximum:0.007% of full scale / °C

Isolation

Channel to Channel 500 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz or 750 Vdc for 1 minute

Channel to Bus 1780 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz, or 2500 Vdc for 1 minute

RMAX

Vloop 7Vdc–

0.02A----------------------------------=

*For a loop supply less than 30 volts, RMIN is 0W.

RMIN∗

Vloop 30Vdc–

0.02A-------------------------------------=

550 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the voltmeter monitor specifications.

Update Time 3 ms for all channels (simultaneous update)

Settling Time 900 μs to +/- 0.1% of the final value

Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA mode. Specific channel is identified when an open circuit is detected through the

red channel LED.


Power Dissipation 5.3 W max

External Power Supply See Loop Voltage in this table.

Fusing

Internal None

Specifications

Possible injury to personnel or equipment.Before removing the connector, ensure that it is safe to have field wiring in an open circuit condition.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING


Range 1 ... 5 V (Main current loop must be active)

Scaling (Volts) = (mA) x 0.25

Output Impedance 300Ω Typical

Wire Length 1 m max

VOUT ILOOP

35013379 02 October 2007 551


I/O Modules

ACO02000 Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140ACO02000 module.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1I SOURCE 1(-)

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

MONITOR 1(+)

I SOURCE 1(-)

N/C

I SOURCE 1(-)

I SOURCE 2(-)

I SOURCE 2(-)

N/C

I SOURCE 2(-)

I SOURCE 3(-)

I SOURCE 3(-)

N/C

I SOURCE 3(-)

I SOURCE 4(-)

I SOURCE 4(-)

N/C

I SOURCE 4(-)

VM

N/C

N/C

N/CI SINK 1(+)

MONITOR 2(+)

N/C

N/C

N/CI SINK 2(+)

MONITOR 3(+)

N/C

N/C

N/C

I SINK 3(+)

MONITOR 4(+)

N/C

N/C

N/CI SINK 4(+)

- +

FIELD DEVICE

FIELD DEVICE

+ -

-

+

+-

-

+

LOOP SUPPLY

CURRENTSINKING

(CURRENTSOURCING)

552 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. Unused channels will indicate broken wire status unless wired to the loop

supply, as shown on Channel 4. In this example, loop supply must be 30 V or less.

2. VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum.

3. The wiring example shows Channel 1 acting as a current sink and Channel 2 acting as a current source for their respective field devices.

4. N / C = Not Connected.

Note: At power up, the channel outputs are all disabled (current = 0). Configuring any channel as disabled will cause all channels to be disabled when a communication loss occurs.

35013379 02 October 2007 553


I/O Modules

140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I/O Module

Overview The 140ACO13000 is an eight channel analog output module used to control and monitor current in 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA loops.

Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the ACO13000 module.

Specifications


LEDs Active, indicates bus communication present

F, indicates a fault on a channel

1 ... 8 (Green) - Module outputs active

1 ... 8 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated channels

Required Addressing 8 Words Out

Module Ranges and Resolution 0 ... 25 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts4 ... 20 mA, 0 ...16,000 counts4 ... 20 mA, 0 ...4,095 counts

Loop Voltage 6 ... 30 Vdc maximum


Accuracy Error @ 25 ° C +/- 0.2% of full scale

Linearity +/-12 μA, 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 4,095 counts+/-4 μA, 0 ... 25 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts+/-4 μA, 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts+/-4 μA, 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 16,000 counts

Accuracy Drift w/Temperature Typical: 0.004% of full scale / °C.Maximum: 0.007% of full scale / °C

Isolation

Channel to Channel none

Field to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute

Update Time 5 ms for all 8 channels

Settling Time Full ScaleStep Change

1.6 ms to 5% of the final value3.2 ms to 0.1% of the final value

Fault Detection Broken wire in 4 ... 20 mA mode.



External Power Supply See Loop Voltage above

Fusing

554 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

InternalExternal

NoneNone

Voltmeter Monitor

Scaling VOUT (Volts) = ILOOP (mA) x 0.10

Accuracy @ 25° C +/- 0.2% of full scale

Output Impedance 300 Ω

Maximum Cable Length 1 meter

Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2.6 or Concept 2.2

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 555


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram 140ACO130 Wiring Diagram

RETURN

OUTPUT 8 SINK

MONITOR 8

OUTPUT 7 SINK

OUTPUT 6 SINK

OUTPUT 5 SINK

OUTPUT 4 SINK

OUTPUT 3 SINK

OUTPUT 2 SINK

OUTPUT 1 SINK

RETURN MONITOR 1

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

N/C

MONITOR 2

N/C

MONITOR 3

MONITOR 4

MONITOR 5

MONITOR 6

MONITOR 7

N/C

RETURN

N/C

RETURN

RETURN

N/C

RETURN

RETURN

N/C

RETURN

Field Device

Field Device

Field Device

Field Device

Field Device

Field Device

Field Device

Field Device

VM

24 Vdcloop

supply

+

–

VM

556 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Notes on Wiring Diagram

1. At power up, channel outputs are all at zero current (0 mA).2. VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is

proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum.3. Either shielded or unshielded cables may be used. In noisy environments, twisted

shielded cable is recommended. Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end.

4. Unused outputs may cause the activation of the F (fault) LED. To avoid this occurrence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 ... 25 mA range.

5. All terminals labeled ‘RETURN" are common inside the module.6. N/C = Not connected

35013379 02 October 2007 557


I/O Modules

140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module

Overview The Analog Out 4 Channel module outputs voltages in mixed modes and levels. These are selected using jumpers on the field-wiring connector.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AVO02000 Analog Out 4 channel module.

Specifications


LEDs Active

1 ... 4 (Green) - Indicates module outputs switched on

NOTE: When the green channel status LEDs are off, the module is not generating outputs, however, an output may still

be present if the master override signal is used.

Required Addressing 4 words out

Voltage Output Ranges

Bipolar +/- 10 Vdc (Min load resistance = 1 kΩ) (Jumper between Reference - Control terminals)

+/- 5 Vdc (Min load resistance = 500Ω) (Jumper between Reference - Control and Output - R terminals)

Unipolar 0 ... 10 Vdc (Min load resistance = 1 kΩ) (Jumper between Output - R terminals)

0 ... 5 Vdc (Min load resistance = 500Ω) (Jumper between Output - R and Control - R terminals)

Output Current +/- 10 mA max any range (outputs are short-circuit proof)

Source Resistance 0.1 Ω

Resolution 12 bits

Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees

+/- 0.15% of full scale


Unipolar Ranges 0.003% of full scale / °C typical 0.005% of full scale / °C max

Bipolar Ranges 0.004% of full scale / °C typical0.007% of full scale / °C max

Linearity +/- 1 LSB

Isolation

Channel to Channel 500 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz for 1 minute

558 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Channel to Bus 1780 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz for 1 minute

Maximum Settling Time 700 μs to +/- 0.1% of the final value



Wire Length 400 m max




Fusing

Internal None

External An external fuse is required on the master override signal when it is connected to an external source. The required fuse

is 1/16 A or 0.063 A fuse.

Fuse Type: 3AG Fast Acting 1/16 A, 250 V

Fuse Holder: 3AG Fuse Type

The external fuse is not required if master override is connected to common.

Note: The output levels of this module are either those generated within the module based on data inputs from the system, or from the master override inputs on the field-wiring terminal strip.

Specifications

Possible injury to personnel or equipmentBefore removing the connector, ensure that it is safe to have field wiring in an open circuit condition.Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

Malfunction of equipmentMaster override must be connected to an external source through 1/16 A in line fuse, or strapped to common to avoid erroneous outputs in this module.Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

35013379 02 October 2007 559


I/O Modules

During normal operation, the front panel Active and 1 ... 4 green LEDs are ON. If bus communication to the module stops for any reason, the Active LED will go off and, depending on panel software configuration:

when LEDs 1 ... 4 are ON, the channel output levels will be as predetermined and held by the module.when LEDs 1 ... 4 are OFF, the master override levels are output on each channel.

If module power is lost or the module fails, the master override levels will be output.

The master override inputs must be from an external supply with a source impedance of <200Ω or tied to system common. These inputs for channels that are in use should not be allowed to float and may be unique for each.

560 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140AVO02000 module.

COMMON 1 (-)

COMMON 1 (-)

MASTER OVERRIDE

N/C

COMMON 1 (-)

COMMON 2 (-)

COMMON 2 (-)

MASTER OVERRIDE

N/C

COMMON 2 (-)

COMMON 3 (-)

COMMON 3 (-)

MASTER OVERRIDE

N/C

COMMON 3 (-)

COMMON 4 (-)

COMMON 4 (-)

MASTER OVERRIDE

N/C

COMMON 4 (-)

SeeNOTE 1

SeeNOTE 1

SeeNOTE 1

SeeNOTE 1

OUTPUT 1 (+)

R 1

N/C

OUTPUT 2 (+)

CONTROL 1

REFERENCE 1

Jumper

JumperR 2

Jumper

CONTROL 2

REFERENCE 2

N/C

OUTPUT 3 (+)

Jumper

R 3CONTROL 3

Jumper

REFERENCE 3

N/C

OUTPUT 4 (+)

Jumper

R 4

CONTROL 4

REFERENCE 4

N/C

1/16A

EXTERNALVOLTAGESOURCE

The external voltage sourceis not required for standardoperation (see NOTE 1).

FIELDDEVICE

FIELDDEVICE

CHANNEL 4JUMPERED

FOR 0 TO 10 V

CHANNEL 3JUMPEREDFOR +/-5 V

CHANNEL 2JUMPERED

FOR 0 TO 5 V

CHANNEL 1JUMPEREDFOR +/-10 V

NOTE 1: Master override is an inputconnected via an internal relay contact to theoutput when the module is not active. Ifconnected to an external source, the masteroverride input must be fused by a 1/16 A fuse.If the master override is not connected to anexternal source, then it must be connected tocommon of that channel. The master overriderelay transition time is typically 2 ms.

NOTE 2: N/C = Not Connected

Normally Open whenCH X green LED is ON

NormallyOpen

NormallyClosed

ChannelOutput X

MasterOverride X

Typical oneof four

Master Override Relay Circuit (Internal)

2 1

4 3

56

8 7

10 9

12 11

1314

16 15

1718

20 19

2122

24 23

2526

28 27

2930

32 31

3334

36 35

3738

40 39

35013379 02 October 2007 561


I/O Modules

18.4 Analog Input/Output Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on Quantum Analog input/output modules.



Topic Page

Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module 563

140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module 568

562 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module

Overview This section provides information on configuration of the analog input/output module 140AMM09000.


This module requires five contiguous input (3x) registers and two output (4x) registers.

3X Registers The following figure shows the 3x registers.

Note: Modsoft V2.2 or above is required to set up your Quantum I/O configuration.

Note: The input data format and resolution are selected in Zoom screen. Voltmeter mode is recommended for bipolar ranges with signed decimal numbers.

Channel 1 input dataRegister 1


3x Registers



35013379 02 October 2007 563


I/O Modules

Status Warning The following figure shows the status warnings for register 5.

*A range warning is issued when a channel input is outside the rated input value, as shown in the following table. Warning bits stay on after out of range bits are set. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.4%. Out of range bits are also set if inputs drop below 0.5V (1 ... 5V mode) or 2.08 mA (4 ... 20 mA mode).

When configured for current inputs (jumper installed between IN(+) and SENSE terminals), a broken field wire results in a zero current reading. If 4 ... 20 mA is selected, fault LEDs and warning/out of range and I/O Map Status Byte bits are displayed.

StatusRegister 5

1 = Channel 1 output broken wire1 = Channel 2 output broken wire

1 = Reserved, always 01 = Reserved, always 0

1 = Channel 1 input out of range1 = Channel 2 input out of range

1 = Channel 3 input out of range1 = Channel 4 input out of range

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

1 = Range warning on input channel 4*1 = Range warning on input channel 3*

1 = Range warning on input channel 2*1 = Range warning on input channel 1*

Not used, always 0

Possible Equipment FailureWhen configured for voltage inputs (no jumper installed between In(+) and sense terminals), if a broken field wire occurs, readings will be non-zero and not predictable.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

564 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AMM09000 combination Analog module.

4x Registers The following figure shows the 4X registers.

Data Format Input Under Warning

Normal Over Warning

16-bit Format

+/- 10 V < 768 768 ... 64,768 > 64,768

+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA < 16,768 16,768 ... 48,768 > 48,768

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 64,000 > 64,000

0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 32,000 > 32,000

1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA < 6,400 6,400 ... 32,000 > 32,000

Voltmeter Format*

+/- 10 V < -10,000 -10,000 ... 10,000 > 10,000

+/- 5 V < -5,000 -5,000 ... 5,000 > 5,000

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10,000 > 10,000

0 ... 5 V 0 ... 5,000 > 5,000

1 ... 5 V < 1,000 1,000 ... 5,000 > 5,000

+/- 20mA < -20,000 -20,000 ... 20,000 > 20,000

0 ... 20mA 0 ... 20,000 > 20,000

4 ... 20mA < 4,000 4000 ... 20,000 >20,000

12-bit Format

+/- 10 V 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

0 ... 10 V 0 ... 4,095 4,095

0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 4,095 4,095

1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095

Note: The data format is always 0 ... 4095 decimal (in Modsoft).

Channel 1 output dataRegister 1

Channel 2 output dataRegister 2

4x Registers

35013379 02 October 2007 565


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte is used for the 140AMM09000 Combination module as follows.


Module Zoom selection screens for selecting input ranges and output timeout states are as follows.

Module Zoom Selections (Inputs)

Push <Enter> to display and select the data format for the module and the ranges for the individual input channels.

Channel 1 output broken wireChannel 2 output broken wire

Not usedNot used

Channel 1 input out of range or broken wire (4-20 mA)Channel 2 input out of range or broken wire (4-20 mA)

Channel 3 input out of range or broken wire (4-20 mA)Channel 4 input out of range or broken wire (4-20 mA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Data Formats (per node)(Inputs)

Channel X Range(per channel)(Inputs)

16-bit Format

Voltmeter

12-bit Format

Not installed

-10V to +10V

0V to +10V

-5V to +5V

0V to +5V

1V to +5V

-20mA to +20mA

0mA to +20mA

+4mA to +20mA

566 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Module Zoom Selections (Outputs)

Push <Enter> to display and select the mode for the outputs after a communication’s timeout. This mode is selected for each channel. The following figure shows the module zoom selections (outputs).

Channel X Output State:Not installed = Disabled with output current equal to 0 for all conditions. No error generated for this channel.

Channel X User Defined Output Value: 0 DEC

Not Installed

Last Value

User Defined

35013379 02 October 2007 567


I/O Modules

140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module

Overview The Analog In/Out 4/2 bi-directional module combines four analog inputs which accept a mix of current and voltage, with two isolated analog outputs that control and monitor current in 4 ... 20 mA loops.

Topology Specifications

The following table shows the topology specifications for the analog input/output module.


Number of Input Channels

4 channels

Number of Output Channels

2 isolated channels

LEDs Active

F (red) - No power applied to the output group(s) or channel fault

1 ... 2 (Green - left column) - Indicates output is active

1 ... 2 (Red - middle column) - Indicates output status: broken wire

1 ... 4 (Red- right column) - Indicates input status: under/over range, broken wire 4 ... 20 mA

568 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Input Specifications

The following table shows the input specifications for the analog input/output module.


Operating Ranges

Bipolar +/- 10 Vdc +/-5 Vdc +/- 20 mA

Unipolar 0 ... 10 Vdc 0 ... 5 Vdc 0 ... 20 mA

Unipolar w/Offset 1 ... 5 Vdc 4 ... 20 mA

Voltage Input

Linear Measuring Range 2.4% over and under range

Absolute Maximum Input +/- 50 Vdc

Input Impedance In Range >10 MΩ

Input Impedance Over Range > 0.5 MΩ

Current Input

Linear Measuring Range +2.4% over range, and -9.6% under range

Absolute Maximum Input +/- 25 mA

Input Impedance 250Ω

Resolution

16 Bit +/- 10 Vdc 0 ...10 Vdc

15 Bit +/- 5 Vdc 0 ... 5 Vdc +/-20 mA 0 ... 20 mA

14 Bit 1 ... 5 Vdc 4 ... 20 mA

Absolute Accuracy Error @ 25° C (Voltage Mode)

Typical:Maximum:

+/- 0.03%+/- 0.05% of full scale

Linearity Monotonic +/- 1 LSB

Offset 0 ... 60° CGain Shift 0 ... 60° C

+/- 0.0014%/°C of full scale max+/- 0.002%/°C of full scale max

Common Mode Rejection Better than 80 dB @ 50 or 60 Hz

Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3dB @ 21 Hz, +/- 20%

Operating Voltage

Channel to Channel +/- 40 Vdc max

Isolation

Channel to Bus 500 Vac, 750 Vdc, for 1 minute

Input Channel to Output Channel

500 Vac, 750 Vdc, for 1 minute

Update Time 320 ms for 4 channels

Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA range, or over range, or under range in bipolar modes only

35013379 02 October 2007 569


I/O Modules

Output Specifications

The following table shows the output specifications for the analog input/output module.


Loop Voltage 7 ... 30 Vdc, up to 60 Vdc with an external resistor

Loop Resistance


Resolution (bits) 12


Linearity Monotonic +/- 1 LSB

Accuracy Error 0 ... 60° C Typical: +/- 0.004%/°C of full scale.Maximum:+/- 0.007%/°C of full scale

Isolation

Channel to Channel 500 Vac, 750 Vdc, for 1 minute

Channel to Bus 500 Vac, 750 Vdc, for 1 minute

Output Channel to Input Channel

500 Vac, 750 Vdc, for 1 minute

Update Time 15 ms for 2 channels

Settling Time 900 μs to +/- 0.1% of final value

Fault Detection Open circuit indicator light and status byte

External Power Supply See loop voltage above

RMIN∗

Vloop 30Vdc–

0.02A-------------------------------------=

RMAX

Vloop 7Vdc–

0.02A----------------------------------=

*No RMIN is required for loop

voltage less than 30 Vdc.

570 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the specifications for the voltmeter monitor for the analog input/output module.

Common Specifications

The following table shows the common specifications for the analog input/output module.


Range 1 ... 5 V (Loop current must be active)

Scaling IOUT (mA) x 0.250 = VOUT (volts)

Output Impedance 300Ω typical

Maximum Wire Length 1 meter


Required Addressing 5 Words In 2 Words Out

Bus Current Required (module) 350 mA

Fusing

Internal None required


35013379 02 October 2007 571


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AMM 090 00 analog input/output module.

The following information pertains to the wiring diagram above.

2

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20 19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

CURRENT SOURCE(-)1

CURRENT SOURCE(-)1

N/C

N/C

CURRENT SOURCE(-)1

CURRENT SOURCE(-)2

CURRENT SOURCE(-)2

N/C

N/C

CURRENT SOURCE(-)2

IN(-)1

N/C

IN(-)2

N/C

N/C

IN(-)3

N/C

IN(-)4

N/C

N/C N/C

SENSE 4

IN(+)4

SENSE 3

IN(+)3

N/C

SENSE 2

IN(+)2

SENSE 1

CURRENT SINK(+)2N/C

N/C

N/C

MONITOR 2

CURRENT SINK(+)1

N/C

N/C

N/C

MONITOR 1 + –

Optional Monitor Voltmeter1 V= 4 mA5 V= 20 mA 24 Vdc

FieldSupply

Field Device

Field Device

4 - 20 mA Current

4 - 20 mA Current

IN(+)1

–

+Sensor 0 - 10 V Output

+

_

10

V

572 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Output Section 2 Channels

Input Section 4 Channels

Typical Wiring Outputs

Channel 1 The output shows a connection to an external field device and optional monitor.

Channel 2 The output shows a connection to an external field device and the input of channel 1.

Typical Wiring Inputs

Channel 1 Channel 1 shows 4 - 20 mA current input controlled by output section Channel 2.

Channel 4 The input shows a connection to a voltage output sensor.

Note: 1. Pins 1 ... 20 are outputs

Pins 21 ... 40 are inputs2. N / C = Not Connected 3. Jumpers are required between IN (+) and SENSE terminals for all current input

ranges.

35013379 02 October 2007 573


I/O Modules

18.5 Discrete Input Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on Quantum discrete input modules.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules 575

140DAI34000 Quantum I/O 24 VAC IN Module 579

140DAI35300 Quantum I/O AC Input 24 Vac Module 582

140DAI44000 Quantum I/O 48 VAC IN Module 585

140DAI45300 Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module 588

140DAI54000 Quantum I/O 115 VAC In Module 591





140DDI15310 Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source Module 608

140DDI35300 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 611

140DDI35310 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc Source 4x8 Input Module 614

140DDI36400 I/O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module 616

140DDI67300 Quantum I/O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module 620

140DDI84100 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module 626

140DDI85300 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 629

574 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules

Overview This section provides information on configuration of 16-, 24-, 32-, and 96-point input modules.

16-Point Input Modules

The 16-point input modules are:

140DAI34000 (AC Input 24 Vac 16x1)140DAI44000 (AC Input 48 Vac 16x1)140DAI54000 (AC Input 115 Vac 16x1)140DAI54300 (AC Input 115 Vac 8x2)140DAI74000 (AC Input 230 Vac 16x1)140DDI84100 (DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink)


The input modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register.The following figure shows the 16-point register.

I/O Map Status Byte

There is no I/O map status byte associated with these modules.


Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the module is I/O mapped to a 3x register. The following figure shows the input type display.

24-Point Input Module

There is only one 24-point input module: 140 DDI 673 00 (DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink).


The input module listed above can be configured as either 24 contiguous discrete input (1x) reference, or as two contiguous input (3x) registers in the following format. The following figures show the input point for Register 1 and Register 2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

BIN

BCD

input Type:

35013379 02 October 2007 575


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte

There is no input I/O map status byte associated with this module.


Push <Enter> to display and select the Input Type and the Filter Select options. The following figures show the input type and the filter select option.

32-Point Input Modules

The 32-point input modules are as follows:

140DAI35300 (AC Input 24 Vac 4x8)140DAI45300 (AC Input 48 Vac 4x8)140DAI55300 (AC Input 115 Vac 4x8)140DAI75300 (AC Input 230 Vac 4x8)140DDI15310 (DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source)140DDI35300 (DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink)140DDI35310 (DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Source)140DDI85300 (DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

18 19 20 21 22 23 2417

Register 1InputPoint 1

MSB - First Word


MSB - Second Word

BIN

BCD

.7 msec

1.5 msec

Group XFilter Select on:

Input Type: The input Type selection only appears if the module is I/O mapped to a 3x register.

The Filter Select option is made on a group-by-group basis and defaults to the .7 msec filter,

576 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The input modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous discrete input (1x) references or as two contiguous input (3x) registers in the following format. The following figure shows the input points for Register 1 and Register 2.

I/O Map Status Byte

There is no I/O map status byte associated with these modules.


Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the module is I/O mapped to a 3x register. The following figure shows the input type.

96-Point Input modules

The following is the only 96 point input module:

140DDI36400 - DC input 6 x 16 sink

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25


MSB - First Word


MSB - Second Word

BIN

BCD

Input Type:

35013379 02 October 2007 577


I/O Modules

140DDI36400 Register Assignment

The following information pertains to the 140DDI36400 Input module. The following figures show the output points for register 1 through 6.

I/O Map Status Byte




1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25


MSB - First WordRegister 2

InputPoint 17

MSB - Second Word

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 42 43 44 45 46 47 4840 41


MSB - Third Word

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 58 59 60 61 62 63 6456 57


MSB - Fourth Word

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 74 75 76 77 78 79 8072 73


MSB - Fifth Word

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 90 91 92 93 94 95 9688 89


MSB - Sixth Word

BIN

BCD

Input Type:

578 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DAI34000 Quantum I/O 24 VAC IN Module

Overview The AC Input 24 Vac 16x1 module accepts 24 Vac inputs.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI34000 24 VAC IN module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 16 Individually Isolated

LEDs Active

1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status

Required Addressing 1 Word In

Operating Voltages and Input Currents*

50 Hz ON: 14 ... 30 Vac (11.1 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 5 Vac

Typical Input Impedance 3.1 kΩ capacitive

60 Hz ON: 12 ... 30 Vac (13.2 mA max)OFF: 0 ... 5 Vac

Typical Input impedance 2.6 kΩ capacitive

*Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range.

Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition

1.9 mA


Continuous 30 Vac

10 s 32 Vac

1 cycle 50 Vac

Response

OFF - ON Min 4.9 ms., Max 0.75 line cycle

ON - OFF Min 7.3 ms., Max 12.3 ms

Isolation

Input to Input 1780 Vac for 1 minute

Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute





Fusing

35013379 02 October 2007 579


I/O Modules

Internal None


Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

Specifications

580 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI34000 wiring diagram.

Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive. 2. N / C = Not Connected.

RETURN 1 INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1RETURN 2

RETURN 3

RETURN 4

RETURN 5

RETURN 6

RETURN 7

RETURN 8

RETURN 9

RETURN 10

RETURN 11

RETURN 12

RETURN 13

RETURN 14

RETURN 15

RETURN 16

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

INPUT 6

INPUT 7

INPUT 8

INPUT 9

INPUT 10

INPUT 11

INPUT 12

INPUT 13

INPUT 14

INPUT 15

INPUT 16

N/C N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

L N

35013379 02 October 2007 581


I/O Modules

140DAI35300 Quantum I/O AC Input 24 Vac Module


Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI35300 AC input 24 VAC IN module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups

LEDs Active


F: Indicates channel fault.Note: This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire

condition in the 4...20 mA range.

Required Addressing 2 words in


50 Hz

Typical Input Impedance

ON: 14 ... 30 Vac (11.1 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 5 Vac

3.1 kΩ capacitive

60 Hz ON: 12 ... 30 Vac (13.2 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 5 Vac

Typical Input Impedance 2.6 kΩ capacitive



1.9 mA



Continuous 30 Vac

10 s 32 Vac

1 cycle 50 Vac

Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms., Max: 0.75 line cycle

ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms., Max: 12.3 ms

Isolation

Group to Group 1780 Vac for 1 minute

582 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Fault Detection Broken wire (4...20 mA mode) or under voltage range (1...5 V)




Fusing

Internal None


Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 583


I/O Modules


Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive.2. N / C = Not Connected.

INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1L NINPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

N/C

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

INPUT 26

INPUT 28

INPUT 30

INPUT 32

N/C

N/C

N/C

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 31

584 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DAI44000 Quantum I/O 48 VAC IN Module



Specifications

Number of Input Points 16 individually isolated

LEDs Active


Required Addressing 1 word in


50 Hz ON: 34 ... 56 Vac (9.8 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 10 Vac


60 Hz ON: 29 ... 56 Vac (11.7 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 10 Vac




1.7 mA


Continuous 56 Vac

10 s 63 Vac

1 cycle 100 Vac

Response



Isolation







35013379 02 October 2007 585


I/O Modules

Fusing

Internal None



Specifications

586 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules



RETURN 1 INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1RETURN 2

RETURN 3

RETURN 4

RETURN 5

RETURN 6

RETURN 7

RETURN 8

RETURN 9

RETURN 10

RETURN 11

RETURN 12

RETURN 13

RETURN 14

RETURN 15

RETURN 16

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

INPUT 6

INPUT 7

INPUT 8

INPUT 9

INPUT 10

INPUT 11

INPUT 12

INPUT 13

INPUT 14

INPUT 15

INPUT 16

N/C N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

L N

35013379 02 October 2007 587


I/O Modules

140DAI45300 Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module



Specifications


LEDs Active


F: Indicates channel fault.Note: This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire

condition in the 4...20 mA range.



50 Hz ON: 34 ... 56 Vac (9.8 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 10 Vac


60 Hz ON: 29 ... 56 Vac (11.7 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 10 Vac




1.7 mA



Continuous 56 Vac

10 s 63 Vac

1 cycle 100 Vac

Response



Isolation


588 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Fault Detection Broken wire (4...20 mA mode) or under voltage range (1...5 V)




Fusing

Internal None



Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 589


I/O Modules



INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1L NINPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

N/C

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

INPUT 26

INPUT 28

INPUT 30

INPUT 32

N/C

N/C

N/C

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 31

590 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DAI54000 Quantum I/O 115 VAC In Module



Specifications


LEDs Active




50 Hz ON: 85 ... 132 Vac (11.1 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac


60 Hz ON: 79 ... 132 Vac (13.2 mA max)

OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac

Typical Input impedance 12 kΩ capacitive



2.1 mA


Continuous 132 Vac

10 s 156 Vac

1 cycle 200 Vac

Response



Isolation







35013379 02 October 2007 591


I/O Modules

Fusing

Internal None



Specifications

592 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140DAI54000 wiring diagram.


RETURN 1 INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1RETURN 2

RETURN 3

RETURN 4

RETURN 5

RETURN 6

RETURN 7

RETURN 8

RETURN 9

RETURN 10

RETURN 11

RETURN 12

RETURN 13

RETURN 14

RETURN 15

RETURN 16

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

INPUT 6

INPUT 7

INPUT 8

INPUT 9

INPUT 10

INPUT 11

INPUT 12

INPUT 13

INPUT 14

INPUT 15

INPUT 16

N/C N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

L N

35013379 02 October 2007 593


I/O Modules




Specifications

Number of Input Points 16 in two 8 point groups

LEDs Active




50 Hz


ON: 85 ... 132 Vac (11.1 mA max)OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac

14.4 kΩ capacitive

60 Hz


ON: 79 ... 132 Vac (13.2 mA max)OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac12 kΩ capacitive



2.1 mA



Continuous 132 Vac

10 s 156 Vac

1 cycle 200 Vac

1.3 ms 276 Vac

Response



Isolation

Input to Input All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage

Group-to-Group 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

Input to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

594 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules





Fusing

Internal None



Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 595


I/O Modules


INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1L N

N/C

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

GROUP A COMMON

GROUP B COMMON

INPUT 5

INPUT 6

INPUT 7

INPUT 8

INPUT 9

INPUT 10

INPUT 11

INPUT 12

INPUT 13

INPUT 14

INPUT 15

INPUT 16

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

596 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage.2. This module is not polarity sensitive.3. N / C = Not Connected.

Voltage CompatibilityAll inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 597


I/O Modules



Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the DAI55300 115 VAC IN module.

Specifications


LEDs Active




50 Hz Typical Input Impedance

ON: 85 ... 132 Vac (11.1 mA max)OFF: 0... 20 Vac

14.4 kΩ capacitive

60 Hz Typical Input Impedance




2.1 mA



Continuous 132 Vac

10 s 156 Vac

1 cycle 200 Vac

Response



Isolation

Input to Input All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage.




598 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules




Fusing

Internal None



Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 599


I/O Modules


INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1L NINPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

N/C

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

INPUT 26

INPUT 28

INPUT 30

INPUT 32

N/C

N/C

N/C

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 31

600 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage.2. This module is not polarity sensitive.3. N/C = Not Connected


CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 601


I/O Modules



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC IN module.

Specifications


LEDs Active 1 - 16 (Green) - Indicates point status



50 Hz Input Impedance


31. 8 kΩ capacitive

60 Hz Input Impedance

ON: 165 ... 264 Vac (11.5 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 40 Vac26.5 kΩ capacitive



2.6 mA


Continuous 264 Vac

10 s 300 Vac

1 cycle 400 Vac

Response



Isolation







Fusing

602 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Internal None



Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 603


I/O Modules


Note: This module is not polarity sensitive.N / C = Not Connected.

RETURN 1 INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1RETURN 2

RETURN 3

RETURN 4

RETURN 5

RETURN 6

RETURN 7

RETURN 8

RETURN 9

RETURN 10

RETURN 11

RETURN 12

RETURN 13

RETURN 14

RETURN 15

RETURN 16

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

INPUT 6

INPUT 7

INPUT 8

INPUT 9

INPUT 10

INPUT 11

INPUT 12

INPUT 13

INPUT 14

INPUT 15

INPUT 16

N/C N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

L N

604 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI75300 AC 230 VAC IN module.

Specifications


LEDs Active1 - 32 (Green) - Indicates point status



50 Hz


ON: 175... 264 Vac (9.7 mA max)OFF:.. 40 Vac

32 kΩ capacitive

60 Hz


ON: 165 ... 264 Vac (11.5 mA maxOFF: 0 ... 40 Vac27 kΩ capacitive



2.6 mA


Continuous 264 Vac

10 s 300 Vac

1 cycle 400 Vac

Response



Isolation





Power Dissipation 9 W max


35013379 02 October 2007 605


I/O Modules

Fusing

Internal None



Specifications

606 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Note: N / C = Not Connected.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT8

N/C

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

INPUT 26

INPUT 28

INPUT 30

INPUT 32

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 31

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

L

N

INPUT 2

N/C

N/C

N/C


CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 607


I/O Modules

140DDI15310 Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source Module

Overview The DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source module accepts 5 Vdc inputs. It is for use with shared input common wired to 0 V and is compatible with TTL, -LS, -S, and CMOS logic.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI15310 5 V IN module.

Specifications


LEDs Active



Input Ratings

ON Level 0.8 Vdc maximum

4.0 mA at US = 5.5 and UIN = 0

OFF Level 4 Vdc (min) @ US = 5.5 V

3 Vdc (min) @ US = 4.5 V

OFF Leakage 200 μA @ US = 5.5 V and UIN = 4 Vdc

Internal Pullup Resistor 7.5 k


Continuous 5.5 Vdc

1.3 ms 15 Vdc decaying pulse

Response




Isolation

Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute

Group to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute




External Power (US) 4.5... 5.5 Vdc

Module Supply 150 mA

Fusing

Internal None

608 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Logic States The following table shows the logic states for the DDI15310 module.


Specifications

Input Voltage Input State LED

<= 0.8 Vdc ON ON

>= 4.0 Vdc @ 5.5 US >= 3.0 Vdc @

4.5 US

OFF OFF

No Connection OFF OFF

35013379 02 October 2007 609


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI15310 wiring diagram.

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

INPUT 15

GROUP A POWER

INPUT 13

INPUT 11

INPUT 9

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

N/C

GROUP B POWER

GROUP C POWER

GROUP D POWER

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 23

INPUT 31

INPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

INPUT 26

INPUT 28

INPUT 30

INPUT 32

N/C

N/C

N/C

TTL

Open Collector

5 Vdc

+ –

610 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DDI35300 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module

Overview The DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI35300 24 VDC IN module.

Specifications


LEDs Active




ON (voltage) +15 ... +30 Vdc


ON (current) 2.0 mA min

OFF (current) 0.5 mA max


Continuous 30 Vdc


Response

OFF - ON 1 ms (max)

ON - OFF 1 ms (max)

Internal Resistance 2.5 k


Isolation





Power Dissipation 1.7 W + 0.36 W x the number of points on


Fusing

Internal None


35013379 02 October 2007 611


I/O Modules


INPUT 12

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1+ –

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 31

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

INPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

INPUT 26

INPUT 28

INPUT 30

INPUT 32

GROUP A COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

FIELD DEVICE

612 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: N / C = Not Connected

35013379 02 October 2007 613


I/O Modules

140DDI35310 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc Source 4x8 Input Module

Overview The 24 Vdc Source 4x8 Input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to 0 V.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI35310 24 VDC IN SOURCE module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 32 input points in four 8 point groups

LEDs Active



Voltage

ON (Voltage) -15 ... -30 Vdc (reference from group supply)

OFF (Voltage) 0 ... -5 Vdc (reference group supply)

ON (Current) 2 mA min; 14 mA max

OFF (Current) 0.5 mA max


Continuous 30 Vdc



OFF - ON 1 ms (max)

ON - OFF 1 ms (max)


Isolation


Input to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

Internal Resistance 2.4 k



Power Dissipation 1.5 W + 0.26 W x the number of points ON

External Power 19.2 ... 30 Vdc

Fusing

Internal None


614 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules



INPUT 1 +

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 31

INPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

INPUT 26

INPUT 28

INPUT 30

INPUT 32

FIELD DEVICE

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

GROUP A SUPPLY N/C

GROUP B SUPPLY

GROUP C SUPPLY

GROUP D SUPPLY

–

N/C

N/C

N/C

35013379 02 October 2007 615


I/O Modules

140DDI36400 I/O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module

Overview The Telefast input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs, and has 6 groups with 16 sink ports each.

Specifications The following table provides detailed specifications for the DDI36400 input module.

Specifications

Number of input points 96 in six 16 point groups

LEDs ACT (green) Bus communication is present

+32 (green) Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix

+ 64 (green) Points 65 to96 displayed on LED matrix

1 ... 32 (green) Indicates point status

Required addressing 6 words in

Operating voltages and currents

ON (voltage) +15 VDC

ON (current) 2.5 mA minimum

OFF (voltage) +5VDC

OFF (current) 0.7 mA

Absolute maximum input

Continuous 30 VDC

1.0 ms 50 VDC

Response (resistive load)

OFF - ON 2.0 ms maximum

ON - OFF 3.0 ms maximum

Internal resistance 6.7 KΩ

Input protection Resistor limited

Isolation

Group to group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute

Bus current required 270 mA

Power dissipation 1.35 W + 0.13 W for each ON input

External power 19.2 ... 30 VDC

Fusing User discretion for field power

616 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Front view of DDI36400 Module

The front view of the DDI36400 input module including terminal assignment numbers:

140DDI 364 0024 VDC IN 6x16 Sink

+3212345678

+64910111213141516

Act1718192021222324

2526272829303132

I49I51I53I55I57I59I61I63NCNC

I50I52I54I56I58I60I62I64COMCOM











PushbuttonA

B

C

D

E

F

35013379 02 October 2007 617


I/O Modules

Selecting Point Status Indicator LEDs

Use the pushbutton to select input points displayed.

Recommended Cables

The following table shows recommended cables, description, and their length in meters.

Color Codes for Input groups

Table indicating cable color coding for all input groups:

LED +32 +64

Inputs 1 to 32 OFF OFF

Inputs 33 to 64 ON OFF

Inputs 65 to 96 OFF ON

Cable Part Number Description Length (M)

TSXCDP301 (1) HE 10 - flying leads 3


TSXCDP102 (2) HE 10 - ribbon cable 1



TSXCDP053 (2) HE 10 - round cable 0.5

TSXCDP103 (2) HE 10 - round cable 1




1 white 2 brown

3 green 4 yellow

5 gray 6 pink

7 blue 8 red

9 black 10 purple

11 gray/pink 12 red/blue

13 white/green 14 brown/green

15 white/yellow 16 yellow/brown

17 white/gray 18 gray/brown

19 white/pink 20 pink/brown

618 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Compatible Connection Sub-Bases

The following tables shows the compatible connections sub-bases. See Quantum Modicon Telemecanique Automation Platform, Discrete I/O Chapter, Telefast 2 pre-wire system: connector cables FOR Quantum PLCs section, for more detailed information.

Compatible Input Adapter Sub-Base

16 Channels, ABE-7S16E2xx/7P16F3xx

Channels Type

8 ABE-7H08Rxx1

8 ABE-7H08S211

16 ABE-7H16Rxx/H16Cxx

16 ABE-7H16S21

16 ABE-7H16R23

16 ABE-7H16S43

1With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02

35013379 02 October 2007 619


I/O Modules

140DDI67300 Quantum I/O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module

Overview The DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink module accepts 125 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential. The module has software-selectable response time to provide additional input filtering.

620 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI67300 125 VDC IN module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 24 in three 8 point groups

LEDs Active



Continuous Operating Voltages and Currents


OFF (voltage) 0 ... +36 Vdc




Continuous 156.25 Vdc including ripple

Input Response (OFF-ON, ON-OFF)

Default Filter 0.7 ms

Non-default Filter 1.5 ms

Internal Resistance

OFF State 73.8 kΩ (nominal)

ON State 31.6 kΩ (nominal)


Isolation





Power Dissipation 1.0 W + (0.62 W x the number of points on)


Fusing

Internal None


35013379 02 October 2007 621


I/O Modules

Operating Curve The following figure shows the DDI67300 operating curve.

Note: The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support this module.

30

Ambient Temperature (°C)

Num

ber o

f Poi

nts

ON

per

Gro

up

5678

40 50 60

4

Operating Voltages

125 Vdc

>140 Vdc

622 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Minimum Version Levels

The following table shows the minimum version levels required.Modules marked SV/PV/RL rather than V0X.0X0 exceed the minimum version levels in this table.

Version Label The following figure shows the version label.

Products Minimum Version Level (see label illustration

User Action Required

CPUs and NOMs < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V02.10

≥ V02.20 None

RIOs < V02.00 Module upgrade

≥ V02.00 and < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V01.10

> V02.20 None

DIOs < V02.10 Module upgrade

≥ V02.10 None

Modsoft < V02.40 Upgrade to V02.40

≥ V02.40 None

ProWORX NxT >=V02.00

Concept >=V02.00 None

Software compatibilityWhen using a DIO drop and the CPU and the NOM executive software is not per the compatibility chart, channels 17 ... 24 of this module will be seen as zeroes in the controller when configured as discretes.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

Note: The version label is found on the top front of the module.


CPU 2M2XMB+ 02.20

35013379 02 October 2007 623


I/O Modules


INPUT 1+ –

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

INPUT9

INPUT 11

INPUT13

INPUT15

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

INPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 22

INPUT 24

GROUP A COMMON

FIELD DEVICE

N/C

N/C

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

INPUT 10

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

624 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


35013379 02 October 2007 625


I/O Modules

140DDI84100 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module

Overview The DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups.

626 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI84110 10-60 VDC IN module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 16 in eight 2 point groups

LEDs Active


Required Addressing 1 Word in

Group Supply / Tolerance ON State* OFF State*

12 Vdc / +/-5%24 Vdc / -15% ... +20%48 Vdc / -15% ... +20%60 Vdc / -15% ... +20%

9 ... 12 11 ... 2434 ... 4845 ... 60

0 ...1.8 IEC 57 Class20 ... 5 IEC 65A Type2

0 ... 10 IEC 65A Type10 ... 9 IEC 57 Class1

*ON/OFF state ranges are specified at normal reference voltages.


ON State Current (mA)

@ 12 Vdc 5 ... 10 mA

@ 24 Vdc 6 ... 30 mA

@ 48 Vdc 2 ... 15 mA

@ 60 Vdc 1 ... 5 mA

Response

OFF - ON 4 ms

ON - OFF 4 ms

Switching Frequency <100 Hz


Isolation

Group to Group 700 Vdc for 1 minute

Group to Bus 2500 Vdc for 1 minute


Power Dissipation 1 W + 0.25 W x the number of points on

External Power 10 ... 60 Vdc (group supply)

Fusing

Internal None


35013379 02 October 2007 627


I/O Modules



INPUT 1 + –

INPUT 3

INPUT 7

INPUT 9

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

N/C

N/C

N/C

INPUT 2

GROUP A SUPPLY

INPUT 4

INPUT 10

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

FIELD DEVICE

INPUT 8

N/C

N/C

GROUP B SUPPLY

GROUP D SUPPLY

GROUP E SUPPLY

INPUT 12

GROUP F SUPPLY

N/C

GROUP G SUPPLY

GROUP H SUPPLY

INPUT 6

GROUP C SUPPLY

GROUP A COMMON

GROUP B COMMON

INPUT 5

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

N/C

GROUP E COMMON

INPUT 11

GROUP F COMMON

GROUP G COMMON

GROUP H COMMON

N/C

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

628 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DDI85300 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module

Overview The DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups.

35013379 02 October 2007 629


I/O Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 10-60 VDC IN module.

Specifications


LEDs Active



Group Supply / Tolerance ON State * OFF State *

12 Vdc / +/- 5% 9 ... 12 0 ... 1.8 IEC 57 Class 2

24 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 11 ... 24 0 ... 5 IEC 65A Type 2

48 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 34 ... 48 0 ... 10 IEC 65A Type 1

60 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 45 ... 60 0 ... 12.5 IEC 57 Class1

*ON/OFF state ranges are specified at nominal reference voltages.


ON State Current (mA)

@ 12 Vdc 5 ... 10 mA

@ 24 Vdc 6 ... 30 mA

@ 48 Vdc 2 ... 15 mA

@ 60 Vdc 1 ... 5 mA

Response

OFF - ON 4 ms

ON - OFF 4 ms

Switching Frequency <100 Hz max


Isolation





Power Dissipation 1 W + 0.25 W x the number of points on

External Power 10 ... 60 Vdc (group supply)

Fusing

Internal None


630 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


INPUT 1+ –

INPUT 25

INPUT 29

INPUT 2

INPUT 26

INPUT 30

FIELD DEVICE

INPUT 22

INPUT 10

INPUT 21

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

GROUP A SUPPLY

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

GROUP B SUPPLY

INPUT 18

INPUT 20

INPUT 24

GROUP C SUPPLY

INPUT 28

INPUT 32

GROUP D SUPPLY

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

INPUT3

INPUT5

INPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

GROUP B COMMON

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 23

GROUP C COMMON

INPUT 27

INPUT 31

GROUP D COMMON

35013379 02 October 2007 631


I/O Modules

18.6 Discrete Output Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on Quantum discrete output modules.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules 633

140DAO84000 I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module 640

140DAO84010 I/O AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module 644

140DAO84210 Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module 649



140DDO15310 I/O DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink Module 664

140DDO35300 Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module 668

140DDO35301 I/O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module 673

140DDO35310 I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 676

140DDO36400 I/O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module 681

140DDO84300 Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module 686

140DDO88500 Quantum I/O DC Output 24-125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module 689

140DRA84000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module 693

140DRC83000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed Module

696

632 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules

Overview This section provides information on configuration of 8-, 12-, 16-, 32- and 96-point output modules.

8-Point Output Modules

The following shows the 8-point output module:

140DRC83000 (Relay Ouput 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed)


The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete output (0x) references or as one output (4x) register. The following figure shows the format for the output modules.

I/O Map Status Byte

There is no I/O Map status byte associated with these modules.


Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and timeout state for the module. Timeout state isassumed when system control of the module is stopped.

2 3 4 5 6 7 81

Output Type:

Timeout State:

User Defined Timeout State Points 1- 8: 00000000

BIN

BCD

Last Value

User Defined

35013379 02 October 2007 633


I/O Modules

Module Zoom Selections (Outputs)

Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when sytem control of the module is stopped.

12-Point Output Module

The 12-point output module is:

140DDO88500

I/O Map Register Assignment (Fault Inputs)

The 140DDO88500 can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register.

The following figure shows the inputs configuration.



I/O Map Register Assignment (Outputs)

The 140DDO88500 can be configured as one output (4x) register in the following format. The following figure shows the register format for outputs.

BIN

BCD

Output Type:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 128 9

Note: Do not use the BCD selection, as it will incorrectly display fault conditions.

BIN

BCD

input Type:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 128 9

634 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte (Outputs)

The least significant bit in the output I/O map status byte is used as follows. The following figure shows the status byte output register.

Modsoft Module Zoom Selections (Outputs)

Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped. The following figure shows the output type and timeout state.


The 16-point output modules are as follows:

140DAO84000 (AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1)140DAO84010 (AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1)140DAO84210 (AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4)140DAO84220 (AC Output 48 Vac 4x4)140DDO84300 (DC Output 10 ... 60 VDC 2x8 Source)140DRA84000 (Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open)


The output modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous discrete output (0x) references, or as one output (4x) register in the following formats. The following figures show the formats for the output modules.

Module Fault(any point fault turns on this bit)

12345678

Note: To clear a fault, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.

BIN

BCD

Last Value

User DefinedTimeout State:

Output Type:

User Defined Timeout State Points 1-12: 000000000000

35013379 02 October 2007 635


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte is used by the 140DAO84210 and 140DAO84220 output modules. The following figure shows I/O map status bytes use.

There is no I/O map status byte associated with the 140DAO84000, 140DAO84010, 140DDO84300, or 140DRA84000 module.


Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped. The following figures show the output type and timeout state.


The following list shows the 32-point output modules:

140DAO85300 (AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 Sink)140DDO15310 (DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink)140DDO35300 (DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source)140DDO35301 (DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source)140DDO35310 (DC Output 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Sink)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

For the 140DAO84000, 140DAO84010, 140DAO84210, 140DAO84220, 140DDO84300, and the 140DRA84000 modules.

12345678

Group D fault

Group C fault Group B fault

Group A fault

BIN

BCD

Last Value


Output Type:


636 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The output modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous 0x references, or as two 4x registers in the following format.

The following figures show the formats for the output modules.

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte (not including 140DAO85300 module) is used by the modules as follows:



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25

Output Point 1

Register 2

MSB - First Word

Register 1

MSB - Second Word

OutputPoint 17

Groupt A Fault

12345678

Group B FaultGroup C Fault

Group D FaultGroup A Point Fault

Group B Point FaultGroup C Point Fault

Group D Point Fault

140DDO35301 Module only(overload or short circuit)

Missing field poweror blown fues

BIN

BCD

Last Value


Output Type:

User Defined Timeout State Points 1-16: 0000000000000000 User Defined Timeout State Points 17-32: 0000000000000000

35013379 02 October 2007 637


I/O Modules

96-Point Output Module

The 96 point output module is:

140DDO36400 - DC out 24VDC 6x16 Source


The following figures show the register 1 through 6 format for the 140DDO36400 output module.

I/O Map Status Byte

The I/O map status byte is used by the module as follows:.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25

Register 1OutputPoint 1

MSB - First WordRegister 2

OutputPoint 17

MSB - Second Word

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 42 43 44 45 46 47 4840 41


MSB - Third Word

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 58 59 60 61 62 63 6456 57


MSB - Fourth Word

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 74 75 76 77 78 79 8072 73


MSB - Fifth Word

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 90 91 92 93 94 95 9688 89


MSB - Sixth Word

Output 1 to 16 Fault

12345678

Output 17 to 32 FaultOutput 33 to 48 Fault

Output 49 to 64 FaultOutput 65 to 80 Fault

Output 80 to 96 Fault

638 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules



BIN

BCD

Last Value


Output Type:

User Defined Timeout State Points 1-16: 0000000000000000User Defined Timeout State Points 17-32: 0000000000000000User Defined Timeout State Points 33-48: 0000000000000000User Defined Timeout State Points 49-64: 0000000000000000User Defined Timeout State Points 65-80: 0000000000000000User Defined Timeout State Points 81-96: 0000000000000000

35013379 02 October 2007 639


I/O Modules

140DAO84000 I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module

Overview The AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 module switches 24 ... 230 Vac powered loads.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AC Output 24 ... 230 VAC OUT module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 16 isolated

LEDs Active


Required Addressing 1 word out

Voltage (rms)

Working 20 ... 253 Vac

Absolute Maximum 300 Vac for 10 s

400 Vac for 1 cycle

Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz

ON State Drop / Point 1.5 Vac

Minimum Load Current (rms) 5 mA

Maximum Load Current (rms)

Each Point* 4 A continuous, 20 ... 132 Vac rms

3 A continuous, 170 ... 253 Vac rms

Any Four Contiguous Points 4 A max continuous for the sum of the four points

Per Module* 16 A continuous (See the derating chart)

Off State Leakage / Point (max) 2.5 mA @ 230 Vac

2 mA @ 115 Vac

1 mA @ 48 Vac

1 mA @ 24 Vac

640 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

The following figure shows the DAO84000 derating chart.

Surge Current Maximum (vms) Per Point

One Cycle 30 A

Two Cycles 20 A

Three Cycles 10 A

Applied DV / DT 400 V/μs

Response

OFF - ON 0.50 of one line cycle max

ON - OFF 0.50 of one line cycle max

Output Protection RC snubber suppression (internal)

Isolation (rms)

Output to Output 1500 Vac for 1 minute

Output to Bus 1780 for 1 minute


Power Dissipation 1.85 W + 1.1 x Total Module Load Current


Fusing

Internal None

External Each output point must be fused with an external fuse. The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part # 043502405 or equivalent) or any other fuse

with an I2T rating of less than 87.

Specifications

1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

30 35 40 45 50 55 60

20-132 vms

170-253 vms

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg.C)

TOTA

L M

OD

ULE

CU

RR

ENT

(A)

0

*The specifications stated are pending UL/CSA approval. This module was originallyapproved at 2 A each point; and 12 A, 0 ... 50° C (115 Vac) and 0 ... 50° C (230 Vac)per module.

35013379 02 October 2007 641


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO84000 wiring diagram.

OUTPUT 1 LINE

5 A (see “Connectivity Compatibility” CAUTION on following page).

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 10

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 15

OUTPUT 16

N/C N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

L N

OUTPUT 2 LINE

OUTPUT 3 LINE

OUTPUT 4 LINE

OUTPUT 5 LINE

OUTPUT 6 LINE

OUTPUT 7 LINE

OUTPUT 8 LINE

OUTPUT 9 LINE

OUTPUT 10 LINE

OUTPUT 11 LINE

OUTPUT 12 LINE

OUTPUT 13 LINE

OUTPUT 14 LINE

OUTPUT 15 LINE

OUTPUT 16 LINE

OUTPUT 1

642 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Agency Compliance1. Voltages up to 133V may be different phases on adjacent output points.2. Voltages over 133V of different phases must have an output point separation

between them. For example: Output 1 and 2 - Phase A, Skip Output 3, Output 4 - Phase B.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Connectivity CompatibilityEach output point must be fused with an external fuse. The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part # 043502405) or any other fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

Wiring CompatibilityIf an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 643


I/O Modules

140DAO84010 I/O AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module


Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAO84010 AC Output 24-115 VAC OUT module.

Specifications


LEDs Active

1 ... 16 (Green) – Indicates point status


Voltage (rms)



200 Vac for 1 cycle





Each Point 4 A continuous, 20 ... 132 Vac rms

Any Four Contiguous Points 4 A max continuous for the sum of the four points

Per Module 16 A continuous (See the derating chart)

Off State Leakage / Point (max) 2 mA @ 115 Vac1 mA @ 48 Vac1 mA @ 24 Vac

644 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Surge Current Maximum (rms) Per Point

One Cycle 30 A

Two Cycles 20 A

Three Cycles 10 A


Response




Isolation (rms)

Output to Output 1500 Vac for 1 minute



Power Dissipation 1.85 W + 1.1 x Total Module Load Current


Fusing

Internal None

Specifications

1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

30 35 40 45 50 55 60

20-132 V rms

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg. C)

TOTA

L M

OD

ULE

CU

RR

ENT

(A)

0

35013379 02 October 2007 645


I/O Modules

External Each output point must be fused with an external fuse. The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part # 043502405 or equivalent) or any other fuse

with an I2T rating of less than 87.

Specifications

646 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


OUTPUT 1 LINE

5 A (see the CAUTION)

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 10

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 15

OUTPUT 16

N/C N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

L N

OUTPUT 2 LINE

OUTPUT 3 LINE

OUTPUT 4 LINE

OUTPUT 5 LINE

OUTPUT 6 LINE

OUTPUT 7 LINE

OUTPUT 8 LINE

OUTPUT 9 LINE

OUTPUT 10 LINE

OUTPUT 11 LINE

OUTPUT 12 LINE

OUTPUT 13 LINE

OUTPUT 14 LINE

OUTPUT 15 LINE

OUTPUT 16 LINE

OUTPUT 1

35013379 02 October 2007 647


I/O Modules

Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive.2. N / C = Not Connected

Connectivity CompatibilityEach output point must be fused with an external fuse. The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part # 043502405), or any other fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

648 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DAO84210 Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module


Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 100 ... 230 VAC OUT module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 16 in four 4 point groups

LEDs Active

F


1 - 4, 5 - 8, 9 - 12, 13 - 16 (Red) - Indicated group has a blown fuse or no field power


Voltage (rms)



400 Vac for 1 cycle





Each Point * 4 A continuous, 85 ... 132 Vac rms,

3 A continuous, 170 ... 253 Vac rms

Each Group 4 A continuous



2.0 mA @ 115 Vac

35013379 02 October 2007 649


I/O Modules


Surge Current Maximum (rms) Per Point Per Group

One Cycle 30 A 45A

Two Cycles 20 A 30 A

Three Cycles 10 A 25 A


Response




Isolation (rms)

Group to Group 1000 Vac rms for 1 minute, galvanically isolated

Output to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of field power


Power Dissipation 1.85 W + 1.1 V x Total Module Load Current

External Power (rms) 85 ... 253 Vac

Fusing

Specifications

1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

30 35 40 45 50 55 60

20-132 V rms

170-253 V rms


TOTA

L M

OD

ULE

CU

RR

ENT

(A)

DAO84210 Operating Curve*

*The specifications stated are pending UL/CSA approval. This module was originally approved at 2 Aeach point; and 12 A, 0 ... 50° C (115 Vac) and 0 ... 50° C (230 Vac) per module.

650 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO84210 module.

Internal 5 A fuse for each group. (Part # 043502405 or equivalent). For the location of the fuses see figure below.


Specifications

Possible injury to personnel or equipmentFirst turn off the power to the module to remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuses.Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

140DAO 842 10100 230 VAC OUT

X

Fuse LocationsPoints

1-4

Points5-8

Points9-12

Points13-16

35013379 02 October 2007 651


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the DAO84210 module.

Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive. 2. N / C = Not Connected

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

OUTPUT 8

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

GROUP A HOT

GROUP C COMMON

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 5

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

GROUP A COMMON

L

GROUP B HOT

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

GROUP C HOT

GROUP D HOT

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 10

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 15

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 16

Optional Fuse

N

652 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Power CompatibilityThe AC power energizing each group must be from a common, single-phase AC power source.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION


CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 653


I/O Modules



Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAO84220 24 - 48 VAC OUT module.

Specifications


LEDs Active

F


1 - 4, 5 - 8, 9 - 12, 13 - 16 (Red) - Indicates group has a blown fuse or no field power


Voltage (rms)



100 Vac for 1 cycle

111 Vac peak for 1.3 ms





Each Point* 4 A continuous, 20 ... 56 Vac rms



Off State Leakage / Point 1 mA max

*The specifications stated are pending UL/CSA approval. This module was originally approved at 2 A each point; 12 A, 0 ... 50° C per group.

654 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Surge Current Maximum (rms) Per Point Per Group

One Cycle 30 A 45 A

Two Cycles 20 A 30 A

Three Cycles 10 A 25 A

Applied DV/DT 400 V/μs


Isolation (rms)

Group to Group 1000 Vac for 1 minute. Galvanically Isolated.





External Power Supply (rms) 20 ... 56 Vac

Fusing

Internal 5 A fuse for each group

(Part # 043502405 or equivalent)

For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations, p. 656.


Specifications

1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

30 35 40 45 50 55 60

20-56 V rms


TOTA

L M

OD

ULE

CU

RR

ENT

(A)

0

35013379 02 October 2007 655


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the DAO84220 fuse locations.

Possible injury to personnel or equipmentFirst turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

140DAO 842 2010 80 vdc out

X


1-4

Points5-8

Points9-12

Points13-16

656 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive.2. N/C = Not Connected.

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

OUTPUT 8

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

GROUP A HOT

GROUP C COMMON

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 5

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

GROUP A COMMON

L

GROUP B HOT

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

GROUP C HOT

GROUP D HOT

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 10

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 15

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 16

N

35013379 02 October 2007 657


I/O Modules


CAUTION


CAUTION

658 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Overview The AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 module switches 24 ... 230 Vac powered loads.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC OUT module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point fused groups

LEDs Active

1 - 32 (Green) - Indicates point status


Operating Voltages (rms)


Absolute Maximum 300 Vac for 10 sec

400 Vac for 1 cycle


On State Drop / Point 1.5 Vac

Minimum Load Current (rms) 10 mA resistive


Each Point 1 A continuous, 20 ... 253 Vac rms

Each Group 4 A max

Per module 16 A continuous (See derating chart)

35013379 02 October 2007 659


I/O Modules



1.1 mA @ 115 Vac

0.4 mA @ 48 Vac

0.2 mA @ 24 Vac

Surge Current Maximum (rms)

One Cycle 15 A per point

Two Cycles 12 A per point

Three Cycles 8 A per point

Applied DV/DT 400 V/μs

Response



Output Protection RC snubber protection (internal)

Isolation (rms)


Output to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute


Power Dissipation 1.60W+1.0 x Total Module Load Current

Specifications

1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

30 35 40 45 50 55 60

NO POINTEXCEEDS 0.5A


TOTA

L M

OD

ULE

CU

RR

ENT

(A)

65

NO POINTEXCEEDS 1.0A

0

660 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO85300 module.


Fusing

Internal 4 A, 250 V fuse (Little Fuse 217004) for each group. For location of fuses see the Fuse

Locations Figure.


Specifications

140DAO 853 0024 230 VAC OUT

X


1-8

Points9-16

Points17-24

Points25-32

35013379 02 October 2007 661


I/O Modules


OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 15

GROUP A HOT

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 9

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

N/C

L

GROUP B HOT

GROUP C HOT

GROUP D HOT

OUTPUT 17

OUTPUT 19

OUTPUT 21

OUTPUT 25

OUTPUT 27

OUTPUT 29

OUTPUT 23

OUTPUT 31

NOUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 10

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 16

OUTPUT 18

OUTPUT 20

OUTPUT 22

OUTPUT 24

OUTPUT 26

OUTPUT 28

OUTPUT 30

OUTPUT 32

N/C

N/C

N/C

OptionalFuse

662 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


CAUTION


CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 663


I/O Modules

140DDO15310 I/O DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink Module

Overview The DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink module switches 5 Vdc loads.It is for use with shared output common wired to positive potential and is compatible with TTL, -LS, -S, and CMOS logic.

664 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 5 V OUT module.

Specifications


LEDs Active

F



Output Ratings

ON Level 0.2 Vdc (max) @ 75 mA sinking

OFF Level VOUT = US - 1.25 V @ 1 mA source

VOUT = 3.2 V (min) @ 1 mA, US = 4.5 V

Internal Pullup Resistor 440 Ω


Each Point 75 mA (sinking)

Each Group 600 mA

Per Module 2.4 A

Surge Current Maximum

Each Point 750 mA @ 500 μs duration (no more than 6 per minute)




Output Protection (internal) Transient voltage suppression

Isolation






External Power (US) 4.5 ... 5.5 Vdc continuous

Absolute Voltage (US) max 15 Vdc for 1.3 ms decaying voltage pulse

External Power Supply Current 400 mA + Load current per point

Fusing

Internal 1A fuse for each group. Modicon # 043508953. For the location of the fuses Fuse Locations, p. 666.

External None

35013379 02 October 2007 665


I/O Modules

Module States The following table shows the module states for the DDO15310 module.

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the DDO15310 module.

External Power Command Active Output LED Fault

ON OFF ON >3.2 OFF OFF

ON ON ON <0.2 ON OFF

OFF X X * OFF ON

OFF ON ON * ON ON

*440 Ω pullup resistor to the power railX = OFF or ON state

Possible danger to equipment or personnel.Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

140DDO 153 105 vdc out

X


1-8

Points9-16

Points17-24

Points25-32

666 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO15310 wiring diagram.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+ –

TTL Inverter

TTL Nand Gate

5 Vdc

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 15

OUTPUT 17

OUTPUT 19

OUTPUT 21

OUTPUT 23

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

OUTPUT 25

OUTPUT 27

OUTPUT 29

OUTPUT 31OUTPUT 32

GROUP D SUPPLY

OUTPUT 30

OUTPUT 28

OUTPUT 26

GROUP C SUPPLY

OUTPUT 24

OUTPUT 22

OUTPUT 20

OUTPUT 18

OUTPUT 16

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 10

GROUP B SUPPLY

GROUP A SUPPLY

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 2

35013379 02 October 2007 667


I/O Modules

140DDO35300 Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module

Overview The DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads and is for use with shared output common wired to 0 V.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35300 24 VDC OUT module.

Specifications


LEDs Active

F



Voltage

Operating (max) 19.2 ... 30 Vdc

Absolute (max) 56 Vdc for 1.3 ms decaying voltage pulse

ON State Drop / Point 0.4 Vdc @ 0.5 A


Each Point 0.5 A

Each Group 4 A

Per Module 16 A

Off State Leakage / Point 0.4 mA @ 30 Vdc


Each Point 5 A @ 500 μs duration (no more than 6 per minute)


OFF - ON 1 ms (max)

ON - OFF 1 ms (max)

Output Protection (internal) Transient voltage suppression

Load Inductance Maximum 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency or

where: L = Load Inductance (Henry)

I = Load Current (A)F = Switching Frequency (Hz)

Load Capacitance Maximum 50 μf

Isolation

L =0.5

I2F

668 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules







Fusing

Internal 5A fuse for each group. Modicon Part # 043502405. For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations, p. 670.

External Each group is protected with a 5A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be protected with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse,(Part # 57-0078-000).

Specifications


CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 669


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO35300 module.

140DDO 353 1024 vdc out

X


1-8

Points9-16

Points17-24

Points25-32

670 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


–

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+

3/4 A

3/4 A

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 15

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

OUTPUT 17

OUTPUT 19

OUTPUT 21

OUTPUT 23

OUTPUT 25

OUTPUT 27

OUTPUT 29

OUTPUT 31OUTPUT 32

GROUP D SUPPLY

OUTPUT 30

OUTPUT 28

OUTPUT 26

GROUP C SUPPLY

OUTPUT 24

OUTPUT 22

OUTPUT 20

OUTPUT 18

GROUP B SUPPLY

OUTPUT 16

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 10

GROUP A SUPPLY

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 2

FIELD DEVICE

+ –3/4 A

35013379 02 October 2007 671


I/O Modules

Possible Equipment FailureEach group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be protected with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse (Part # 57-0078-000).Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

WARNING

672 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DDO35301 I/O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module

Overview The 140DDO35301 source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads, and is short circuit and overload resistant.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35301 24 VDC OUT module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 32 in four 8-point groups

LEDs Active (Green) Bus communication is present

F (Red) Group power missing or point faulted



Voltage

Operating 19.2 ... 30 Vdc



Each Point 0.5 A

Each Group 4 A

Per Module 16 A

Off State Leakage / Point <1 mA @ 24 Vdc


Each Point 2 A (Internally limited)


OFF - ON < 0.1 ms

ON - OFF < 0.1 ms

Output Protection (internal) Thermal overload and short circuit

Load Inductance Maximum 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:


Isolation



L =0.5

l2 F

where:L = Load inductance (Henry)l = Load current (A)F = Switching Frequency (Hz)

35013379 02 October 2007 673


I/O Modules


Fault Detection Group indication: Loss of field power/faulted point

Bus Current Required 250 mA max.

Power Dissipation 5 W (all points on)


Fusing

Internal 5A fuse for each group. Modicon Part # 043502405. For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations, p. 674.


Specifications

Possible danger to equipment or personnel.Disconnect the supply voltage to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

140DDO 353 0124 VDC OUT

X


1-8

Points9-16

Points17-24

Points25-32

674 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


–2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1+

3/4 A

3/4 AOUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 15

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

OUTPUT 17

OUTPUT 19

OUTPUT 21

OUTPUT 23

OUTPUT 25

OUTPUT 27

OUTPUT 29

OUTPUT 31OUTPUT 32

GROUP D SUPPLY

OUTPUT 30

OUTPUT 28

OUTPUT 26

GROUP C SUPPLY

OUTPUT 24

OUTPUT 22

OUTPUT 20

OUTPUT 18

GROUP B SUPPLY

OUTPUT 16

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 10

GROUP A SUPPLY

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 2

FIELD DEVICE

+ –3/4 A

Possible Equipment FailureEach group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 675


I/O Modules

140DDO35310 I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module

Overview The 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Sink module switches 24 Vdc, and is capable of driving displays, logic, and other loads up to 500 mA sinking, in the ON state.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35310 24 VDC OUT SINK module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 32 output points in four 8 point groups

LEDs Active

F



Voltage





Each Point 0.5 A

Each Group 4 A

Per Module 16 A

OFF State Leakage/Point 0.4 mA @ 30 Vdc


Each Point 5 A@ 1 ms duration (no more than 6 per minute).


OFF - ON 1 ms (max)

ON - OFF 1 ms (max)


Isolation



676 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Load Inductance Maximum 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequencyor

where:L = Load Inductance (Henry)I = Load Current (A)F = Switching Frequency (Hz)


Tungsten Load Maximum 12 W @ 24 Vdc

Output Protection (internal) Transient voltage suppression: 36 V


Power Dissipation 2.0 W + (0.4 V x Total Load Current)


Fusing

Internal 5.0 A fuse per group. Part # 043502405. For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations, p. 678.

External Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be protected with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse, Part # 57-0078-000.

Specifications

L =0.5

I2 F

Access to FusesTurn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 677


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the DDO35310 module.


X


1-8

Points9-16

Points17-24

Points25-32

678 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following shows the DDO35310 wiring diagram.

–

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1+

3/4 A

3/4 A

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 15

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

OUTPUT 17

OUTPUT 19

OUTPUT 21

OUTPUT 23

OUTPUT 25

OUTPUT 27

OUTPUT 29

OUTPUT 31OUTPUT 32

GROUP D SUPPLY

OUTPUT 30

OUTPUT 28

OUTPUT 26

GROUP C SUPPLY

OUTPUT 24

OUTPUT 22

OUTPUT 20

OUTPUT 18

GROUP B SUPPLY

OUTPUT 16

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 10

GROUP A SUPPLY

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 2

FIELD DEVICE

+–

24 Vdc

3/4 A

35013379 02 October 2007 679


I/O Modules

Possible Equipment FailureEach group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be fused with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse Part # 57-0078-000.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

680 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DDO36400 I/O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module

Overview The Telefast Output Source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads. Outputs are thermally protected.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140DDO36400 output module:

Specifications

Number of Output Points 96 in six 16 point groups

LEDs ACT (Green) Bus communications are present

F (Red) Group power missing or point faulted

+32 (Green) Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix

+64 (Green) Points 65 to 96 displayed on LED matrix



Voltage




Each Point 0.5 A

Each Group 3.2 A

Per Module 19.2 A

Off State Leakage / Point <1 mA @ 24 Vdc


Each Point 2 A (Internally limited)


OFF - ON <.1 ms

ON - OFF <.1 ms

Output Protection (internal) Thermal overload and short circuit

Load Inductance Maximum 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:

where:L = Load inductance (Henry)

I = Load current (A)F = Switching frequency (Hz)


L =0.5

I2 F

35013379 02 October 2007 681


I/O Modules

Isolation


Fault Detection Group indication: loss of field power/faulted point (short circuit or overload)

Bus Current Required 250 mA max.


External Power 19.2 ... 30 Vdc. 19.2 A maximum (depends on load)

Fusing

External User discretion for field power

Specifications

682 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Front view of 140DDO36400 Module

The front view of the 140DDO36400 output module including terminal assignment numbers:

140DDO 364 0024 VDC OUT 6x16 Source

+3212345678

+64910111213141516

Act1718192021222324

F2526272829303132

O49O51O53O55O57O59O61O63+24V+24V

O50O52O54O56O58O60O62O64COMCOM

O01O03O05O07O09O11O13O15+24V+24V


O65O67O69O71O73O75O77O79+24V+24V


O17O19O21O23O25O27O29O31+24V+24V


O81O83O85O87O89O91O93O95+24V+24V


O33O35O37O39O41O43O45O47+24V+24V


PushbuttonA

B

C

E

D

F

35013379 02 October 2007 683


I/O Modules

Selecting Point Status Indicator LEDs

Use the pushbutton to select output points to be displayed as per the following table:

Recommended Cables

The following table shows recommended cables, description, and their length in meters.

Color Codes for Input Groups

The following table shows the color codes for all groups.

LED +32 +64

Out 1 to 32 Off Off

Out 33 to 64 On Off

Out 65 to 96 Off On

Cable Part Number Description Length (M)



TSXCDP053 (2) HE 10 - round cable 0.5





1. White 2. Brown

3. Green 4. Yellow

5. Gray 6. Pink

7. Blue 8. Red

9. Black 10. Purple

11. Gray/pink 12 Red/blue

13. White/green 14. Brown/green

15. White/yellow 16. Yellow/brown

17. White/gray 18. Gray/brown

19. White/pink 20. Pink/brown

684 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Compatible Output Adapter Sub-Bases

The following tables shows the compatible output adapter sub-bases. See Quantum Modicon Telemecanique Automation Platform, Discrete I/O Chapter, Telefast 2 pre-wired system: connector cables FOR Quantum PLCs section for more detailed informaton.

Channels Type

8 ABE-7S08S2xx1

8 ABE-7R08Sxxx/7P08T3301

16 ABE-7R16Sxxx

16 ABE-7R16Txxx/7P16Txxx

1With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02

35013379 02 October 2007 685


I/O Modules

140DDO84300 Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module

Overview The DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source module switches 10 ... 60 Vdc powered loads and is for use with shared output common wired to 0 V. External power supplies may be mixed between groups.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO84300 10 ... 60 VDC OUT module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 16 in two 8 point groups

LEDs Active



Voltage


Absolute Maximum 72 Vdc (continuous)

ON State Drop / Point 1 V max @ 2 A


Each Point 2 A

Each Group 6 A

Per Module 12 A

Off State Leakage / Point 1 mA @ 60 Vdc max


Each Point 7.5 A @ 50 ms duration (no more than 20 per minute)


OFF - ON 1 ms

ON - OFF 1 ms

Output Protection (internal) Over voltage (suppression diode)

Isolation




Power Dissipation 1 W + 1 V x Total Module Load Current

External Power 10 ... 60 Vdc (module inrush at power up approximately 0.75A, < 1 msec)

Fusing

686 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows fuse locations for the DDO84300 module.

Internal 8A fuse time-lag for each group (Part # 042701994 or equivalent).For location of fuses, see Fuse Locations, p. 687.

External Each group is protected with an 8 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be fused with a 2 A fuse: Little Fuse 312-002 or equivalent.

Specifications


CAUTION


X


1-8

Points9-16

35013379 02 October 2007 687


I/O Modules



–2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1+

2 A

2 A

GROUP A SUPPLY

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 8

GROUP A COMMON

GROUP B COMMON

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 10

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 14

OUTPUT 15

OUTPUT 16

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 5

GROUP B SUPPLY

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

688 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DDO88500 Quantum I/O DC Output 24-125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module

Overview The DC Output 24-125 Vdc 2x6 Source module switches 24-125 VDC powered loads and is for use with shared output common wired to 0 V.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO88500 24-125 VDC OUT module.

Specifications


LEDs Active

F (Red) - An over current condition on any point has been detected

1 - 12 (Green) - The indicated point or channel is turned ON

1 - 12 (Red) - The indicated output point has an over current condition


1 word out

Voltages

Working 19.2 to 156.2 Vdc including ripple

ON State Voltage Drop 0.75 Vdc @ 0.5 A


Each Point 0.75 A, < 40° C (see the operating curve below)

Each Group 3 A, 0 ... 60° C

Per Module 6 A, 0 ... 60° C

Surge Current Maximum 4 A, 1 ms pulse, no more than 6 per minute

OFF State Leakage 0.5 mA @ 150 Vdc

Maximum Tungsten @ 130 Vdc 46 W per point

@ 115 Vdc 41 W per point

@ 24 Vdc 8 W per point

35013379 02 October 2007 689


I/O Modules

NOTE: Each group: 3 A, 0 ... 60° C. Per module: 6 A, 0 ... 60° C

Inductance Internal diode protected, no limit on inductance

Output Response (OFF - ON, ON - OFF) 1.0 ms, resistive

Switching Frequency 50 Hz maximum

Output Protection (internal) Group varistor and individual point over current sense

Isolation

Field to Bus 2500 Vac for 1 minute

Group-to-Group 1200 Vac for 1 minute

Fault Detection Over current (see note below)


6 points ON 375 mA

12 points ON 650 mA

Power Dissipation 1.0 W + 0.77 W x number of points ON

External Power None

Fusing

Internal 4 A (Part # 043511382 or equivalent) See below for the location of the fuses.

External Not required for this module.

Specifications

DDO88500 Output Point Operating Curve

4030 35 45 50 55 60

0.75

0.625

0.5


OU

TPU

T PO

INT

CU

RR

ENT

(A)

690 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Note: Each output point is protected by an over current sense circuit. When an over current condition is detected, the point is turned OFF, its LED fault indicator is turned ON, and the appropriate bit is set in the module fault register. The output point will be turned OFF after a short is detected. A fault greater than 9.4 A will guarantee that the point will be turned OFF and will latch the output point in the OFF state. To clear a fault, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.


CAUTION

Note: At a minimum, Modsoft V2.40, ProWorX NxT V2.0, or Concept V2.0, is required to configure this module.


X

Fuse LocationsPoints1-6

Points7-12

35013379 02 October 2007 691


I/O Modules


Note: N / C = Not Connected.

– +

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 10FIELD

DEVICE

+ –

GROUP A RETURN

OUTPUT 1

N/C

OUTPUT2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

N/C

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 7

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 8

GROUP B RETURN

N/C

OUTPUT 11

OUTPUT 12

N/CN/C

GROUP B SUPPLY

GROUP A SUPPLY

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

GROUP A

GROUP B

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

Reverse Polarity PossibilityThis module is not protected against reverse polarity. If you want to protect against polarity miswiring, an external diode in series with each group supply line is recommended. This diode must be able to support the group load current.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

692 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DRA84000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module

Overview The Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open module is used to switch a voltage source using 16 relays with normally open contacts.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the RELAY OUT module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 16 normally open

LEDs Active1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status


Voltage

Working 20 ... 250 Vac5 ... 30 Vdc

30 ... 150 Vdc (reduced load current)


Each Point 2 A max, at 250 Vac or 30 Vdc @ 60° C ambient, resistive load

1 A Tungsten lamp load

1 A @ a power factor of 0.4

1/8 hp @ 125/250 Vac

Each Point (30 ... 150 Vdc) 300 mA (resistive load)

100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)

Minimum Load Current

Each Point 50 mANote: Minimum load current if the contact is used at rated

loads of 5 ... 150 Vdc or 20 ... 250 Vac


Each Point 10 A capacitive load @ τ = 10 ms

Switching Capability 500 VA resistive load

Response

OFF - ON 10 ms max

ON - OFF 20 ms max

Off State Leakage < 100 μA

Relay Contact Life

Mechanical Operations 10,000,000

Electrical Operations 200,000 (resistive load @ max voltage and current)

35013379 02 October 2007 693


I/O Modules

Electrical Operations (30 ... 150 Vdc) (see note below)

100,000, 300 mA (resistive load)


100,000, 100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)

100,000 Interposing Relay (Westinghouse Style 606B, Westinghouse type SG, Struthers Dunn 219 x 13 XP)

Relay Type Form A

Contact Protection Varistor, 275 V (internal)

Isolation

Channel to Channel 1780 Vac rms for one minute

Field to Bus 1780 Vac rms for one minute2500 Vdc for one minute


Power Dissipation 5.5 W + 0.5 x N = Watts (where N = the number of points on)


Fusing

Internal None


Note: Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load.

Specifications

694 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DRA84000 wiring diagram.

Note: 1. For 125 Vdc inductive loads, external clamping is recommended to extend relay

contact life. (1N 4004 or equivalent).2. N/C = Not Connected. N.O. = Normally Open. N.C. = Normally Closed.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1 OUTPUT 1 N.O.

OUTPUT 2 N.O.

OUTPUT 3 N.O.

OUTPUT 4 N.O.

N/C

RELAY 1 COMMON

RELAY 2 COMMON

RELAY 3 COMMON

RELAY 4 COMMON

N/C

RELAY 5 COMMON

RELAY 6 COMMON

RELAY 7 COMMON

RELAY 8 COMMON

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 5 N.O.

OUTPUT 6 N.O.

OUTPUT 7 N.O.

OUTPUT 8 N.O.

RELAY 9 COMMON

RELAY 10 COMMON

RELAY 11 COMMON

RELAY 12 COMMON

RELAY 13 COMMON

RELAY 14 COMMON

RELAY 15 COMMON

RELAY 16 COMMON

OUTPUT 9 N.O.

OUTPUT 10 N.O.

OUTPUT 11 N.O.

OUTPUT 12 N.O.

OUTPUT 13 N.O.

OUTPUT 14 N.O.

OUTPUT 15 N.O.

OUTPUT 16 N.O.

VOLTAGESOURCE

+

–

See Note 1.

N.O.

N.C.

OUTPUT XN.O.

RELAY XCOMMON

One of 16 Typical

35013379 02 October 2007 695


I/O Modules

140DRC83000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed Module

Overview The Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed module is used to switch voltage sources using eight relays with normally open and normally closed contacts.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DRC83000 RELAY OUT module.

Specifications

Number of Output Points 8 normally open / normally closed pairs

LEDs Active


Required Addressing 0.5 word out

Voltage


5 ... 30 Vdc

30 ... 150 Vdc (reduced load current)


Each Point 5 A max at 250 Vac, 30 Vdc @ 60° C ambient, resistive load

2 A Tungsten lamp load

3 A @ power factor 0.4

1/4 hp @ 125/250 Vac

Each Point (30 ... 150 Vdc) 300 mA resistive

100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)

Maximum Module Current 40 A (see the derating curve below)

The following figure shows the relay derating curve.

TOTA

L M

OD

ULE

C

UR

REN

T (A

)

Relay Derating Curve

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (Degrees C)

100

203040

40 50 60

696 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Minimum Load Current 50 mANote: Minimum load current if the contact is used at rated loads of 5 ... 150 Vdc or 20 ... 250 Vac

Maximum Frequency (F) 30 Hz resistive loads, or:

where:L = Load Inductance (Henry)I = Load Current (A)


Each Point 20 A capacitive load @ τ = 10 ms

Switching Capability 1250 VA resistive load


OFF - ON 10 ms max

ON - OFF 20 ms max

Off State Leakage < 100 μA

Relay Contact Life

Mechanical Operations 10,000,000

Electrical Operations 100,000 (Resistive load @ max voltage and current)

Electrical Operations(30 ... 150 Vdc)(see note)



100,000, 100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)

100,000 Interposing Relay (Westinghouse Style 606B, Westinghouse type SG, Struthers Dunn 219 x 13 XP)

Relay Type Form C, NO / NC contacts

Contact Protection Varistor, 275 V (internal)

Isolation

Channel to Channel 1780 Vac rms for one minute

Field to Bus 1780 Vac rms for one minute, 2500 Vdc for one minute


Power Dissipation 2.75 W + 0.5 x N = Watts (where N is the number of points on)


Fusing

Internal None


Specifications

F =0.5

I2 L

35013379 02 October 2007 697


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DRC83000 wiring diagram.

Note: Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load.

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1 OUTPUT 1 N.O.

OUTPUT 1 N.C.

OUTPUT 2 N.O.

N/CN/C

RELAY 3 COMMON

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 3 N.O.

RELAY 5 COMMON

RELAY 7 COMMON

RELAY 8 COMMON

OUTPUT 5 N.O.

OUTPUT 6 N.O.

OUTPUT 7 N.O.

OUTPUT 8 N.O.

VOLTAGESOURCE

+

–

See Note 2.

N.O.

RELAY XCOMMON

RELAY 2 COMMON

N/C

N/C

OUTPUTX2 N.O.

OUTPUTX2 N.C.

N.C.

One of Eight Typical

N/C

RELAY 4 COMMON

N/C

N/C

N/C

RELAY 6 COMMON

N/C

N/C

RELAY 1 COMMON

N/C

OUTPUT 2 N.C.

OUTPUT 3 N.C.

OUTPUT 4 N.O.

OUTPUT 4 N.C.

OUTPUT 5 N.C.

OUTPUT 6 N.C.

OUTPUT 7 N.C.

OUTPUT 8 N.C.

698 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Note: 1. When switching DC voltages, it is recommended that the source be connected

to the common pin and the load be connected to the N.O. or N.C. contact.2. For 125 Vdc inductive loads, external clamping is recommended to extend relay

contact life (1N 4004 or equivalent).3. N / C = Not Connected. N.O. = Normally Open. N.C. - Normally Closed.

35013379 02 October 2007 699


I/O Modules

18.7 Discrete Verified Output Module

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on the discrete verified output module, the 140DVO85300, a 32-point output module.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module – 140DVO85300 701

140DVO85300 I/O Verified 10-30 VDC Out Module 706

700 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module – 140DVO85300

Overview The following provides information on the 140DVO85300 DC verified output 10 - 30 Vdc 32 point module.

Verified Output Module

The following is the verified output module:

140DVO85300 (DC Output 10-30 Vdc 4x8 Source)

I/O Map Register Assignment (Outputs)

The 140DVO85300 is configured as two output (4x) registers. The following diagram shows the register formats:

I/O Map Register Assignment (Inputs)

The 140DVO85300 is configured using 32 contiguous 1x references or two 3x registers assigned as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25

Output Point 1

Register 2

MSB - First Word

Register 1

MSB - Second Word

OutputPoint 17

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25

Input SensePoint 1

Register 2

MSB - First Word

Register 1

MSB - Second Word

Input SensePoint 17

35013379 02 October 2007 701


I/O Modules

I/O Map Status Byte

The eight bits in the I/O map status byte are used as follows:

The voltage fault bit is set when the field supply is not present, or the group fuse is blown.

The miscompare bit is set when any point within the group does not match its commanded state.

Modsoft Zoom Screens Selections

The module zoom screen selections are shown below.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Group B Voltage FaultGroup C Voltage fault

Group D Voltage Fault

Group A Voltage Fault

Group B MiscompareGroup A Miscompare

Group C MiscompareGroup D Miscompare

NO

YES

Head - slot: X Drop: X Slot: X

Output Shutdown State:Fail States

Disabled

Group Number Fail States User DefinedValues

Status/Input

Group X Outputs OFF

Last Value

User Defined

00000000

Verified Health

Verified Fault

Input Only

Actual

ALLOW AUTOMATIC RESTART OF FAULTED POINTS

702 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Zoom Screen Selection Descriptions

Output Shutdown State - Determines the module output states if backplane communication is lost (i.e., no "Active" LED on module).

Fail States - Module output state choices if selected in "Output Shutdown State" menu.

Output Shutdown State:Fail States

Disabled

Disabled: Forces all outputs to be in the OFF state.

Fail States: Group outputs are per the selection made in the “Fail States” column.

Fail States

Outputs OFF

Last Value

User Defined

Outputs OFF: Group outputs turn OFF

Last Value: Group outputs remain in the state they were in.

User Defined: Group output states may be individually selected in the“User Defined Values” column to be ON or OFF.Choices If Selected: 00000000

Lowest NumberedGroup Output (Ch 1, 9, 17, 25)

Highest NumberedGroup Output (Ch 8, 16, 24, 32)

0 = OFF1 = ON

35013379 02 October 2007 703


I/O Modules

Status/Input - RE: I/O map register assignments (Inputs).

Allow Automatic Restart of Faulted Points:

NO: Module outputs that fault during the on state are latched off until the user clears the point bit to the OFF (0) state, and then sets it back to the ON (1) state.

Status/Input

Verified Health

Verified Fault

Input Only

Actual

Verified Health: The associated bit = 1 when the point output command andmodule output state agree

Verified Fault: The associated bit = 1 when the point output command andmodule output state disagree.

Input Only: Input module operation for diagnostic purposes only. When anoutput point has a high applied, the associated 1x bit or 3x register location =1.There are no specifications for output terminals read as inputs and the DVOshould not be operated as an input module in a system.If the corresponding 4x register point is turned OFF, a high will also cause theLED display red F to appear and a group miscompare bit will set in the I/O Mapstatus byte. If the corresponding 4x point is turned ON, no LED ref F or groupmiscompare will be displayed when a high is applied to the output point.The status byte voltage fault bits work in this mode.

Actual: Module output state, 1 = ON

ALLOW AUTOMATIC RESTART OF FAULTED NO

YES

704 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

State of output point, Status bits, LEDs and Fault Bit for the three operating states are as follows:

YES: Module outputs that fault during the ON state are controlled by a thermal protection mechanism. At shutdown the appropriate fault/status indications will be present.

After shutdown, the output device will cool and try to turn itself back on. If the fault has been removed, the output will function normally and fault/status indications will be removed. If the fault is still present. the point will again shut down and repeat the cycle until the fault is removed or the point is commanded off.

When a faulted point is commanded off, all fault indications will no longer be present because the miscompare will no longer exist.

Mode Fault Occurs (Point commanded ON shuts OFF)

Off command sent On command sent (After fault is removed)

Verified health Output point=OFFStatus bit=0Output LED=OFFFault LED=ONGroup fault flag=1

Output point=OFFStatus bit=0Output LED=OFFFault LED=ONGroup fault flag=1

Output point=ONStatus bit=1Output LED=ONFault LED=OFFGroup fault flag=0

Verified fault Output point=OFFStatus bit=1Output LED=OFFFault LED=ONGroup fault flag=1



Actual Output point=OFFStatus bit=0Output LED=OFFFault LED=ONGroup fault flag=1



Possible Safety HazardWhen choosing "YES", the use of thermally protected output devices with the 140DVO85300 module can produce safety concerns.In the event of an enabled output sensing an overcurrent condition, the output will disable, until the overcurrent condition is removed. The output will then re-enable itself, if still set ON in the logic program.Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

35013379 02 October 2007 705


I/O Modules

140DVO85300 I/O Verified 10-30 VDC Out Module

Overview The Quantum Verified Output module is a 10 ... 30 Vdc, 32 point output module with diagnostic capability. The module will detect and report the output state sensed at the field connector and, depending on the selected configuration, will verify that the output point is in the state commanded by the PLC. The module is configured in four groups of eight source outputs.

Specifications Key specifications for the Quantum 140DVO85300 module are as follows:

Specifications


LEDs Active (Green): Bus communication present.1 ... 32 (Green): Indicates output point status.

F (Red): Indicates incorrect output state on a channel, loss of field power, or blown fuse.

Required addressing 2 words in, 2 words out

Voltage


Absolute Maximum 50 Vdc for 1.0 ms decaying voltage pulse

On state Drop/Point 0.4 Vdc @ 0.5 A


Each Point 0.5 A

Each Group 4 A

Per Module 16 A

Off State Leakage/Point 0.4 mA @ 30 Vdc


Each Point 2.5 A @ 1 ms duration (no more than 6 per minute)

Response ( Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON 1 ms (typical), 2 ms (max)

ON - OFF 1 ms (typical), 2 ms (max)

Load Inductance Maximum 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switching frequency, or:

where:L = Load inductanceI = Load current (A)F = Switching frequency (Hz)

L =0.5

I2F

706 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Tungsten Load Maximum 2.5 W @ 10 Vdc3 W @ 12 Vdc6 W @ 24 Vdc


Isolation

Group to Bus 1780 Vac RMS for 1 minute


Output Protection (internal) Transient voltage suppression, overload (short circuit) protection

Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of power, incorrect output state


Power Dissipation [2.5 + (0.1 x No. of points ON) + (total load current x 0.4)] watts

External Power 10 ... 30 Vdc

Fusing

InternalExternal

5.0 Amp fuse per group, P/N 0043502405Not required. If desired, a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse(P/N 57-0078-00) may be used

Programming Software

Type and version Concept, Version 2.2 or higherModsoft, Version 2.6.1 or higher

Specifications

35013379 02 October 2007 707


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations A view of fuse locations on the module is shown below.

Points1-8

140DVO 853 0010-30 VDC OUT

X

Fuse Locations

Points17-24

Points25-32

Points9-16


CAUTION

708 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the Quantum 140DVO85300 module is shown below.

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP B COMMON

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 9

OUTPUT 13

OUTPUT 17

OUTPUT 19

OUTPUT 21

OUTPUT 32

OUTPUT 30

OUTPUT 26

OUTPUT 24

OUTPUT 22

OUTPUT 20

OUTPUT 18

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1+–

OUTPUT 25

OUTPUT 27

OUTPUT 29

OUTPUT 31

GROUP D COMMON

OUTPUT 23

OUTPUT 15

OUTPUT 11

GROUP A COMMON

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 10.75 A

0.75 A

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 10

OUTPUT 12

OUTPUT 16

GROUP A SUPPLY

GROUP B SUPPLY

OUTPUT 28

GROUP D SUPPLY

GROUP C SUPPLY

0.75 A

0.75 A

OUTPUT 14Note:When driving a load fromtwo different points, ablocking diode is requiredfor each point. These di-odes (shown above) willprevent false fault reportingwhen only one of the pointsis commanded ON.

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 3

35013379 02 October 2007 709


I/O Modules

18.8 Discrete Supervised Input Module

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on the discrete supervised input module, the 140DSI35300, a 32-point input module.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module – 140DSI35300 711

140DSI35300 I/O DC 24V Supervised Input Module 712

710 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

I/O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module – 140DSI35300

Overview The following provides information on the 140DSI35300 supervised input 24 Vdc 32-point module.

Supervised Input Module

The following is the supervised input module:

140DSI35300 (DC input, 24 Vdc, 4x8 sink)

I/O Map Register Assignment (Input)

The DSI35300 is configured as four input (3x) registers. The following diagram shows the register formats:

I/O Map Status Byte

The eight bits in the I/O map status byte are used as follows:


There are no Modsoft Zoom selections.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 3224 25

InputPoint 1

InputPoint 17

BrokenWire 1

BrokenWire 17

Register 1

Register 2

Register 3

Register 4

12345678

Group A Voltage FaultGroup B Voltage FaultGroup C Voltage FaultGroup D Voltage Fault

35013379 02 October 2007 711


I/O Modules

140DSI35300 I/O DC 24V Supervised Input Module

Overview The Supervised Input module is used with source output devices. It accepts 24 Vdc inputs. It has 32 Sink input points (four groups of 8), each with broken wire detection.

712 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the 140DSI35300 module:

Specifications

Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups`

LEDs

Active (Green) Indicates bus communication present

1 ... 32 (Green) Indicates point status

F (Red) External Supply missing

Required addressing 4 words in

Operating Voltage and Current

ON (voltage) +11 Vdc

ON (current) 2.5 mA min.

OFF (voltage) +5 Vdc

OFF (current) min. 0.3 mA ...1.2 mA


Continious 30 Vdc

10 ms 45 Vp

Response time

OFF - ON 2.2 ms

ON - OFF 3.3 ms

Internal Resistance 4.3k


Isolation

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute

Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute



External Power Supply +20 ... 30 VDC, 20 mA/group

Open–Circuit Monitoring

Broken–wire detection OFF current < 0.15 mA

Shunt resistor Recommended 56 kΩ with 24 Vdc external power supply

Fusing

Internal None


35013379 02 October 2007 713


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram for the 140DSI35300 Module:

* Recommended resistor value for 24 Vdc.

INPUT 3

INPUT 15

GROUP B COMMON

GROUP C SUPPLY

GROUP D SUPPLY

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1 INPUT 1

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

GROUP A COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

GROUP C COMMON

GROUP D COMMON

INPUT 17

INPUT 19

INPUT 21

INPUT 23

INPUT 25

INPUT 27

INPUT 29

INPUT 31INPUT 32

INPUT 30

INPUT 28

INPUT 26

INPUT 24

INPUT 22

INPUT 20

INPUT 18

GROUP B SUPPLY

INPUT 16

INPUT 14

INPUT 12

INPUT 10

GROUP A SUPPLY

INPUT 8

INPUT 6

INPUT 4

INPUT 2

* 56 KΩ

* 56 KΩ

+

714 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

18.9 Discrete Input/Output Modules

At a Glance

Overview This section provides information on the Quantum discrete input/output modules: the 140DDM39000 and the 140DDM69000.



Topic Page

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules 716

140DAM59000 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4) 720

140DDM39000 I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink/DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source Module

727

140DDM69000 I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module 734

35013379 02 October 2007 715


I/O Modules

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules

Overview This section provides information on configuration of 4 In/4 Out and 16 In/8 Out modules.

4-Point Input/4-Point Output Module

The following shows the 4 In/4 Out module:

140DDM69000 (125 Vdc Input/High Power Output)


The 140DDM69000 input/output module can be configured as either eight contiguous 1x references; or as one 3x register and either eight contiguous 0x references or one 4x register.

I/O Map Register (Inputs)

The following figure shows the 3x input register.


There is no input I/O map status byte associated with the inputs.

I/O MappingWhen I/O mapping module inputs using discrete (1x) references in remote drops, users should not split discrete words between drops. The lowest discrete reference for a drop should start on a word boundary.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

Output 1 Fault

Input 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 81

Input 2 Input 3

Input 4

Output 2 FaultOutput 3 Fault

Output 4 Fault

716 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Modsoft Module Zoom Selection (Inputs)

Push <Enter> to display and select the Dual Mode and Filter Select options.

I/O Map Register (Outputs)

The following figure shows the 4x output register.

In Fast Trip Mode, each output can be turned ON by the Command Bit (e.g., Output 1) or by the corresponding Input Bit plus the Fast Trip Enable Bit (e.g., last order Input 1 controls Output 1 directly).

Dual Mode:

Filter Select:

When Dual Mode Is Enabled

1. Output 1 is turned ON when Input 1 and Input 2 are ON and when both “Fast Trip 1Enable” and “Fast Trip 2 Enable” are enabled; or by directly turning ON the Output 1 bit.2. Output 2 is controlled by the Output 2 bit.

3. Output 3 is turned On when Input 3 and

4. Output 4 is controlled by the Output 4 bit.

Input 4 are ON and when both “Fast Trip 3 Enable” and “Fast Trip 4 Enable”are enabled; or by directly turning ON the Output 1 bit.

Filter SelectThis entry selects which filter response time to use for the input circuits.

.5 msec

1.5 msec

Disabled

Enabled

Fast Trip 1 Enable

Output 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 81

Output 2 Output 3

Output 4

Fast Trip 2 EnableFast Trip 3 Enable

Fast Trip 4 Enable

35013379 02 October 2007 717


I/O Modules


The four least significant bits in the I/O map status are used as follows:


Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when the system control of the module is stopped.

16-Point Input/8-Point Output Modules

The following information pertains to the 140DAM59000 (AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4) and the 140DDM39000 (DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4) modules.

140DAM59000 (AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4)140DDM3900 (DC Input 24 Vdc 2X8 / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4)


The modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register and as one 4x register.

I/O Map Register (Inputs)

The following figure shows the 3x input register.


There is no input I/O map status byte associated with these modules.

Output 1 Fault

12345678

Output 2 FaultOutput 3 Fault

Output 4 Fault

Default Output State:

User Defined Timeout State Point 1 - 4: 0000

Hold Last Value

User Defined

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 9

718 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the module is I/O mapped to a 3x register and one 4x register.

I/O Map Assignment (Outputs)

The modules listed above can be configured as 8 0x references or as 1 output (4x) register in the following format.


The two least significant bits in the output I/O map status byte are used as follows.


Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.

BIN

BCD

input Type:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

12345678

Group B fault

Group A fault

BIN

BCD

Last Value


Output Type:


35013379 02 October 2007 719


I/O Modules

140DAM59000 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4)

Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 module accepts 115 Vac inputs and switches 115 Vac loads.


The following table shows the specifications for the 115 VAC and AC IN/OUT module for the Topology.

Topology



LEDs Active

F (red) - No power applied to the group(s) or blown fuse

1 ... 16 (Green - right two columns) - Indicates input status

1 ... 8 (Green - left column) - Indicates output status

Required Addressing 1 word in0.5 words out

720 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the Input specifications.


Operating Voltages and Input (Wetting) Currents*

50 Hz



14.4 kΩ capacitive

60 Hz





2.1 mA

Absolute Maximum Input Voltages

Continuous 132 Vac

10 s 156 Vac

1 cycle 200 Vac

Response (Inputs)

OFF - ON Min 4.9 ms/max 0.75 line cycle

ON - OFF Min 7.3 ms/max 12.3 ms


35013379 02 October 2007 721


I/O Modules


The following table shows the Output specifications.


Absolute Maximum Output Voltages

Continuous 85 ... 132 Vac

10 seconds 156 Vac

1 cycle 200 Vac

On State Drop / Point 1.5 Vac



Each Point* 4 A continuous


Per Module* 8 A continuous (see the derating chart below)

Off State Leakage / Point (max) 2 mA @ 115 Vac

Surge Current Maximum (rms)One CycleTwo CyclesThree Cycles

Per Point Per Group30 A 45 A20 A 30 A10 A 25 A

Response

OFF - ON, ON - OFF 0.50 of one line cycle max



987654321

40 45 50 55 60

85-132V rms

TO

TA

L M

OD

ULE

LO

AD

CU

RR

EN

T (

A)

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (°C)

DAM59000 Operating Curve*

*The specifications stated are pending UL/CSA approval. This modulewas originally approved at 2 A each point; 7 A, 0 ... 50° C per group.

0

722 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the Common specifications.



Isolation


Input or Output to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute

Fault Detection

Input None

Output Blown fuse detect, loss of field power


Power Dissipation 5.5 W + 1.1 V x Total module load current

External Power 85 ... 132 Vac required for output groups

Fusing

Input Internal – NoneExternal – User discretion

Output Internal – 5 A fuse for each group (Part # 043502405 or equivalent). For the location of the fuses, see Fuse Locations, p. 724.External – User discretion

Note: Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuses.

35013379 02 October 2007 723


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAM59000 module.

Revision Numbr Location for RIO Drop

The following figure shows the revision number location.

Note: If the 140DAM59000 module is used in a RIO drop, the 140CRA93X00 RIO Drop must be Version 1.04 at a minimum. Check the version label (see below) on the top front of the 140CRA93X00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level

140DAM 590 00120 VAC IN/OUT

X


1-4

Points5-8

Note: Since this original note, revision marking format has changed. Any RIO drop module with PV/RL/SV formatted labeling is acceptable.

140CRA 932 00

RIO DROPS908

724 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAM590wiring diagram.

OUTPUT 1

N

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT GROUP B COMMON

INPUTGROUP B COMMON

OUTPUT 8

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

INPUT 5

INPUT 7

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT 15

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

INPUT 2

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT GROUP A SUPPLY

OUTPUT GROUP B SUPPLY

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

INPUT GROUP A COMMON

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 5

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

L

OUTPUT GROUP A COMMON

N LOptionalFuse

35013379 02 October 2007 725


I/O Modules


AC Power CompatibilityThe AC power energizing each group must be from a common single phase AC power source. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION


CAUTION

726 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

140DDM39000 I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink/DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source Module

Overview The DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source module accepts and switches 24 Vdc inputs/outputs and is for use with sink input and source output devices.

Topology The following table shows the topology for the DDM39000 module.


The following table shows input specifications for the DDM39000 module.s

Topology



LEDs Active

F (red) - No power applied to the group(s) or blown fuse

1 ... 16 (Green - right two columns) - Indicates input status

1 ... 8 (Green - left column) - Indicates output status

Required Addressing 1 Word In0.5 Word Out


Operating Voltages and Currents (Input)






Continuous 30 Vdc


Internal Resistance (Input) 2.5 kΩ

35013379 02 October 2007 727


I/O Modules


The following table shows the output specifications for the DDM39000 module.


Voltage (Output)


Absolute (max) 56 Vdc for 1.3 ms decaying voltage pulse



Each Point 0.5 A

Each Group 2 A

Per Module 4 A



Each Point 5 A @ 500 μs duration (no more than 6 per minute)

Load Inductance Maximum (Output) 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency or:

where:L= Load Inductance (Henry)I = Load Current (A)F = Switching Frequency (Hz)


0.5

I2 F

728 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the common specifications for the DDM39000 module.


Response (Input and Output)

OFF - ON 1 ms (max) - (resistive load output)

ON - OFF 1 ms (max) - (resistive load output)

Module Protection


Output Protection Transient voltage suppression (internal)

Isolation (Input and Output)



Fault Detection

Input None

Output Blown fuse detect, loss of field power

Bus Current Required (Module) 330 mA

Power Dissipation 1.75 W + 0.36 x input points on + 1.1 V x total outputs load currents

External Power (Module) Not required for this module

Fusing

Input Internal – NoneExternal – User discretion

Output Internal - 5 A fuse for each group (Part # 043502405 or equivalent). For the location of the fuses, (see Fuse Locations, p. 730).External - Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be fused with a 1.25 A fuse, Part # 043508930 (Littlefuse 3121.25, 1.25 A, 250 V).

35013379 02 October 2007 729


I/O Modules

Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations of the DDM39000 module.

Possible injury to personnel or equipment.Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

Note: If the 140DDM39000 module is used in an RIO drop, the 140CRA93X00 RIO Drop must be Version 1.04 at a minimum. Check the version label, (see Version Label, p. 731)) on the top front of the 140CRA93X00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level. Any module marked PV/RL/SV is acceptable.

140DDM 390 0010 80 VDC OUT

X


1-4

Points5-8

730 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Version Label The following figure shows the location of the version label.

140CRA 932 00RIO DROP

RIO DROP S90801.04

35013379 02 October 2007 731


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDM39000 wiring diagram.


2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+ –

INPUT GROUP A COMMON

INPUT 9

INPUT 11

INPUT 13

INPUT15

INPUT GROUP B COMMON

INPUT 7

INPUT 5

INPUT 3

INPUT 1

OUTPUT GROUP B COMMON

OUTPUT 8

OUTPUT 7

OUTPUT 6

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT GROUP A COMMON

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 1

1.25 A

1.25 A

INPUT 2

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT GROUP A SUPPLY

OUTPUT GROUP B SUPPLY

INPUT 4

INPUT 6

INPUT 8

N/C

INPUT 10

INPUT 12

INPUT 14

INPUT 16

N/C

– +

732 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Possible Equipment FailureEach group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be fused with a 1.25 A fuse, Part # 043508930 (Littlefuse 3121.25, 1.25 A, 250 V).Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 733


I/O Modules

140DDM69000 I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module

Overview The 125 VDC Input/High Power Output module provides four isolated outputs and four grouped inputs. The outputs switch 24 to 125 Vdc powered loads and are for use with sink and source devices. The outputs also have short-circuit sense, indication, and shutdown circuitry. The inputs accept 125 Vdc inputs and are for use with source output devices. The inputs have software-selectable response times to provide additional input filtering.

Topology The following table shows the topology for the DDM69000 module.


The following table shows the input specifications for the DDM69000 module.

Topology

Number of Input Points 4 in 1 group


LEDs Active

F (red) - Over current condition on any point

1 ... 4 (Green - left column) - Indicated output point is turned ON

1 ... 4 (Red - middle column) - Indicated output point has an over current condition

1 ... 4 (Green - right column) - Indicated input point is turned ON

Required Addressing 1 word in, 1 word out


Operating Voltages and Currents (Input)

ON (voltage) +88 ... +156.2 Vdc including ripple

OFF (voltage) 0 ... +36 Vdc



Absolute Maximum Input Continuous, 156.2 Vdc including ripple

Input Response (OFF-ON, ON-OFF)

Default Filter: 0.5 msNon-default Filter: 1.5 ms

Internal Resistance (Input) 24 kΩ (nominal)

734 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules


The following table shows the output specifications for the DDM69000 module.


Voltage (Output)

Operating (max) 19.2 ... 156.2 Vdc including ripple

ON State Drop / Point 0.75 Vdc @ 4 A


Each Point 4 A continuous

Per Module 16 A continuous (see the derating curve below)


Output Response (OFF-ON, ON-OFF) 0.2 ms, max (resistive load output)

The following figure shows the DDM69000 Derating Curve.


Each Point 30 A @ 500 ms duration

Load Inductance Maximum (Output) For switching intervals ≥ 15 secondsper ANSI/IEEE C37.90- 1978/1989):

For repetitive switching:

where: L = Load Inductance (Henry)I = Load Current (A)F = Switching Frequency (Hz)

Load Capacitance Maximum 0.1 μf @ 150 Vdc0.6 μf @ 24 Vdc

30Ambient Temperature (°C)

Tota

l Mod

ule

Cur

rent

T

40 50 60

16 A

8

L ≤ 9

I2

L ≤ 0.7

I2F

35013379 02 October 2007 735


I/O Modules


The following table shows the common specifications for the DDM69000 module.


Module Protection


Output Protection Transient voltage suppression (internal)

Isolation (Input and Output)

Input Group-to-Output 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

Output-to-Output


Fault Detection

Input None

Output Over current - each point

Bus Current Required (Module) 350 mA

Power Dissipation 0.4 W x (1.0) x number of input points ON + (0.75) x total module output current

External Power (Module) Not required for this module

Fusing

Input Internal - NoneExternal - User discretion

Output Each output is protected by an electronic shutdown:For current output surges between 4 A and 30 A, the outpoint point will shutdown after 0.5 s. For current surges greater than 30 A, the output will shutdown immediately.

736 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Version Levels The following table shows the required version levels. Modules marked with SV/PV/RL rather than V0X.X0 exceed the minimum version levels in this table

Version Label The following figure shows the version number location.

Products Minimum Version Level (see lable illustration)

User Action Required

CPUs and NOMs < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V02.10

≥ V02.20 None

RIOs < V02.00 Module upgrade

≥ V02.00 and < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V01.10

≥ V02.20 None

DIOs < V02.10 Module upgrade

≥ V02.10 None

Modsoft < V02.40 Upgrade to V02.40

≥ V02.40 None

ProWORX NxT ≥ V02.00

Concept ≥ V02.00 None

Note: See (see Version Label, p. 737). This figure is found on the top front of the module.

140CPU 424 02Controller

CPU 2M2XMB+ 02.20

35013379 02 October 2007 737


I/O Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDM69000 wiring diagram.

Note: 1. Each output has two terminals for multiple wire connections.2. N / C = Not Connected.

OUTPUT 1 (-)+–

2

10

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40 39

37

35

33

31

29

27

25

23

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

+–

–+

OUTPUT 1 (-)

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 2 (-)

OUTPUT 3 (-)

OUTPUT 3 (-)

OUTPUT 2 (-)

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 4 (-)

OUTPUT 4 (-)

N/C

125 VDC INPUT 1

125 VDC INPUT 3

N/C

N/C

INPUT GROUP B COMMON

N/C

N/C

N/C

125 VDC INPUT 4

125 VDC INPUT 2

N/C

OUTPUT 4 (+)

OUTPUT 4 (+)

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 3 (+)

OUTPUT 3 (+)

OUTPUT 2 (+)

OUTPUT 2 (+)

N/C

N/C

N/C

OUTPUT 1 (+)

OUTPUT 1 (+)

Output Sourcing

Output Sinking

738 35013379 02 October 2007


I/O Modules

Polarity awarenessThe output points are not protected against reverse polarity. Reverse polarity will turn an output point ON.Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 739


I/O Modules

740 35013379 02 October 2007


Appendices

At a Glance

Overview These appendices provide information on miscellaneous components and spare parts; hardware installation instructions; power and grounding considerations; the CableFast cabling system; error stopped codes; agency approvals of Quantum products; and troubleshooting tools and resources.

What's in this Appendix?

The appendix contains the following chapters:


A Miscellaneous Components 743

B Spare Parts 753

C Hardware Installation 757

D Power and Grounding Guidelines 775

E CableFast Cabling 797

F Error Stopped Codes 865

G Agency Approvals 869

35013379 02 October 2007 741


Appendices

742 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


A
Miscellaneous Components
Miscellaneous Components

Overview This appendix contains information on cabling and illustrations of miscellaneous components.

For more detailed information on Modbus Plus components, see the Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide, Part Number 890USE10000.

For more detailed information on Remote I/O components, see the Remote I/O Cable Planning and Installation Guide, Part Number 890USE10100.

Cables The following table shows the available cables.

Part Number Description

990NAA26320 Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 12 ft. (2.7 m)

990NAA26350 Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 50 ft. (15.5 m)

990NAD21110 Modbus Plus Drop Cable, 8 ft. (2.4 m)

990NAD21130 Modbus Plus Drop Cable, 20 ft. (6 m)

990NAD21810 Modbus Plus Drop Cable (left side drop), 8 ft (2.4 m)

990NAD21830 Modbus Plus Drop Cable (left side drop), 20 ft. (6 m)

990NAD21910 Modbus Plus Drop Cable (right side drop), 8 ft (2.4 m)

990NAD21930 Modbus Plus Drop Cable (right side drop), 20 ft. (6 m)

AS-MBII-003 Prefabricated S908 RIO drop cable, RG-6 cable, 50 ft. (14 m)

AS-MBII-004 Prefabricated S908 RIO drop cable, RG-6 cable, 140 ft. (43 m)

743

arr-thorp.com

Misc. Components

Modbus Plus Cable Connector Orientation

The following figure shows the connector orientation for the 990NAD21XX0.

Coding Kit, 140XCP20000

The following figure shows the coding kit – a typical 1 set of 18 (Plastic Keys: 6 white sets, 12 yellow sets), part number 140XCP20000.

Empty Module, 140XCP50000

The following figure shows an empty module without a terminal strip, part number 140XCP50000.

990NAD218/219X0 Connector Orientation

990NAD218X0 990NAD219X0

X

744 35013379 02 October 2007


Misc. Components

Empty Module with Door Cover, 140XCP51000

The following figure shows an empty module without the terminal strip and with a door cover, part number 140XCP51000.

Terminal Strip Jumper Kit, 140XCP60000

The following figure shows the terminal strip jumper kit (qty: 12), part number 140XCP60000.

X

35013379 02 October 2007 745


Misc. Components

Field Wiring Terminal Strip, 140XTS00200

The following figure shows the 40-pin field wiring terminal strip, part number 140XTS00200.

X



Customer Identification Label

23

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

2021

23

25

27

29

3133

35

37

1

4

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

22

24

26

2830

32

34

36

38

5

3940

746 35013379 02 October 2007


Misc. Components

IP 20 Compliant Field Wiring Terminal Strips, 140XTS00100 and 140XTS00500

The following figure shows the 40-pin field wiring terminal strip with IP 20 compatible, finger-safe, fixed terminal screw shield, part number 140XTS00100.

The following figure shows the 7-pin field wiring I/O power connector with IP 20 compatible, finger-safe, fixed terminal screw shield, part number 140XTS00500.

X



Customer Identification Label

23

8

10

12

14

16

18

2021

23

29

31

33

35

37

1

4

9

1113

15

17

19

22

24

28

30

32

34

36

38

2526

27

56

3940

7

1

12

34

56

7

35013379 02 October 2007 747


Misc. Components

Battery, 990XCP90000

The following figure shows the battery for the Battery Module, part number 990XCP90000.

CPU Battery, 990XCP98000

The following figure shows the CPU battery, part number 990XCP98000.

Modbus Plus Tap The following figure shows the Modbus Plus Network tap, part number 990NAD23000.

CAUTIONPull on this tape to remove battery. Do not use metallic tool.

Batt. install date:

748 35013379 02 October 2007


Misc. Components

Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap

The following figure shows the Modbus Plus Network ruggedized tap, part number 990NAD23010.This tap is mounted on the ruggedized Modbus Plus tap din rail mounting bracket, part number 990NAD23012.

Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Terminator

The following figure shows the Modbus Plus network terminator plug, part number 990NAD23011, for the ruggedized Modbus Plus tap.

Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Programming Cable

The following figure shows the Modbus Plus programming cable, part number 990NAA21510, for the ruggedized network tap.

35013379 02 October 2007 749


Misc. Components

I/O Conversion Connector

The following figure shows the 200 series I/O conversion connector, part number 990XTS00300.

Remote I/O Tap The following figure shows the remote I/O network tap, part number MA-0185-100.

12

34

567

891011121314

1516171819

20

21

Side ViewFront View

990XTS00300 B200 C

ON

VER

SIO

N C

ON

NE

CTO

R MO

DIC

ON

990XTS00300 B200 CO

NVE

RS

ION

CO

NN

EC

TOR

MO

DIC

ON

990XTS00300 B200 C

ON

VER

SIO

N C

ON

NE

CTO

R M

OD

ICO

N

OUT IN

MODICONAN AEG COMPANY

750 35013379 02 October 2007


Misc. Components

Remote I/O Splitter

The following figure shows the remote network I/O splitter, part number MA-0186-100.

RG-6 Remote I/O F Connector

The following figure shows the remote I/O network F connector, part number MA-0329-001. This is the F connector for quad shield RG 6 cable.

Remote I/O BNC Connectors

The following figure shows the remote I/O network BNC connectors: part number 043509446–BNC connector for quad shield RG-6 cable, and 52-0487-000 BNC connector for non-quad shield RF-6 cable.

RG-11 Remote I/O F Connector

The following figure shows the remote I/O network F connector, part number 490RIO00211. This is the F connector for the quad shield RG-11 cable.

MODICONAN AEG COMPANYTRUNK SPLITTERMA 0331 000 RCV/A

OUT OUT

35013379 02 October 2007 751


Misc. Components

752 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


B
Spare Parts
Spare Parts

Overview This section provides information on miscellaneous spare parts and fuses.

753

arr-thorp.com

Spare Parts

Miscellaneous Spare Parts

The following table shows the miscellaneous spare parts for the Quantum modules.

Spare Part Number Description

043502480 X13 CPU Door Label

043502952 Universal Module Door (smoked, obsolete)

043503019 1X4 AC Power Supply Door Label

043503328 24 Vdc, 7 Position (includes safety cover) Field Wiring Terminal Block

043503381 Module Ground Clip

043504417 NOM Door Label

043505673 AC DIO Door Label

043504639 2X4 DC Power Supply Door Label

043504640 DC DIO Door Label

043504680 RIO Door Label

043504708 111 AC Power Supply Door Label

043504710 211 DC Power Supply Door Label

043506326 115/230 Vac, 7 Position (includes safety cover) Field Wiring Terminal Block

043506673 424 CPU Door Label

043513804 Universal Module Door (clear)

043509695 200 Series I/O Conversion Connector Label

043503242 Yellow Safety Keys (6)

043503243 White Safety Keys (6)

043503020 Backplane Connector Dust Cover

043503356 Field Wiring Terminal Block Jumpers

043503416 Module Mounting Screw

043505125 Field Wiring Terminal Block, Terminal Screw

31000207 40 Position Wiring Terminal Block Door Label

31000221 NOE Door Label

31000226 x34 1x CPU Door Label

31000264 Hot Standby Door Label

31002249 x34 1xA CPU Door Label

754 35013379 02 October 2007


Spare Parts

Fuses The following table shows the fuses for the Quantum modules.

Part Number/Fuse Type Fuse Value Fuse Holder

042701994 8 A SloBlo Not required

043502405 5 A SloBlo Wickman 820 (Holder*)Wickman 835 (Flush Cap)

043502515 1.5 A SloBlo Wickman 5700000000 (Holder*)

Wickman 5750000100 (Cover)

043502516 2.5 A SloBlo Wickman 5700000000 (Holder*)

Wickman 5750000100 (Cover)

043503948 2.5 A Not required

043508930 1.25 A 57-001-000

57-0078-000 3/4 A 57-001-000

57-0089-000 2 A SloBlo 57-001-000

3 AG Fast Acting 1/16 A, 250 V 1/16 A 3 AG Fuse Type

35013379 02 October 2007 755


Spare Parts

756 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


C
Hardware Installation
At a Glance

Introduction This section provides information on selecting backplanes, selecting mounting brackets, space requirements for the Quantum system and mounting Quantum modules.



Topic Page

Hardware Installation – Selecting Backplanes 758

Hardware Installation – Mounting Brackets 765

Hardware Installation – Space Requirements for the Quantum System 768

Hardware Installation – Mounting Quantum Modules 770

757

arr-thorp.com


Hardware Installation – Selecting Backplanes

Overview Backplanes are designed to mechanically secure and electrically connect all modules used in drops. The backplane contains a passive circuit board which permits modules to communicate with each other and to identify their slot numbers without further switch settings.

Refer to the following tables for front view illustrations and dimensions of the backplanes (all backplane dimensions are nominal).

The recommended length for the mounting screws should be within the following range: 0.24 in. (6 mm) - 0.52 in. (13 mm)

The head height of the screws should not exceed 0.14 in. (3.5 mm). 1/4' X 20 screws are recommended.

Backplanes The following table shows the backplanes.

Note: To meet vibration/shock specifications, the backplane must be mounted using all specified mounting holes. The mounting surface should be flat to within +/- 1.0 mm. The backplane is mounted using standard hardware (described below).

Part Number Module Slots Weight (Old Model) Weight (New Model)

140 XBP 002 00 2 0.5 lbs (0.23 kg) 0.9 lbs (0.41 kg)

140 XBP 003 00 3 0.75 lbs (0.34 kg) 1.35 lbs (0.62 kg)

140 XBP 004 00 4 1.0 lbs. (0.45 kg) 1.8 lbs (0.82 kg)

140 XBP 006 00 6 1.4 lbs (0.64 kg) 2.7 lbs (1.23 kg)

140 XBP 010 00 10 2.2 lbs (1.0 kg) 4.5 lbs (2.04 kg)

140 XBP 016 00 16 3.5 lbs (1.58 kg) 7.2 lbs (3.27 kg)

758 35013379 02 October 2007



Two Position Backplane Figure

The following figure shows the two position backplane.

A 290 mm / 11.42 inchesB 270 mm / 10.63 inchesC 175.5 mm / 6.91 inchesD 94.5 mm / 3.72 inchesE 10 mm / 0.39 inchesF 15 mm / 0.59 inchesG 102.61 mm / 4.04 inchesH 72.44 mm / 2.85 inches

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Ground Screws

=Mounting HoleDiameter: 8mm/0.31 inches.

=Optional locations for Modbus Pluscommunication cable grounding.Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches

=Threaded mounting holes forhalf and full height modules.Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches

35013379 02 October 2007 759



Three Position Backplane Figure

The following figure shows the three position backplane.


A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Ground Screws




760 35013379 02 October 2007



Four Position Backplane Figure

The following figure shows the four position backplane.


A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Ground Screws




35013379 02 October 2007 761



Six Position Backplane Figure

The following figure shows the six position backplane.

A 290 mm / 11.42 inchesB 270 mm / 10.63 inchesC 175.5 mm / 6.91 inchesD 94.5 mm / 3.72 inchesE 10 mm / 0.39 inchesF 15 mm / 0.59 inchesG 265.1 mm / 10.44 inchesH 235 mm / 9.25 inches

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Ground Screws




762 35013379 02 October 2007



Ten Position Backplane Figure

The following figure shows the ten position backplane.

A 290 mm / 11.42 inchesB 270 mm / 10.63 inchesC 175.5 mm / 6.91 inchesD 94.5 mm / 3.72 inchesE 10 mm / 0.39 inchesF 15 mm / 0.59 inchesG 427.66 mm / 16.84 inchesH 397.56 mm / 15.65 inchesI 198.78 mm / 7.825 inches

F GH

A

B

C

D

E Ground Screws


=Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding.Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches

=Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules.Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches

I

35013379 02 October 2007 763



Sixteen Position Backplane Figure

The following figure shows the sixteen position backplane.

A 290 mm / 11.42 inchesB 270 mm / 10.63 inchesC 175.5 mm / 6.91 inchesD 94.5 mm / 3.72 inchesE 10 mm / 0.39 inchesF 15 mm / 0.59 inchesG 670.74 mm / 26.41 inchesH 641.4 mm / 25.25 inchesI 427.6 mm / 16.83 inchesJ 213.8 mm / 8.42 inches

Ground Screws

A

BC

D

E

F

I

GH

J




764 35013379 02 October 2007



Hardware Installation – Mounting Brackets

Overview Brackets are required when mounting backplanes in 19 inch NEMA cabinets. These brackets support the 2 through 10 position backplanes. The bracket mounts to rails using standard NEMA hardware.

Mounting brackets are offered in two sizes: 20 mm for back rail mounting, and 125 mm for front rail mounting (refer to the following illustrations).

Backplane Mounting Brackets

The following table shows the mounting brackets.

Part Number Description

140XCP40100 125 mm Bracket

140XCP40200 20 mm Bracket

35013379 02 October 2007 765



125 mm Mounting Bracket

The following figure shows the 125 mm mounting bracket.

A 125 mm / 4.92 inchesB 22.83 mm / 0.90 inchesC 17.5 mm / 0.69 inchesD 88.9 mm / 3.50 inchesE 7.1 mm / 0.28 inchesF 146.1 mm / 5.75 inchesG 88.9 mm / 3.50 inchesH 14.7 mm / 0.58 inchesI 436.6 mm / 17.19 inchesJ 482.25 mm / 18.99 inchesK 20.2 mm / 0.79 inchesL 94.5 mm / 3.72 inchesM 175.5 mm / 6.91 inchesN 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches

Note: Before installing a Quantum backplane to a mounting bracket, ensure that the mounting holes of the bracket and backplane are properly aligned.

A

B

C

DEF

G

H

J

I

K

LM

N

Diameter of the mounting holes: 6.6 mm / 0.26 inches

766 35013379 02 October 2007



20 mm Mounting Bracket

The following figure shows the 20 mm mounting bracket.

A 20 mm / 0.79 inchesB 22.83 mm / 0.90 inchesC 17.5 mm / 0.69 inchesD 88.9 mm / 3.50 inchesE 7.1 mm / 0.28 inchesF 146.1 mm / 5.75 inchesG 88.9 mm / 3.50 inchesH 14.7 mm / 0.58 inchesI 436.6 mm / 17.19 inchesJ 482.25 mm / 18.99 inchesK 20.2 mm / 0.79 inchesL 94.5 mm / 3.72 inchesM 175.5 mm / 6.91 inchesN 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches

A

B

C

DEF

G

H

I

J

K

LM

N

Diameter of the mounting holes: 6.6 mm / 0.26 inches

35013379 02 October 2007 767



Hardware Installation – Space Requirements for the Quantum System

Overview When mounting Quantum systems in a cabinet, a 4 in. (101.60 mm) space should be maintained above and below the modules. Side spacing should be 1 in. (25.40 mm) minimum. Wiring ducts up to 2 in. (50.80 mm) square may be centered horizontally between backplanes.

Duct work or similar items mounted in this manner that extend further out than 2 in. require a 4 in. space (instead of 1 in.) between them and the upper and lower modules, to allow for air movement. (Refer to the Spacing Requirements Figure, p. 769 for the spacing required when installing Quantum systems.) There is no front clearance restriction regarding heat. Only sufficient mechanical clearance is required.

Spacing Requirements

The following table gives a summary of the spacing requirements for a Quantum system.

Minimum Spacing Location

4 in. (101.60 mm) Between the top of the cabinet and the top of the modules in the upper backplane.

4 in. Between the cabinet bottom and the bottom of the lower modules in the lower backplane.

4 in. Between the upper and lower modules when the backplanes are mounted one above the other.

1 in. (25.40 mm) On either side between the cabinet walls and end modules.

Note: Wiring ducts up to 2 in. x 2 in. (50.80 mm x 50.80 mm) may be centered between back planes. If the duct extends further than 2 in. out from the mounting panel, there must be a 4 in. space between the modules and duct on the top and bottom.

768 35013379 02 October 2007



Spacing Requirements Figure

The following figure shows the Quantum system spacing requirements.

4” (101.60 mm)

Top of Cabinet

1” (25.40 mm)

4” (101.60 mm)

1” (25.40 mm)

2” x 2” Maximum(50.80 x 50.80 mm)Wire Duct

4” (101.60 mm)

Bottom of Cabinet

35013379 02 October 2007 769



Hardware Installation – Mounting Quantum Modules

Overview Quantum modules, with the exception of power supply modules, can be inserted into any slot of any backplane, and, with the added exception of CPU modules, can be removed under power (hot swapped) without damaging modules or the backplane; power supply modules must be installed in the first or last slots of the backplane. Refer to the following figures and procedure when mounting modules.

POSSIBLE DANGER TO PERSONEL OR EQUIPMENTAn I/O module can only be hot swapped with the field side terminal strip removed.Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

770 35013379 02 October 2007



Mounting Quantum Modules

The following figure shows a step-by-step procedure for mounting Quantum modules.

PowerSupply

ModuleHooks

I/O BusConnector

Side view of installing amodule to the backplane

a

bc

3

1

2

Screw

1

2

3

If required for the application, select and installa 20 mm or 125 mm mounting bracket to therack using standard hardware.

Select and install the appropriate backplane tothe mounting bracket using standard hardwareand remove the plastic backplane connectordust covers.

a. Mount the module at an angle on to the two hooks located near the top of the backplane.b. Swing the module down to make an electrical connection with the backplane I/O bus connector.c. Tighten the screw at the bottom of the module to fasten it to the backplane.

The maximum tightening torque for thisscrew is 2-4 in-lbs (0.23 - 0.45 Nm).

Module

Mounting Screw

Terminal StripI/O Screws

TerminalStrip

Mounting Screw

4

5

Install the appropriate terminal strip (if required) on tmodule, and with a philips screwdriver tighten themounting screws at the top and bottom of the terminThe maximum tightening torque for the mountinscrews is 10 in-lbs (1.13 Nm).

With a philips screwdriver, make all I/O connectionsto the terminal strip as shown in the individualQuantum module wiring diagrams.The maximum tightening torque for the terminalstrip field wiring screws is 10 in-lbs (1.13 Nm).

35013379 02 October 2007 771



Installing Module Terminal Strip Jumper Clips

Terminal strip jumper clips (see below) are installed when contiguous I/O points need to be jumpered (i.e., the AVO 020 00 Analog Voltage Out module). Follow the procedure below for installing jumper clips.

3Insert

Jumper Clip

Terminal StripI/O Screw

140AVO 020 00ANALOG VOLTAGE OUT

Inserted Jumper Clip

Exploded view of an inserted jumper clip

4

5

1

2

3

4

Turn power off to the system.

Remove the terminal strip from themodule (see next page).

Loosen the terminal strip I/O screws ofthe points that you want jumpered.

Insert the jumper clip under the loosenedscrews (see exploded view below).

Tighten the screws and reinstall themodule (see previous page).

772 35013379 02 October 2007



Removing a Quantum I/O Terminal Strip

The Quantum Automation Series I/O terminal strips have been designed with a pry slot to assist in their removal. Follow the procedure below to remove the terminal strip.

140DDO8430010-80 Vdc Out

Pry Slot(Insert screwdriver)

(Exploded View)

Mounting Screws

2

1

1 Loosen the terminal strip mountingscrews located at the top andbottom of the terminal strip.

2 Located the pry slot at the top of theterminal strip near the topmounting screw.

3 From the front and at an angle,insert a flat edge screwdriver intothe pry slot and lever the top of theterminal strip away from themodule.

4 Once the top of the terminal striphas been loosened, the terminalstrip may be completely removedby continuous outward pressurewith the screwdriver.

5 To reinstall the terminal strip intothe module, follow the procedurepreviously described.

3

4Pry Slot

Backplane

Module(Side view)

35013379 02 October 2007 773



Removing a Quantum Module Door

The Quantum Automation Series module terminal strips have been designed with a flexible, removable door to allow for easier wiring and access to the terminal strip. Follow the procedure below to remove the module door.

140DDO84300

10-80 VDC OUT

1 Open the module door.

2 Place your thumb near the middleof the door (as illustrated).

3 With your thumb, apply pressureuntil the door bends and the doorhinge pins pop out of the retainingholes at the top and bottom of theterminal strip.

4 After wiring the module, reinstall thedoor using the reverse of the aboveprocedure.

774 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


D
Power and Grounding Guidelines
At a Glance

Introduction This section provides information of power and grounding considerations for AC and DC powered systems, system design considerations for Quantum power supplies, grounding and closed system installation.



Topic Page

Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems 776

System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies 786

Grounding 793

Closed System Installation 795

775

arr-thorp.com

Pwr. & Grnding. Guide

Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems

Overview The required power and grounding configurations for AC powered and DC powered systems are shown in the following illustrations.

Each backplane shown has its own ground connection; that is, a separate wire returning to the main grounding point, rather than "daisy chaining" the grounds between power supplies or mounting plates.

The main grounding point is the local common connection of the panel ground, equipment ground, and earth grounding electrode.

Also shown are power and grounding configurations of AC and DC systems required for CE compliance. The CE mark indicates compliance with the European Directive on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC). In order to maintain compliance, the Quantum system must be installed per the installation instructions.

AC Powered Systems

The following figure shows the AC powered systems.

AC POWERSOURCE

AC POWERSOURCE

FUSE

FUSE

AC L

AC N*

AC L

AC N*

PANELGROUND

POINTEQUIPMENT(CHASSIS)GROUND

AC POWERSOURCE

FUSE AC L

AC N*

EQUIPMENT(CHASSIS)GROUND

GROUNDSCREWS

*AC N should be earth grounded. If it is not earthgrounded, it must be fused (refer to local codes).

GROUNDSCREWS

GND

GND

BACKPLANES

PS CPU

I/OorCOMM

I/O

COMM

I/O

COMM

I/O

COMM

oror or

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

PS CPU

PSRED/

GND

RED/SUM SUM

776 35013379 02 October 2007



DC Powered Systems

The following figure shows the DC powered systems.

Note: This power and grounding configuration is compliant with the CE standards for the 140CPS11420 and 140CPS12420 power supplies, and for the 140CPS11100 (PV 01 or greater) power supply.

FUSE

+24 VDC

24 V COM*

FUSE

24 V COM*

24 V+

−

EARTH GROUND

*It is recommended that the 24 Vpower be earth grounded.

PANELGROUND

POINT

EQUIPMENT(CHASSIS)GROUND

GND

GND

GROUNDSCREWS FUSE +24 VDC

24 V COM*

GND

PS CPU

I/OorC

CPU

PS

OMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

PSRED/

BACKPLANES

+24 VDC

RED/SUM SUM

35013379 02 October 2007 777



AC Powered Systems for CE Compliance

The following figure shows the AC powered systems for CE compliance.

ACPOWERSOURCE

EARTHGROUND

AC LAC N

FUSE

See detailed AC Powered System Figure.

SHIELDED CABLEAND FERRITE BEAD

BROWNBLUE

LINE LOAD

LINEFILTER

BROWNBLUE

GREEN/YELLOW

SHIELDEDCABLE

PANELGROUND

GROUNDSCREWS

SHIELDED CABLEBROWNBLUE

BROWNBLUE

LINE LOAD

LINEFILTER

CASE GND

SHIELDEDCABLE

REDUNDANT/SUMMABLEPOWER SUPPLY

BACKPLANE

PS

LN

CPU

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

PS

LN

CASE GND

European ComplianceTo maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC), the 140CPS11100 (PV00 only), 140CPS11400, 140CPS11410, 140CPS12400, 140CRA21110 and the 140CRA21210 power supplies must be installed in accordance with these instructions.Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

Requirements ComplianceFor installations that must meet "Closed System" requirements, as defined in EN 61131-2 (without relying upon an external enclosure), connector models 140 XTS 00100 and 140 XTS 00500 are required. Also, if an external Line Filter is used, it must be protected by a separate enclosure which meets the "finger safe" requirements of IEC 529, Class IP20. See Closed System Installation, p. 795Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

778 35013379 02 October 2007



Detailed AC Powered System

The following figure shows the details for the AC powered system for CE compliance.

The following table shows the list of parts for the AC Powed System figure.

AC Powered System for CE ComplianceDetailed Installation Illustration

AC LINE(BROWN)

AC NEUT(BLUE)

GNDGRN/YEL)

EARTHGROUND

PANELGROUND

SHIELD

1 2 34

BROWN

BLUE

CASE TAB

GREEN/YELLOW*(TO GROUND SCREW ONQUANTUM BACKPLANE)

Line Filter

BLUE

BROWN

BACKPLANEGND SCREWS

Quantum Backplane140 XBP XXX 00

GNDLEAD

ShieldGND Lead

*Note: Only one ground wire per backplane is required. In redundant and summable systems, this lead is not connected for the additional line filter/power supply.

Quantum Power Supply

Wire to the power supply as follows:

Line (Brown wire)Neutral (Blue wire)

GND (Green/Yellow wire)

13

46

5

Callout Vendor (or equivalent)

Part Number Description Instruction

1 Offlex Series 100cy

35005 Line Cord Terminate the shield at panel ground; the filter end of the shield is not terminated.

2 Steward 28 B 0686-200 Ferrite Bead Install next to the filter and secure with tie wraps at both ends of the ferrite bead.

Fair Rite 2643665702

35013379 02 October 2007 779



24 Vdc Powered Systems for CE Compliance

The following figure shows the 3 A, 24 Vdc powered systems for CE compliance.

3 Schaffner FvN670-3/06 Line Filter (fast on terminals)Dimensions:Length: 3.4" (85 mm)Width: 2.2" (55 mm)Height: 1.6" (40 mm)Mounting Holes: 0.2 in (5.3 mm) dia.,3 in (75 MM) centerline mounted.Fast on terminals: 0.25 in (6.4 mm)

Install next to the power supply.

4 N/A N/A Ground BraidFlat braid 0.5 in (134 mm) with a maximum length of 4" (100 mm)

N/A


35005 Line CordThe maximum length is 8.5" (215 mm)

Third lead (green/yellow) is not used; terminate the shield at the power supply ground terminal.



See System for CE Compliance Figure.

Shielded Cable andFerrite Bead

24 VdcCommon+24 Vdc

EARTH GROUND

SHIELDGND

GROUNDSCREWS

BACKPLANE

PS CPU

I/O I/O I/O

780 35013379 02 October 2007



European complianceTo maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), the 140CPS21100, the 140CRA21120, and the 140CRA21220 must be installed in accordance with these instructions.Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 781



Detailed System for CE Compliance

The following figure shows the detailed installation for the CE compliance system and the parts list callouts.

The following table provides a list of parts for the CE Compliance Figure.

QUANTUMBACKPLANE

GND SCREWS1

2

GNDLEAD

GREEN/YELLOW+24 VDC

24 VDCCOM

BROWN

BLUE

EARTH GROUND

GREEN/YELLOW

SHIELDGNDLEAD

QUANTUM BACKPLANE140 XBP XXX 00


Wire to the power supplyas follows:

24 Vdc COM (Blue wire)+24 Vdc (Brown wire)GND

12

56

34




35005 Line Cord Terminate the shield at the power supply ground terminal

2 Steward 28 BO686-200 Ferrite Bead Install next to the filter and secure with tie wraps at Both ends of the ferrite bead.


782 35013379 02 October 2007



125 Vdc Powered System

The following figure shows the 125 Vdc powered system for CE compliance.

See detailed illustration on next page.

SHIELDED CABLE AND FERRITE BEAD

+125 VDC

125 VDCCOMMON

EARTHGROUND

SHIELDGND

GROUND SCREWS

SHIELDED CABLE AND FERRITE BEAD

BACKPLANE

PS CPU

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

I/OorCOMM

PSRED

European complianceTo maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), the 140CPS51100 and the 140CPS52400 must be installed in accordance with these instructions.Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 783



125 Vdc Powered Installation

The following figure shows the detailed installation for the 125 Vdc powered system for CE compliance with parts list callouts.

QUANTUMBACKPLANE

GND SCREWS

GNDLEAD

GREEN/YELLOW

BROWN1

2

BLUE

+125 VDC125 VDC

GREEN/YELLOW

SHIELDGND LEAD Quantum Power Supply


+125 Vdc (Brown wire)125 Vdc COM (Blue wire)GND

12

34

56

EARTH GROUND

COMMON

Quantum Backplane140XBPXXX00

784 35013379 02 October 2007



The following table provides a list of parts for the 125 Vdc Powered Installation Figure..




35005 Line Cord Terminate the shield at the power supply ground terminal

2 Steward 28 BO686-200 Ferrite Bead Install next to the filter and secure with tie wraps at Both ends of the ferrite bead.


European complianceTo maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), the 140CPS51100 and the 140CPS52400 must be installed in accordance with these instructions.Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

35013379 02 October 2007 785



System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies

Overview There exist some important design differences between various models of Quantum power supplies that require careful consideration by the system designer in order to achieve maximum system performance. The principal difference lies in the generation within the power supply of important backplane signals related to the health of the power supply and the status of the input power.

All Quantum power supplies include on-board early power fail detection logic which is used to signal all other modules on the backplane that input power has failed. This signal is called POK (power OK) and is active high (i.e., when the signal is high, power is OK).

There is both an internal (to the power supply) and an external (as seen by the backplane and all other modules) version of the POK signal. The internal POK signal is represented by the Pwr ok LED (light emitting diode) on the front panel of all power supplies.

The system POK signal is generated so that there is sufficient time between the negative going edge of system POK (power has failed) and the actual interruption of power to the backplane. This early warning of power failure is necessary for the Quantum executive to perform an orderly system shutdown.

786 35013379 02 October 2007



Standalone Power Supplies

Three models of standalone power supplies are offered.

The following figure shows the single internal POK that relates directly to the Quantum system POK.

• 140CPS11100 115...230 Vac input 3 A output

• 140CPS21100 24 Vdc input 3 A output


Equipment compatibility.Standalone units must be the only power supply installed in a backplane. No fault tolerant or redundant capability exists in systems powered by standalone power supplies.In systems powered by a standalone power supply, the internal power supply POK is provided directly to the Quantum system POK. Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

Standalone CPSInternal POK QuantumSystem POK

35013379 02 October 2007 787



Summable Power Supplies

Four summable power supply models are offered.

A summable power supply may be used as a standalone power supply without reservation in any Quantum system.

For systems configured with a mix of CPS, NOM, expert, and l/O modules, whose total current consumption from the backplane exceeds the current provided by one summable supply, two summable supplies may be used in a single backplane. In such a system, the total current available on the backplane is the sum of the capability of both supplies:

16 A for two 140CPS11410,16 A for two 140CPS21400,16 A for two 140CPS41400,20 A for two 140CPS11420,16 A for one 140CPS11410 and one 140CPS11420.

Use only like summable power supplies (same product reference) except for 140CPS11410 and 140CPS11420, which can be summed.

The summable supplies are designed so that they split the current supplied to the load almost equally, which also has the added benefit of increasing total system MTBF, and to distribute the thermal load across the backplane. Summable supplies should be installed at opposite ends of in the Quantum backplane to maximize the system thermal performance.

The Quantum system POK signal in systems powered by two summable power supplies is only true (power is OK) when both internal POK signals (in the 140CPSX14X0) are true. Quantum summable power supplies are not hot-swappable.

The following figure shows that the internal summable supply Quantum POKs are ANDed to create the Quantum System POK.





Summable CPSInternal POK

Summable CPSInternal POKand Quantum System POK

788 35013379 02 October 2007



The proper method for starting systems powered by summable power supplies is to insert both supplies in the backplane in an unpowered state, and then apply power to each supply. For 140CPS11410, 140CPS21400, and 140CPS414 models, there is no requirement to power each supply simultaneously. For 140CPS11420, or wherever this module is operated with a 140CPS11410, the delay between the two powering times should not be greater than five seconds. The system designer must realize that the operation of the summable supply described above is independent of total backplane load, i.e., even if the total load on the backplane is less than 8 A, if there are two summable supplies installed in the backplane, the system POK is generated as shown in this section.

For the special case of a single summable supply used as a standalone, the system POK generation reverts to the standalone case as shown previously in this section.

Redundant Power Supplies

Five redundant power supply models are offered.

Similar to the summable supplies, the Quantum redundant power supplies also contain circuitry which forces the installed power supplies to share output current almost equally. An important difference between the summable and the redundant supply lies in the system POK generation circuitry.

The Quantum system POK signal in systems powered by redundant power supplies is true (power is OK) if either or both internal POK is true. The following figure shows the internal Quantum redundant supply POKs are ORed to create the Quantum System POK.

• 140CPS12400 115 ... 230 Vac input 8 A output

• 140CPS12420 115 ... 230 Vac input 10 A output




Note: Redundant power supply module health may be monitored in an I/O module health status word. (Refer to the STAT Block description in Modicon Ladder Logic Block Library User Guide, 840USE10100.)

QuantumSystem

POK

Redundant CPSInternal POK

Redundant CPSInternal POK

OR

35013379 02 October 2007 789



Another important difference from the summable system is the total available system backplane loading. If there are N redundant power supplies installed in a backplane, the total backplane load must not exceed the capability of N – 1 supplies.

For example:

If three 8 A redundant power supplies are installed (N = 3), the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is the current sourced by N – 1 ( = 2) supplies, which is 16 A.if two 8 A power supplies are installed in the backplane (N = 2), the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is the current sourced by N – 1 ( = 1) supplies, which is 8 A.

If these constraints are observed, then in a system of two or three redundant supplies, one supply (it doesn’t matter which one) is hot-swappable. This is possible because there is excess capacity in the N – 1 remaining supplies to source the backplane current while the Nth supply is being swapped.

An obvious extension to this argument is that a single redundant power supply may be used as a standalone supply (but the lowest cost solution will be achieved by using a summable or standalone supply for this application).

Limits to Backplane LoadIf two 140CPS12420 power supplies are installed in the backplane, the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 10 A.If three 140CPS12420 power supplies are installed in the backplane, the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 20 A.

CAUTION

Use only like redundant power supplies except for 140CPS12420 which can be mixed with one 140CPS22400 or one 140CPS42400.

If one CPS12420 is installed with one 140CPS22400 or one 140CPS42400 in the backplane, the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 8 A.If one 140CPS12420 is installed with two 140CPS22400 or two 140CPS42400 in the backplane, the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 16 A.

If two 140CPS12420 are installed with one 140CPS22400 or one 140CPS42400 in the backplane, the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 16 A.


790 35013379 02 October 2007



Compatibility Issues of power supplies

With the exception of standalone models, power supplies with the same model number are always compatible when installed in the same backplane.Do not use a standalone power supply in combination with any other supply in the same backplane. Do not mix different models of power supplies on the same backplane, except in the following combinations:

One 140CPS11420 and one 140CPS11410 power supply may be installed for configurations consuming more than the rated current of one supply. In this case the total load capacity is 16 A @ 60° C.One 140CPS12420 and one 140CPS22400 power supply may be used for configurations requiring power for uninterrupted system operation with redundancy between an AC voltage source and a 24 Vdc voltage source. In this case, the total load capacity is 8 A @ 60° C. Three redundant supplies can also be mixed in a backplane. See Redundant Power Supplies, p. 789 for details.One 140CPS12420 and one 140CPS42400 power supply may be used for configurations requiring power for uninterrupted system operation, with redundancy between an AC voltage source and a 48 Vdc voltage source. In this case the total load capacity is 8 A @ 60° C. Three redundant supplies can also be mixed on a backplane. See Redundant Power Supplies, p. 789 for details.

Do not mix DC input power supplies into the same backplane as the corresponding AC version.

35013379 02 October 2007 791



Table of combination

This table shows the different possible combinations of Quantum power supplies.

Compatibility Issues of DIO

While it is possible to use a standalone or a summable power supply with a DIO drop (as long as the DIO input is left unpowered), it is not possible to use a redundant supply with the DIO drop. The added power supply must not be included in the system I/O map. The added power supply need not be of the same type as the DIO adapter. AC powered supplies may be used with DC type adapters and vice-versa. DIO module current load with an added power supply is typically 200 mA.

Combination with

Power supplies Alone

1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 2 pieces

140

CP

S 1

11 0

0

140

CP

S 2

10 0

0

140

CP

S 5

11 0

0

140

CP

S 1

14 1

0

140

CP

S 1

14 2

0

140

CP

S 2

14 0

0

140

CP

S 4

14 0

0

140

CP

S 1

24 0

0

140

CP

S 1

24 2

0

140

CP

S 2

24 0

0

140

CP

S 4

24 0

0

140

CP

S 5

24 0

0

140

CP

S 1

24 0

0

140

CP

S 1

24 2

0

140

CP

S 2

24 0

0

140

CP

S 4

24 0

0

140

CP

S 5

24 0

0

Standalone 140 CPS 111 00 X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

140 CPS 211 00 X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

140 CPS 511 00 X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Summable 140 CPS 114 10 X - - - X X - - - - - - - - - - - -

140 CPS 114 20 X - - - X X - - - - - - - - - - - -

140 CPS 214 00 X - - - - - X - - - - - - - - - - -

140 CPS 414 00 X - - - - - - X - - - - - - - - - -

Redundant 140 CPS 124 00 X - - - - - - - X - - - - X - - - -

140 CPS 124 20 X - - - - - - - - X X X - - X X X -

140 CPS 224 00 X - - - - - - - - X X - - - X X - -

140 CPS 424 00 X - - - - - - - - X - X - - X - X -

140 CPS 524 00 X - - - - - - - - - - - X - - - - X

Caption:

X : possible,

- : impossible.

792 35013379 02 October 2007



Grounding

Overview This appendix provides information on grounding issues for the chassis, power supply Modbus Plus, and other equipment and system requirements.

Chassis Grounding

A chassis ground wire is required for each backplane. The wire is connected between one of four ground screws (located on the backplane) and the main ground point of the power system. This wire should be green (or green with a yellow stripe) and the AWG rating must be (at a minimum) sized to meet the fuse rating of the supply circuit.

Power Supply Grounding

On each power supply connector there is a ground connection. This connection must be made for safety reasons. The preferred connection is between the power supply connector ground terminal and one of the backplane ground screws. This wire should be green (or green with a yellow stripe) and at a minimum the same AWG rating as the power connections to the supply.

In backplanes with multiple power supplies, each supply should have a ground connection between its input connector and the backplane ground screws.

Modbus Plus (MB+) Communication Tap Grounding

Modbus Plus network drop cables require a ground connection to the backplane. The connection is made by means of a metal loop clamp that grounds the cable shield to the ground point. The maximum allowable distance from the ground point to the drop cable’s connector is 30 cm (11.8 in).

Note: It is recommended that the power supplying the I/O modules be grounded at the main ground point.

35013379 02 October 2007 793



Modbus Plus Grounding Figure

The following figure shows Modbus Plus grounding information.

Other Equipment Grounding

Other equipment in the installation should not share the grounding conductor of the system. Each piece of equipment should have its own grounding conductor returning to the main grounding point from which the equipment power originates.

Systems with Multiple Power Feeds

In systems with multiple power feeds, the grounding should proceed in the same manner as single feed systems. However, a zero volt potential difference must be maintained between the equipment grounding conductors of the separate systems to prevent current flow on communication cables.

Loop Clamp(supplied withModbus Plus Tap)

Modbus PlusDrop Cable

Remove outerjacket to exposethe shield braid.

0.5 in(13 mm)

min

11.8 in(30 cm)

maxExisting backplaneground screw may beused if wire spaceand clearance allows.

GroundScrews

MB+

Use holes along backplanemounting flange to secure clamp.Customer electrical panel mayneed to be drilled and tapped.

European complianceTo maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC), the Modbus Plus drop cables must be installed in accordance with these instructions.


CAUTION

794 35013379 02 October 2007



Closed System Installation

Overview For installations that must meet "Closed System" requirements, as defined in EN 61131-2 (without relying upon an external enclosure) in which an external Line Filter is used, it must be protected by a separate enclosure which meets the "finger safe" requirements of IEC 529, Class IP20.

AC/DC Installation

The following figure shows the detailed installation for the AC and DC powered systems for CE closed system compliance.

AC & DC Powered Systems for CEClosed System Compliance DetailedInstallation Illustration

AC LINE(BROWN)

AC NEUT(BLUE)

GND(GRN/

YEL)

EARTHGROUND

PANELGROUND

SHIELD

GREEN/YELLOW*(TO GROUND SCREW ONQUANTUM BACKPLANE)

BACKPLANEGND SCREWS

QUANTUM BACKPLANE140XBPXXX00

GNDLEAD

* Note: Only one ground wire per backplane is required. In redundant and summable systems, this lead is not connected for the additional line filter/power supply.

** Note: Connectors 140 XTS 005 00 (for all power supplies) and 140 XTS 001 00 (for all I/O modules) must be ordered separately.



Line (Brown wire)Neutral (Blue wire)GND (Green/Yellow wire)

5

STRAIN RELIEFBUSHING

STRAIN RELIEFBUSHING

SHIELDGND LEAD

**140XTS00500CONNECTOR REQUIREDPROTECTIVE COVER

FOR LINE FILTER

WIRING DETAILSFOR LINE FILTERSHOWN ON NEXTPAGE

35013379 02 October 2007 795



Protective Cover The protective cover must completely enclose the line filter. Approximate dimensions for the cover are 12.5 cm by 7.5 cm. Wire entry/exit shall be through strain relief bushings.

Line Filter Connections

The following figure shows the wiring connections to the enclosed line filter.

Protective Cover Green/Yellow(To ground screw onQuantum backplane)

Ground wire formetal box (Notrequired for plastic box

BrownBrown

Blue

Case tab

Blue

796 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


E
CableFast Cabling
At a Glance

Introduction The following information pertains to the CableFast cabling system.



Topic Page

Features of the CableFast Cabling System 798

140 CFA 040 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 805

140 CFB 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 808

140 CFC 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 812

140 CFD 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 820

140 CFE 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 822

140 CFG 016 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 824

140 CFH 008 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 829

140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 837

140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 844

140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 852

CableFast Cables 860

CableFast Accessories 864

797

arr-thorp.com

CableFast Cabling

Features of the CableFast Cabling System

Overview The CableFast wiring system consists of pre-wired Quantum field wiring terminal strips, available in various cable lengths that are terminated with "D" type connectors. The "D" connectors plug into DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks offered in straight through or special application versions. Cables and terminal blocks are ordered separately and all terminal blocks may be used with any cable length. Pigtail cable versions are also available.

Quantum Modules and Backplane

The following figure shows the Quantum modules and backplane components.

Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.

1A801A79

2A82

2A81

CableFast

CableFast Terminal

Wiring Panduit

Wiring Panduit

MODICON MODICON MODICON MODICON MODICON MODICON

AEG AEG AEG AEG AEG AEG

CableFastTM

140CFA00400

Cab

leFa

stTM

140C

FA00

400

UL

FILE

E12

3528

UL FILE E123528

Cab

leFa

stTM

140C

FA00

400

UL

FILE

E12

3528

CableFastTM

140CFA00400UL FILE E123528

798 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Specifications All CableFast systems are designed to the following specifications.

Specifications

Power Ratings 150 Vac/Vdc @ 0.5 A per point

150 Vac/Vdc @ 2.0 A per point **Requires the 140CFG01600 Terminal Block and the 140XTS012XX Cable

Dielectric Withstanding Voltage

1060 Vac and 1500 Vdc

Creepage and Clearance per IEC 1131, UL 508, CSA 22.2 #142-1987

Terminal Block Wire Sizes per Terminal

One wire - #12 AWG (2.5 mm2)

Two wires - #16 AWG (1.0 mm2) and above (See below for the maximum number of wires allowed per terminal.)

Note: It is recommended that no more than two wires be used at one time.

Wire Size Number of Wires

#24 4#22 4#18 3#16 2#14 1#12 1

Terminal Screw Size M3

Screwdriver Head Size 0.13" (3.3 mm) flat head min.

Terminal Screw Type Captive

Terminal Screw Finish Tin plate (197 μin min.)

Terminal Screw Tightening Torque

7.2 lb.-in (0.8 Nm)

System Flammability Rating 94 V-2

Temperature

Operating 0 ... 60° C (32 ... 140° F)

Storage -40 ... +65° C (-40 ... +149° F)

Humidity 0 ... 95% RH noncondensing

Altitude 6,666 ft. (2000 m) full operation

Shock +/- 15 g peak, 11 ms, half sine wave

Vibration 10 ... 57 Hz @ 0.075 mm displacement57 ... 150 Hz @ 1 g, total 10 sweeps

Mounting Configuration DIN rail mount, NS35/7.5 and NS32

35013379 02 October 2007 799


CableFast Cabling

Terminal Block Selection Guide

Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast terminal blocks.

140ACI03000 X X X

140ACO02000 X X X

140ACI04000 X

140ACO13000 X

140ARI03010 X

140ATI03000 X (See Note 3)

140AMM09000 X

140AVI03000 X X X

140AVO02000 X X

140DAI34000 X X

140DAI35300 X X X X

140DAI44000 X X

140DAI45300 X X X X

140DAI54000 X X

140DAI54300 X

140DAI55300 X X X X

140DAI74000 CableFast Not Allowed

140DAI75300 CableFast Not Allowed

140DAM59000 X (See Note 1)

140DAO84000 X (See Note 2)




140C

FA04

000

140C

FB03

200

140C

FC03

200

140C

FE03

200

140C

FE03

200

140C

FG01

600

140C

FH00

800

140C

FI00

800

140C

FJ00

400

140C

FK00

400

800 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling


140DDI15310 X X

140DDI35300 X X X

140DDI35310 X

140DDI36400 Not compatible with CableFast. See 140DDI36400 I/O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module, p. 616 for recommended cables

140DDI67300 X

140DDI84100 X

140DDI85300 X X X X

140DDM39000 X

140DDM69000 X (See Note 1)

140DDO15310 X

140DDO35300 X X X

140DDO35301 X X X

140DDO35310 X

140DDO36400 Not compaitble with CableFast. See 140DDO36400 I/O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module, p. 681 for recommended cables.

140DDO84300 X (See Note 2)

140DDO88500 X (See Note 1)

140DRA84000 X (See Note 1)

140DRC83000 X (See Note 1)

140DSI35300 X

140DVO85300 X

X = Valid Selections.

140C

FA04

000

140C

FB03

200

140C

FC03

200

140C

FE03

200

140C

FE03

200

140C

FG01

600

140C

FH00

800

140C

FI00

800

140C

FJ00

400

140C

FK00

400

35013379 02 October 2007 801


CableFast Cabling

Note: These are the maximum load current capacities of the 140CFA04000 and CFG01600 terminal blocks:1. When using the 140CFA04000 terminal block, the indicated module outputs are

limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac maximum and 0.5 A per point, 150 Vdc maximum.

2. When using the 140CFG01600 terminal block and either the 140XTS012xx or 140XTS102XX high power cables, the indicated module output ratings are 2 A per point, 150 Vac maximum, and 2 A per point, 150 Vdc maximum.

3. The 140CFA04000 block does not incorporate an isometric barrier and is not recommended for use with the 140ATI03000 TC module. Without such a barrier, temperature readings may vary up to 2 degrees from one end of the block to the other. If the application can tolerate this temperature error, the block (and module remote CJC) may be used.

802 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

CableFast Terminal Blocks

This table includes descriptions for the following terminal blocks.

Block Number Block Description

140CFA04000 The A block is a straight through point to point connection on the terminal block. Wiring of this block is identical to wiring the Quantum I/O connector (140XTS00200).

140CFB03200 The B block is used for individually fused 2-wire digital inputs. This terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs. It is not recommended for sourced 1-wire inputs (powered from the field).

140CFC03200 The C block provides connection for 32 group fused input or output points. The block may be used for 1- or 2-wire inputs or outputs, and features a fuse per group, four groups total. Users select input or output mode via four switches located on the module. (The default is input mode.)

140CFD03200 The D block is used for sensors requiring either 2- or 3-wire electrical interface. A fuse per group is supplied to accommodate the I/O module (4) groups.

140CFE03200 The E block provides connection for 32 individually fused 24 Vdc outputs. 1- and 2-wire interfacing may be selected. Field power must be supplied to the four groups.

140CFG01600 The G block is a high power output block used on both AC and DC circuits requiring up to 2 A. Individual fusing is provided and may be used in both 1- and 2-wire installations. It is also used for isolated AC modules.

140CFH00800 The H block is used for analog inputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.

140CFI00800 The I block is used for analog inputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.

140CFJ00400 The J block is used for analog outputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.

140CFK00400 The K block is used for analog outputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.

35013379 02 October 2007 803


CableFast Cabling

CableFast Terminal Block Features

All CableFast terminal blocks have the following features.

CableFast Terminal Block Stacking Convention

The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast terminal blocks.

CableFastTM

140 CFA 040 00UL FILE E123528

SHIELD

UL componentrecognized.

Standard DIN railmounting for quickinstallation.

A standard 50 pin “D” connector.

Field side wiring terminals accommodate #12 AWG to #24 AWG (2.5 mm² to 0.2 mm²) wire.

Marking label for Quantum backplane, module group, and/or slot information.

Layer 3

Layer 2

Layer 1

SignalPositiveNegative

SignalPositive

SignalNegative

Layer 3Layer 2Layer 1

804 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

140 CFA 040 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The A block is a straight-through point-to-point connection on the terminal block. Wiring this block (and other CableFast cabling blocks) is identical to wiring the Quantum I/O connector (140 XTS 002 00).

140 CFA 040 00 terminal block

The following terminal block is unique to the 140 CFA 040 00 module.

Application notes

The following are the application notes for the 140 CFA 040 00 terminal block:

1. Configuration – two columns2. Compatibility – this terminal block provides straight through (point-to-point)

connection.

CableFastTM

140 CFA 040 00UL FILE E123528

SHIELD

Note: You may use this terminal block with all Quantum I/O modules except the 140 ATI 030 00 thermocouple module.

35013379 02 October 2007 805


CableFast Cabling

140 CFA 040 00 Dimensions

3.0 in(76.2 mm)

4.5 in(114.3 mm)

2.3 in(58.4 mm)

806 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

140 CFA 040 00 Wiring Diagram

12

34

56

78

910

1112

1314

1516

1718

1920

2122

2324

2526

2728

2930

3132

3334

3536

3738

3940

The wiring of the 140 CFA 040 00block is identical to

that of the 140 XTS 002 00Quantum I/O connector.

Refer to the module wiringdiagrams.

35013379 02 October 2007 807


CableFast Cabling

140 CFB 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The B block is used for individually fused 2-wire digital inputs. This CableFast terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs. It is not recommended for sourced 1-wire inputs (powered from the field).

Terminal block The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140 CFB 032 00 module.

Application notes

The following are the application notes for the 140 CFB 0320 0 terminal block:

1. Configuration – arranged in four groups of eight I/O points. Two terminals per point prevent disruption of service due to a single point failure.

2. Compatibility – this terminal block provides individual 32 point 0.8 A fusing for the following input modules:140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDO 153 10, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00.

Cab

leFa

stTM

140

CFB

032

00

UL

FILE

E12

3528

31

30

29

SHIELD

32

27

26

25

28

23

22

21

24

19

18

17

20

15

14

13

16

11

10

9

12

7

6

5

8

3

2

1

4

GROUP AGROUP BGROUP CGROUP D

808 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFB03200 terminal block.

4.4 in(111.8 mm)

3.3 in(83.8 mm)

2 18 7 6 5 4 310 916 15 14 13 12 1118 1724 23 22 21 20 1926 2532 31 30 29 28 27VD+VC+

9.3 in(236.2 mm)

2+ 1+8 + 7+ 6+ 5 + 4 + 3+10+ 9+16+15+14+ 13+12+11+18+17+24+23+22+ 21+20+19+26+25+32+31+30 + 29+28+27+

VB+VA+

VD-VC- VB-VA-

35013379 02 October 2007 809


CableFast Cabling

Wiring of input modules

The following figure shows the 140 CFB 032 00 wiring for the following input modules: 140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00.

Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10) can be used to jumper the power between groups.

1 1+2 2+3 3+4 4+5 5+6 6+7 7+8 8+

9 9+10 10+11 11+12 12+13 13+14 14+15 15+16 16+

17 17+18 18+19 19+20 20+21 21+22 22+23 23+24 24+

25 25+26 26+27 27+28 28+29 29+30 30+31 31+32 32+

VA+ VA-VB+ VB-VC+ VC-VD+ VD-

GR

OU

P B

GR

OU

P

GR

OU

P

GR

OU

P

Field side connections

ModuleInput 1

Group A power

Group C Group D

+-

ModuleGroup A

supply

DC input module power AC input module

N

L

VA+

VB+

VC+

VD+VD+

VA -

VB -

VC -

VD -

Group B

ModuleGroup Acommon

F1 0.8 A

Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU08000 (Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700800041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3

810 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring of output module

The following figure shows the 140 CFB 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 153 10 output module.

Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10) can be used to jumper the power between groups.

1 1+2 2+3 3+4 4+5 5+6 6+7 7+8 8+

9 9+10 10+11 11+12 12+13 13+14 14+15 15+16 16+

17 17+18 18+19 19+20 20+21 21+22 22+23 23+24 24+

25 25+26 26+27 27+28 28+29 29+30 30+31 31+32 32+


Moduleoutput 7

GR

OU

P B

GR

OU

P C

GR

OU

P D


Moduleoutput 1

ModuleGroup A Group A power

Group C power

Group D power

+-

ModuleGroup A

Group B power

TTL Nand gate

TTL inverter

Moduleoutput 4

Moduleoutput 5

F1 0.8 A

GROUP A

Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU08000(Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700800041

35013379 02 October 2007 811


CableFast Cabling

140 CFC 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The C block provides connections for 32 group fused input or output points. You may use this CableFast terminal block for 1- or 2-wire inputs or outputs, and features a fuse per group – up to a total of four groups. Users select input or output mode via four switches located on the module. (The default is input mode.)

Terminal block The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140 CFC 032 00 module.

CableFastTM

140 CFC 032 00UL FILE E123528

SHIELD

C D

A B

Groups A B

C D

+ -

812 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Application notes

The following are the application notes for the 140 CFC 032 00 module:

1. Configuration – arranged in four groups of eight I/O points (two terminals per point). This block may be used for one- and two-wire inputs or outputs. The input and output mode is selected via four switches located on the block.

2. Compatibility – this terminal block provides 0.8 A group fusing for the following discrete modules:

The following table shows the modules provided with 0.8 A group fusing.

Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFC 032 00 terminal block block. All four switches must be set to the same position.

Module Mode Switch setting Fuse rating

140 DAI 353 00 Input + 0.8 A

140 DAI 453 00 Input + 0.8 A

140 DAI 553 00 Input + 0.8 A

140 DDI 153 10 Input - 0.8 A

140 DDI 353 00 Input + 0.8 A

140 DDI 853 00 Input + 0.8 A

140 DDO 153 10 Output + 4 A

140 DDO 353 00 Output - 4 A

Note: Select input or output mode with the four switches located on the terminal.

2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 10 9 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 24 23 22 21 20 19 26 25 32 31 30 29 28 27 VD-VC- VB-VA-

8.0 in(203.2 mm)

2- 1-8- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3-10- 9-16-15-14- 13-12-11-18-17-24-23-22- 21-20-19-26-25-32-31-30- 29-28-27-VD-VC- VB-VA-

3.0 in(76.2 mm)

2.9 in(73.7 mm)

35013379 02 October 2007 813


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for input modules

The following shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the following input modules: 140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00.

Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can be used to jumper the power between groups.

1 1+/-2 2+/-3 3+/-4 4+/-5 5+/-6 6+/-7 7+/-8 8+/-

9 9+/-10 10+/-11 11+/-12 12+/-13 13+/-14 14+/-15 15+/-16 16+/-

17 17+/-18 18+/-19 19+/-20 20+/-21 21+/-22 22+/-23 23+/-24 24+/-

25 25+/-26 26+/-27 27+/-28 28+/-29 29+/-30 30+/-31 31+/-32 32+/-


Module input 9G

RO

UP

BG

RO

UP

CG

RO

UP D

GR

OU

P A


Moduleinput 1

Module Group A common

Module

Group Apower

Group C powerGroup D power

+

+

-

-

FA

FB 0.8A

Module Group B common

B+/-

A+/-

+

+

-

- Group BPower

ModuleDC input module power

Module input 10Typical 1-wire configuration

Typical 2 - wireconfiguration

AC input module

N

L

VA+

VB+

VC+

VD+VD+

VA -

VB -

VC -

VD -

0.8 A Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU08000(Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700800041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

814 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for 140 DDI 153 10 input module

The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDI 153 10 input module.

Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can be used to jumper the power between groups.

1 1+/-2 2+/-3 3+/-4 4+/-5 5+/-6 6+/-7 7+/-8 8+/-

9 9+/-10 10+/-11 11+/-12 12+/-13 13+/-14 14+/-15 15+/-16 16+/-

17 17+/-18 18+/-19 19+/-20 20+/-21 21+/-22 22+/-23 23+/-24 24+/-

25 25+/-26 26+/-27 27+/-28 28+/-29 29+/-30 30+/-31 31+/-32 32+/-

VA-VB+ VB-VC+ VC-VD+ VD-

Module input 9G

RO

UP

BG

RO

UP

GR

OU

P D

GR

OU

P A

Field side connec-

Module input 1

ModuleGroup A

Module

Group A power

Group C Group D

+

+

-

-

FA

FB

ModuleGroup B

B+/-

A+/-

+

+

-

- Group B power

Module input 7

Open collec-

TT

ModuleDC input module power

0.8 A Fuse part num-bersModicon # -140CFU08000 (Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700800041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-

VA+

35013379 02 October 2007 815


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for 140 DDO 153 10 output module

The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 153 10 output module.

1 1+/-2 2+/-3 3+/-4 4+/-5 5+/-6 6+/-7 7+/-8 8+/-

9 9+/-10 10+/-11 11+/-12 12+/-13 13+/-14 14+/-15 15+/-16 16+/-

17 17+/-18 18+/-19 19+/-20 20+/-21 21+/-22 22+/-23 23+/-24 24+/-

25 25+/-26 26+/-27 27+/-28 28+/-29 29+/-30 30+/-31 31+/-32 32+/-


Module Output 9

GR

OU

P B

GR

OU

P C

GR

OU

P D

GR

OU

P A

Field SideConnections

Module Output 1

ModuleGroup Acommon

ModuleGroup A

supply

Group A power

Group C power

Group D power

+

+

-

-

FA 4A

FB 4A

ModuleGroup Bcommon

ModuleGroup B

supply

B+/-

A+/-

+

+

-

- Group B power

Modul Output 6Module Output 7

TTL Nand Gate

TTL Inverter

4 A Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU40000(Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3701400041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

816 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Note: 1. The 140 CFC 032 00 is shipped with Modicon the 140 CFU 080 00 (0.8 A) fuse

installed. Check that the Modicon 140CFU40000 (4 A) fuse is installed when the 140 CFC 032 00 and the 140 DDO 153 00 are wired together.

2. The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can be used to jumper the power between groups.

35013379 02 October 2007 817


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for 140 DDO 353 0X output module

The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 353 00 and 140 DDO 353 01 output modules.

1 1+/-2 2+/-3 3+/-4 4+/-5 5+/-6 6+/-7 7+/-8 8+/-

9 9+/-10 10+/-11 11+/-12 12+/-13 13+/-14 14+/-15 15+/-16 16+/-

17 17+/-18 18+/-19 19+/-20 20+/-21 21+/-22 22+/-23 23+/-24 24+/-

25 25+/-26 26+/-27 27+/-28 28+/-29 29+/-30 30+/-31 31+/-32 32+/-


Module output 10Module output 9

GR

OU

P B

GR

OU

P C

GR

OU

P D

GR

OU

P A

Typical 1-wire configuration



3/4AModule

output 1

ModuleGroup AcommonModuleGroup Asupply

Group A power

Group C power

Group D power

+

+

-

-

3/4A

3/4A

FA 4A

FB 4A

ModuleGroup Bcommon

ModuleGroup B supply

B+/-

A+/-

+

+

-

- Group B power

4 A Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU40000 (Qty.10)Wickman # - 3701400041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

818 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Note: 1. The 140 CFC 032 00 is shipped with the Modicon 140 CFU 080 00 (0.8 A) fuse

installed. Make sure the Modicon 140 CFU 400 00 (4 A) fuse is installed when the 140 CFC 032 00 and the 140 DDO 353 00 are wired together.

2. The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can be used to jumper the power between groups.

35013379 02 October 2007 819


CableFast Cabling

140 CFD 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The CableFast cabling D block is used for sensors requiring either 2- or 3-wire electrical interfaces. A fuse per group is supplied to accommodate the I/O module (4) groups.

Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFD 032 00 terminal block.

Application notes

The following are the application notes for the 140 CFD 032 00 module:

1. Configuration – arranged in four groups of eight I/O points. Each input is allocated three terminals.

2. Compatibility – this terminal block provides 0.8 A group fusing connection points for 3- and 2-wire proximity switches and is used with the following modules: 140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00.

Dimensions The following shows the dimensions for the 140 CFD 032 00 module.

CableFastTM

140 CFD 032 00SHIELD

C D

A B

UL FILE E123528

2 18 7 6 5 4 310 916 15 14 13 12 1118 1724 23 22 21 20 1926 2532 31 30 29 28 27VD+VC+ VB+VA+

2+ 1+8+ 7+ 6+ 5+ 4+ 3+10+ 9+16+15+14+ 13+12+11+18+17+24+23+22+ 21+20+19+26+25+32+31+30+ 29+28+27+VD-VC- VB-VA-

8.0 in(203.2 mm)

2- 1-8- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3-10- 9-16-15-14- 13-12-11-18-17-24-23-22- 21-20-19-26-25-32-31-30- 29-28-27-VD-VC- VB-VA-

3.0 in(76.2 mm)

2.9 in(73.7 mm)

820 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFD 032 00 module.

Note: 1. The GND (ground) terminal points are not connected.2. The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can

be used to jumper the power between groups.

GROUP B

GROUP C

GROUP D

GROUP A


Module input Module input Module input Module input Module input Module input Module input Module input

PROX

PROX

PROX

PROX

3-wire sensor

2-wire sensor

Group A power+-

Group B powerGroup C powerGroup D power

DC input module AC input module power

N

L

Module Group Acommon

Module Group Asupply(see Note 2)

FA .8A

VA+

VB+

VC+

VD+VD+

VA -

VB -

VC -

VD -

GND

GND

GND

GND

VA+

VB+

VC+

VD+VD+

VA -

VB -

VC -

VD -

GND

GND

GND

GND

29-

30-

31-

32-

29+

30+

31+

32+

29

30

31

32

25-

26-

27-

28-

25+

26+

27+

28+

25

26

27

28

21-

22-

23-

24-

21+

22+

23+

24+

21

22

23

24

17-

18-

19-

20-

17+

18+

19+

20+

17

18

19

20

13-

14-

15-

16-

13+

14+

15+

16+

13

14

15

16

9-

10-

11-

12-

9+

10+

11+

12+

9

10

11

12

5-

6-

7-

8-

5+

6+

7+

8+

5

6

7

8

1-

2-

3-

4-

1+

2+

3+

4+

1

2

3

4

Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU08000 (Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700800041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

35013379 02 October 2007 821


CableFast Cabling

140 CFE 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The CableFast E cabling block provides connections for 32 individually fused 24 VDC outputs. 1- and 2-wire interfacing may be selected. Field power must be supplied to the four groups.

Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFE 032 00 terminal block.

Application notes

The following are the application notes for the 140 CFE 032 00 module:

1. Configuration – arranged in four groups of eight I/O points. Two terminals per point prevent disruption of service due to a single point failure.

2. Compatibility – this terminal block provides individual 32-point 0.8 A fusing for the 140 DDO 353 00 and the 140 DDO 353 01 modules.

Dimensions The following shows the dimensions for the 140 CFE 032 00 module.

Cab

leFa

stTM

140

CFD

032

00

UL

FILE

E12

3528

31

30

29

SHIELD

32

27

26

25

28

23

22

21

24

19

18

17

20

15

14

13

16

11

10

9

12

7

6

5

8

3

2

1

4

GROUP AGROUP BGROUP CGROUP D

4.4 in(111.8 mm)

3.3 in(83.8 mm)

2 18 7 6 5 4 310 916 15 14 13 12 1118 1724 23 22 21 20 1926 2532 31 30 29 28 27VD+VC+

9.3 in(236.2 mm)

2+ 1+8 + 7+ 6+ 5 + 4 + 3+10+ 9+16+15+14+ 13+12+11+18+17+24+23+22+ 21+20+19+26+25+32+31+30 + 29+28+27+

VB+VA+

VD-VC- VB-VA-

822 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFE 032 00 module.

Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10 (QTY. 10), can be used to jumper the power between groups.

1 1+/-2 2+/-3 3+/-4 4+/-5 5+/-6 6+/-7 7+/-8 8+/-

9 9+/-

10 10+/-11 11+/-12 12+/-13 13+/-14 14+/-15 15+/-16 16+/-

17 17+/-18 18+/-19 19+/-20 20+/-21 21+/-22 22+/-23 23+/-24 24+/-

25 25+/-26 26+/-27 27+/-28 28+/-29 29+/-30 30+/-31 31+/-32 32+/-


GR

OU

P B

GR

OU

P

GR

OU

P DG

RO

UP A




Group A power

Group C Group D

+

+

-

-Group B power

Moduleoutput 10

ModuleOutput 9

Moduleoutput 1

ModuleGroup A

ModuleGroup A supplyModuleGroup B commonModuleGroup B supply

F9 0.8A

F10 0.8A

F1 0.8A

Fuse part numbers:Modicon# 140CFU08000 (Qty.10)Wickman# 3700800041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

35013379 02 October 2007 823


CableFast Cabling

140 CFG 016 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The G CableFast cabling block is a high-power output block used on both AC and DC circuits requiring up to 2 A. Individual fusing is provided and may be used in both 1- and 2-wire installations. It is also used for isolated AC modules.

Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 terminal block.

Application notes

The following are the application notes for the 140 CFG 016 00 module:

1. Configuration – Arranged in 16 isolated I/O points.2. Compatibility – This terminal block provides individual 16-point 4 A fused

connection points for the following modules: 140 DAI 340 00, 140 DAI 440 00, 140 DAI 540 00, 140 DAO 840 00, 140 DAO 840 10, 140 DAO 842 10, 140 DAO 842 20, and 140 DDO 843 00.

Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFG 016 00 module.

CableFastTM 140 CFG 016 00

SHIELD

UL

FILE

E12

3528

14 11 8 6

15 12 9 7

16

13 10 1

4 2

5 3

VB- VA-VD- VC-

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 116 15

4.4 in(111.8 mm)

14+/- 13+/-16+/- 15+/- 12+/- 11+/- 10+/- 9+/- 8+/- 7+/- 6+/- 5+/- 4+/- 3+/- 2+/- 1+/-

GND GNDGND GND VC- VC- VC- VC- VB- VB- VB- VB- VA- VA- VA- VA-VD- VD-VD- VD-

VB+ VA+VD+ VC+

5.8 in(147.3 mm)

2.4 in(61.0 mm)

824 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for isolated AC input mode

The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the input (isolated AC input mode) modules: 140 DAI 340 00, 140 DAI 440 00, and 140 DAI 540 00.

Note: 1. The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can

be used to jumper the power between groups.2. The GND (ground) terminal points are not connected.

VA-1 +/-1

VA-2 +/-2

VA-3 +/-3

VA-4 +/-4

VB-5 +/-5

VB-6 +/-6

VB-7 +/-7

VB-8 +/-8

VC-9 +/-9

VC-10 +/-10

VC-11 +/-11

VC-12 +/-12

VD-13 +/-13

VD-14 +/-14

VD-15 +/-15

VD-16 +/-16

VA+ VA- GND

VB+ VB- GND

VC+ VC- GND

VD+ VD- GND

Moduleinput 1

Field side connec-F1 4A

N LModulereturn 1

GR

OU

P B

GR

OU

P AG

RO

UP C

GR

OU

P D

Fuse part numbersModicon # -140CFU40000 (Qty. 10)Wickman # -3701400041 (UL VDE,SEMK IEC 127-3)

35013379 02 October 2007 825


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for isolated output mode

The following shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DAO 840 00 and 140 DAO 840 10 output modules (isolated output mode).


be used to jumper the power between groups.2. The GND (ground) terminal points are not connected

VA-1 +/-1

VA-2 +/-2

VA-3 +/-3

VA-4 +/-4

VB-5 +/-5

VB-6 +/-6

VB-7 +/-7

VB-8 +/-8

VC-9 +/-9

VC-10 +/-10

VC-11 +/-11

VC-12 +/-12

VD-13 +/-13

VD-14 +/-14

VD-15 +/-15

VD-16 +/-16

VA+ VA- GND

VB+ VB- GND

VC+ VC- GND

VD+ VD- GND

Moduleoutput 1

Field side connec-F1 4A

NLModuleoutput 1 line

Fuse part numbersModicon # -140CFU40000 (Qty. 10)Wickman # -3701400041 (UL VDE,SEMK IEC 127-3)

826 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for grouped AC output mode

The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DAO 842 10 and 140 DAO 842 20 output modules (grouped AC output mode).


be used to jumper the power between groups. 2. The GND (ground) terminal points are not connected.

VA-1 +/-1

VA-2 +/-2

VA-3 +/-3

VA-4 +/-4

VB-5 +/-5

VB-6 +/-6

VB-7 +/-7

VB-8 +/-8

VC-9 +/-9

VC-10 +/-10

VC-11 +/-11

VC-12 +/-12

VD-13 +/-13

VD-14 +/-14

VD-15 +/-15

VD-16 +/-16

N

L

VA+ VA- GND

VB+ VB- GND

VC+ VC- GND

VD+ VD- GND

Moduleoutput 1


F1 4A

F9 4AModule

output 9

Module Group Acommon

Module Group Ccommon

Moduleoutput 10

F10 4A

Module Group Ahot

Module Group Chot

N

L

GR

OU

P DG

RO

UP C

GR

OU

P BG

RO

UP

A



Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU40000(Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3701400041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

35013379 02 October 2007 827


CableFast Cabling

Wiring for grouped DC output mode

The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 843 00 (grouped DC output mode) module.

VA-1 +/-1

VA-2 +/-2

VA-3 +/-3

VA-4 +/-4

VB-5 +/-5

VB-6 +/-6

VB-7 +/-7

VB-8 +/-8

VC-9 +/-9

VC-10 +/-10

VC-11 +/-11

VC-12 +/-12

VD-13 +/-13

VD-14 +/-14

VD-15 +/-15

VD-16 +/-16

+

-

+

-

VA+ VA- GND

VB+ VB- GND

VC+ VC- GND

VD+ VD- GND

Moduleoutput 1

Module Group ACommon


F1 4A

F9 4A

Moduleoutput 9

Module Group Bcommon

Module Group Asupply

Module Group Bsupply

Group A supply

Group B supply

Fuse part numbersModicon # - 140CFU40000(Qty. 10Wickman # - 3701400041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

(outputs 1-8)Group Areturns

Group B (outputs 9-16)Returns


be used to jumper the power between groups. 2. The GND (ground) terminal points are not connected.

828 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

140 CFH 008 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The H CableFast cabling block is used for analog inputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.

Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFH 008 00 terminal block.

Application Notes

The following are the application notes for the 140 CFH 008 00 module:

1. Configuration – eight analog inputs with a common loop supply. Each point is allocated four terminals.

2. Compatibility – this terminal block provides individually 0.063 A fused connection point sets for the 140 ACI 030 00 and 140 AVI 030 00 analog input modules.

CableFastTM 140 CFH 008 00

SHIELDU

L FI

LE E

1235

28

8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1

35013379 02 October 2007 829


CableFast Cabling

Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFH 008 00 module.

3.0 in(76.2 mm)

2.3 in(58.4 mm)

4+ S4V4+ 4- V3+3-3+ S3 V2+ 2- 2+S2-V1+

5.0 in(127.0 mm)

V+ RET GND

1- 1+ S1

8+ S8 V7+7-7+ S7 V6+ 6- 6+S6-V5+ 5- 5+ S5V8+ 8-

830 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring diagram (source grounding)

The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFH 008 00 (source grounding) module.

S1

1+

1-

V1+


Current INLoop Power Required

+-

Module Input 1 (+)

S2

2+

2-

V2+

S3

3+

3-

V3+

S4

4+

4-

V4+

S5

5+

5-

V5+

S6

6+

6-

V6+

S7

7+

7-

V7+

S8

8+

8-

V8+

GND

RET

V+

4 - 20 mASource

4 - 20 mA

Current INInstrument Powered

Module Input 1 (-)

Module Input 2 (+)

Module Input 2 (-)

Module Input 3 (+)

Module Input 3 (-)

F1

F2

F3

1/16A

1/16A

1/16A

Fuse Part NumbersModicon # - 140CFU00600 (Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700063041 (UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

35013379 02 October 2007 831


CableFast Cabling

Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation

of input points.2. For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00 and the 140 AVI 030 00,

see the wiring diagrams for said modules. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.

832 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring diagram (instrument grounding)

The following figure shows the wiring (instrument grounding) for the 140 CFH 008 00 module.

S1

1+

1-

V1+


Jumper(See jumper information below)


+-

Module Input 1 (+)

S2

2+

2-

V2+

S3

3+

3-

V3+

S4

4+

4-

V4+

S5

5+

5-

V5+

S6

6+

6-

V6+

S7

7+

7-

V7+

S8

8+

8-

V8+

GND

RET

V+

4 - 20 mASource

4 - 20 mA


Module Input 1 (-)

Module Input 2 (+)

Module Input 2 (-)

Module Input 3 (+)

Module Input 3 (-)

F1

F2

F3

1/16A

1/16A

1/16A

Fuse Part NumbersModicon # - 140CFU00600(Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700063041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

Jumper Part Number140CFX00110

Jumper ConnectionsS1 to 1-S2 to 2-S3 to 3-

35013379 02 October 2007 833


CableFast Cabling

Note: If you use a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of the input points.For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00 and the 140 AVI 030 00, see the wiring diagrams for said modules.The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.

834 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Wiring diagram (chassis grounding)

The following figure shows the wiring (chassis grounding) for the 140 CFH 008 00 module.

S1

1+

1-

V1+




+-

Shield

Module Input 1 (+)

S2

2+

2-

V2+

S3

3+

3-

V3+

S4

4+

4-

V4+

S5

5+

5-

V5+

S6

6+

6-

V6+

S7

7+

7-

V7+

S8

8+

8-

V8+

GND

RET

V+

4 - 20 mASource

4 - 20 mA


Module Input 1 (-)

Module Input 2 (+)

Module Input 2 (-)

Module Input 3 (+)

Module Input 3 (-)

F1

F2

F3

1/16A

1/16A

1/16A

Fuse Part NumbersModicon # - 140 CFU 006 00(Qty. 10)Wickman # - 3700063041(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)Jumper Part Number140CFX00110Jumper ConnectionsS1 to S2 to S3 to S4 to S5 to S6to S7 to S8

35013379 02 October 2007 835


CableFast Cabling


of input points.2. For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00 and the 140 AVI 030 00,

see the wiring diagrams for said modules.3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.

836 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The I block is used for analog inputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interfaces for both field and loop power configurations.

See Features of the CableFast Cabling System, p. 798 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks.

Application Notes

The following are the application notes for the 140CFI00800 module:

1. Configuration – Eight analog inputs with a common loop supply. Each point is allocated four terminals.

2. Compatibility – This terminal block provides eight connection point sets for the 140ACI03000 and 140AVI03000 analog input modules.

Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFI00800 module.

3.0 in(76.2 mm)

2.3 in(58.4 mm)

4+ S4V4+ 4- V3+3-3+ S3 V2+ 2- 2+S2-V1+

5.0 in(127.0 mm)

V+ RET GND

1- 1+ S1

8+ S8 V7+7-7+ S7 V6+ 6- 6+S6-V5+ 5- 5+ S5V8+ 8-

35013379 02 October 2007 837


CableFast Cabling

Wiring Diagram (Source Grounding)

The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFI00800 (source grounding) module.

S1

1+

1-

V1+


VoltageSource


+-

Module Input 1 (+)

Voltage IN

S2

2+

2-

V2+

S3

3+

3-

V3+

S4

4+

4-

V4+

S5

5+

5-

V5+

S6

6+

6-

V6+

S7

7+

7-

V7+

S8

8+

8-

V8+

GND

RET

V+

4 - 20 mASource

4 - 20 mASource


Module Input 1 (-)

Module Input 2 (+)

Module Input 2 (-)

Module Input 3 (+)

Module Input 3 (-)

838 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling


of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVI03000,

see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module, p. 524 and 140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module, p. 540.

3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 839


CableFast Cabling

Wiring Diagram (Instrument Grounding)

The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFI00800 (instrument grounding) module.

S1

1+

1-

V1+



VoltageSource


+-

Module Input 1 (+)

Voltage IN

S2

2+

2-

V2+

S3

3+

3-

V3+

S4

4+

4-

V4+

S5

5+

5-

V5+

S6

6+

6-

V6+

S7

7+

7-

V7+

S8

8+

8-

V8+

GND

RET

V+

4 - 20 mASource

4 - 20 mA


Module Input 1 (-)

Module Input 2 (+)

Module Input 2 (-)

Module Input 3 (+)

Module Input 3 (-)


Jumper ConnectionsS1 to 1-S2 to 2-S3 to 3-

840 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling


of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVI03000,

see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module, p. 524 and 140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module, p. 540.


35013379 02 October 2007 841


CableFast Cabling

Wiring Diagram (Chassis Grounding)

The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFI00800 (chassis grounding) module.

S1

1+

1-

V1+

Field SideConnectionsJumper

(See jumper information below)

VoltageSource


+-

Shield

Module Input 1 (+)

Voltage IN

S2

2+

2-

V2+

S3

3+

3-

V3+

S4

4+

4-

V4+

S5

5+

5-

V5+

S6

6+

6-

V6+

S7

7+

7-

V7+

S8

8+

8-

V8+

GND

RET

V+

4 - 20 mASource

4 - 20 mA


Module Input 1 (-)

Module Input 2 (+)

Module Input 2 (-)

Module Input 3 (+)

Module Input 3 (-)


Jumper ConnectionsS1 to S2 to S3 to S4 to S5 to S6to S7 to S8

842 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling


of input points.2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVI03000,

see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module, p. 524 and 140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module, p. 540 .


35013379 02 October 2007 843


CableFast Cabling

140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The J block is used for analog outputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interfaces for both field and loop power configurations.


Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFJ00400 terminal block.

Application Notes

The following are the application notes for the 140CFJ00400 module:

1. Configuration – Four analog outputs with a common loop supply. Each point is allocated six terminals.

2. Compatibility – This terminal block provides four individually 0.063 A fused connection point sets for the 140ACO02000 analog output module.

CableFastTM 140 CFJ 004 00

UL FILE E123528

SHIELDV4+ V3+ V2+ V1+

844 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFJ00400 module.

2-V2-V2+ C02 V02 S2 1-V1-V1+

4.3 in(109.2

3.0 in(76.2 mm)

2.3 in(58.4 mm)

4-V4-V4+ 3-V3-V3+V+ RET GND

C01 V01 S1

C04 V04 S4 C03 V03 S3

35013379 02 October 2007 845


CableFast Cabling


The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFJ00400 (source grounding) module.

S 1

VO 1

CO 1

V 1+

V 1-

1-

S 2

VO 2

CO 2

V 2+

V 2-

2-

S 3

VO 3

CO 3

V 3+

V 3-

3-

S 4

VO 4

CO 4

V 4+

V 4-

4-

GND

RET

V+


FieldDevice

Current Out(Sinking)

Jumper(Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10)

FieldDevice

Current Out(Sourcing)

Jumper(Modicon #140 CFX 002 10)

+ -

I Source 3 (-)

Monitor 2 (+)

I Source 2 (-)

I Source 1 (-)

Monitor 1 (+)

Monitor 3 (+)

I Sink 3 (+)

I Sink 1 (+)

I Sink 2 (+)

1/16A

1/16A

1/16A

F1

F2

F3

Fuse Part NumbersModicon # - 140CFU00600 (Qty. 10)Wickman # - 19370-.063 (opto)(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)

846 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling


of input points.2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see the wiring diagrams

in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram, p. 552.3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 847


CableFast Cabling


The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFJ00400 (instrument grounding) module.

S 1

VO 1

CO 1

V 1+

V 1-

1-

S 2

VO 2

CO 2

V 2+

V 2-

2-

S 3

VO 3

CO 3

V 3+

V 3-

3-

S 4

VO 4

CO 4

V 4+

V 4-

4-

GND

RET

V+



FieldDevice


Jumper

FieldDevice


Jumper

+ -

I Source 3 (-)

Monitor 2 (+)

I Source 2 (-)

I Source 1 (-)

Monitor 1 (+)

Monitor 3 (+)

I Sink 3 (+)

I Sink 1 (+)

I Sink 2 (+)

1/16A

1/16A

1/16A

F1

F2

F3

Fuse Part NumbersModicon # - 140CFU00600 (Qty. 10)Wickman # - 19370-.063 (Opto)(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)


Jumper ConnectionsS1 to V1- to 1-S3 to V3-CO3 to V3+

848 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling


of input points.2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see the wiring diagrams

in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram, p. 552. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 849


CableFast Cabling


The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFJ00400 (chassis grounding) module.

S 1

VO 1

CO 1

V 1+

V 1-

1-

S 2

VO 2

CO 2

V 2+

V 2-

2-

S 3

VO 3

CO 3

V 3+

V 3-

3-

S 4

VO 4

CO 4

V 4+

V 4-

4-

GND

RET

V+



FieldDevice


Jumper

FieldDevice


Jumper

+ -

Shield

I Source 3 (-)

Monitor 2 (+)

I Source 2 (-)

I Source 1 (-)

Monitor 1 (+)

Monitor 3 (+)

I Sink 3 (+)

I Sink 1 (+)

I Sink 2 (+)

1/16A

1/16A

1/16A

F1

F2

F3

Fuse Part NumbersModicon # - 140CFU00600 (Qty. 10)Wickman # - 19370-.063 (Opto)(UL VDE, SEMK IEC 127-3)


Jumper ConnectionsS1 to S2 to S3 to S4V1 to 1-C03 to V3+

850 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling


of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see the wiring diagrams

in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram, p. 552.3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.

35013379 02 October 2007 851


CableFast Cabling

140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block

Overview The K block is used for analog outputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.


Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFK00400 terminal block.

Application Notes

The following are the application notes for the 140CFK00400 module:

1. Configuration – Four analog outputs with a common loop supply. Each point is allocated four terminals.

2. Compatibility – This terminal block provides four individually unfused connection point sets for the 140ACO02000 and 140AVO02000 analog output modules.

CableFastTM

140 CFK 004 00

UL FILE E123528SHIELD

852 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFK00400 module.

2-V2-V2+ C02 V02 S2 1-V1-V1+

4.3 in(109.2 mm)

3.0 in(76.2 mm)

2.3 in(58.4 mm)

4-V4-V4+ 3-V3-V3+V+ RET GND

C01 V01 S1

C04 V04 S4 C03 V03 S3

35013379 02 October 2007 853


CableFast Cabling


The following shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 (source grounding) module.

S 1

VO 1

CO 1

V 1+

V 1-

1-

S 2

VO 2

CO 2

V 2+

V 2-

2-

S 3

VO 3

CO 3

V 3+

V 3-

3-

S 4

VO 4

CO 4

V 4+

V 4-

4-

GND

RET

V+


FieldDevice

140 ACO 020 00Current Out

(Sinking)Jumper(Modicon # 140 CFX 001 10)

FieldDevice

FieldDevice

For 140 ACO 020 00

140 ACO 020 00Current Out(Sourcing)

Jumper(Modicon # 140CFX00110)

+ -

I Source 3 (-) Common 3 (-)

Monitor 2 (+) Output 2 (+)





I Sink (+) 3

I Sink (+)

I Sink (+) 2 140 AVO 020 00Voltage Out

140 ACO 020 00Signals

140 AVO 020 00Signals

854 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Note: 1. When used with the 140AVO02000 analog voltage out module, the master

override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I/O connector.

2. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points.

3. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see wiring diagram in 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module, p. 550.


35013379 02 October 2007 855


CableFast Cabling


The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 (instrument grounding) module.

S 1

VO 1

CO 1

V 1+

V 1-

1-

S 2

VO 2

CO 2

V 2+

V 2-

2-

S 3

VO 3

CO 3

V 3+

V 3-

3-

S 4

VO 4

CO 4

V 4+

V 4-

4-

GND

RET

V+

Field SideConnections Jumper


FieldDevice


(Sinking)

Jumper

FieldDevice

FieldDevice

For 140 ACO 020 00operation only


Jumper

+ -







I Sink (+) 3

I Sink (+)





Jumper ConnectionsS1 to V1- to 1-S2 to V2-S3 to v3-CO3 to V3+

856 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling




3. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000 and the AVO02000, see wiring diagrams in 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module, p. 550 and the 140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module, p. 558.


35013379 02 October 2007 857


CableFast Cabling


The following shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 (chassis grounding) module.

S 1

VO 1

CO 1

V 1+

V 1-

1-

S 2

VO 2

CO 2

V 2+

V 2-

2-

S 3

VO 3

CO 3

V 3+

V 3-

3-

S 4

VO 4

CO 4

V 4+

V 4-

4-

GND

RET

V+

Field SideConnections Jumper


FieldDevice


(Sinking)

Jumper

FieldDevice

FieldDevice

For 140 ACO 020 00operation only


Jumper

+ -

Shield







I Sink (+) 3

I Sink (+)





Jumper ConnectionsS1 to S2 to S3 to S4V1- to 1-CO3 to V3+

858 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling




3. For wiring the 140ACO02000 and the 140AVO02000, see the wiring diagrams in 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module, p. 550 and 140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module, p. 558.


35013379 02 October 2007 859


CableFast Cabling

CableFast Cables

Overview This section provides CableFast cable specifications, cable lengths, inner wire color codes (for standard and high power cables), cable selections, and accessories.


The following table shows the CableFast cable specifications.


Standard Power

Cable Diameter 0.43 in. nominal (10.9 mm)

Number of Conductors 8-#20 AWG (0.8 mm), 7/28 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC

32-#26 AWG (0.4 mm), 7/34 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC

Bend Radius (I.D.) 0.75 in. min. (19.0 mm)

High Power

Cable Diameter 0.55 in. nominal (14.0 mm)

Number of Conductors 8-#18 AWG (1.0 mm), 16/30 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC

32-#20 AWG (0.8 mm), 10/30 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC

Bend Radius (I.D.) 1.50 in. min. (38.1 mm)


Cable Jacket Jacket color: black, 0.040 in wall min, flexible PVC

Wire Strip Length 0.32 in. (8 mm)

Wire Marking See the wire color coding table (next page)

Wire Rating 300 V, 105° C UL rated 2517, CSA Type AWM 1/2 FT1

Cable Rating 300 V, 105° C rated

Shielding Aluminum/polyester tape (aluminum side out) attached at connector body (360°).

#22 AWG, 7/30 drain wire.Shield resistance 16.55 Ohms/Mft nominal

Agency Approval UL-758; AWM style 2517 VW-1 and CSA C22:210.2; AWM I/II A/B FT1

860 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Cable Lengths The following table shows the cable lengths for the CableFast system.

Inner Wire Color Codes

The following table provides the wire color codes for standard power and high power cables.

Cable Lengths Terminated Pigtail

Standard Power High Power High Power

3 ft. (0.91 m) X X

6 ft. (1.82 m) X X X

9 ft. (2.73 m) X X

12 ft. (3.64 m) X X

15 ft. (4.6 m) X

Wire/ Pin #

AWG for Standard

Power Cable

AWG for High Power

Cable

Color Wire/ Pin #

AWG for Standard

Power Cable

AWG for High Power

Cable

Color

1 26 20 Black 21 26 20 White/Blue

2 26 20 Brown 22 26 20 White/Violet

3 26 20 Red 23 26 20 White/Gray

4 26 20 Orange 24 26 20 White/Black/ Brown

5 26 20 Yellow 25 26 20 White/Black/ Red

6 26 20 Green 26 26 20 White/Black/ Orange

7 26 20 Blue 27 26 20 White/Black/ Yellow

8 26 20 Violet 28 26 20 White/Black/ Green

9 20 18 Black 29 20 18 Yellow

10 20 18 Brown 30 20 18 Green

11 26 20 Gray 31 26 20 White/Black/ Blue

12 26 20 White 32 26 20 White/Black/ Violet

13 26 20 White/ Black 33 26 20 White/Black/ Gray

14 26 20 White/ Brown 34 26 20 White/Brown/ Red

15 26 20 White/ Red 35 26 20 White/Brown/ Orange

16 26 20 White/ Orange 36 26 20 White/Brown/ Yellow

17 26 20 White/Yellow 37 26 20 White/Brown/ Green

18 26 20 White/ Green 38 26 20 White/Brown/ Blue

19 20 18 Red 39 20 18 Blue

20 20 18 Orange 40 20 18 Violet

35013379 02 October 2007 861


CableFast Cabling

Cable Selections (XTS)

The following table shows the 140XTS0xx terminated cables.

I/O Connector for Quantum

The following figure shows the I/O Connector for the Quantum system.

XCA102xx Pigtail The following table shows the 140XCA102xx Pigtail cable description.

Part Number Cable Type Cable Description

Standard Power

High Power

140XTS00203 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 3 ft. (0.9 m) and "D" sub connector 140XTS01203 X




See cable lengthsin the above table.

Quantum I/OConnector

50-pin “D”Connector

Part NumberCable Type

Cable DescriptionStandard Power

High Power

140XCA10206 X CableFast system cable, 6 ft (1.8 m), with "D" sub connector and pigtails

140XCA10215 X CableFast system cable, 15 ft (4.6 m), with "D" sub connector and pigtails

862 35013379 02 October 2007


CableFast Cabling

Pigtail Leads The following figure shows the color coded pigtail leads.

XTS102xx Pigtail The following table shows the 140XTS102xx Pigtail cables.

I/O Connector for Pigtail Leads

The following figure shows the I/O connector for pigtail leads.

40 Color CodedPigtail Leads

50-pin “D”Connector


Part Number Cable Type Cable Description

Standard Power High Power

140XTS10206 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 6 ft. (1.8 m), and pigtail cable

140 XTS10215 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 15 ft. (4.6 m), and pigtail cable

40 Color CodedPigtail Leads

Quantum I/OConnector


35013379 02 October 2007 863


CableFast Cabling

CableFast Accessories

Overview The following information pertains to the CableFast accessories.

Accessories The following table shows the part numbers and descriptions for CableFast Accessories.

Terminal Block Common Strip

The following figure shows the terminal block common strip.

Jumper, Fuse Replacement

Fuse replacement information is given in the following table.

The following figure shows a jumper.

Part Number Description Quantity

140CFU40000 Fuse Kit, Wickmann 4 A 10

140CFU08000 Fuse Kit, Wickmann 0.8 A 10

140CFU00600 Fuse Kit, Wickmann 0.063 A 10

140CFX00110 Terminal Block Common Strip, 10 Position (see below)

10

Part Number Description Quantity

140 CFX 002 10 Jumper, Fuse Replacement (see below) 10

Note: The jumper is used instead of fuses as a disconnect device.

864 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


F
Error Stopped Codes
Error Stopped Codes

Overview The following is a list of error stopped codes and their definitions.

Error Stopped Codes

The following is a list of error stopped codes for the Quantum system.

Stop Bit Code (hex) Description

7FFF PLC unhealthy

8000 PLC stopped

4000 Bad I/O map

2000 PLC unconfigured

1000 Bad Modbus port intervention

0800 Bad segment scheduler

0400 Start-of-network (SON) did not start a segment

0200 Bad power-down checksum

0100 No end of logic detected

0080 Watchdog timer has expired

0040 Real time clock has failed

0020 Bad coil used table

0010 RIO option has failed

0008 Illegal node type found

0004 User logic checksum error

0002 Discrete disable table error

0001 Bad configuration

865

arr-thorp.com

Error Stpd. Codes

Definitions for Error Stopped Codes

The following are definitions for Error Stopped Codes.

PLC unhealthy: This condition indicates that the CPU has failed one or more of its health diagnostics. In all probability the CPU will have to be replaced. PLC stopped: By itself, an 8000 hex is not an error but a CPU state. If, for example, a user issues a CPU stop command, the status register would indicate "8000" hex. An error condition exists when "8000" is anded with one or more of the previously defined errors (bits 0-14). An example would be an error code of "8100"; this suggests a PLC stopped with No End of Logic Node detected.Bad I/O map: This error will occur if the user declares more than one I/O drop in his configuration but does not have an RIO Head installed. This error may also occur if a drop has been configured in such a way so as to exceed the maximum number of inputs/outputs allowable per drop.PLC unconfigured: The user should expect this condition if he is trying to log into the CPU for the first time. This error indicates that the CPU has not been configured. The user should write a configuration offline and transfer it to the CPU prior to attempting to login to the CPU. If this error appears while seeking to coomunicate to a previously running CPU, this would suggest a corrupted state memory in the CPU. The usr should clear memory and attempt to reload the user logic program. Bad modbus port intervention: This error will most likely appear in conjunction with another error. The CPU would in all likelihood be stopped when this error occurs. This error may also appear upon the user’s attempt to clear the system stop state. The user should try to clear user logic and reload.Bad segment scheduler: This error indicates improper programming of the segment scheduler.Start-of-network (SON) did not start a segment: This error is most often caused by improper programming. It can also be caused by a corrupted program and can be detected by issuing a start command to the CPU.Bad power-down checksum: This error indicates that continuous run time ram diagnostic has failed. Reload the user logic program. If this error persists, replace the CPU.No end of logic detected: This error is usually caused by an incomplete or unsuccessful load of the program. Try another reload.Watchdog timer has expired: This error indicates that the CPU has taken too much time to complete its current scan. This error will sometimes occur with ambitious DX programming techniques. The user may want to increase the Watchdog Timer value. This error may also point to a failure of the CPU.Real time clock has failed: Replace the CPU.

866 35013379 02 October 2007


Error Stpd. Codes

Bad coil used table: This error means that the coil used table does not match user logic. Possible causes include:1. This error is often seen when a program is altered offline by non-Modsoft users and then reloaded. It may be neccesary to update the coil used table manually in order to recover from this error.2. The battery coil is not configured or configured in correctly. This error is not uncommon if the program is being relocated from another PLC.3. There may be a hardware failure of the CPU.RIO option has failed: The RIO option board (140CRP93x00) has been determined to be unhealthy. Replace the board.Illegal node type found: This error is usually seen when downloading a program to the CPU. Some of the things a user should look for include:1. The user is loading/relocating logic from a CPU that supported a loadable function block to another CPU that hasn't been configured for the same function block. (ie HSBY or XMIT) 2. A constant or reference is outside the range of that particular CPU's instruction set. This may occur when relocating logic from a 24 bit CPU to a 16 bit CPU. This error is generally not seen as a hardware failure and the user is advised to examine his user logic for incompatibility with the target PLC. RIO Option Has Failed.User logic checksum error: The calculated user logic checksum does not agree with the stored checksum. It can be caused by an illegal change in memory. The user should try to reload his user logic program. If the error persists, replace the CPU.Discrete disable table error: This error occurs when the user attempts to run the CPU in Optimize mode with disabled coils in user logic.Bad configuration: The most probable cause would be that the memory has been modified through the MODBUS/MODBUS PLUS ports. If this error occurs during a program download, check configuration data for values greater than the CPU's specified addressable range. This error can also appear if the CPU's memory is defective.

35013379 02 October 2007 867


Error Stpd. Codes

868 35013379 02 October 2007


35013379 02 October 2007


G
Agency Approvals
Agency Approvals

Overview The following tables provide the agency approvals and also include the conformal coating availability of the indicated Quantum products.

Power Supplies The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the power supplies of the indicated Quantum products.

Quantum Part Numbers

Conformally Coated Version

Availabilty

Agency Approval Status

UL 508 CSA 22.2-142 C-UL Factory Mutual Class I, Div 2

CE CSA Class I, Div 2

140CPS11100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS11400 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS11410 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS11420 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS12400 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS12420 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS21100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS21400 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS22400 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS41400 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS42400 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS51100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPS52400 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

869

arr-thorp.com

Agency Approvals

CPUs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the CPUs of the indicated Quantum products.

DIO Drops The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the DIO drops of the indicated Quantum products.



Availabilty




140CPU11302 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU11303 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU21304 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU42402 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU43412 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU43412A √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU53414 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU53414A √ √ √ √ √ √

140CPU53414B √ √ √ √ √ √


Conformally Coated Version Availabilty




140CRA21110 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CRA21210 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CRA21120 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CRA21220 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

870 35013379 02 October 2007


Agency Approvals

RIO Heads and Drops

The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the RIO Heads and Drops of the indicated Quantum products.

Field Bus Modules

The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Field Bus modules of the indicated Quantum products.



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142

C-UL Factory Mutual Class I, Div 2


140CRA93100 √ √ √ √ √ √

140CRA93200 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CRP93100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CRP93200 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140CRA93101 √ √






140CRP81100 √

140EIA92100 √

140NOA61100 √ √ √ √ √

140NOA61110 √ √ √ √ √

140NOL91100 √ √ √

140NOL91110 √ √ √

140NOL91120 √ √ √

35013379 02 October 2007 871


Agency Approvals

NOEs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the NOEs of the indicated Quantum products.

NOMs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the NOMs of the indicated Quantum products.

Hot Standby The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Hot Standby of the indicated Quantum products.






140NOE21100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE25100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE31100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE35100 √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE51100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE55100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE77100 √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE77101 √ √ √ √

140NOE77110 √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOE77111 √ √ √ √



Availabilty




140NOM21100 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOM21200 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140NOM25200 √ √ √ √ √ √ √



Availabilty




140CHS11000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

872 35013379 02 October 2007


Agency Approvals

Counters The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Counters of the indicated Quantum products

ASCII Interface The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the ASCII Interface of the indicated Quantum products

High Speed Interrupts

The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the High Speed Interrupt of the indicated Quantum products

Single Axis Motion

The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Single Axis Motion of the indicated Quantum products



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142



140EHC10500 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140EHC20200 √ √ √ √ √ √ √



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142



140ESI06210 √ √ √ √ √ √ √



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142



140HLI34000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142



140MSB10100 √ √ √ √ √ √

140MSC10100 √ √ √ √ √ √

35013379 02 October 2007 873


Agency Approvals

Simulators The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Simulators of the indicated Quantum products


The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the intrinsically safe I/O modules of the indicated Quantum products.

Battery Module The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Battery module of the indicated Quantum products.Note: These modules should not be installed in a Class 1, Division 1 environment. They can monitor/contorl intrinsically ssafe apparatus located in hazardous areas without the use of additional barriers. See Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules, p. 417 for installation guidelines.



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142



140XSM002 √ √ √ √

140XSM010 √ √ √ √



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142



140AII33000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140AII33010 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140AIO33000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DII33000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DIO33000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √



Availabilty


UL 508 CSA 22.2-142



140XCP90000 √ √ √ √ √ √

874 35013379 02 October 2007


Agency Approvals

I/O The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the I/O of the indicated Quantum products



Availabilty




140ACI03000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140ACI04000 √ √ √ √ √ √

140ACO02000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140ACO13000 √ √ √ √ √ √

140AMM09000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140ARI03010 √ √ √ √ √ √

140ATI03000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140AVI03000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140AVO02000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI34000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI35300 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI44000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI45300 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI54000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI54300 √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI55300 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI74000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAI75300 √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAM59000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAO84000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAO84010 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAO84210 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAO84220 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DAO85300 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDI15310 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDI35300 √ √ √ √ √

140DDI35310 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDI36400 √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDI67300 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDI84100 √ √ √ √ √

35013379 02 October 2007 875


Agency Approvals

Backplanes The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the I/O of the indicated Quantum products

140DDI85300 √ √ √ √ √

140DDM39000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDM69000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDO15310 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDO35300 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDO35301 √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDO35310 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDO36400 √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDO84300 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DDO88500 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DRA84000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DRC83000 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

140DSI35300 √ √ √ √ √ √

140DVO85300 √ √ √ √ √ √



Availabilty






Availabilty




140XBP00200 √ √ √ √ √ √

140XBP00300 √ √ √ √ √ √

140XBP00400 √ √ √ √ √ √

140XBP00600 √ √ √ √ √ √

140XBP01000 √ √ √ √ √ √

140XBP01600 √ √ √ √ √ √

876 35013379 02 October 2007


Agency Approvals

Backplane Expander

The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the backplane expander of the indicated Quantum products

Maritime Approvals

The following talbe provides maritime approvals for selected group of modules. Check www.modicon.com for details.



Availabilty




140XBE10000 √ √ √ √ √ √

ABS/U.S.A.

DNV Norway GL Germany LR United Kingdom

RINAItaly

RRS Russia

√ √ √ √ √ √

35013379 02 October 2007 877


Agency Approvals

878 35013379 02 October 2007


CBAIndex

Numerics140 CFA 040 00

application notes, 805description, 805dimensions, 806terminal block illustration, 805wiring diagram, 807

140 CFB 032 00application notes, 808description, 808terminal block illustration, 808wiring for input modules, 810

140 CFC 032 00wiring diagram for 140 DDI 353 00, 814

140 CFC 032 00application notes, 813description, 812dimensions, 813terminal block illustration, 812wiring diagram for 140 DAI 353 00, 814wiring diagram for 140 DAI 453 00, 814wiring diagram for 140 DAI 553 00, 814wiring diagram for 140 DDI 153 10, 815wiring diagram for 140 DDI 853 00, 814wiring diagram for 140 DDO 153 10, 816wiring for 140 DDO 353 0X, 818wiring for output module, 811

35013379 02 October 2007

This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., I

140 CFD 032 00application notes, 820description, 820dimensions, 820terminal block illustration, 820wiring diagram, 821

140 CFE 032 00dimensions, 822

140 CFE 032 00application notes, 822description, 822terminal block illustration, 822wiring diagram, 823

140 CFG 016 00application notes, 824description, 824dimensions, 824terminal block illustration, 824wiring diagram (grouped AC output mode), 827wiring diagram (grouped DC output mode), 828wiring diagram (isolated AC input mode), 825wiring diagram (isolated output mode), 826

879

nc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.com

Index

140 CFH 008 00application notes, 829description, 829dimensions, 830terminal block illustration, 829wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 835wiring diagram (instrument grounding), 833wiring diagram (source grounding), 831

AACI03000

configuration, 507description, 524I/O map status byte, 509register assignment, 508specifications, 524wiring diagram, 526

ACI04000description, 528I/O map status byte, 511module zoom selections, 511register assignment, 510specifications, 529wiring diagram, 530

ACO02000configuration, 546description, 550I/O map status byte, 546module zoom selections, 547register assignments, 546specifications, 550voltmeter monitor specifications, 551wiring diagram, 552

ACO13000configuration, 547description, 554I/O map status byte, 548module zoom selections, 548register assignments, 547specifications, 554wiring diagram, 556

880

This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc

Agency approvalsASCII interface, 873backplane expander, 877backplanes, 876battery module, 874counters, 873CPUs, 870DIO drops, 870field bus modules, 871high speed interrupts, 873Hot Standby, 872I/O, 875intrinsically safe modules, 874NOEs, 872NOMs, 872power supplies, 869RIO heads and drops, 871simulators, 874single axis motion, 873

AII33000configuration, 423description, 431field wiring, 434I/O map register assignment, 423I/O map status byte, 426module zoom selections, 426register assignment, 424RTD/resistance module specifications, 432terminal color and keying assignment, 435thermocouple/millivolt map register assignment, 425Thermocouple/Millivolt module specification, 433wiring diagram (Cenelec/RTD), 436wiring diagram (Cenelec/TC), 437wiring diagram (CSA/RTD), 438wiring diagram (CSA/TC), 439wiring diagram (FM/RTD), 440wiring diagram (FM/TC), 442wiring diagram (UL/RTD), 444wiring diagram (UL/TC), 445

35013379 02 October 2007

. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.com

Index

AII33010configuration, 427description, 446field wiring, 447fixed wiring, 447map status byte (inputs), 428module zoom selections, 428register assignment, 428specifications, 446terminal strip color and keying assignment, 447wiring diagram (Cenelec), 448wiring diagram (CSA), 449wiring diagram (FM), 450wiring diagram (UL), 451

AIO33000configuration, 429description, 452field wiring, 454fixed wiring system, 454I/O map status byte, 429module zoom selections, 430register assignments, 429specifications, 453terminal strip color and keying assignment, 454wiring diagram (Cenelec), 458wiring diagram (CSA), 455wiring diagram (FM), 456wiring diagram (UL), 457

AMM090003x registers, 5634x registers, 565common specifications, 571configuration, 563description, 568I/O map status byte, 566input specifications, 569linear measuring ranges, 565module zoom selections, 566output specifications, 570register assignments, 563status warning, 564topology specifications, 568wiring diagram, 572

35013379 02 October 2007


analog input modulesconfiguration, 507

analog input/output module AMM09000, 568analog output modules

configuration, 546analog simulator module XSM01000, 478ARI03010

configuration, 511description, 532I/O map status byte, 513module zoom selections, 513register assignment, 512specifications, 532wiring diagram, 534

ASCII interface module ESI06210, 387AS-i master module EAI92100, 236ATI03000

configuration, 514description, 536I/O map status byte, 516measurement ranges, 517module zoom selections, 519register assignment, 515specifications, 536wiring diagram, 538

AVI03000configuration, 520description, 540I/O map status byte, 522linear measuring ranges, 522, 541module zoom selections, 523register assignment, 520specifications, 540wiring diagram, 543

AVO02000configuration, 548description, 558module zoom selections, 549register assignments, 549specifications, 558wiring diagram, 561

Bbackplane expander XBE10000, 408

881


Index

backplanesfour position, 761mounting hardware specifications, 758part numbers, 758selecting, 758six position, 762sixteen position, 764ten position, 763three position, 760two positions, 759

battery module XCP90000, 485bus configuration, 302

CCableFast

cable lengths, 861cable selections (XTS), 862cable specifications, 860description, 798I/O connector for Quantum, 862I/O connector illustration, 863inner wire color codes, 861quantum modules and backplane illustration, 798specifications, 799terminal block descriptions, 803terminal block features, 804terminal block selection, 800terminal block stacking convention, 804XCA102xx pigtail, 862XTS102xx pigtail, 863

CableFast accessoriesjumper, fuse replacement, 864part numbers, 864terminal block common strip, 864

cablespart numbers, 743

CE closed system installationAC & DC powered systems, 795AC/DC installation illustration, 795line filter connections, 796protective cover, 796

CFB03200terminal block dimensions, 809

882


CFI00800application notes, 837description, 837dimensions, 837wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 842wiring diagram (instrument grounding), 840wiring diagram (source grounding), 838

CFJ00400application notes, 844description, 844dimensions, 845terminal block illustration, 844wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 850wiring diagram (instrument grounding), 848wiring diagram (source grounding), 846

CFK00400application notes, 852description, 852dimensions, 853terminal block illustration, 852wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 858wiring diagram (instrument grounding), 856wiring diagram (source grounding), 854

CHS11000A/B designation slide switch, 416blinking Com Act LED error codes, 415description, 413illustration, 413keyswitch and update button, 415LED descriptions, 414LED indicators, 414specifications, 414

communication interface modulesEthernet TCP/IP module, 23InterBus interface modules, 24LonWorks modules, 24Modbus Plus on Fiber, 23SY/MAX-Ethernet, 23twisted-pair wiring, 23types, 22

connector types, for fiber optic links, 307

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

CPS11100description, 72illustration, 72LED description, 74LED indicator, 74wiring diagram, 74

CPS11100 (PV01 or greater)description, 75illustration, 75LED description, 77LED indicator, 77wiring diagram, 77

CPS11400description, 78illustration, 78LED description, 80LED indicators, 80specifications, 79wiring diagram, 80

CPS11410description, 81illustration, 81LED description, 83LED indicator, 83specifications, 82wiring diagram, 83



35013379 02 October 2007






CPS41400description, 102illustration, 102LED description, 103LED indicator, 103operating curve and timing chart, 104specifications, 103wiring diagram, 104

CPS42400illustration, 105LED description, 106LED indicator, 106operating curve and timing chart, 107specifications, 106wiring diagram, 107

883


Index


CPS52400description, 111illustration, 111LED description, 113LED indicators, 113specifications, 112wiring diagram, 113

CPUdescription, 20hardware specifications, 62part numbers, 62

CPU11302ASCII communication port parameters, 123description, 128front panel switches, 123illustration, 117LED descriptions, 120LED error codes, 121LED indicators, 120Modbus connector pinouts, 126Modbus ports pinout connections, 126Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 127rear panel rotary switches, 125RTU communication port parameters, 123specifications, 118SW1 and SW2 address settings, 125SW1 and SW2 switches, 125valid communication port parameters, 124

CPU11303ASCII communication

884


port parameters, 134illustration, 128LED descriptions, 131LED error codes, 132LED indicators, 131Modbus connector pinouts, 137Modbus ports pinout connections, 137Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 138rear panel switches, 136RTU communication port parameters, 134specifications, 129SW1 and SW2 address settings, 136SW1 and SW2 switches, 136valid communication port parameters, 135

CPU21304ASCII communication port parameters, 145description, 139front panel switches, 145illustration, 139LED descriptions, 142LED error codes, 143LED indicators, 142Modbus connector pinouts, 148Modbus ports pinout connections, 148Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 149rear panel switches, 147RTU communication port parameters, 145specifications, 140SW1 and SW2 address settings, 147SW1 and SW2 switches, 147valid communication port parameters, 145

CPU42402ASCII communication

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

port parameters, 156description, 150front panel switches, 156illustration, 150LED descriptions, 153LED error codes, 154LED indicators, 153Modbus connector pinouts, 159Modbus ports pinout connections, 159Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 160rear panel switches, 158RTU communication port parameters, 156specifications, 151SW1 and SW2 address settings, 158SW1 and SW2 switches, 158valid communication port parameters, 157

CPU43412, 167ASCII comm port parameters, 167description, 161key switch, 170LED description, 164LED error codes, 165LED indicators, 164Modbus connector pinouts, 171Modbus ports pinout connections, 172Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 173rear panel rotary switches, 169RTU comm port parameters, 167specifications, 162SW1 and SW2 address settings, 169SW1 and SW2 switches, 169valid comm port parameters, 168

CPU43412AASCII communication

35013379 02 October 2007


port parameters, 181description, 174front panel slide switch, 181key switch, 183LED descriptions, 177LED error codes, 178LED indicators, 177Modbus connector pinouts, 186Modbus pinout connections for portable computers, 187Modbus ports pinout connections, 186rear panel switches, 184RTU communication port parameters, 181specifications, 175SW1 and SW2 address settings, 184valid communication port parameters, 182

CPU53414ASCII communicaton port parameters, 194CPU front panel switches, 194description, 188key switch, 195LED descriptions, 191LED error codes, 192LED indicators, 191Modbus ports pinout connections, 198Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 199rear panel switches, 197RTU communication port parameters, 194specifications, 189SW1 and SW2 address settings, 197SW1 and SW2 switches, 197valid communication port parameters, 195

CPU53414AASCII communication

885


Index

port parameters, 207description, 200front panel slide switch, 207illustration, 200key switch, 209LED descriptions, 203LED error codes, 204LED indicators, 203Modbus connector pinouts, 211Modbus ports pinout connections, 212Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 213rear panel switches, 211RTU communication port parameters, 207specifications, 201SW1 and SW2 address settings, 211valid communication port parameters, 208

CPU53414BASCII communication port parameters, 221description, 214front panel slide switch, 221illustration, 214key switch, 223LED descriptions, 217LED error codes, 218LED indicators, 217Modbus connector pinouts, 225Modbus ports pinout connections, 226Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 227rear panel switches, 225RTU communication port parameters, 221specifications, 215SW1 and SW2 address settings, 225valid communication port parameters, 222

886


CRA21X10description, 258illustration, 258LED descriptions, 261LED indicators, 261rear panel switches, 262specifications, 259wiring diagram, 260, 265

CRA21X20description, 263illustration, 263LED descriptions, 266LED indicators, 266rear panel switches, 267specifications, 264

CRA93200illustration, 275

CRA93X00address settings, 279description, 275error codes, 278LED descriptions, 277LED indicators, 277rear panel switches, 279specifications, 276SW1 and SW2 address settings, 279

CRP81100description, 230illustration, 231LED descriptions, 232LED status, 232RS-232C port, 233RS-485 port, 233specifications, 235

CRP93X00description, 270error codes, 273LED descriptions, 272LED indicators, 272specifications, 271

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

DDAI34000

description, 579specifications, 579wiring diagram, 581

DAI35300description, 582specifications, 582wiring diagram, 584








DAM59000common specifications, 723description, 720fuse locations, 724input specifications, 721output specifications, 722topology specifications, 720wiring diagram, 725

35013379 02 October 2007


DAO84000description, 640specifications, 640wiring diagram, 642

DAO84010description, 644specifications, 644wiring diagram, 647, 652

DAO84210description, 649specifications, 649

DAO84220description, 654fuse locations, 656specifications, 654wiring diagram, 657

DAO85300description, 659fuse locations, 661specifications, 659wiring diagram, 662

DD035301fuse locations, 674

DD036400recommended cables, 684

DDI15310description, 608logic states, 609specifications, 608wiring diagram, 610

DDI35300description, 611specifications, 611wiring diagram, 612


DDI36400color codes for input groups, 618compatible connection sub-bases, 619description, 616front view illustration, 617LEDs, 618recommended cables, 618specifications, 616

887


Index

DDI67300description, 620minimum version levels, 623specifications, 621wiring diagram, 624



DDM39000common specifications, 729description, 727fuse locations, 730input specifications, 727output specifications, 728topology, 727wiring diagram, 732

DDM69000common specifications, 736description, 734I/O map register (outputs), 717I/O map status byte (outputs), 718input specifications, 734module zoom selections (inputs), 717module zoom selections (outputs), 718output specifications, 735register assignments, 716topology, 734version levels, 737wiring diagram, 738

DDO15310description, 664fuse locations, 666specifications, 665wiring diagram, 667


888


DDO35301description, 673specifications, 673wiring diagram, 675

DDO35310description, 676fuse locations, 678specificatons, 676wiring diagram, 679

DDO36400color codes for input groups, 684compatible output adapter sub-bases, 685description, 681front view illustration, 683selecting point status indicator LEDs, 684specifications, 681



DII33000description, 462field wiring, 463specifications, 462terminal strip color and keying assignment, 463wiring diagram (Cenelec), 464wiring diagram (CSA), 465wiring diagram (FM), 466wiring diagram (UL), 467

DIO configurationdescription, 39dual cable illustration, 40part numbers, 41single cable illustration, 39

DIO modules CRA21X10 or CRA21X20, 258

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

DIO33000description, 468specifications, 468terminal strip color and keying assignment, 469wiring diagram (Cenelec), 470wiring diagram (CSA), 471wiring diagram (FM), 472wiring diagram (UL), 473

direct CPU drivernetwork interface techniques, 47

discrete I/O true highillustration, 503

discrete I/O true lowillustration, 503

discrete input (16-point) modulesdescription, 575module zoom selections, 575register assignments, 575

discrete input (24-point) modulesdescription, 575I/O map register assignment, 575module zoom selections, 576

discrete input (32-point) modulesdescription, 576I/O map register assignment, 577module zoom selections, 577

discrete input (8-point) modulemodule zoom selections, 460register assignments, 460

discrete input (96-point) modulesdescription, 577module zoom selections, 578register assignments, 578

discrete input modulesdescription, 575

discrete input/output (16/8 point) modulesI/O map assignments (outputs), 719module zoom selections (inputs), 719module zoom selections (outputs), 719register assignments, 718

discrete input/output modulesconfiguration, 716

discrete output (12-point) moduledescription, 634register assignments, 634

35013379 02 October 2007


discrete output (16-point) modulesdescription, 635module zoom selections, 636register assignments, 635

discrete output (32-point) modulesdescription, 636module zoom selections, 637register assignments, 637

discrete output (8-point) modulesdescription, 461, 633I/O map register assignment, 461, 633module zoom selections, 461, 633module zoom selections (outputs), 634

discrete output (96-point) module, 638module zoom selections, 639register assingment, 638

discrete simulator module XSM00200, 476discrete verified output module DVO85300, 706distributed I/O

Quantum configuations, 32DRA84000

description, 693specifications, 693wiring diagram, 695

DRC83000description, 696specifications, 696wiring diagram, 698

DSI35300description, 712specifications, 713wiring diagram, 714

dual cable configurationRIO configuration, 36RIO in a Hot Standby configuration, 38

DVO85300configuration, 701description, 706Modsoft zoom screen selections, 702register assignments, 701specifications, 706wiring diagram, 709

889


Index

EEHC10500

description, 336illustration, 336LED descriptions, 339LED indicators, 339specifications, 337wiring diagram, 340

EHC202003x register content, 356Command 1, 343Command 1 and Command 2 response formats, 351Command 2, 344Command 3, 344Command 3 read input counter, 351Command 3 response format, 352Command 4, 344Command 4 output register format, 352Command 4 response format, 353configuration, 342COUNT DOWN example, 358counting pulses, 380description, 372fuse location, 375I/O map register assignment, 342I/O map status byte, 353illustration, 372LED descriptions, 376load values, 355, 359module configuration, 354, 358module functions, 379module zoom selections, 370one 32 bit counter, 348operations, 343RATE SAMPLE example, 358rate sample mode, 350rate sample mode caution, 360rate sampling, 380read input counter command, 356read rate sample, 359reset latched outputs, 356response for configuration command, 355response to read rate sample

890


command, 360signal descriptions, 384specifications, 373timing diagrams, 378timing parameters, 378two 16 bit counters, 347two 32 bit counters, 349user logic, 357using I/O mapped registers, 354wiring diagram, 385wiring diagram 1, 362wiring diagram 2, 364wiring diagram 3, 366wiring diagram 4, 368

EIA92100AS-i cable connection illustration, 241description, 236illustration, 237LED bus mode, 239LED descriptions, 238LED diagnostics, 240LED display, 238LED slave I/O mode, 239specifications, 241

error stopped codesdefinitions, 866list, 865

ESI06210description, 387front panel connectors and switches, 390front panel push button, 392illustration, 387LED blinking sequence, 389LED descriptions, 389LED indicators, 389RS-232 serial port setup, 392RS-232C serial port, 391specifications, 388Status LED crash codes, 390

Ethernet MMS modules NOE5X100, 318Ethernet SY/MAX modules NOE3X100, 315Ethernet TCP/IP module NOE2X100, 312

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

Ffiber optic cable

cable types, 308connecting, 301ports, 300repairing, 310termination kits, 307tools, 308

fiber optic networkadding nodes, 309bus configuration, 302calculating number of modules, 310point-to-point configuration, 302self healing ring configuration, 305tree configuration, 304

fusesdescription, 755

Hhardware specifications

ASCII interface module, 64counter modules, 64CPU, 62description, 61DIO heads/drops, 63Ethernet modules, 63field bus modules, 62high speed interrupt module, 64Hot Standby module, 63I/O modules (analog out), 68I/O modules (discrete in), 65I/O modules (discrete in/out), 67I/O modules (discrete out), 66intrinsic safe analog modules, 69intrinsic safe discrete modules, 69miscellaneous modules, 69NOM modules, 63power supplies for local and RIO drops, 61RIO heads/drops, 62single axis motion modules, 64

high speed counter (5 channel) EHC10500, 336high speed counter module (2 channel)

35013379 02 October 2007


EHC20200, 372high speed interrupt modules HLI34000, 393HLI34000

description, 393illustration, 393LED descriptions, 395specifications, 394wiring diagram, 396

Hot Standby configurationdescription, 36

Hot Standby module CHS11000, 413

II/O map interface

network interface techniques, 48I/O map status byte

description, 504illustration, 504table/module configuration, 505

I/O modulesdescription, 21, 491discrete I/O true high/true low circuit, 503illustration, 491LED descriptions, 492LED descriptions for 16 point modules, 493LED descriptions for 24 point input modules, 494LED descriptions for 32 point I/O modules, 494LED descriptions for bi-directional modules, 495LED descriptions for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication, 497LED indicators for 16 point modules, 493LED indicators for 24 point input modules, 494LED indicators for 32 point I/O modules, 494LED indicators for bi-directional modules, 495LED indicators for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication, 497primary keys, 499secondary keying and backplane

891


Index

position codes, 501terminal strip key codes, 499terminal strip/module keying, 498

intelligent/special purpose I/O modulesdescription, 25

InterBus communication module NOA6XXXX, 242InterBus interface modules

communication interface modules, 24Intrinsically safe analog input module AII33000, 431intrinsically safe analog output module AIO33000, 452intrinsically safe current input module AII33010, 446intrinsically safe discrete input module DII33000, 462intrinsically safe discrete output module DIO33000, 468intrinsically safe modules

description, 418identification and labeling, 419illustration, 420installation, 418intrinsic safety, 418safe barriers, 418safe wiring practices, 419wiring and grounding, 419wiring diagram, 421

Llocal I/O

Quantum configurations, 32local I/O configuration

description, 34illustration, 34

LonWorks modulescommunication interface modules, 24

LonWorks NOL911X0, 250

892


Mmiscellaneous components

battery, 748cable connector orientation, 744cables, 743coding kit, 744CPU battery, 748description, 743empty module, 744empty module with door cover, 745field wiring terminal strip, 746I/O conversion connector, 750IP 20 compliant field wiring terminal strips, 747Modbus Plus ruggedized tap, 749Modbus Plus tap, 748remote I/O BNC connector, 751remote I/O splitter, 751remote I/O tap, 750RG-11 remote I/O F connector, 751RG-6 remote I/O F connector, 751terminal strip jumper kit, 745

MMS interfacenetwork modules, 23

Modbus and Modbus Plus communications features, 50Modbus communications

description, 50Modbus connector

25-pin, 4059-pin, 405

Modbus connector pinouts25-point connections, 198nine-pin connections, 198

MODBUS I/O Scannerfunctionality, 325

Modbus Plus communicationsdescription, 50

Modbus Plus network option modules NOM21X00, 281Modbus Plus on Fiber NOM25200, 291module mounting procedure

description, 770I/O terminal strip mounting

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

procedure, 773illustration, 771installing jumper clips, 772removing Quantum module door, 774

mounting brackets125 mm, 76620 mm, 767description, 765part numbers, 765

MSB10100 MSX10100, 398MSC10100 MSX10100, 398MSX motion modules MSX10100, 398MSX10100

analog input (electrical specifications), 402analog input (operational specifications), 400analog output (electrical specifications), 402analog output (operational specifications), 401application program (operational specifications), 399communications (operational specifications), 399compatibility (operational specifications), 401description, 398DIP switch settings, 407discrete inputs (operational specifications), 400discrete inputs and high speed input (electrical specifications), 402discrete output (electrical specifications), 402discrete outputs (operational specifications), 400drive interface (electrical specifications), 403electrical specifications, 402encoder feedback interface (electrical specifications), 403front panel indicators, 404high speed input (operational

35013379 02 October 2007


specifications), 400illustration, 398incremental encoder feedback, 401LED descriptions, 404Modbus connectors, 405motor temperature input (electrical specifications), 403operational specifications, 399power requirements (electrical specifications), 403rear panel switches, 407resolver feedback (fully configured version), 401resolver interface (electrical specifications), 402servo, 399servo connector, 405servo connector signals, 406

Nnetwork interface techniques

CPU interface support, 47description, 47direct CPU driver, 47I/O map interface, 48option module interface, 47

network modulesMMS interface, 23

network status, 307NOA61110

seven segment display, 246NOA611X0

LED descriptions, 244LED indicators, 244required loadables, 248reset push button, 248RS-232C port, 248

NOA62200LED descriptions, 245LED indicators, 245

893


Index

NOA6XXXXcomparison of features, 249description, 242front panel conncections, 246illustration, 242InterBus port, 247specifications, 243

NOE2X100description, 312illustration, 312installation, 313installation example, 314LED descriptions, 313LED indicators, 313specifications, 312

NOE3X100description, 315illustration, 315LED descriptions, 317specifications, 316SY/MAX addressing, 317

NOE5X100description, 318illustration, 318LED descriptions, 320LED indicators, 320specifications, 319

NOE77100peer cop based I/O scanner, 326

NOE771x0BOOTP server, 330

NOE771x1Enhanced Web Diagnostics, 333

894


NOE771xxBandwith Monitoring, 332DHCP server, 331enhanced MODBUS I/O scanner, 326FTP server, 327Global Data, 331HTTP server, 329illustration, 321key features, 325LED descriptions, 323LED indicators, 323MODBUS I/O scanner, 325MODBUS/TCP server, 327Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules, 326run LED status, 324services, 332specifications, 322

NOL911X0auxiliary LonWorks communication port, 255description, 250front panel connectors, 254front panel push buttons, 253illustration, 250LED descriptions, 252LED error codes, 253LED indicator status, 252LED indicators, 252media types, 256primary LonWorks communication port, 254RS-232 configuration port, 254specifications, 251

NOM modulesModbus Plus on Fiber, 23twisted-pair wiring, 23

NOM21X00ASCII comm port parameters, 287description, 281front panel switches, 287LED descriptions, 283LED error codes, 284LED indicators, 283Modbus connector pinouts, 289Modbus ports pinout connections for

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

portable computers, 290rear panel switches, 286RTU comm port parameters, 287specifications, 282SW1 and SW2 address settings, 286valid comm port parameters, 288

NOM25200adding nodes, 309address settings, 297ASCII comm port parameters, 295bus configuration, 302cables, 308calculating modules in a fiber network, 310comm port parameters, 296connecting, 301, 309description, 291fiber optic cable ports, 300fiber optic configurations, 302front panel switches, 295hot standby systems example, 306illustration, 292LED descriptions, 293LED topology and descriptions, 293materials for fiber optic links, 307mixed fiber optic/copper network, 302Modbus connector pinouts, 298network status, 307optical star passive couplers, 307point-to-point configuration, 302rear panel switches, 297RJ45 cable parts, 299RJ45 connector, 299RTU comm port parameters, 295self healing ring configuration, 305specifications, 294termination kits, 307tree configuration, 304

Ooption module interface

network interface techniques, 47

35013379 02 October 2007


Ppart numbers

ASCII interface module, 64counter modules, 64CPU, 62DIO heads/drops, 63Ethernet modules, 63high speed interrupt module, 64Hot Standby module, 63I/O modules, 65NOM modules, 63power supplies, 61RIO heads/drops, 62single axis motion modules, 64

Peer CopMODBUS I/O Scannercharacteristics, 326

point-to-point configuration, 302power and grounding considerations

125 Vdc powered systems, 783AC powered systems, 776AC powered systems for CE compliance, 779CE compliance installation instructions for AC systems, 778CE compliance installation instructions for Vdc systems, 780DC powered systems, 777description, 776

power and grounding guidelineschassis grounding, 793Modbus Plus communication tap installation for CE compliance, 793other equipment grounding, 794power supply ground connection, 793systems with multiple power feeds, 794

power suppliescompatibility issues, 791description, 19, 786modes, 19redundant, 19

Profibus CRP81100, 230

895


Index

QQuantum Automation Series

block diagram, 18capabilities, 18

Quantum configurationsdescription, 32distributed I/O, 32local I/O, 32remote I/O, 32

Quantum editorsdescription, 28

Quantum network supportdescription, 44supported networks, 45

Quantum simulator modulesdescription, 26

Rredundant power supplies

description, 789register assignment

ACI03000, 508ACI04000, 510AII33000, 424AII33010, 428ARI03010, 512ATI03000, 515AVI03000, 520

remote I/OQuantum configurations, 32

RIO configurationdescription, 35dual cable illustration, 36Hot Standby, 36single cable illustration, 35

RIO drop modules CRA93X00, 275RIO head modules CRP93X00, 270RIO in a Hot Standby configuration

dual cable configuration illustration, 38single cable configuration illustration, 37

RIO modulescommunication interface modules, 23

RJ45 connector, 299

896


Sself healing ring configuration, 305signal descriptions

EHC20200, 384single cable configuration

RIO, 35RIO in a Hot Standby configuration, 37

spare partsdescription, 754

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

specificationsACI03000, 524ACI04000, 529ACO02000, 550ACO13000, 554AII33010, 446AIO33000, 453ARI030010, 532ATI03000, 536AVI03000, 540AVO02000, 558CableFast, 799CHS11000, 414CPS11100, 73CPS11100 (PV01 or greater), 76CPS11400, 79, 103CPS11410, 82CPS11420, 85CPS12400, 88CPS12420, 91CPS21100, 94CPS21400, 97CPS22400, 100CPS42400, 106CPS51100, 109CPS52400, 112CPU11302, 118CPU11303, 129CPU21304, 140CPU42402, 151CPU43412, 162CPU43412A, 175CPU53414, 189CPU53414A, 201CPU53414B, 215CRA21X10, 259CRA21X20, 264CRP81100, 235CRP93X00, 271DAI34000, 579DAI35300, 582DAI44000, 585DAI45300, 588DAI54000, 591DAI54300, 594DAI55300, 598

35013379 02 October 2007


DAI74000, 602DAI75300, 605DAO84000, 640DAO84010, 644DAO84210, 649DAO84220, 654DAO85300, 659DDI15310, 608DDI35300, 611DDI35310, 614DDI36400, 616DDI67300, 621DDI84110, 627DDI85300, 630DDM39000, 727DDM69000, 734DDO15310, 665DDO35300, 668DDO35301, 673DDO35310, 676DDO36400, 681DDO84300, 686DDO88500, 689DII33000, 462DIO33000, 468DRA84000, 693DRC83000, 696DSI35300, 713DVO85300, 706EHC10500, 337EHC20200, 373EIA92100, 241ESI06210, 388HLI34000, 394NOA6XXX0, 243NOE2X100, 312NOE3X100, 316NOE771xx, 322NOL911X0, 251NOM21X00, 282NOM25200, 294XCP90000, 486XSM01000, 480

standalone power suppliesmodels, 787

897


Index

summable power suppliesdescription, 788

system configurationslocal, RIO, and DIO, 32

system space requirementsdimensions, 768illustration, 769locations, 768minimum spacing, 768

system specificationsAC/DC power supplies, 56agency approvals, 58description, 55electrical, 55I/O modules (between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc), 56I/O modules (greater than 48 Vac or Vdc), 56I/O modules (less than 24 Vac or Vdc), 56mechanical, 55operating conditions, 57storage conditions, 57

TTelefast Input DDI36400, 616Telefast Output DDO36400, 681terminal strip/module keying

description, 498illustration, 499primary keying, 498secondary keying, 498

termination kits, 307tree configuration, 304

Vversion levels

DDM69000, 737

898


Wwiring diagram

140 CFA 040 00, 807140 CFB 032 00, 810140 CFD 032 00, 821140 CFG 016 00, 825, 826, 827, 828140 CFH 008 00, 831ACI03000, 526ACI04000, 530ACO02000, 552ACO13000, 556AII33000, 436AII33010, 448AIO33000, 455AMM09000, 572ARI03010, 534ATI03000, 538AVI03000, 543AVO02000, 561CFC03200, 814CFI00800, 838CFJ00400, 846CFK00400, 854, 856, 858CPS11100, 74CPS11100 (PV01 or greater), 77CPS11400, 80CPS11410, 83CPS11420, 86CPS12400, 89CPS12420, 92CPS21100, 95CPS21400, 98CPS22400, 101CPS41400, 104CPS42400, 107CPS51100, 110CPS52400, 113CRA21X10, 260, 265DAI34000, 581DAI35300, 584DAI44000, 587DAI45300, 590DAI54000, 593DAI54300, 596DAI55300, 600

35013379 02 October 2007


Index

DAI74000, 604DAI75300, 607DAM59000, 725DAO84000, 642DAO84010, 647, 652DAO84220, 657DAO85300, 662DDI15310, 610DDI35300, 612DDI35310, 615DDI67300, 624DDI84110, 628DDI85300, 631DDM39000, 732DDM69000, 738DDO15310, 667DDO35300, 671DDO35301, 675DDO35310, 679DDO84300, 688DDO88500, 692DII33000, 464DIO33000, 470DRA84000, 695DRC83000, 698DSI35300, 714DVO85300, 709EHC10500, 340EHC20200, 362, 385HLI34000, 396intrinsically safe modules, 421XSM01000, 481

XXBE10000

configuration illustration, 410description, 408expander cables, 410guidelines, 412illustration, 408specifications, 409

35013379 02 October 2007


XCP90000battery backup, 486configuration, 484description, 485illustration, 485installing and removing a battery, 487LED descriptions, 487LED indicators, 487specifications, 486

XSM00200description, 476illustration, 477

XSM01000description, 478illustration, 479specifications, 480wiring diagram, 481

899


Index

900


35013379 02 October 2007


Modicon Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide

Documents

Transcript of Modicon Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide